THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES
THE ASIATIC ORIGIN OF THE OCEANIC
' LANGUAGES.
THE ASIATIC ORIGIN
OCEANIC LANGUAGES:
ETYMOLOGICAL DICTIONARY OF THE LANGUAGE OF
EFATE (NEW HEBRIDES)
WITH AN INTRODUCTION.
THE REV. D. MACDONALD,
Efate, New Hebrides.
MELVILLE, MULLEN AND SLADE,
262 AND 264 COLLINS STREET.
LONDON : 12 LUDGATE SQUARE, E.C.
1894.
PL
2,6 Ml
PREFACE.
The following work gives, in the first place, a Dictionary of the
language of Efate, New Hebrides, as accurate as I can make it
after upwards of twenty-one years' constant study and use of the
language in the performance of my duty as a missionary stationed
on the island of Efate. But, as is noted in the introduction, a vast
number of derivative words have, for the sake of brevity, not been
inserted. In the second place, the dialectical variations of Efatese
words are given in a considerable number of instances ; the cognate
words in other languages of the Oceanic family are usually put
within brackets, and are chosen purposely from its four great
branches — the Papuan (or " Melanesian "), the Maori- Hawaiian (or
" Polynesian "), the Malayan, and the Malagasy (or " Tagalan. ").
These, which embrace the fundamental elements of Oceanic speech,
have been found of great use in determining the radical meaning
and original forms of words, and also, it may be remarked, in
illustrating the homogeneity of the great insular family, properly
called Oceanic, since it extends from Madagascar in the Indian
Ocean to Easter Island in the Pacific, from the Hawaiian Islands
1
11983' 2
PREFACE.
in the North Pacific to New Zealand in the South, and from
Sumatra through the Eastern Archipelago and New Guinea to the
New Hebrides and Fiji. In the third place, and usually after the
bracket, are placed the Asiatic — i.e., the Semitic — words to which all
the preceding Oceanic words are traced. Arabia, which borders on
Oceania, has always been, and is to this day, the principal home of
this, the most important family of Asiatic languages.
For a short Efatese grammar the reader is referred to the work
entitled " Three New Hebrides Languages: Efate, Eromanga, Santo ;"
for short grammars of other New Hebrides languages, to that
entitled " South Sea Studies ; " and for some general outline of
Oceanic grammar, to that entitled " Oceania: Linguistic and Anthro-
pological." Any remark on a particular point in the present work
which differs from any similar remark that I had made in the
works just named is to be regarded as correcting it. Even in the
present work, as, e.g., in treating of the formative particles, many
of the main elements of Oceanic grammar are dealt with ; in a work
treating of the whole material of a language of a family so extremely
analytic as the Oceanic, it could not well be otherwise. While fully
convinced of the importance of grammar in comparative philology,
I have for many years been equally convinced that, to establish the
Asiatic origin of the Oceanic languages, the whole material of one
Oceanic language must be dealt with, as in the present work.
The work of Gibbon has been described as the splendid bridge
from the old world to the new. The work presented to the public
in this little volume is a bridge of an immensely wider span than
Gibbon's, connecting two worlds less known than his, and throwing
PREFACE. \ii
light, as I believe not otherwise obtainable, on both, especially on
the newer — the world, so interesting to modern science, of the
existing savage, which can be thoroughly known only through his
language. This bridge, indeed, makes no pretension to " splendour,"
but, while perhaps more deeply sensible of its imperfections in
details than anyone else can be, I trust it will be found to be in all
substantial respects well and faithfully built, and durable even to
indestructibility. However that may be, it is certain that the
building of it has taken more than the twenty yeai-s which the build-
ing of Gibbon's took.
I may here explain that, as no Arabic or Ethiopic type are in the
establishment where this work is printed, I have been reluctantly
obliged to re-write all the Arabic and other Semitic words in Roman
characters. For this reason I have not printed at all, as I originally
intended, the second part of the Dictionary, or Asiatic-Oceanic.
Whether the complete work, with proper type, will appear here-
after will largely depend on the reception accorded to the present
volume.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
a., adjective,
ad., adverb,
art., article.
c, with.
c. art., with the article,
eg., egg., cognate, cog-
nates.
conj., conjunction.
cf., compare.
d., dd., dialect, dialects.
d. syn. c. , dialect syn-
onymous with.
den., denominative.
dcin.. demonstrative.
der., derivation,
i.q., the same as.
inf., infinitive,
inter., interrogative.
inter j., interjection,
imp., imperative,
mid., middle voice,
n. a., nomen actionis (in-
linitive).
n. ag., nomen agentis
(active participle).
n. p., nomen patientis
(passive participle).
nom. suf ., nominal suffix.
num., numeral.
opp., opposite, opposed.
part., participle.
pers. pron. , personal pro-
noun.
pi., plural.
pref. , preformative.
pre]). , preposition.
pro) i. , probably.
pron., pronoun.
ps. , passive.
(j. v., which see.
redup. , reduplicate.
s., substantive.
s.v., under the word
(sub voce),
sing., singular,
syn. , synonymous,
syn. c.. synonymous with,
t. , transitive,
v., verb.
v. c.verb causative form,
v. i. , verb intransitive,
v. r., verb reflexive, or
reciprocal,
v. t. , verb transitive,
verb, suf., verbal suffix,
voc. , vocative.
A., Arabic.
Ainh. , Amharic.
Am., Ambrym.
An., Aneityum.
Arm., Aramaic.
Assy., Assyrian.
Bu., Bugis.
Ch., Chaldee.
E., Ethiopic.
E. Mai, East Mai.
Ef., Efate.
Er., Eromanga.
Fi., Fiji.
Fut., Futuna.
H. , Hebrew.
Ha., Hawaiian.
Ja., Java.
Ma., Maori.
Mg. , Malagasy.
Ml., Malekula.
Ml. A., Malekula Aulua.
Ml. P., Malekula Pang-
Is umu.
M 1. U.. Malekula Uripiv.
Mod. A.. Modern Arabic.
Mod. S. . Modern Syriac.
My., Malay.
Pa., Paama.
S., Syriac.
Sa. , Samoan.
Soc. , Socotra.
T., Tigre.
Ta., Tanna.
TaSa., Tangoan Santo.
Tah., Tahiti.
To., Tonga.
Ct. , Catafago's Dic-
tionary of Mod. A.
Freytag, Freytag's Ara-
bic Lexicon.
Ges. , Gesenius's Dic-
tionary of Hebrew.
Nni., Newman's Dic-
tionary of Mod. A.
St. , Stoddart's Grammar
of Mod. S.
After an Arabic verb 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, &c. , denote
its different forms, and
1), 2), 3), &c, its dif-
ferent meanings.
After a Hebrew verb
Pi. denotes Piel, Pu.
Pual, Hi. Hiphil, Ni.
Niphal.
INTEODUCTION.
The Alphabet. — The Ef. alphabet used in this work differs from
that used in the Ef. version of the New Testament only in the use
of b instead of p. The letters are a, b (and b), e, f, g, i, k, 1, m, n, o,
r, s, t, and u. The vowels a, e, i, o, u have the Italian sounds : i
and u are also used sometimes for y and w, thus uo is pronounced
wo, but i is very rarely used for y. B stands for both b and p, f
for f and v, g for ng in sing, and k, 1, m, n, r, s, t are sounded as in
English. In one dialect of Efatese h represents the s of the other
dialects. In My. d* is nearly the same as d, ch is like ch in church,
a like short e, and g is hard, as in give. In the New Hebrides
languages, Fiji, and Samoan, g represents ng as in Ef. In Fi.
c represents th, and in Malagasy o stands for u. The Samoan ' is a
click, or half-expressed k, and the Hawaiian k stands for the t of
the cognate dialects. Ef. au sounds like ow in now, and ai, or ei,
like i in sigh, or ei in height. Ef. b is sometimes like b\v, some-
times like kb: a more rare variation of m is m, or m, like mw, or
gm. The alphabet of the Asiatic group of languages to which the
Island group of languages is traced in this work is represented
thus :— ' (Elif ), b, g, d, A. d, h, w (u, o), z, ]i, A. h', t, A. t', y (i), k, 1,
m, n, s, ' ('ain), A. " («ain), p (f), s, A. s , li, r, s', th (t), A. t. Of
these the ' represents a quiescent consonant, or spiritus lenis, like
the h in hour ; b, b and sometimes bh or v ; g, g and gh ; d, d and
dh ; w (u, o), w and v ; h, a guttural h, like hh ; t, a guttural t ;
* is related to ' and to h; S represents ts ; k, a guttural k, some
INTRODUCTION.
times confounded with ' ; s', sh. Of the Arabic letters d, h', f, ",
and s', d is sounded like th in that, with ; s', somewhat like th in
this ; and t' (an aspirated t, or th) is sometimes like a strongly-
articulated palatal z (somewhat like s), sometimes like s' ; while h',
and " are stronger guttural sounds than h and ', the former like ch
in Scotch loch. The Arabic t is a grammatical ending, and is
represented in Arabic by an h with two dots over it. In Mod. A.
only when it is followed by another word is it pronounced t, other-
wise it is a quiescent h. It should be noted that ' in the middle or
at the end of words represents also an omitted letter or vowel
sound.
Letter Changes. — The Ef. vowels u and o are frequently
interchanged : in many words — as kori (kuri), bonoti (bunuti), loko
(loku, luku) — it is equally correct to use either u or o. The vowel
a is very often pronounced and written e, as in set, bet, the My. a.
The short sounds of i and e are practically identical. The diph-
thongs ai, or ei, and au, are sometimes contracted to e, or i, and o,
or u. Generally when w (u) and y (i) come between two vowels
they may be omitted in writing and pronunciation, thus mauora
(mawora) or maora, uui (uwi) or ui, noai (na-uai, na-wai), and nai,
ia (iya). The labials b, f, m, are thus often elided, being first
changed into u (w), as in the examples given mauora is for mabora,
noai for na-fai (d. ni fai), and uui for ufi or ubi.
The labials are very frequently interchanged, as m to b or f,
and vice vertsd, as munuti, bunuti ; mago, bago ; mai, bai, or bei,
and be. B and f are constantly interchanged, especially when
occurring at the beginning of verbs, thus ba fano go thou, i bano
he went, bare, redup. barefare ; and bano to go, nafanoen the
going. As already noted, m, b, and f are often changed to w (u),
and then elided : at the end of a word preceded by the vowel a,
they readily become w or u, thus baram, barab, baraf, barau are all
Ef. forms of the same word ; and in the same position, preceded by
the vowel u, they are apt to be simply elided, thus num, nuf, nubu,
INTRODUCTION.
nu are all Ef. forms of the same word. B and b are interchanged,
and also m and m : b (like 1>) readily changes into w (u, o), as 6ota
ia, redup. botauota, and uotauota (vvotawota), mitotan, or nauotan,
mauota (mawota) or nniota.
G (ng). This sound in Ef. usually stands for k (see generally
words beginning with g in the Dictionary) ; more rarely it stands
for n, as in finaga and rag (ran), and still more rarely for m, as in
sugi (sumi). G (ng) is not one of the original stock of Oceanic
consonants.
K. The Ef. k is sometimes elided, as in alia for kali a, usi for
kusi, nosoafa and soafa for nakosoafa, nara for nakoro, buti for
bakauti ; sometimes changed to g (ng), and sometimes interchanged
with b, as bui na and kui na, bisi na and kihi na, makus and maris
(cf. My. bawa and gawa, etc.)
N. This letter is sometimes elided, as a for ani or an, ma for
man, sometimes interchanged with g (ng) q.v., t, as ni ki, ti ki ; s,
inuma, isuma ; 1 and r, nag, lag, rag, and nagusu, lausu.
R. This letter is interchanged with 1, as rag and lag ; with t, as
bald ta for bakira to them, and very commonly ta for ra in both the
nom. and verb suf. 3 pi ; with s, as busi for muri, gusu na for gore
na, and, s to r, muri na for mesau na. It is also sometimes elided, as
eu for 6ru, u for ru. In one d. r is often pronounced tr, which in
others is nr, t, and nd.
L. See r and n. L and r in some Oceanic dialects are identical,
and 1 is sometimes pronounced somewhat like d.
T. See r and 1. This letter is sometimes in Ef. pronounced ts,
as tsi ka for tika (also rika and nika), and is found changed to s, as
sa for ta.
S. See t, r, n. In one Ef. d. it is changed to h, as lateha
for latesa, &c.
Note. — The gutturals kh, hh, gh, in some of the New Hebrides
sister dialects, have been lost from the Ef. The Oceanic inter-
dialectical letter changes are in general so self-explaining and well
INTRODUCTION.
known (My. and Ef. k, Mg. h; Fi. c (i.e., th), Ef. s, Ac.) as to
require no treatment here.
Letter Changes in the Asiatic Languages of which the
Alphabet is Given Above. — The sounds represented by ', h, li, h', ' ,
and " , may have been all distinct from each other in the Semitic
mother tongue, but the uniform tendency of the Semitic languages is,
as they become developed analytically, to confound them all into one
or two. Thus in Assy. ', h, li, ', and ", all became like ' (i.e., spiritus
lenis), and even li' became either a mere spiritus lenis or k. So in
Ef. these are all a mere ', or spmtus lenis, except h, and h', which
are sometimes k.
G, k, and k were not only sometimes interchanged with each
other, but also with ', h ; and, as above remarked, k is sometimes
treated in pronunciation as a mere ', or spiritus lenis. In Ef. they
are usually represented by k, and sometimes elided (i.e., spiritus lenis).
The labials b, w, m, p. These were interchanged with each
other : b (or v) in Mod. S. has sometimes a sound varying fx*om w
to v; in Assy, m and v are interchanged, in Himyaritic m and b
(or v) ; in Assy, m was also sometimes changed to n and ng ; p is
either p or f in H., in A. it is f ; b following a in Mod. S. is
pronounced o, and f (or p) following a is pronounced au (i.e., ab or
av becomes o, af or ap au). Compare the remarks on the Ef. labials
above.
N. This letter, especially when the first consonant of a verb,
was often dropped. Accordingly in Ef., &c, such verbs are often
without the initial n. It was also interchanged with 1, m, and y.
R, 1. These are interchanged with each other, and with n :
they are also sometimes elided ; 1 is interchanged with d, and r with
the sibilants, as with z and s. Compare the Ef. above.
Sibilants and Dkntals. — These were sometimes intei'changed
with each other ; and see r, 1. They were also sometimes elided.
See Ef. r, 1, t, s, above.
See concluding remarks, injra.
INTRODUCTION.
The Article. — The forms of the article illustrate some of the
foregoing remarks on letter changes. Its common form in Ef. is na,
ni, n', in Mg. ny, Sa. le, E. Mai. re, Meli and Ma. te. But in
Ef. it not only occurs in some words with its consonant elided (A.
al, hal, 1', H. ha) as a, 8, or 1, but also as la or 1' (or ra), as in lausu,
lag (also rag, ran, nag), and Lifaru (also rafalu, libuis), lobu, laso na,
lima, and rakum, rarua ; as ta, as in tanekabu (and nanekabu, see
ate, infra), taliga ; and as s, as in suma (My. rumah). In such
words the article has been prefixed in very early times (in lifaru
certainly before the word left Arabia), and has come by later
generations to be regarded as a part of the word. By looking up
these words in the Dictionary it will be seen that they illustrate
more than one of the above noted letter changes. The article is
regularly prefixed to the abstract substantive that may be formed
from every verb or adjective in the language by the ending an (ana,
usually written en, ena) as nakasuana the being strong, strength,
from kasua strong, nafamiena the act of eating, food, from bami to
eat : in My. the article (or dem. particle) ka is thus used (Mg. ha).
This ka or k' occurs in Ef. only as an " unconscious " article, and
the former, F, r', or n', occurs in My. only as an unconscious article.
Both of these articles were also prefixed to verbal nouns (substan-
tives or adjectives) without the formative ending an, as in kalu;?a
spider, lit. the sweller, or that which swells, kalau spider's web, lit.
the woven, or that which is woven, kolofa bent (Fi. kalove), lit. the
bent, that which is bent. To a word of this kind — with the
unconscious article ka — the causative preformative was attached,
and hence baka (see ba, c. pref., and baka, Mg. maha, infra). In
■the same way — to words with the unconscious article iv (ng) — was
prefixed the same c. pref. ma (in My. and Mg.), forming man, mana,
mang, ic. Thus Mg. be is "great," habe greatness, lit. that which
is great, mahabe to make great, but also manabe to make great (na,
modern form ny, the article, and also used in the sense of a relative
= ha = that which, &c. ) The r in My. bar (ber, be), the reflexive
INTRODUCTION*.
p reformative, is a form of the same article (Fi. ra, forming so called
passives like ka) which in Ef. occurs as 1', n', and r', &c, and the
prefixed ba or be, Mg. mi, Ef. bi, Sa. fe, is the real r. pref. : hence
My. bar is equivalent to Mg. miha, the difference being that the
former has the art. r, the latter the article ha. The fact that in
Mg. maha is the causative and miha the reflexive preformative
shows that there is nothing either reflexive or causative in the ha.
But of course baka, man, «fcc, came to be regarded, when their origin
was no longer remembered, as simple formatives.
The Personal Pronouns and Numerals. — For these see two
papers in the Journal of the Polynesian Society, on " The Asiatic
Origin of the Oceanic Personal Pronouns" and "Oceanic Numerals"
respectively.
The Verb. — The Semitic verb had two bases, the one that of
the perfect, being the " concrete " or participial, the other that of
the imperfect (or " future "), with which was connected the im-
perative and infinitive, being the " abstract " or verbal substantive.
In the Oceanic languages the ancient inflexion of the perfect and
imperfect has disappeared, its place being supplied by analytic
substitutes. The Oceanic verb is really a participle, or verbal
substantive used as a participle, and represents, or is, either the
ancient participial base, as afa ia, afa ki, ba, laba or leba, and
(passive) bura, tuk or toko, or the ancient infinitive base, as tao,
taru (or toro), soko, saki, or a derived participle or infinitive of the
ancient verb. The ancient participle (or verbal adjective) had two
forms, the active and passive, and was sometimes used as a substan-
tive; the ancient infinitive had numerous forms, each of which could be
used either in an active or a passive sense, and was sometimes used
as a participle or verbal adjective. Every adjective in Efatese is a
verb when used with the verbal pronoun (the analytic substitute for
the ancient inflexion of the perfect and imperfect), and every verb
is an adjective when used without the verbal pronoun. The follow-
ing are examples of verbs representing ancient participles and
INTRODUCTION.
infinitives: — Active participle, mita; passive participle, mitela, barua,
bau ; infinitive, roko (loku, luku), borau, mauri (moli). It will be
observed that these examples involve both the Semitic modes of
inflexion, by internal vowel change and by external addition.
In the Semitic languages the simple verb usually had three
radical letters, but a very large number of these were, or (became,
always pronounced as having only two, and a good many were some-
limes so pronounced, as those one of whose three letters was ', ', ",
h, ll, h', k, w, y, and (initial) n. Generally, but not always, it is
the briefest form of the ancient word that is found represented in
Efatese. In some instances the three strong radicals of an ancient
\ erb are still found in its Efatese representative, as in salube, sekof,
serab, surut, sumat. The final n of an ancient verb is sometimes
found elided in Efatese, as in asua, and m, b, or p (f) vocalized or
elided, as already pointed out, as in nu (num), nu e a, ra (or ta),
barau (barab), bolau (uolauj, sau, galau, balu-sa (and balu-saki).
The " forms " of the Efatese verb, or derivative verb forms, are
the causative, having the formative prefixes ba (or ma), and baka
and sa ; the reflexive or reciprocal, having bi or fi ; the reflexive
passive, having ta; the passive, having ma (mi, tfec): see the Diction-
ary for these particles and words beginning with them. Among
" forms " of the verb may also be placed the reduplicate forms, as
when the whole verb is doubled, as magamaga ; when the initial
syllable is doubled, as sasaio ; and when the final is doubled, as
tafagka or tafakaka (or tafak'ka). Reduplication modifies the
meaning of the verb in various ways, expressing intensity or repeti-
tion of the act, and sometimes giving a diminutive sense.
The Substantive. — From every verb, whether simple or deriva-
tive, is or may be formed a verbal substantive by adding to it the
formative suffix ana, or an (usually pronounced ena, or en), and
prefixing the article na (ni, &c.) This formative suffix is common
generally to all the Semitic and to all the Oceanic languages, form-
ing infinitives or abstract verbal substantives denoting the action or
INTRODUCTION.
state and various related ideas. In Efatese, when used without the
article, this verbal substantive is used in a passive sense as a verbal
adjective, thus barni to eat, nafamiena the eating, the act of eating,
eating, food, and fainiena to be eaten, eatable, for eating, as nafinaga
faniiena food to be eaten, eatable, or for eating. These, to save
space, are not given, except in a few instances, in the Dictionary.
A number of Efatese substantives analytically represent the n.
ag., or active participle, of the simple form of the Semitic verb, as
kali, from kili a, lita, or tlla, from tila ia, so sar', let, lofa, laga,
luma, nife, ori, seru, slko, sll, tunu, soro, &,c. A number of Efatese
verbs become substantives by prefixing the article, as mitela broken,
i mitela it is broken, namitela that which is broken, a fragment,
manaki to remain as a guest, namanaki a guest : see above on the
article. In the same way, as already observed, some nouns were
formed by prefixing ka, k' ; but no new substantives can thus
be formed. On the other hand, a new substantive phrase can
be similarly formed from every verb in the language by prefixing
the particle te (for which see the Dictionary), as te fami what eats,
■eater, te kili what digs, a digging thing or person. A number of
Efatese substantives simply represent, or are, the ancient Semitic
substantives, whether primitive, as fai or ai (water), afa or ab'
(father), or derivative, as ate (liver), tua (leg), kuli (skin). A few
Efatese verbs become substantives by suffixing a, as namisakia
sickness, namatakua fear, namitiria a writing, namaietoa anger : this
a represents the ancient abstract ending H. ah (for ath), A. a.t, Mod.
A. a (or ah).
The Adjective Endings. — The first of these to be noticed is a,
as in sama, koa, sulia, lebaleba, lasoa, fitia, bulia, buna, oroa. This
in Assy, is a (originally ai), Mod. S. a, E. i, awi, ai, A. iyy'. It was
originally pronounced iya, or aya (Dillmann). Sometimes in Ef. it is
i, as in tuai. Another a. ending is na, or 'na, as in barbarutena,
bi&ilena, telatelana, sasana, rana, rarana, oraorana. This in Assy.
is an', or en', Arm. ana, an, na, A. an'. These are found in the
INTRODUCTION.
Oceanic languages generally. The former, a, is exceedingly common
in the Maori-Hawaiian languages, and the latter in Malagasy. The
so-called passives in Samoan, &c, formed by the ending a, are not
passives but adjectives : sometimes in Samoan they are actives, and
they always seem to be so in Futuna, and they sometimes turn a
substantive into an adjective. The Efatese adjective tunitunia is
formed from tuni (i.e., tu ni, tu, v., and ni, t. prep.) exactly after the
manner of the so-called Maori-Hawaiian passives, which in a vast
number of instances suffix the ending a to a verb having a transitive
preposition. A third a. ending is ak, k, or ka, as in katak, kanoka
(also syn. kanoa), sikai (and sikatika), Malagasy isaka, iraika. This
in Assy, is ak', which may be the same as the Mahri ending k, which
forms adjectives, as safaik healed, taimak thirsty, sebak full, hark
hot, heberrek cold : this ending in Mahri formed also in earlier times
verbal substantives.
Other Endings. — The ending t (or th) in the Semitic languages
is very common in Malagasy, and pronounced tra, which is often
changed to ra. This occurs in all the Oceanic languages generally
as in bate, 4, My. ampat, Mg. efatra, Sa. (elided) fa, and also in Sa.
titu, Mg. fito, 7 ; and in Ef. fuata, barbaruta, lebalebara, fuluara,
bulora, sikara, and (elided) in bau head, for batu (as the neighbour-
ing dialects prove), also in batu, bate, buta. Sometimes the t.
prepositions are found suffixed to the verb, as if they were a part of
it, and have to be carefully distinguished from the formative endings
above treated of. In bau, fitu, Hfaru, &c, we have also the ancient
Semitic ending u.
The Transitive Prepositions. — These are simply the preposi-
tions coming immediately after, or suffixed to, the verb, connecting
it with its object. The construction is exactly the same as in the
Semitic languages, and the prepositions are identical, and occur in all
the Oceanic languages, forming a marked feature of them. The verb
with its t. prep, is construed as one word, and to it is or may be
suffixed the substantive formative ending an, or ana, or the adiective
INTRODUCTION.
ending a, or na. The three most frequently used preps, are bi, or fi,
or mi (also ba, fa, ma), li, or ni, or ri (also la, na, ra), and ki (also
ka). The two former are the most frequently used in all Semitic
languages, and the latter very frequently used in Himyaritic (or
Sabaean) and Amharic. The double t. preps, usually have the
latter, as maki, faki, raki, naki, &c, but not always, for there occur
also nusi, nus (as in bunusi and banus, My. panas), bisi (as in libisi ),
noti or nuti (as in bonoti, munuti). In the Dictionary the t. prep,
(or preps.) is usually given with the verb, see, e.g., under the words
sili, v. t., and alialia, and the a which is often suffixed to the prep, is
the verbal suffix pronoun, 3 person, see, e.g., under bamau ria (d.
bamau sa). The na after many substantives in the Dictionary, see,
e.g., under balu, is the nominal suffix pronoun, 3 person. Thus balu
na denotes his brother, bamau ria to find him, her, or it, le-ka see
him, le-baia see him, le k'baia see him, li-bisia see him ; these are all
practically synonymous, but le-ka is lit. look to him, le-baia look
upon him, le-k'baia look to — upon him, and li-bisia look upon him
(the transitive prep, si being in this case without definite meaning
and merely directing more emphatically to the object).
Concluding R,emarks. — Taking the letters of the above-given
Asiatic alphabet in their order, and, for the sake of brevity, taking
them here only as they occur as the initial letters of the words
compared in the Dictionary, we may observe the changes these letters
have undergone from the time they left South-Western Asia till the
present time when they are found in Oceania : —
'. Always found as spiritus lenis, generally dropped, sometimes
retained (i.e., its accompanying vowel retained). Number of words
large.
b. Nearly always b, rarely m. Number of words large.
g. Nearly always k (or its variant g, i.e., ng), rarely elided. A
good number of words.
d. Nearly always t, very rarely r, rarely s, and still more
rarely elided. A good many words.
INTRODUCTION.
(I. Always t, except in one instance s (d. h). Very few words,
h. Always spiritus lenis, and sometimes its accompanying
■vowel elided. A good many words.
w (u, o). Always retained only in its accompanying vowel (as
•a for wa), and sometimes that vowel elided. A good many words.
/.. Always s. A good many words.
II. Nearly always spiritus lenis, but in a considerable pro-
portion of instances k (or g), and rarely its accompanying vowel
elided. Number of words large.
ll'. Generally k (or g), sometimes spiritus lenis, very rarely its
accompanying vowel elided. Not very many words.
t. Generally t, rarely r, 1, or n. A good many words.
t'. Always t. Words very few.
y (i). Always l'etained only in its accompanying vowel, and
that usually is elided. Not many words.
k. Generally k (or g), rarely elided. Number of words large.
1. Nearly always 1, rarely r, t, and (see the prep, ni) rarely n
or elided. A good many words.
m. Usually m, often b (or f), very rarely (through w, u) only
its accompanying vowel retained. A very large number of words.
n. Usually elided, n when retained as it sometimes is. Number
of words large.
s. Nearly always s, in one instance t, and in one instance n.
Not many words.
'. Always spiritus lenis, and retained only in its accompanying
vowel, which is sometimes elided. Number of words large.
". Always spiritus lenis, and as preceding letter. A good
many words.
p (f). Generally b, or f, rarely m, m, sometimes b. Number
of words large.
S. Generally t, or s, oftener the former, sometimes (rarely) r,
or 1. See futum, busuf, and tiu, riu, tutu, lulu, luma, luba.
Number of words larcje.
INTRODUCTION.
S'. Generally t, sometimes 1, in one instance s, and very rarely
r. A good many words.
k. Nearly always k (or g), rarely spiritus lenis. Number of
words large.
r. Generally r, very often 1. Number of words large.
s'. Nearly always s, rarely t, and more rarely 1, in one instance
n. Number of words large.
th, t. Usually t, sometimes n, rarely r, 1, or s. A good many
words.
Certain words and particles, owing to their very frequent use,
undergo greater changes, as the pronouns, numerals, formative
particles, and prepositions ; thus the Ancient Semitic interrogative
and indefinite pron. ma (Sabaean ba) in Ef. occurs as ma, fa, and a,
and the same word, m', used as a preformative in participles and
infinitives in the Ancient Semitic, in Ef. occurs as m', b', and f,
Mg. m', f, mp', My. m', b', and p' ; and see the preps, li (original
form), ni, ri, i, &c, and with a, ani, an, a, and bi, fi, or mi, with
dem. suffixed bai or bei. See also, above, the article, and the
negative adverb in the Dictionary.
DICTIONARY
OF THE
LANGUAGE OP EFATE
A]
(NEW HEBRIDES).
[abu
A.
l, verbal pron., I : d. ni, q.v.
A, v., contraction of ani, q.v., to
be, or dwell in.
A, prep., contraction of ani, an,
q.v. : sometimes e, or i, in, at,
to, of. Used prefixed to nouns,
as ataku, etaku, or itaku, at
the back, behind ; and to the
suffixed pronoun of the posses-
sive, as agu my, ana his, dialect
enea, or inea his, inu my.
[The same contraction is found
in Mg. ahy my, azy his, and in
Sa. ana his. The Mg. a is
contracted for any, an, and the
Sa. is probably the same par-
ticle.]
A, art., or dem., prefixed to cer-
tain words, as to some nouns,
pronouns, akamus ye, and pre-
positions, ani of, aki or agi of ;
and to verbs, nikam, d. agau,
that which nips, or grasps.
[Fi. a, an article, prefixed also
to prepositions, as a nei, a kei,
denoting the possessive case as
in Efatese. The Fi. a is a
form of the article na, and the
Efate a, being the same as the
Fi., must in that case be a
form of the common article na
(ni, ne, &c), q.v. Agi (a gi)
of, in Efate in one dialect is
nag or nagi (na gi) of, and
akam, ye, in another dialect is
nikam ye. The same article is
found in Ma. and To. as a. In
Fi. and Ef., prefixed to posses-
sive prepositions, it has some-
what of the force of a relative
pronoun.] H. ha for hal ; A.
al, sometimes hal, dem. art.,
used also sometimes as a rela-
tive pronoun prefixed to verbs
and prepositions: compare ha,
according to F. Muller iden-
tical with hal for al, the article,
Arm. ha this, as an interjec-
tion, lo ! H. he.
A, interj., ! lo ! [Ha. a, Tah.
a, lo ! o !] See under preced-
ing word.
Ab, s., d. voc, father. [Ma. pa,
My. pa, pak, Mg. aba.] A.
ab, H. ab, Ch. aba, father.
Aba, v. See ofa.
Abab, s., father. [Ma. papa,
My. bapa, bapak, Mg. baba.J
See ab.
Abu, v., to heal, get well (a sore),
d. au, id., d. mau, to get well,
recover from sickness. [Sa.
mafu, to heal up, Mg. miafa,
to recover from sickness.] A.
afa, 3, 4, restore to health.
2
ABU]
Abu, s., ashes, also afu, au. See
following word.
Abuobu, v. redupl., to be dusty,
to fly in the air (dust), also
afuafu, id.; naob dust, ashes,
lime (ashes of coral), na, art.,
and ob, noba (nobwa), s., id.,
nobanoba, v., to be dusty, be-
come dust, fly in the air (dust),
tano afu, tano abu, tano au
ashes; libu, v., to be ashy,
ash-coloured, dirty, or covered
with ashes, as in mourning for
the dead, hence malibu, v., to
be a mourner thus, especially
for a deceased husband or wife,
and hence malibu, s., a widow
or widower, that is, one so
mourning : libu, v., is also
found (Bau d.) as lifu, lifu-
lifu ; mafu, s., a thick vapour
like dust; uncleanness (ritual).
[Sa. efu, s., efuefu, s., dust,
efu, v., to become dust, efu,
a., reddish-brown, To. efoo, s.,
dust, ashes, efooia, a., dusty,
covered with ashes, Sa. lefu,
a., s., lefulefu, s., ashes, Ma.
nehu, s., dust, nehunehu, a.,
dusky, whakanehu, v., reduce
to powder, My. abu, s., Ja.
awu, s., dust, ashes, My. dabu,
labu, id., kalabu, v., a., ashy,
ash-coloured, also klabu, Ja.
kluwu, Mg. vovoka, s., dust,
ashes, mamavoka, v., to dust,
sprinkle with dust, mavo, a.,
brown, manavo, v., despise,
blacken, sully, mavoana, a.,
unadhesive (applied to mortar),
Fi. dravu, s., ashes, dravu-
dravua, a., ashy, of the colour of
asnes, poor, hence vakadravu-
dravua-taka, v., to make poor.]
[a FA I A
A. haba (habu), v., rise, float-
in the air (dust), become like
dust, de carbone igne extincto,
die, 4, raise or excite dust,
habwa£ dust, colour of dust,
Ct. habut dust, dust mixed
with ashes, a thick vapour
like dust, Nm. hebwa fine
dust, powder, mutahabbi weak
in sight.
Abuera, and abura, s., d. for
kabuer, q.v.
Afa (ava), s., father, an afa his
father. See ab, d. voc. afa.
Afa, v., swim (man, or animal),
d. of a.
Afa ia, v. t., carry (him, or it),
d. ofea. The flrst meaning
seems not connected with the
second, to a European, but a
native connects them thus : a
man afa natas swims or floats
on the sea, the sea afa nata-
mole bears or carries the man ;
so a man afa ki nakasu swims
holding a floating stick, but if
he gets on to the stick and lets
it float him ashore the stick is
said to afa ia carry him. The
sea or the stick carry him thus,
hence afa, v. t., denotes carry a
man on one's back, then to carry
anything on the back : and as
a man so carried clasps with
his arms the carrier round the
chest the head of an axe is
said to afa its handle, and as
one carrying a basket on his
back holds the string of it
over his shoulder, so a man
drawing a log by a string
thus over his shoulder is said
to afa it, and a tug steamer is
A FA FA]
.said to afa or tow a ship. A
dog afa a piece of meat, carry-
ing it oft' firmly held by its
teeth, and a man afa a pipe
or a twig, i.e., carries it held
by his teeth. A messenger
afa, carries, his message, a
horse its rider, and a warrior
afa, carries, i.e., leads his
troop ; also a person afa naro-
gitesan bears a disease or in-
firmity or trouble. (See bafa.)
.Afafa, v. redupl., dd. ofaofa,
ofafa. [My. apung, s., a float,
ampung, a., buoyant, kambang,
v., to float. Sa. opeope, to
float, Epi mava, d. mia, to
swim ; Sa. fafa, v., carry a
person on the back, faafafa, s.,
a burden carried on the back,
Mg. baby, a., carried on the
back, niibaby, v., to carry on
theback(as children and others
are carried), Fi. vava, v., to
carry on the back, va-ya, to
make a bundle, as of sticks, to
carry on the back, ps. vai,
cf. bai a, fai a, infra.] A.
'ama, swim (man), go (camel),
2, dispose in sheaves or
bundles : Nm. float, swim.
'Ama< a bundle, a float, or raft,
for carrying things across
water. In this A. word there
is the idea of connecting to-
gether (as things in a bundle,
ifcc.) Cf. the cognates under
bau, mau, 4c, iv/ra, viz.,
'amma, &c. In afaia, carry
him, as a floating stick carries
a man in the water, or a horse
carries him on land, the transi-
tive preposition = bi (afai =
'ama bi) gives the verb its
[afis ia
transitive force, make to swim,
to go, i.e., carry.
Afa ki, v. t., and ofa ki, to bury,
Maka tafaki, pr. n., name <>f
the person who buried the first
men who died in the beginning
of the world, according to
native story. [Sa. ufi, v., cover,
conceal, ps. ufitia, with instru-
mental particle ufita'i, ufi, s.,
a cover, ufi, s., the yam, Efate
ui, or uui (pronounced uwi),
the yam, Mg. afina, vo'atina is
concealed, miafina to conceal
oneself, manafina to conceal,
to bury, My. buni to conceal,
concealed, mambuni to conceal,
tarbuni, sambuni, &c. See bei,
iv/ra.] A. "aba be concealed,
2 to conceal, to bury, 5 be
absent. See egg. s. v. bei,
iv/ra. ' Ayab' roots (so called
because buried in the ground
or covered with earth), Sa. ufi,
Ef. uwi, Ja., My. uwi, ubi,
Mg. ovy (uvi) yams.
Afaru na, s.,d. ofari, wing, wings.
[Ero. evlok, Tidore filafila,
Torres Islands perperi, wing,
My. mibar, mabur, to fly with
wings.] H. 'abar, Hi. to soar,
mount upwards in flight, 'eber
and 'evrah wing feather (with
which birds soar).
Af ia, v. t., to be near to, d. of
ia, A. wahafa to approach,
draw near to.
Afin ia, v. t., afan ia, afen ia,
also dd.
Afis ia, and afit ia, to put or
carry under the arm or arms,
held between the arm and the
side; to cover with its wings,
as a bird its young, clasping
AFITl]
between the wing and the side,
and atini na, s., armpit, axilla,
and d. afili na, id., also the
groin. [My. kapet, mangapet,
carry under the arm, Sa. afisi,
carry under the arm.] A. 'Ibit',
pi., abat' armpit, axilla, abt, 5,
place, or carry under the arm,
'ibat' what is put under the
arm, anything put or clasped
to the side.
Afiti, s., a slave. This word oc-
curs with the article as nafiti.
[My. beta, Ja. patik, a slave.]
H. 'ebed, Ch. 'abaci, a slave.
See bati, v.
Afo, s. See foga.
Afuafu. See abuobu.
Agau, d. nikam, s., a, or ni,
art., and kam, or gau, nippers,
tongs : from the verb kamu,
q.v. [Fi. ai qamu, id., My.
angkub forceps, nippers, pin-
cers.] See kamu, kamut.
Aga (anga), for anka, art., a.,
and prep, ka, literally that
or the to, or that which to ;
a particle prefixed to the nom.
suf. pron., forming a poss.
pron. Without the art. it
is pronounced ka, q.v. See
kagu, &c, for meaning.
Agana, poss. pron., 3 sing.; aga,
na. See kana, kakana, kan-
ana, and for meaning and use
see under kiana.
Agama, poss. pron., 2 sing.; aga,
ma. See kama.
Agagu, poss. pron., 1 sing ; aga,
gu. See kagu.
Ag'gami, poss. pron., 1 pi., excl.;
aga, gami. Kagaml.
Agagita, poss. pron., 1 pi., incl. ;
aga, gita. Kagita.
AGI NAM I
Agamu, poss pron., 2 pi.; ag*,
mu. Kamu.
Agara, poss. pron , 3 pi. ; aga,
ra. Kara.
Agam, pron., 2 pi., you, ye ; dd.
igam, nigami, nigkam (gk for
g). akam, egii, art., a, or i, e,
or ni, and the pers. pron. 2
pers. pi. kam, gam, eami,
which in one dialect, without
the art., is kumu, in another
is kami, q.v.
Ag, pron., 2 sing., you, thou ;
dd. nago, nlgo, nego; a, or na,
ni, ne, art., and g, go (for k,
ko). See k, ko, ku, ki.
Agi, or aki, particle consisting of
the art. a, and prep, gi (for ki,
q.v.) to, of ; dd. nig', nag',
nigi or nigki (ng for g), in
which the art. is na or ni. Agi
is often equivalent to ani, q.v.,
but not always : ani or ini
sometimes means "of" nearly
in the sense of " from," as
rarua ini se 1 a canoe of (from)
what place 1 which cannot be
expressed by rarua agi so ?
See the preps, ki and ni. Agi
is often equivalent to the
simple prep, gi, or ki, but
sometimes it means the, the
(thing), that which of, the
art. having the force of a rela-
tive pronoun.
Agiegi, s., c. art. nagiegi, the
air, breeze : lagi.
Aginago, poss. pron., 2 sing., thy,
of thee ; agi, nago.
Aginai, poss. pron., 3 sing., his,
her, of him ; agi, nai.
Aginami, poss. pron., 1 pi. excl.,
our and theirs, of us aud them ;
agi, nami.
A(JINARA]
Aginara, poss. pron., 3 pi., their,
of them ; agi, nara.
Aginau, poss. pron., 1 sing., my,
■ of me ; agi, nau.
Agita, poss pron., a, prep., and
nom. suf. gita ; a, gita. [Sa.
a tatou, Mg. antsika.l
Ago, pron., 2 sing, you, thou ;
ag, nago.
Agu, poss. pron., 1 sing., my ;
a, gu. [Sa. a'u, Ma. aku,
Mg. ahy, my.]
Agumu, poss. pron., 2 pi., your;
agi, kumu.
Aheka, d., tasila, d. tasiga ; sila
ia.
Ais, or eis, ad., here, d. ieta ; a,
or e, or i, prep., and is, see sa,
se, s, this, here ; d. esas, q.v.
[Mg. aty, ety, ato eto, Ta.
yesa. My., without prep.,
sini, sika, and with preps,
di and ka, disini, kasini.]
H. zeh, without prep., here,
properly this, Ef. se, this,
here, E. zeya here. Also H.
bazeh, E. bazya, c. prep, ba,
with which is to be compared
Ha. ma in manei here, and
also generally. The prep, a,
e, or i was also similarly used.
See examples of this under the
word igin, infra.
Ai, s., c. art. nai, water, d. for
nifai, q.v.
Aime, s., c. art. naime, a stream:
preceding word, and me, q.v.
Aka, a., d. koa, and koakoa, a.,
stringy, fibrous, as a yam
when cooked (bad to eat) ;
akoa na, or ako ana, root, its
root, lit. and fig. ; aka, a rela-
tive, family connection (con-
sidered as root or off-shoot
[aka
from), aka na, d. ek, ekana;
in one place ek or eka denotes
great grandfather, and great
grandmother (which in another
place is denoted by tai la, or
tai, q.v.), in another place aka
denotes mother (used by a
child addressing its mother),
d. iak (i, art.), mama; aka na,
or uaka na (waka na) fissure,
inside of fissure, as of the
mouth, of a canoe (hold), of a
bag or basket, or of anything ;
kaka naniu the fibrous sub-
stance like coarse cloth that
grows round the top of the
stem of the cocoanut tree
(naniu) ; makaka, to be ragged
or fissured, as cloth ; mako, or
maka, offspring, in pr. nn. as
mako naru, &c; taumako, the
wild yam growing on the hills,
so called becausekoa or fibrous.
Koa has the a. ending a. [To.
aca, Fi. waka, My. akar, Mg.
faka, root, Ma. long and thin
roots, akaaka fibrous roots,
kaka a fibre or hair, a garment,
a kind of net, Ha. aa niu = Ef.
kaka naniu, also roots (small),
offspring, a pocket, a bag, a
coarse kind of cloth, Sa. aa
fibres of a root, family connec-
tion. Mg. kaky, ikaky (i art.,
cf. Ef. aka, iak) father, papa,
Tab. aa root, sieve, &c, aaa the
stringy substance in any kind
of food or vegetable, native
cloth that is not well worked.]
A. ' alika, n.a. ' akak, to be
split, fissured, ' akko, a fissure,
' akika^' a bag (pera viatoi ia,
Ha. aa), also like 'akiko and
'ikka?', hairs of a foetus ;
akam]
[A LI
'awako, small shoots sprouting
from the upper part of a palm,
'ilvkano. shoots sprouting from
the roots of palms and vines,
'akka, 4, to send forth such
shoots from the roots (palms
or vines), cf. Mg. faka root,
caus. verb mamaka to send
forth roots, and My. akar roots
of a plant, scandent plant, parts
of a plant that climb.
Akam, d. ; a, art., and kam, you ;
pers. pron., 2 pi. See kumu.
Akamus, preceding word, with
dem. s suffixed, as it is in E.
to pers. prons.
Ake, interj. See ako, ako ri.
[Mg. akay !] A, interj., and
ke, q.v.
Ake ri, interj., ake or aki and ri,
as in ako ri.
Aki, prep., i.q., agi, q.v.
Akit, d., pron., 1 pi., inch, we
and you. [My. kita, Tag.
kita, Fut. akitea, An. akaija.]
See nininta.
Akoa na, or ako ana, s., root.
See aka.
Ako, interj. For ri, dem. par-
ticle, used also as an expletive,
and la, ad., see these words.
Ako ri la, interj.
Ako ri, interj. Ako expresses
surprise, wonder, admiration,
also mourning, commiseration.
A, interj., and ko, q.v.
Al, d., syn. with clo, d. ali, the
sun. See ali.
Alat ia, v. t. (and let, q.v.) to
press together, nip as with
scissors, or with the teeth, press
between two ihings drawn to-
gether, to press, urge, persist,
be importunate with, to grasp.
The final consonant is often
dropped ;
Ala, s., c. art. nala, a basket or
purse the edges of whose
mouth can be closed by being
drawn or pressed together,
women's carrying basket ;
Alati, s., scissors, nippers, clip-
pers;
Alaterabati, also alati bati ore,
to gnash the teeth, lit., press
the teeth together creaking.
See bati and ore ;
Ala goro ki, v. t., press, urge.
See goro ;
Alala, a., compressing. [Mg.
lasitra, mandasitra to pinch.]
H. Lalias to press, squeeze,
'alas to urge, S. 'elas coegit,
arctavit, A. laliis' angustus,
arctus (drawn, pressed to-
gether).
Alalu, i.q. elalo, q.v. See alo
na.
Alau, s. ; a, prep., and lau, sea ;
also elau, d. ela, the sea, on
the sea, seawards. [Malo a
lau, Epi lau, My. laut, Ja.
lahut, lot, Tag. dagat, Mar-
shall Islands lojet, the sea,
My. lauti, v., and malaut, v.,
to put to sea, be at sea in a
boat or ship.] A. logg', and
logga/!', or lojja^', middle and
depth of the sea, ocean, lajja,
or lagga, 8, the sea was wide
and deep, or such a sea was
sailed over, 2, he entered the
vast and deep sea.
Alekabu, c. art , talekabu, d. for
arekabu.
Ali, s., c. art., nali, leaf, leaves :
ulua.
Ali, s., day (d. ali sun, d. ali
ALIATlJ
light, see linaj. Sera ali,
every day, toko ali, stay at
home during the day, not going
to work. Usually this word
is doubled, as
Aliati, s., day (for aliali). [An.
adiatj. And
Aliati, v., to day, to dawn, to
lighten as the dawn. See al,
alo, elo, the sun, also meta ni
al, meta ni elo, the sun, lit.,
eye, i.e., source of day or light.
[Mg. andro, Malo alo, My.
ari, hari, Sa. la, Ma. ra, day ;
Sa. la, Ma. ra, My. mata-ari,
Mg. maso-andro, the sun.] A.
nahar', daylight, day (from
sunrise to sunset), H. nharah,
light, daylight, S. nhar, A.
niira, to shine, be light, 2, to
dawn, lighten as the dawn.
Al ia, v. t., for gal ia, or kal ia,
q.v.
Ali, and alia, s., place, part, alian,
its place or part, d. male n, or
mile n; luan, that place, there,
for alia uan, li ban, d. lo bon,
there (li for alia) ; mala, and
malo, a place, a part, malo,
time, i.e., a part of time, as
malo ni aliati a part of the
day, malo uan, that time, or
that place, malo, trunk of the
body, or of a tree, mala
malala, an open place or plain,
also the village dancing and
public worship ground, mal-
mal, redup., a small place or
part ; malu, malumalu, to be
bare, clear, as a piece of
ground, to be bare, devoid of
hair, as the face, malamala
naked. [Fi. mala a part, Sa.
malae the open space where
[alialia
public meetings are held, Tah.
marae the sacred place formerly
used for worship, marae, a.,
cleared, as a garden, or a place
of worship, Ma. marae enclosed
space in front of a house, a
yard, maramara, a small
piece.] A. 'ariya to be naked,
'ara', 'ara', 'ara£', an open place,
tract, part, mo'rai, and mo'ra//,
naked part of the body not
covered with clothing, H.
•arah to be naked, 'arah a
naked or bare place, ma'ar
a naked space, void space,
ma'arah a naked place, i.e., a
plain or field devoid of trees,
'A. mo'arrai, naked, bare.
Aliali, v. i. (doubled), to delay,
be slow, and taliali, id., in-
tensive. [Of. Ha. alia, v., to
wait.] A. ala (alu), and, 2,
alia', and, 5, to delay, be slow.
Alialia, v. i., or a., insane, to be
insane ; connected with this is
ululia inspired, possessed, or
entered by a deity (natemate)
or demon, and, therefore, as a
matter of course, out of one's
senses. Alialia is not used in
some places where ululia (for
uluuluia) is used in both
senses ; this latter word is also
pronounced luluia, and lulia.
It is a reduplicate and has the
a. ending ia, and literally
means entered (i.e., by a
spirit), possessed. [Sa. ului-
tino enter the body, possess
(as by an aitu), ulu to enter,
and tino body, Ha. uluia and
uluhia to be inspired, pos-
sessed by a spirit,' ulu to
have spiritual possession,
A LI ALIA]
good or bad, ulala insane, out
of one's senses, Tab. uru to
be inspired, uruhia inspired.
This last word corresponds to
Sa. ulufia, which simply means
entered, being the passive of
ulu to enter. Tah. taura a
pretended prophet or some-
one inspired by some god or
goddess. Corresponding to Sa.
ulu to enter is Mg. idi^ra to
enter, and with this latter is
connected the reduplicate ad-
ala insane, senseless, a lunatic,
a fool (cf. Ha. ulala). Ef.
lala an idiot, senseless person,
fool, may belong here also, and
cf. Fi. lialia foolish, crazy, an
idiot.] Ch. 'alal to enter, S.,
id., 'al he entered, imp., 'ul
enter, A. "alia he entered.
Note. — The A. is followed
by prep, fi, the S. by b and also 1
(A. li) : the first of these preps,
is used in Mg. (amy), as in
Jno. xiii. 27, Satan niditra
ami?M/, entered into him ; and
the second (any, sometimes
contracted to an and a), as in
Lu. xxii. 3, and often : in Sa.
we have the first in the fi of
ulufia, hi of Ha. uluhia, and
the second in the i of ulu-i-tino
and of Ha. uluia. This is
the verb constantly used in S.,
Mg., and Sa., to denote the
entering into a man of a spirit.
The Ef. and Fi. use another
and synonymous verb, Ef. sili
to enter, Ei. curu, id., which is
used also in A. to express this
idea, and the first of the above
preps, is sometimes used in all
three languages, as in Lu. xxii.
[alo n
3, Ef . sili-ti, Ei. curu-mi, A. fi :
for the A. verb corresponding
to sili, curu, see sili, infra.
In the three languages both
verb and prep, exactly cor-
respond, and express (that
Satan) entered into (Judas).
Alo, s., d., the sun. See ali.
Alo-fi a, v., wave (with a circular
and rolling motion) to him,
beckon to by so waving the
hand, or a branch of a tree ;
alo, and prep, fi : bialo, v. r.,
wave often, or wave to each
other, alo-alo wave repeatedly,
talo go round, avoid, turn
round, taloalo keep going round
(as on a zigzag or crooked
path), turn round. See next
word.
Alo n, or alu n, s., belly, abdo-
men, the front, before, d. aP
naru na, belly, i.e., palm (or
front) of his hand ; reduplicate
lalo n, or lalu n, id., elalo, be-
fore (e prep., and lalo front),
d. elol, in the belly, inside,
an enclosure, d. loga. [Fi.
yalova, Ml. P. oruvi, Ml. U.
oluve, TaSa. lobe or love, Malo
alovi, to beckon, To. taloo to
beckon, Sa. alo to fan, talo to
fan, to beckon, to wave a
piece of tutuga over the dead,
begging him to take calamities
and diseases with him, alofi to
sit in a circle, alofilima palm
of hand [i.e., front or belly of
hand), Sa. alo belly, under
side, Ma. aro face, front, Ha.
alo belly, face, Ma. arohi to
look for, arohirohi to turn
round and round, Ha. aloalo
to turn this way and that, alo
al']
to elude, to oppose (face,
front), to swim (wave hands),
double (as a cape, i.e., go
round).] H.'ul belly, abdomen,
so called from its roundness,
A. alo : the root is 'ul, and 'il,
not used as a verb in H., and
its primary notion is to roll,
turn round, as is seen in its
(derivatives and) cognates, as
H. hul, gil, galal, 'agal, &c,
and A. alia (awl, &c.) The
meaning of Ef. elalo in front,
before (e = in) is secondary,
the radical meaning being in
the belly, inside, and it is as
opposed to etaku (e taku)
behind, at the back (taku
radically denoting back, as na
taku natamole a man's back),
that it has the former meaning.
It should be noted that
Gesenius points out that a
secondary meaning of the root
'ul is to be strong, powerful,
whence, el, strong, God ; and
that thence arises a third
notion, that of pre-eminence (A.
awila to go before, precede),
whence H. 'ulam prop, front,
then vestibule.
Al' (naru) (for alo naru), d.,
palm (belly) of the hand.
[Ml. P. aro, Malo lolo.]
Alo ana, or aloa na, s., maternal
uncle ; vocative (reduplicate)
lolo (cf. abab, mama). [In Ef.
dd. syn. auaua, bau. Malo
taura (ta art.), maternal
uncle.] A. h'alo maternal
uncle. See next word.
Aloara, a. ; alo, and a. ending
ara or ra ; and
Aloaloara, a., redupl., spotted,
9 [amo-rua
marked. [Sa. ilaila, a.,
spotted, marked, ila, s., a
mother's mark, a mark in the
skin, To. ila a mole or mark
in the skin.] A. h'alo, pi.
h'ilan, mole or mark in the
skin, ah'yalo, a., having such
marks in the skin, spotted,
marked.
Alo-ti a, v., rub on (to) it ; alo,
v., and prep. fi. See loa, and
lo-h' a. A. hala, lialu, or halo,.
rub, smear.
Alikas, s., c. art. nfilikas, for na
uli na kasu, leaf or leaves of
trees. See uli, and kasu.
Alser, s., c. art. nalser, dried or
withered cocoanut leaves, so
called because jagged : from
nal for na uli, leaves, and sere,
jagged.
Alu na, s., for alo na, q.v.
Ama, poss. pron., 2 sing., thy : a
prep., and nom. suf. ma. [Sa.
au, Mg. anao, thy.]
Amau, a., true : in loamau, q.v.,.
lo a thing, and amau, also
mau, mori, mauri, true. H.
amau. See mau.
Amos ia, v., to carry on the
shoulder, to bear, to carry.
Often the final s is dropped ;
hence
Amo, v., to carry, to put a load
on the shoulder ; and
Amo-taki, d., id. ; and
Amo-rua, am'rua (rua two), to
carry two (burdens), one on
each end of a stick (as a China-
man carries two baskets) ; the
word also occurs in tak'amo,
d. takiamo to carry a burden
on only one end of such a.
stick ; and
AMOAMO]
Amoarno, c. art. namoarao, s.,
a burden, lit., that which is
carried. [Sa. amo, v., to carry
on the shoulders, amoga, s., a
burden, Ha. amo, to carry a
burden on the shoulder, to
carry.] H. 'amas, bear, carry,
especially lift up a load and
put it on a beast.
.Amo, s., c. art. namo na, the
lungs, but also
Am' kanoa, the heart, and
Am' insat, the lungs (see kanoa,
in sat) ; and
Am' molu, the spleen. [Fut.
ama, Sa. mama, the lungs, To.
mama, id., Ha. akemama, the
lungs, from ake liver, and
mama. In To., Sa., Fut., and
Ha., mama (a reduplicate)
means light, to be light (opp.
of heavy), but this is not the
stem to which the word mama
denoting the lungs belongs, and
does not occur at all in Ef.,
though the Ef. amo is mani-
festly the same as Fut. ama,
and Sa. (reduplicate) mama,
the lungs. For analogues
of akemama see under the
word ate, the liver. In Ef.
uateam', q.v., the kidneys, is
ua ate am', lit., fruit of the
liver (or inside) of the belly
(am', the belly) : uateau (d. ua-
teaf) is d. for uateam', and
balau, q.v. (for balam'), the
common Ef. for inside, is lit.
the hollow of the am' (amo),
i.e., belly. See following —
Amo, s., c. art. namo, the soft
forming kernel of a young
cocoanut : so called like the
internal parts of man or ani-
10 [ana
mal from the softness and
smoothness :
Amoamo, v. i., a., reduplicate, to
be soft and smooth, as the
forming kernel of a young
cocoanut, or the intestines or
viscera, or any smooth or pol-
ished surface : d. momoa. [Sa.
mania, a., clean (i.e., smooth),
Tah. clean, not soiled or pol-
luted, To. and Ma. ma clean,
white.] A. ma'y', pi. am 'a'
intestinum ; also, a level place
between two rugged places
(Ef. na momo, or na amo'mo,
a smooth and level place
between the rocks in a reef),
ma'a, 4, to have dates ripe or
ripening (a palm), ma'w' dates
on the tree, ripe or growing
ripe, ma'i soft, smooth {of food),
ma"y' softness of skin, H.
me'eh only in pi. me'im or
m'ey intestines, the belly, then
the bosom, heart : eg. is A.
maha to gleam with whiteness,
to gild, whence mahw' new
soft dates. Gesenius gives the
radical meaning as " flowing
down, softness," see H. ma'ah.
Amo'mo, or am'mo, c. art. nam-
omo, or nam'mo ; see s. pre-
ceding word : d. momo.
Amorl. See mori.
Amos ia, v. t., to rub, to rub in
order to make smooth : mos ia,
mus ia. A. wamasa to rub (a
thing), to rub (a thing) that it
may be smooth.
Amu, poss. pron., 2 pi., your :
a, prep., and nom. suf. mu.
Ana, form of pers. pron., 3 sing., he,
she, preserved in aneana: other
forms nai, enea (inia), ga (nga).
ana]
Ana, poss. pron., 3 sing., )u.s, her,
its : a, prep., and na, nom.
suf. [Sa una, id., Mg. azy,
has the same prep, a, hut pre-
fixed to the separate pron. like
Ef. anai, d. inea, liis, her, its.]
Anagagu, anagama, anagana,
anagagita, anagami, anaganiu,
anagara (or anagata), poss.
prons., syn. c. agagu, agama,
tfcc, q.v.
Anaga, in these words, is the
same as aga, in agagu, and
anaga is related to aga as
nagi or nig to agi, that is, the
prefix to the prep, ga (or gi) is
the art. with or without its n.
Anai, poss. pron., 3 sing., his,
her, its : a, prep., and nai.
Anana, poss. pron., 3 sing., his,
her, its, d. for aneana, q.v.
AnSana, poss. pron., 3 sing., of
him, his, her, its : ane or am,
q.v., prep., and ana, a form of
the pers. pron., 3 sing.
Anekabu, c. art. nanekabu, d.
for arekabu.
Anekama, c. art. nanekama, d.
for arekabu.
Anekabu, c. art. tanekabu, d.
for arekabu.
Anena, d. for aneana.
Anera, for aneara, often pro-
nounced aneta, aneata, d. are-
ara, poss. pron., 3 pi., of them,
their; prep, ani, and ara, pers.
pron., 3 pi.
Aneta, d. for anera.
Ani, prep., particle consisting of
the art. a and prep, ni, q.v.,
and often used for the simple
prep, ni, of, belonging to (geni-
tive prep.), for (dative, rare,
this is usually expressed by
1 1 [ani
magi, nag', or nig', q.v.) :
generally synonymous with
agi, q.v. for a difference. Some-
times pronounced ini (eni), and
contracted to a, in, i, or e, and
having among other meanings
that of "in"(cf. the contraction
in English of i' for in, as " i'
the forest," for "in the forest"),
or "at," or " on," as etaku or
itaku behind (at the back),
elau or alau on the sea, also
to the sea, seawards, as ba ki
elau, go seawards, or to the
sea, ki e being two preps,
of similar meaning, the one
strengthening the other (cf.
My. akan, Mg. ho any, ho a).
Anigami; d. syn. c. aginami ;
poss. pron. 1 pi. excl., of us —
them (of us and them) : ani,
prep., and garni (for nami),
pers. pron. 1 pi. excl. See
nami, kinami.
Anigita ; d. aninita, q.v. ; poss.
pron. 1 pi. inch, of us — you
(of us and you) : ani prep.,
and gita (for nlta). See
ninita, nita.
Animu ; d., syn. c. agumu ;
poss. pron. 2 pi., of you, your :
a, prep., and nimu (for
nikamu), d. nikam, pers. pron.
2 pi.
Aninita, d. obsolete, syn. c.
anigita : ani prep., and nita,
pers. pron. 1 pi. incl. See
ninita, nita.
Ani, v., usually pronounced em,
d. oni, contracted to an, en, a,
o ; c. preformative m' or ma,
it is man, ma, ban (and mban),
ba, dd. bon, ben, bao, baon,
maon ; to abide, to be, as i
ANl]
12
[AN I NA
ani or i an sunia he abides or
is at home (in the house), i
man or i ma tafa he is on the
hill, i man or i ma rarua it is
in the ship or canoe, i ma or i
an til ia, bat ia, he abides
(continues) or is telling it,
doing it.
Note 1. — The verb an
may be thus used before
any verb, like toko (contracted
to) to sit, dwell, be, with
which it is nearly synonymous.
But an tano lies or is on the
ground, toko tano, or to atano
sits on the ground, tu tano
stands on the ground. Both
tu and toko are used before
other verbs like an, and toko
til ia, tu til ia, like an til ia,
denote to abide, continue, or
be telling it. Another verb,
tau, q.v., is used in the same
way before other verbs, as i
tau til ia, bat ia, he abides, or
is constantly, habitually, or
nddictedly, or repeatedly, tell-
ing, doing it. These verbs
thus used before other verbs
are auxiliaries, not of tense,
but of " form," expressing
continuance, intensity, repeti-
tion ; and as in the English
phrases "I do say it," " I
must say it" (where say is the
simple infinitive after the
auxiliaries do and must), the
verb immediately following
them is the infinitive.
Note 2. — The preformative
in', ma' (me, mi) is used with
toko, tu, and tau, as well as with
ani, an, as matoko(or mato), dd.
batoko, fatoko (vatoko), matu,
batu, fatu (vatu), mitau or
metau : with this preformative
these verbs have much the
same meaning as without it ;
they have the same meaning
with the added idea of con-
tinuance or intensity. [Mg.
monina dwell, reside, inhabit,
onenana, fonenana (a dwelling),
mponina (dweller).] A., 4)
"aniya, to dwell, abide, 8) to
be, ma"na' dwelling, cf. H. 'un
to rest, to dwell, ma'on a dwell-
ing.
Ani na, c. art. nani na, s., child,
son or daughter, dd. ati, atu.
[My. anak, Mg. anaka, id.,
My. kanak (see kanao, kano,
infra), Mg.zanaka, id., c. arts,
k' and z'.] A. wald', walad',
walid', E. walde, Amh. wande,
T. wade, H. yalid, one born,
child, son, from the verb H.
yalad, A. walada, to bring
forth, bear (a mother), to beget
(a father), A. walid', parent,
genitor, father, walida^' mother,
genitrix (Nm. welid, welida,
Ct. walid ah). My. baranak
(Makassar, ma-ana), to bear a
child, bring forth any offspring,
have children, be a parent, Sa.
fanau (cf. A., A) to bring forth,
fananau, fanafanau, fanaua
(ps.), fanau, s., offspring, chil-
dren, fanauga, s., offspring,
child-bearing.
Note. — The word ani, or ati,
atu, son or daughter, probably
represents an original mascu
line (and so that denoting
father, A. walid, Ml. and Santo
tata, voc, reduplicate, Santo d.
tai, Mg. ray), but the word
ANOlJ
belonging to this stem do-
noting mother, the ancient
feminine (welida, walidah).
This is in Ef. d. raite na, or
reita na mother, d. ere na (for
erana), Ta.iti, d. rih, Am. rahi,
An. risi, Ml. risi, d. are, Epi d.
la, Pa. lati, Fila leta, Celebes
ley to: Ef. voc. tete (cf. abab, or
mama) a reduplicate ; also be-
long here Ef. atene na grand-
mother, and cl. atia na, id.,
the vocative of which, a redu-
plicate, is tata. In one dialect
atia means also grandfather.
In Epi mother, in one d. la, in
another is kaine, i.e., ka art.,
and ine (for ina) mother, and
this latter is the prevailing
form of this word in the Malay
Archipelago (see Wallace's list),
Amboyna, Ceram, &c, ina, Mg.
reny and ineny (reduplicate,
voc. Ta. d. nana), Sa. tina ; the
Sa. tina is t' art., and ina,
Put. jina, Aniwa nana, Epi d.,
without art. ani, Mg. r-eny
Celebes undo, Bu. indok, ina,
My. ind-u, J. id-ung ; also
Ysabel ido, San Cristoval ina,
Motu tina. Mare nene, Duke of
York na.
Anoi, or anui, s., c. art. nanoi,
or nanui, vir, husband, male :
m has been elided from the
beginning of this word as in
noai, d. nai, d. nifai (nivai),
q.v., water ; d. inane (mwane),
ma'an (mo'an), male. See
mane.
Anu, d., pers. pron. 1 sing., I-
See kinau.
Anu na, s. c. art., nanu na, his,
13 [ao
her, its shadow, i bi an' fur
it is an empty appearance,
mere shadow (worthless).
[Epi ununo, Malo unu, Ml. d.
nunu, id.] And
An', s., a rope, c. art. nan'.
These two meanings are also
found in the A. A. 'anna, n.
a. 'annu, 'ananu, 'ununu to
present itself, to appear, 2, to
hold with a rein ; 'anu a long
rope, 'ananu and 'inanu ad-
paritio rei, 'ananu clouds, H.
'anan a cloud.
Note. — The radical mean-
ing of H. anan is to cover,
and cognate are kanan and
ganan ; A. j anna, or ganna, to
cover, to be dark (of the
night), to be possessed by a
demon and insane, jinnu, or
ginnu, darkness of night, also
demons, spirits, or every kind
of them (this is the jin of the
"Arabian Nights "), bin a kind
of demons, ginniyyu a demon
or spirit, ganunu genii. In
Ef., d., unu ghost, d. inini
spirit, soul, Ml. P. oni, noni
n, his soul, or his shadow, Epi
d. anunu soul or spirit, Epi
(Baki) unu, c. art. niunu soul
or spirit, ununo shadow ; and
Ml. oni, Malo unu, one's like-
ness in water or in a looking
glass. Ef. ate, q.v., denotes
the soul, a spirit, one's
shadow, and one's likeness in
water or in a looking-glass.
Ao (or au), v., d., to bark (as a
dog). See bakau. [Sa. ou,
id.]
Ao, ad., yes. [Ma. au.] See au.
ara]
Ara, form of pers. pron. 3 pi.,
preserved in areara : other
forms nara, nigara (gaia),
enera, kiniara.
Ara, s., a fence : c. art. nara, d.
nar : see koro, c. art. nakoro,
id. (ara has the initial k elided),
Nar fat, d. for nakoro fatu, a
stone fence.
Ara ia, v. t., seek, ara ika search,
look for fish, come seeking,
ba ara go or come seeking,
ti ara press after seeking.
[Fi. qara, v. t., seek, qaqara,
qaraqara, vakasaqara.] A.
liala, 3, n. a. liawal', v. t.,
seek.
Araara, or arara, v., reduplicate
of ara, to join to, join together,
connect with, arara naui,
attach the yam vines to stakes,
arara nia connect it, arara ni
ora naui ki nakau connect or
attach the yam vine to the
stake : arara ki nalo na agree
to his voice (judgment, opinion,
<fec), lit. join on to it, syn.
sokari nalona : oraorana, q.v.,
variegated, belongs to this
stem. H. habar, S. hbar, E.
liabara, to join together, con-
nect with; then, to agree with
someone; then, to be banded,
striped, variegated, A. liabara,
ps. liubira to be striped, E.
liubur coloured, variegated,
adorned with various colours,
Ch. habarbar spotted. Pri-
mary meaning, bind together.
Arara, s., heat, arara ni elo heat
of the sun : see next word.
Aran, or oran, d. arain, d. on,
d. uen, s., c. art. naran, &c,
sand. In on and uen (wen),
U [ A ru
the r is elided, the n of on,
like that of mane (male), q.v.,
is non-radical. [Sa., Ma.,
Tah., To., Ha., one, and one-
one sand ; oneonea (a, a. end-
ing) sandy.] A. horr', or
llorron, sand, from liarra to be
hot, whence liarai'a£ heat, Ef.
arara heat.
Arai, d., dem. pron , this, that.
For the final ai, see uai. [Ha-
la, Ma. ra there, Fut. ra that,
Mg. iroa that, there, ery, ary,
there.] 8. hal, H. halah there,
connected with the dem. H.
hal, A. al, the art., Ch. alu,
aru, Ch. and Talmud hare,
are, dem., lo ! there ! Of
this dem. syllable al, hal,.
ar, har, Gesenius remarks —
" It is hard to say which
form is the more ancient and
primitive;" it is seen also-
in Arm. harka, halkah, here,
H. elleh, &c., these, those, and
in Ef. arog (d.), eri, erik, eru,
q.v.
Areara, d., for aneara, anera, q.v.*
the prep, am, or ane, is are in
this word.
Arekabu na, s., c. art. narekabu,.
the liver. See ate.
Arifon, s., c. art. narifon, diviner,
magician, A. 'arrafon a di-
viner, from 'arafa to know,
divine, 2, make known.
Ari(a), v. t., to plane, scrape off,
rub off. [Sa. oro, id.] S. gra'
to scrape off, shave, H. gara'.
Arog (arong), d., dem. pron., this.
See arai and erik. The final
g as in nag, naga, dem.
Aru na, s., c. art. nam na,
hand, arm ; fore-foot of a
asa]
quadruped : nam arms, i.e.,
weapons of war, war ; i bi aru
uia he is industrious, lit. a
good hand, i bi aru sa he
is handles?, lazy, lit. a bad
hand. [New Guinea dd.
uadu, dei, Ml. P. fera, Ml. A.
verua, Samang tong, Nias
tanga, Borneo dd. tongan,
lungan, rongo, tangan, My.
tangan, Mg. tan ana, d. tan-
gana, Madura Bali tanang.]
H. yad hand, S. id., A. yadu
(and yaddu), dualyadan ; also,
adu, dual adan, hand, arm;
fore-foot of a quadruped. The
Mg. tana-na, compares with the
A. adan.
Asa, ad., the day after to-morrow.
See uasa.
Aseli na, s., a friend. [Ml. U.
selen, Bu. sblao, id.] A.
wasll', intimate friend, from
wasala to join, be joined.
As ia, d. uas ia, v. t., cut, cut
out, as asi naniu cut out the
kernel of a cocoanut (to make
a water vessel of it), asi
(lua namena na) cut (out his
tongue), asi intale cut the
roots of taro (while it is in
the water, to pull it out of
the ground) : hence maseasi,
q.v. S. hsa, v.t., cut out (as
the eye).
Asi na, s., c. art. nasi na, the
part of the face bearded, jaw,
jawbone, chin. [Malo ase
TaSa. ese chin, Ml. P. fese
chin, ese cheek.] The radical
idea is that of cutting, sharp,
tearing. A. ll'add' mala, gena.
Asi ta bunu, jaw cutting dead ;
As! tageli, crooked jaw : these
15 [a sua
expressions denote, the latter
crooked talk, the former talk
calculated for and resulting in
the death of one hated.
Aso, v.i., to burn, he burning (a
fire), be kindled, to be burnt
or scorched (as one's skin, or
food in being cooked). [Fi.
qesa, qesaqesa, a, burnt or
scorched, as in cooking, An.
ecescas, a., burned, acas, or
cas, to burn ; hot, burning.]
A. waliada, n. a. wakdo, H.
yakad, 8. ikad, to burn, be
burning, be kindled.
Aso, s., a kind of crab, the
robber crab.
Aso, or asu, s., c. art. naso, or
nasu, a bow (for shooting
arrows). [Aurora usu, Paama
hisu, Ml. P. vus, Ml. U. vis,
Amblaw busu, My. busor,
Saparua husu, id.] A. kawsu,
or kasu, id. So called from
being curved.
Asoara, s., the rainbow. Cloth
brilliantly variegated with
different coloured bands or
stripes is called na kalu aso-
ara, a phrase in which the word
is an adjective. Also a stone
fence constructed of three rows
or bands of stone is described
as asoara. See infra, soara
(or souara).
Asolat, see soli.
Asua, v. i., to smoke, c. t. prep ,
asuenia to smoke on to it, or
him : c. art. it is s., naasua na
the smoke of it, its smoke.
[Mg. etona, s., smoke, mane-
tona, v., to smoke, My. asap
(probably this word lit. means
smoke of fire, api), barasap to
at]
smoke, Malo asu, s., mo asu-
asu, v., TaSa. asu, s., m'asu,
v., Ml. P. ese, s., mi es, v., Ml.
A. nahamp basua, s., lit. the
fh*e smokes, basua, v., Sa. asu,
s., asua, and asuina, v. ps.]
H. 'as'en, to smoke, 'as'an
smoke, A. 'athana, 1, 2, 4, to
smoke.
At, or ats, c. art. nat, q.v.,
banana.
Ata (or nata), s., c. art. nata, d.
na eta for na ata, a man, a
person ; one, someone ; nata
nata, every one. See atamole,
atemate, ata na, atamani.
[Motlav et, Ureparapara at,
man. See below, Note 2.]
A. nat', for lias', which is
the commonly used plural
(" pluralis fractus," a col-
lective or abstract, or singular
with a collective meaning),
of 'insan', man, male or
female, a human being, also
umbra hominis (the older
plural is 'unas', with which
corresponds H. 'enos', Arm.
'anas'a, a man, men), and de-
notes men, also genii, demons.
Note 1. — A. 'insan, for
which there is also 'Isan,
corresponds to H. 'Is'on, which
is formed from 'is' by the
ending on, and denotes, when
followed by the word eye,
" little man of the eye, i.e.,
pupil in which as in a glass a
little image of a man is seen"
(Ges.) ; the A. denotes in
addition to the meanings given
above " the little image appear-
ing in the pupil of the eye : "
A. 'insan is from the root 'ans
10 [ata na
and H. 'is' vir, 'is'ah woman,
from 'ins', 'ins'ah, hence the pi.
of 'is'ah is nas'im, corresponding
to A. nisa, niswa£, and niswan,
women. The words 'is' vir, is'ah
woman (and their equivalents
in the cognate languages) must
be carefully distinguished from
that given above under ata (or
nata) denoting " a human
being " whether male or female,
though they all belong to the
same root or stem.
Note 2. — According to the
above, the t in ata, like that in
A. nat', represents an original
s as in nas'. In Ef. dd. this
t is sometimes pronounced
nearly as r, and ts. In
other New Hebrides dia-
lects this consonant is found
as t, s, r, 1 ; thus correspond-
ing to Efate ata-niani male
(vir) are An. ata-maig, Fut.
ta-ne (for ta-ane), Ta. yeru-
man, Epi dd. ata-mani, su-
mano, Ml. U. oro-man, TaSa.
la-mani. My orang, Mg. olona
belong here.
Ata na, s., c. art. nata na (or
nate na) his spirit, his soul ;
his shadow : his image (in
water or a glass). This is the
same word as the preceding,
but in this use has the nom.
suf . [Sa. ata a spirit, a shadow,
Fut. ata a ghost, shadow,
image (as in water), picture or
likeness, Fila tano ata, his
soul, Ma. ata reflected image,
shadow, ata po early morning,
ata marama moonlight, whaka-
ata mirror, Sa. ataga (from ata
a shadow) the mere appearance
ATA IAJ 17
of a thing, atagia to glisten
(as from a reflected light),
ataata the red sky after sun-
set, Ha. iika the shadow of a
person, figure, outline, or like-
ness, aka to light up, as the
moon before rising, akalani a
heavenly shadow, a splendid
light, Ef. atalagi, q.v., the
moon.] See preceding word.
Ata ia. or atai a, v. t., to know, d.
tai, q.v.
Atakasua, a., jealous ; sus-
picious : from ata (soul), and
kasua q.v.
Atalagi, s., usually written
atelagi, the moon : from ata
(see ata na), and lagi the
sky, heaven. [Ha. akalani
(a heavenly shadow, a splen-
did light) is composed of the
same two words.]
Atamauri, or atemauri, s., the
spirit of a living man that has
gone out of him during sleep
and been seen by someone.
This word occurs in one dia-
lect and is composed of ata
the soul, and mauri, q.v., to
live.
Atamate, or atemate, s., c. art.
natemate, spirit of one dead,
ghost, spirits of the dead,
demons, good or bad spirits,
supernatural beings, objects of
worship, gods (gen. name).
The word is composed of ata
(above), and mate, q.v., to
die, be dead, a. dead. [Ml. P.
demej, Epi dd. atamate, si-
maro, Ta. yeramis, Ml. A.
temes, An. natmas, id.] The
primary meaning of natemate
seems to be dead man : thus
[A TATA
a corpse may be called nate-
mate, and natemate sometimes
denotes "the dead" in a col-
lective sense.
Atamole, s., c. art. natamolp,
man, male or female, a human
being, same as ata, or nata,
with the addition of mole,
q.v., to live, a. living. Nata-
mole lit. denotes living man.
[Mg. olombelona, id. The
Mg. is composed of the same
two words as the Ef. ; for olo-
na see ata (above), and for
velona to live see mole (be-
low) ; and the meaning of the
compound word is the same in
each case. At least the
initial ta in Fi. tamata, Sa.
tangata, Tah. taata, id., be-
longs here.]
Ataniani, s., c. art. nataniani,
male, lit. a male human
being, from ata (above), and
mani, q.v., male. [For New
Hebrides forms of this com-
pound word, see ata (above).
Fi. tangane, Sa. tane, id.]
Atatabu, or at'tab, s., c. art.
natatabu, or nat'tab, lit.
sacred spirits, sacred stones
identified with such spirits,
and objects of pagan worship :
from ata (above), and tabu,
q.v.
Atama s., d. syn. c. ore, the
pointed rubbing stick for pro-
ducing fire by its friction with
another stick : a, art., and
tama ia, q.v.
Atara, aturiei. See natara,
naturiei.
Atata, v. i., or a., a reduplicate, to
have white spots or marks
3
atata] 1 1
such as show where sores have
healed. See next word.
Atata, s., an albino. The
radical meaning would there-
fore seem to be white. [Cf.
Mg. hatsatra white, pale,
wan, sickly.] A. was'ali'
white spot appearing on the
head or feet of a horse,
was'ali' whitening spots of
leprosy, was'ill' very white;
from was'alia to be manifest,
white (as milk), &c.
Ate, c. art. nat6 na (d. nante na),
the liver (of a shark), the
spleen ; in arekabu (for ate-
kabu) it signifies the liver or
principal viscus of the kabu
(or kobu, q.v.), inside, and in
uateam, q.v., the proper mean-
ing seems to be the middle, the
middle and more important
part. [My. ati the liver, then
the mind, heart or inside,
Mg. aty the liver, the inside,
Sa. ate the liver.] A. kabd',
kabid'. H. kabecl, E. kabd6,
the liver, Amh. hode, the
belly. A. kabid' also denotes
the belly with its parts, the
middle and more important
part (of a thing), the middle
(of a thing). E. kabde viscus
(nom. gen.), stomach, belly, in-
side, and particularly the
liver, as the heaviest of the
viscera. (See Ludolf's E.
Lex.) H. kabad, E. kabda, to
be heavy (primary meaning).
Note 1. — Arekabu, q.v., c.
art. narekabu, dd. talekabu,
nanekabu, tanekabu, and
nanekama, the liver, is com-
posed of are (for ate) the
[ate
liver or principal viscus, and
kabu (for which see kobu the
belly, the inside), and lit.
denotes the viscus (or liver) of
the inside ; with are (for ate)
corresponds Ml. U. ere, and
New Guinea, Maclay Kiiste
arre, the liver.
Note 2.— With Ludolf's
statement (above) compare
that in the Ha. Diet.,
where ake (for ate) is de-
fined as " the liver," and also
" a general name for several
internal organs, qualified by
different terms " : thus akeloa
spleen (loa long), and also
akeniau ; akepaa the liver, as
well as the simple ake ; ake-
mama the lungs (see above,
s.v. amo). In Sa. atepili the
spleen, atevae the calf of the
leg, Tah. aterima the thick
part of the arm. In Ef.
uateam' (d. uateau) the kid-
neys (see above, s.v. amo)
ua-nate-natuo, or ua-nate-tuo,
the calf of the leg, in one
dialect is denoted by uateau
natore, lit. kidneys of the
shin (i.e., the leg from the.
knee to the foot, see tore),
and uateau laso denotes
kidneys of the scrotum.
Ua-nate has exactly the same
meaning as uate (i.e., ua-ate)
the only difference being that
in the former ate c. art. is
nate ; ua, fruit, is used be-
cause the parts spoken of are
round or fruit-shaped. In
Ef. dd. the calf of the leg is
uateau natore, ua-nate tuo (or
natuo), and na&ela natore, of
ATELAKl]
which the last lit. denotes
the belly of the leg (below
the knee).
Atelaki na, or atelakia na, s.,
the owner of it, owner : from
a, art., and telaki or telakia,
q.v.
Atena na (d. atia na), s., maternal
grandmother ; voc. tata. See
ani na.
Ati na, s., c. art. nati na, child,
d. ani na, q.v. [Ma., Tah.,
ati offspring.]
Atia na, s., paternal grandfather
or grandmother : voc. tia. See
atena na, tata, tematete ta,
tia, tematia ta.
Ati(a). d. uati(a), v. t., d. for
ari a, q.v.
Atoara, see natoara.
Atu na, s., c. art. natu na, d.
ati na, his, her child, off-
spring. See ani na.
Atu, c. suf. atu-gia (d. uatu) beat,
smite, break off or divide off
(as a piece of a plantation) ;
atu (namauri) utter (an in-
cantation), at' usi utter re-
hearsing (see us ia), atu saki
plop up (of a turtle, also of
the sound of the breath in the
throat of a man recovering
from a faint or dying) ; and
atu taku turn the back (to
anyone on being addressed, as
if not aware of it), atu taluko
turn oneself (from someone) ;
atu tuai break in pieces (a
plantation) giving him (a por-
tion) ; fiatu, v. r., to be fight-
ing, to be smiting each other :
nalagi atu the wind beating,
a hurricane ; atu nabau kill
(by smiting the head) ; atu
19 [atu A
ualubota rout the enemy
(smite, break the enemy).
With the ending maki the
word, atu-makl, means jerk,
snap, as atu-maki jerk (as the
branch of a tree), balusa atu-
maki to paddle jerking (with
a jerking motion of the
paddle), atu-maki nalo ra jerk
their voices, or snap their
voices. A. hata beat, smite,
hatia be bent, stoop (a man),
Nm. heti declaim : cf. hatta
to break, to beat off (as leaves
from trees), to utter (words).
Atuta (see ta atuta ki), s., set
time, or place, as i ta atuta
ki nia, he declares a set time to
(one), i.e., to meet him on a
certain day, or at a certain
time (to do something), ru tu
natuta they kept the set time,
i risugi natuta he changed the
set time. See ta atuta.
Atu-maki, v. See atu.
Atu saki, at 'saki, v. See atu
and saki.
Atu taku, at' taku, v. See atu
and taku.
Atu taluko, at' taluko, v. See
atu and taluko.
Atua, s., God. Introduced word.
In Meli. c. art. the word
tetua (East Mai retua, To.
hotooa, he otua) denotes
among the heathen the same
as atamate, that is, any
spiritual being regarded as
having supernatural qualities
or powers, as a demon, good
or bad, a ghost, a god : it is
a general name. A human
being on dying immediately
becomes a tetua or natamate —
atc.m-kol]
that is, not only a spirit, but,
among the heathen, an object
of superstitious regard. In
Sa. aitu a spirit, a god, seems
to belong to the same stem,
whence, with a. ending a,
aitua haunted. Probably both
aitu and atua belong to the
same stem as ata, q.v. The
word in Ha. (akua), To. (otua),
Ma. and Sa. (atua) now de-
notes God in the Christian
sense, and it has been intro-
duced with this meaning into
Aneityum, Tanna, Efate, Epi,
&c.
Atum-kol, s., echo, lit. offspring
of the call or shout, and
Atuma, in pr. nn. atuma-neru
offspring of war, &c. See
kola, and for atuma offspring,
see futum.
Atuta. See p. 19.
Au, verb. pron. 1 pi. excl., we,
they, d. pu (for mu) : separate
pron. kinami we — they ; kinau
I, verb. pron. a I, d. ni.
Au, ad., yes, d. ao. A, dera.
prefix, and u, or o, for which
see o. H. hahu' that (is it).
Au, v. i., to heal, get well, d. for
abu, id., q.v.
Au, s., a kind of lizard, d. for
kiiu, id.
Au, v. i., to bark. See ao.
Aua (awa), v. i., or a., fatigued,
c. art. naiia, one fatigued. H.
ya'af, to be fatigued, ya'ef,
fatigued.
Alia (awa), ad., no, it is not : d.
eiio, q.v.
Auaua, s. (awawa, a reduplicate),
d. bau, q.v., maternal uncle.
20 [ba
[My. uwa, wa, uwak, an uncle
or aunt], cf. A. 'amm', an
uncle. See bau na.
Aue, interj., surprise, commisera-
tion. [Sa. aue, alas ! oh ! of
wonder.] A. awwi (&c.\ alas!
ah ! oh !
Aui, interj., surprise, commisera-
tion ; a, dem., and ui, q.v.
Auis, interj., surprise, commisera-
tion ; a, dem., and uis, q.v.
Aul ia, v. t., dd. ul ia, ol ia, uil
ia. See ul ia.
Aum, s., c. art. naum, d. for
aime, q.v.
Aure, s., a singer, bard, a, art.,
and ure or ore (see ore). [Fut.
goro, Ma. whakaoriori, Ha.
olo, My. uraura, Mg. hira, to
sing, &c.] E. halaya, to sing.
Aiita, s., or ad., auta, ashore, on
land, d. euta, q.v., a, prep., and
uta, q.v.
B
a-, or fa-, caus. prefix, origin-
ally ma. [Mg. ma-, fa-, mpa-.]
S. ma- (Maphel conj.), Mod.
S. ma-, caus. prefix (St.,
pp. 110, 111) : the Mafel or
Maphel is simply the participle
of the ancient Aphel (H.
hiphil, A. 4).
Ba. (bwa), and ua (wa), v. i., to
rain = d. boua (bowa). [Epi
mboba, mbobo, Ta. ufu, id.]
A. ba'a to rain continuously,
ba'a'a rain, rain water.
Ba, or fa (va), v., to go, enter (a
ship, &,c), tread (go upon), with
si suffixed, ba-si to tread, tread
upon (go upon). [Fi. va-ca,
to tread upon, hence va na,
and probably yava na, the feet,
Mysol bo, to go. This verb
in Ef., &c, is often followed
by a " directive," or adverb,
which sometimes is suffixed to
it, and the expression thus
formed may signify either to
go or to come, thus, An. apan,
go there, apam, come here,
Ef. ban, or bano, go there,
ba be (d.) come here, (d.)
umai (in which the ba is
corrupted to u), Sa. o mai,
Amboyna uimai, oimai, omai,
Mysol bo inun, to come here ;
My. pargi, pai, to go, is perhaps
this pa and rgi or i, pargi-mari
to come, like Ef. d. bano
to go (ba and no), bano mai
to come here. The mai in
such phrases as the above, Ef.
dd. mai, be, has sometimes,
from being an abverb or
directive so used after ba, '
come to be used alone, the
ba being understood, signi-
fying to come : thus in one Ef.
d. mai, in another d. be (mai
and be are forms of the same
particle) are now verbs used
alone denoting to come here.
My. mari hither, here, in like
manner used alone signifies to
come. See under banotu, notu.]
H. bo', ba, to enter, come, go
(egg. E. bawi', A. ba, to return,
&c.)
5a, v., to come from (from a
place), as Ku ba se 1 you
come from where 1 i ba nalia
uan he comes from that place,
dd. bai, be, baki (where the
prep, ki = from). [Mg. avy
21 [baba
aiza 1 = ha se *? = come from
where 1 come whence 1 avy to
come.] See under banotu.
Ba ki, v., c. prep., to go to (a
place) : ba, and the prep, ki
to: ki, to, sometimes denotes
from see preceding word.
Bai, v., d., ba, q.v., to come from,
as bai se 1 come from where ?
See under banotu.
Bai, v., to be, d. for bi, q.v.
Bai a, v. t., to gather together in
order to carry home, as fire-
wood, or fruit, &c. [Fi. va-ya,
})S. vai, to make a bundle, as
of sticks, to carry on the back.]
See afaia.
Ba, d. mba, final conj., that :
used in the conjugation of the
future and imperative and in-
finitive of verbs.
Ba, that thou, sign of 2 pers. sing,
imperative ; includes pron. 2
pers. sing. [Motu ba, used in
the same way in fut., inf., and
imp., Fi. me, in imp. and inf.,
Ma. me, forming a kind of im-
perative future, Mg. mba that,
Ml. P. ba, b' that, used in con-
jugation of imp., inf., and
future.] A. fa that (final
conj. ), Ac.
Ba, v., d. for ma. See ani, v.
Bai), s., d., voc, father = ab,
babu, abab, id.
Ba, na (kba na), s., c. art. na ba,
na, and reduplicated
7>a6a na, s., hollows, or channels ;
and
Baba,, s., c. art. na&a&a, a hollow,
channel, or bed of a stream,
dry except after heavy rains :
Baba,, s., c. art. naftaia, a board :
[Sa., Tah.papa, My. papan, id.]
BABU]
£&bu na (d. bamu na), s., c. art.
na&a&u na, the cheek : (My.
pipi, Tah. papa — uru, id.] H.
gabab to be curved, hollow ;
to cut, dig. Hence gab the
back (see below, bamu), geb a
board : egg. having the sense
of hollow, curved, are numer-
ous, as gavah, gafaf, guf, or
gup (infra kobu, kubu, kabu),
kafaf (infra kau, kai, kaf),
naliab (infra na6ea, i.e., nak-
bea, d. nakima, fafine), bub,
'abab, nabab, &c, and the eg.
words in A., 6zc. Mg. ho-
boka hollow, concave, pepo
hollow, concave, My. ampa
hollow, To. papa the hollow
piece of wood on which
gnatoo is imprinted, lowpapa
a board, &c.
Babatrega, v. L, or a., variegated,
versicoloured, as cloth : the
formative prefix ba doubled ;
said to be denominative from
troga (toga), q.v., a versi-
coloured woven basket.
Babu, s., d., voc, father : dd.
afa, ab, abab, bab'.
2?afa, s., a small separate house
used only by women dwelling
apart from men during men-
struation, and also at the time
of parturition. From afa to
bear, carry, c. pref. 6a (for
ma). See baofa (d.), which is
from ofa, d. for afa, bear,
carry : baofa, though etymo-
logically the same as iafa, has
a different meaning, no such
custom as is implied by the
6afa obtaining among the
speakers who say " baofa."
It denotes the act of men-
5-2
[baga
struating, not the house for
those menstruating.
Note. — In Ha. the house
for menstruating women was
called hale pea.
Bafanau, same as fanau, q.v.
Bafano, or fafano, v., to wash
the hands. See bano lia.
[Sa. fafano wash the hands
and mouth, Fi. vuluvulu wash
the hands. See bulu nia,
bano lia, balo nia, ifcc, ivfra.~\
Bafatu, or fafatu, v. t., to trust
in, confide in, rely upon. See
fatu.
Baga, v. c. See bagan ia, to feed,
charge, fill ;
Bagan ia, v. c, to feed, lit. make
to eat, bagan ia sa, lit. make
him eat it ; caus. prefix ba,
and kan to eat. With the
n elided baga, as baga nata
feed anyone, baga sisi load a
gun ; baga, absolute, as i baga
(of a pig or a fish) to wander
about in search of food ; faga
(of fire), nakabu faga a burn-
ing or devouring fire, i faga it
burns, devours, or eats (of fire,
and of an ulcer) ; nafaga a
bribe, nafagafaga a bait. [Fi.
vakani-a, Sa. fafaga, feed,
cause to eat, Mg. mamahana
to feed, also load (a gun),
caus. pref. ma, and fahana.]
See kan ia.
Bagau-nabau, pr. n., c. art.
nabagau-nabau : the feeder of
the oven with the slain ; baga,
ua, nabau.
Baga, s. See bago, a hill, d.
mago, d. bega.
Baga, s., d. for maga, the banyan
tree.
uagabaga]
23
Bagabaga, v. i. See bagobago.
Bagarai a, v. c., to dry, lit. make
dry : from gara, kara, dry.
[My. mangaiing kan, id.] See
gara, kara.
Bagaranu a i, den. v. c. ; from
ran, c. art. niran, fresh water;
to wash with fresh water after
bathing in the sea : d. baka-
naru mia, id. (naru, transposed I
for ranu). [Sa. faalanu to ',
wash off salt water, ps. faa-
lanumia; with 'i faalanuma-'i.]
See ran, s.
Bagi, v., to mount, climb, ascend
(a hill, ladder, tree, ship, &c); '
may also have the prep, ki
before the object, as bagi
nakasu or bagi ki nakasu
climb the tree, bagi to go up, |
ascend, bagi ki go up on. [Mg.
akatra, miakatra, id., My.
minggah, id., Ma. piki to
climb, pikitia.J A. 'aka', 4), to
ascend.
Bagobago, v. i., or a., to be
crooked. [Sa. pi'o, pi'opi'o,
id., Ma. piko, bent, Mg.
vokoka crooked, My. bengkok,
Ja. bengkong crooked.] H.
hafak, S. hpak, A. 'apaka
to turn, ifcc, H. hapakpak
crooked, twisted. Hence
Bagobagoa, a., crooked, twisted :
-a, a. ending ; and
Bagobagora, a., id.: a. ending -ra.
/?ago, v., to be behind, i bago
asa he is behind it, as i feago
nakoro he is behind the fence
(of a man behind a fence put
up about his house to shut
out the public view), i 6ago
nafanua it is behind the land
(of a ship taking shelter under
[bago
the lee side of an island in a
hurricane). The word iago
na, s., denotes the heel ; the
lower part of the back (syn.
bisi na) ; 6ago nafanua west
end of an island, is the opp.
of meta nafanua east end of
an island (fore-end and heei-
end) ; bugo na kelu, or baga.
na kelu is the after part of an
army that (kelu) gor-s in a
circuitous course to surprise
the enemy — and in all these
senses the word in one dialect
is pronounced mago na, which
is the more original form.
The hills behind the villages,
or not far back from the shore,
on which there is no jungle,
are called bega, baga, d.
mago. This word is much
used in names of places, points
or heels of the land : thus
Pagona is the name of west end
of Deception Island, Havan-
nah Harbour, and Pago of the
long point of land on the
south of Fila harbour ; Selim-
baga a place on Tongoa, &c.
The end of anything, as the
land, a stick, &c, is called
meta-frago na, lit. the eye or
point of its end. [TaSa.
pigo na, end or extremity.]
H. 'akab, A. 'akaba to be be-
hind, to come from behind :
the form (in Ef.) resembles
A. ma'kob, mago, ba,go : H.
'akeb the heel, A. 'akib' id.,
and the end of a thing : H.
'akeb also denotes the ex-
treme rear of an army, and
'akob a hill, acclivity (A., E.,
id.)
BAGO NA]
Ba.go na, s., d. for mago na, heel
of foot ; back part of body ;
binder end (of an island) in
opp. to meta na fore end (i.e.,
east) ; hinder part of an army ;
an end (of anything) ; end of
a house (the Efatese house has
two ends), hence, inside of a
house at the far ends, and
then generally in one d. in-
side (of a house) ; end, i.e.
bottom, of a hole or deep pit.
See preceding word and mago.
Bagote fia, v.c, to buy it, pur-
chase it, lit. to break, separate
(from its former owner) a
thing, d. bakotufia. See koto.
Bagokot, or bagkot, v., redupli-
cate of foregoing.
Bfi gote fia, v., to break a thing
(as a stick) by treading (see ba)
on it.
Bai, v., d. ba, to go or come from
(a place) : ba v., and prep L,
d. ba ki, id., has prep. ki.
Bai, or bei, v., dd. bi, mi, to be,
as, i bai fatu it is a stone ; also
prep, before the object of
many verbs, see bei. See bi ;
and bei (or bai).
Baibai, or baibaia, v. i., or a., to
be large, wide ; said to be d.
for bebea, q.v.
Bai na, s., d. for bau na, the
head. See bau na.
Bai, s., d., c. art. nabai na,
feathers or covering of a bird :
d. for mau na, q.v. [Ma. hou,
feathers.]
Bai ! baibai ! interj., surprise and
pleasure. [Mg. baba, id.] A.
bali'i bah'i id.
Baina, v., to go there (away from
speaker), ba go, i to, na there :
24 [baka
d. binen' : d. syn. banotu,
q.v.
Baka, d. sometimes for baki, v.,
used also as a prep.: ba to go,
and ki (rai-ely ka) to, as v., i
baki nalia uane he goes to that
place ; as prep., i bisa baki
John he speaks to (or unto)
John. [Epi beki ; and Epi d.,
with prep, ni (instead of ki and
equivalent to it) bani, Florida
vani.] See preps, ki, ni.
Baka, or faka, caus. prefix. This
consists of the caus. prefix ba
(or fa), q.v., and the deni.
particle ka, q v. [Fi. vaka,
Sa. faa, Ma. whaka, Mg. malia,
faha, mpaha.]
Note. — As this particle ka
(Mg. ha) has various uses in
Oceanic, and as in baka it is
manifestly used in a manner
not of local or recent origin,
the question arises as to what
its exact force in this con-
nection is. In My. ka is
prefixed to the verbal noun
formed by the suffix an
exactly as in Ef. na (the
common art.) is to the same
verbal noun, and in that case
it has the force of an article.
In Ja. ka is used in the same
way, and in addition prefixed
to a verb forms a passive
verbal adjective, as suduk to
stab, kasuduk stabbed, or
passive verb (as it is called)
to be stabbed. (So in Fi., as,
e.g., voro-ta to break, kavoro
broken.) And it is thus that,
in the case of the numerals, ka
prefixed to the cardinals makes
them ordinals in Ja., My., Fi.,
V.AKA ROA]
and Ef. These ordinals
having been formed as katolu
third (that which or he who
is three, that (or what) is
three) the causative prefix ba
added formed bakatolu make
third, cause to be third ; this
word in Mg., fahatelo (verbal
adjective), is " third," in Ef.
i bakatolu is (verb) he made
the third (time) at it, and the
verbal noun from this verb,
formed in the usual way, is
nafakatoluan the being or
doing the third time. Compare
in H. the den. verb formed
from the numeral three, Piel
•(causative) "to do anything the
third time," &c, and Pual
part, (verbal adjective) "three-
fold," &c. In Ef. bakatolu,
though really a verb, is trans-
lated into English as an ad-
verb of times — thus i bakatolu
bat ia he did it three times,
but lit. he made the third
time doing it.
Baka roa, v. i., to jerk over to
the other side (a canoe sail) :
boka tia to strike, and roa to
turn round.
Z?aka, s., a fence, a fence of stone
or wood made for protection
or fortification in war. [Ha.
pa a fence, Ma. pa a stockade,
fortified place, pa to block
up, obstruct.] H. ma'akeh a
parapet (surrounding a flat
roof) to hinder one from fall-
ing off, from 'akah, A. 'aka'
to hold back (and l aka),
hinder, impede.
Baka sia, d. transposed for kaba
sia, koba sia, to follow.
25 [bakalarua
Bakabasea, v. c, d. syn. c. suer
ia, to scold, vituperate : from
base a, id.
Bakabftte, or bakafate, v. c, make
the fourth time : from bate, 4.
[Mg. fahefatra the fourth.]
Bakabulu tia, v. c, nearly the
same as the simple verb bulu
tia, q.v.
Bakabunuti, bakamanu, &c. See
bakaralima.
Bakafakal ia, v., to console, com-
fort : reduplicate from bakal
ia, id., q.v.
Bakafia, d. bakafisa, v., make
how many times 1 make how
often 1 See bisa.
I. Bakal ia, v. c, to soothe, com-
fort, take tender care of (as of
a child, or one in sorrow) : see
kal. A. 'agila to soothe, com-
fort ; E. 'egal, a child, Ef.
kal, fakal, and d. kekel, id.,
usually vocative, and much
used in proper names of chil-
dren, as kal nagusu child of
the point (promontory), kal
or fakal tamate child of
peace, &c.
ii. Bakal ia, v. c, to sharpen (as
a knife, axe, &c.) H. kalal,
Pilpel, to sharpen; to move to
and fro, A., E., id. See
makal sharpened, sharp, kala
little, &c. H. kalal to be light,
to be swift, fleet, to be dimin-
ished, little, so A. kalla to be
despised, H. kalon, shame,
pudenda, Ef. makal.
Bakalailai, v. c, nearly same as
simple verb lailai, q.v., to be
delighted.
Bakalarua, v. c, make the
seventh time, or seven times.
bakalatesa]
See larua, kalarua. [Mg.
fahafito the seventh.]
Bakalatesa, v. c, make the sixth
time, or six times. See latesa,
kalatesa. [Epi vaari.]
Bakalatolu, v. c, make the
eighth time. [Epi vaarolu.]
See latolu.
Bakalititi, v. c, make the ninth
time. [Epi vakoveri.] See
lifiti.
Bakaleba, v. c, make (himself)
great, be proud : leba, laba.
Bakalima, v. e, make the fifth
time, or five times. [Mg.
fahading, the fifth.] See lima.
Bakamataku ki, v. c, to make
afraid, to threaten, frighten :
from mataku to be afraid.
[Mg. mahatahotra, My. mana
kuti, manakut kan, Sa.
faamata'u.]
Bakamaturu ki, v. c, make to
sleep, put to sleep : from
maturu to be asleep, to sleep.
[My. manidor kan.]
Bakamauri a, v. c, to make
alive, save : from mauri to be
alive, live. [Sa. faaola, My.
mangidupi, Mg. mamelona.]
Bakameta sa, v. c, to direct the
eyes to, look at : a bakameta
gu is, i bakameta na sa, &c,
seems to mean lit. I direct my
eyes, make my eyes upon it,
&c. : meta, or mita, q.v., v.,
and s. Bakamita, id.
Bakamirara. See mirara.
Bakanaru mia, v. c, naru, trans-
posed for ranu : d. for baga-
ranu a i, in the one case m' is
the t. prep., in the other a.
Bakarairai, v. c. Nearly the same
as the simple v. rairai, q.v.
26 [bakas
Bakarau sa, v. c, divide it
(among a number of persons),
distribute it : from rau, q.v.
Bakarogo, v. c, make (him-
self) hear or obey, be humble,
quiet, meek ; from rogo, q.v.
Bakaru. See bukaru.
Bakarua, v. c, make the second
time, or two times. See rua,
karua. [Mg. faharoa, the
second.]
Bakaralima, or bakarualima,
v. c, make the tenth time, or
ten times. [Epi vaduiilimo.]
See rualima, or ralima, kara-
lima.
Note. — The caus. prefix
baka may be attached to the
word or words denoting any
number, as bakabunuti (bun-
uti, 100), bakamanu (manu,
1000), make the hundredth,
thousandth time, or one
hundred, one thousand times,
bakaralima lima (ralima lima,
50), bakamanu ralima (manu
ralima, 10,000), make the
fiftieth, ten thousandth time, or
fifty or ten thousand times, &c.
Bukas, or iokas, s., c. art.
na&akas, flesh ; then, a pig
(not a sow or a boar) specially
reared and esteemed for its
flesh ; then, Hades, because
of the numbers of such pigs
killed on occasion of deaths,
especially of chief's, whose
flesh was not only much en-
joyed at repeated feasts among
the living, but supposed in
some way to accompany or
follow the souls of the de-
ceased to Hades, and give
corresponding gratification to
bakasa]
the shades of the departed
assembled there : with the
prep, a, abakas, or abokas, in
Hades. [Epi bukahi a pig
(not boar or sow), Fut. pakasi
a pig (gen. name), Ero. mpokas
a pig (gen. name), An. picad,
i.e., picath, a pig (gen. name).]
A. manhus' having much
flesh, fleshy, from nalias'a to
denude a bone of flesh, to take
the flesh from off a bone.
Bakasa, v. c., bakasa ki, or
bakasa ia, to paint (as the
face), hence na fakasa, s., a
festival (adornment); to clean,
make clean (as a place), to
clear, make clear. [Fi. ai
qisa paint for the face.] A.
nakas'a to paint, to colour ;
to clear, make clear (as a
place) : bakasa, dd. (trspd.)
bisaki, biski.
Bakasau, v. c, dd. bisakau ia,
bisaui, bisaku tia, to make or
build up a fire, lit., make to
join on to, i.e., one stick to
another, to make a bigger
fire. (By joining together the
smouldering ends of two fire
sticks and then joining on to
them the ends of other sticks
a tire is built up.) The in-
itial bi or ba in this word is
the causative prefix : the
simple verb is siku tia, q.v.
Bakaser ia, v. c, to loosen or
remove a tabu (as from a
place), make common or non-
tabu. See ser ia.
Bakasere a, v. c, to treat kindly
carefully providing for, to en-
tertain hospitably. See sere
a, ps. masere.
27 [bakau
Bakasikai (d. fakasikitika), v. c,
make the first time, or one
time. [Mg. faharaika the
first.] See sikai (or isikai),
kasikai.
Bakosoro fia, v. c, make to burn :
from soro, v. c, to burn.
Bakatabtabu ki, v. c, make
tabu, or declare tabu. See
tabu. [To. fakatabu to inter-
dict.]
Bakatar ia, v. c. Nearly the
same as the simple verb tar
ia, q.v.
Bakatau, v. c. Nearly the same
as the simple v. tau, q.v.
Bakateba, v. c, caus. form, to
watch, to look out or watch
for, as bakateba na bai saki
ni aliati watch or look out for
the rising flush of dawn. [Sa.
tepa, tetepa, to look towards.]
H. sapah to look out, view,
watch, look out for.
Bakatilas ia, v. c, to suffice :
from tilas ia, q.v., and see
also the simple v. las ia.
Bakatogo ia, v. c, d. for
Bakatoko ia, v. c, to make a
show or feint of striking or
pushing. See the simple v.
togo fia.
Bakatolu, v. c, make the third
time, or three times. [Mg.
fahatelo the third.]
Bakau, or bakaue, v. c, to say
or shout aue ! au8 ! or au ! au !
to make a howling or barking
noise in a well-known Efatese
way expressive of joy, triumph,
or derision : the howl or cooee
repeated several times, ending
in the loud jerking or barking
utterance of au ! au ! au ! H.
BAKAUL IA]
'avah to howl, cry out, A. 'aui to
howl, as a dog, wolf, or jackal.
Bakaul ia, v. c, to make like,
imitate, to be like to, resemble:
the simple v. is aul ia (dd.
ui lia, ol ia) or ul ia, q.v.
Bakauti a, v. c, d. buti a, q.v.,
make an end, finish. [Fi.
vakaoti, To. vakaochi, Sa.
faaoti, Ma. whakaoti.] H.
kaseh an end, kasah, A. kas'a',
2, to finish.
Bake, d. baku, v., to search, to
search for (as to search for
insects in the head, or for
fleas and such like in mats or
cloth). S. bka', or bko', to
search.
Baki, v., to go to (a place), ba to
go, and ki, prep. ,to : d. be'
(nearly beh), id.
Baki, prep., to, unto. This is
preceding word used as a prep.
Baki, v., d., to go or come from
(a place), dd. ba, bai : ba to
go or come, and prep, ki (to),
from. For ba see bai.
Bake, d. for baki se, go where ?
bake is for baki e, go to where :
se, d. e, where ? se is e c.
art. s'.
Bakilina, v., to go or come into
the light, i.e., into view, to
appear : baki go or come to,
and lina light. See lina, d. ali.
Bakitakita d. for makitakita, q.v.
Bako, s., shark, d. bake. [Malo
bacio, Epi bekeu.] Der. un-
certain.
Bakor, v., d., to go or come in
front of, to appear : ba to go
or come, and koro, q.v.
Bakotu fia, v. t., d. for bagote
fia, q.v.
28 [bala
Baku, v., d. for bake, q.v.
Baku, v. t., to pluck out, baku
sa pluck it out, ps. mafaku
plucked out, tafakaka, d. ta-
fagka (i.e., tafak'ka), v. i., to
burst, explode. [Sa. fa'i pluck,
extract, mafa'ifa'i extracted,
Ma. whakiwhaki, and kow-
haki, to pluck, My. kopak to
burst, break out, Mg. vaky
burst out, mitifaka to burst,
mitefoka to sound (as the ex-
plosion of a gun.] A. faka' to
burst, to pluck out, tafakka',
5, to be burst.
I. jBala, v. i., to be smooth.
[Sa. molemole, lamolemole,
id., Tah. moremore smooth,
without branches, as a tree ;
even, without protuberances ;
also, hairless, more, v. i., to
drop or fall, as pia leaves
when ripe, Ma. moremore,
v. t., to make bald or bare ;
strip of branches, <fcc.] A.
mara, n. a. maur' to fall off
(as wool or hair from the
body, feathers from an arrow) ;
to pluck out or off (as hair,
wool).
2>ala, i bi 6ala, it is smooth,
level. See preceding word.
Z»ala-gara, v. i., d., to be poor,
lit. smooth (or bare) dry,
bare and dry : gara or kara
dry, q.v.
II. Z>'ala, v. i., often pronounced
tela, d. bola, to incline to ; be
close to : i 6ala nakasu in-
clines and keeps close to a
tree (hiding), balk sa inclines
and keeps close to it, 6ala-afi
nafanua hugs the land (a
ship), (see af ia) ; 6ala is close
bala]
to (as a man to a tree, or one
board to another), hence to be
stuck and inclining from side
to side to get through (as a
man in the vines of the
jungle, or in any confined
place, as a narrow door ; a
bone in the throat, or the
branches of a fallen tree in
those of another) ; ftala-tagoto,
or iala-goto incline across,
hence cross, a., as nakasu 6ala-
tagoto (see goto) a cross beam,
or cross stick, hence fala a
ship's yards (because they are
fixed across or on the mast),
and sticks fastened across or
on a tree for a ladder to climb
it are called fala, or balafala,
and iala-galu (see galu) is the
upper cross board at the
end of a canoe ; fala also
denotes a litter, so called be-
cause the sticks forming it are
fastened across or upon each
other. [Sa. pilia to be en-
tangled (as one tree falling
against another, <fec), pilipili
be near, pipili a cripple, Ma.
piri, to stick, come close, keep
close, skulk, hide oneself,
pipiri come to close quarters,
join battle, Ha. pili to cleave
to (as to a friend).] A. mala,
n. a. mayl' to incline, incline
to, bend or lean to (some-
thing) ; to be close or near
to ; to have a part of the
body (vitio naturae) inclined
or bent to one side (used also
of a building leaning to one
side) ; 3, make a hostile
incursion. Nm. miel, v. i.,
slant, deviate, incline (to-
29 [bala
wards;, mail (gerund) slope,
inclination, propensity.
ill. /?ala, s., the belly, usually
pronounced be\e, q.v. ; 6alau,
for 6ala am' (like uateau for
d. uateam'), the inside of a
man, or of anything (hollow or
womb of the am', abdomen),
ialoa (ending a) a hollow, a
valley, 6alua a hollow or hole
in a rock, falea a cave, 6ala-
kutu na the hollow at the
back of the head (lit. the
hollow of his kutu, q.v.), bsdo-
leba the stomach (lit. the big
hollow), 6ile na, or bele na his
mother (lit. his womb, the
womb that bore him), na felak
a family, tribe, bela-ki, to
gird (oneself), to tie or fasten
under one's girdle or belly, to
take with one, to conceive
(« woman), bela, source. [Ma.
wharua, a., concave, s., valley,
whawharua, s., mother, whare
a house, people of a house,
wharetangata connection by
marriage, Tah. fare a house,
farefare, a., hollow, as the
stomach for want of food.]
H. beten the belly, the womb,
the inside, the womb, mother,
batan properly to be empty,
hollow, vain, i.q. batal (see
ba\o infra), A. batn' belly, in-
side or middle of anything, pi.
connections by marriage, a
tribe (small), batana to have
the belly distended with food,
to be intimate and familiar,
to be hid, 4, to fasten the
girth under the belly (of a
beast of burden), to cover,
hide, 5, to put a thing under
BALAF IA]
one's belly, S. btan to con-
ceive, have in the womb, A.
batuna to have a great belly.
jBalaf ia, v. t., incline to keeping
near to : ala n., and af ia.
J5alagote fia, v. t., incline (or
bend) across it : bala. n., and
goto, or koto.
Z?alafis ia, v. t., hug (as a ship
hugging the coast) : 6ala n.,
and afis ia.
Balaga tia, v. c, to lift up (as
the cover from anything) :
laga tia.
Balaga-saki nia, v. c, lift up,
stripping off (as the husk of
reeds) : preceding word, and t.
ending saki. Hence
i?alaga na, s., husk, scale, or
similar thing that is or may
be lifted up from what it
covers or encloses : syn. laga-
laga na.
Balafala sa, v., to be entangled
(as one tree falling against
another). [Sa. pilia, id.]
The radical idea is seen in
6ala to be entangled or stuck
in the throat (a bone) ; the
bone inclines to one side and
so sticks. See frala II.
Balafala, s. See fala, s.
J5alas, c. art. na&alas, i.e., na'ia
las big hollow ; nabua naialas
the road of the big hollow or
gorge behind Utaon.
i?alau na, s., the belly, inside ;
inside, middle of anything :
feala in., and au for amo :
6alau is, lit., the hollow or
middle or inside of the belly.
2?alaus ia, v. t., to go through or
along a thing lengthwise, not
to go across it (ialagote fia) :
30 [balo
6ala ii., and us ia to follow,
go through or along (as a
road, &c.)
Z?alea, s., d. for 6aloa, valley :
ftala in., and a. ending a.
i?ale6alea, and 6ele6elea, full of
hollows, bellied, large : 6ala
in., and a. ending a. [Ha.
pele, to have a large belly ; to
be large.]
Bale sia, v. t., d., to husk, strip
off (as the envelope of sugar
cane) ; and
Bala-saki, v. t., id. A. wafala
to decorticate.
Bali, v. i., to fast ;
Bali ki, v. t., to fast from (a
thing) ;
Balifali, v. i., to fast (many
people). [Mg. fady, id.] A.
'abala, or 'abila, to abstain ;
to be devoted to the worship of
God, 2, to mourn (the dead).
Balikau ia, v. t., to go or step
over : ba to go, and likau or
lakau, q.v.
2?alo, v. i., a., ad., to be empty,
vain, null and void, to no
purpose or effect : i 6alo it is
empty, nasuma 6alo an empty
house, lo or te balo an empty,
i.e., a worthless thing, a trifle,
nothing, i toko balo he remains
in vain, to no purpose, for
nothing, idle ; d. mole ; hence
sera te balo, or sera te mole,
to deem worthless, vain, to
despise. [Fi. wale uselessly,
for nothing, idly, Ha. wale,
Sa. vale.] A. batala, n. a.
bufl', or botl' to be vain,
nothing, to no end or purpose,
in vain, for nothing, idle, H.
batal to. be empty, vacant,
julo] 31
iclie (cognate bat an, 6ala ill.),
E. batala to be empty, vain.
Balo, prep, or ad., d., above, up :
see (b') bi, prep., and ulua, v.
[Malo aulu (a, prep. " on "),
Fut. weiluga (see elag, infra),
Ha. maluna above, up (ma,
prep., and luna).] Arab.
balai above, and exactly as
Ef. balo ki (above to), balai
ka, as above his house, or
above anything : the prep, ba,
E. ba, on, and lai the upper
part, high, A. 'alu, 'alo, upper
part.
Note. — Compound preps, or
ads. of this kind consist of a
preposition prefixed to another
word, which may be an ad. , s., or
a. used substantively (as Eng-
lish above, aboard, around, i.e.,
on-bove. on-board, on-round) :
thus Ef. elag, d. balo, Sa.
iluga, Ha. maluna, Malo aulu,
Amharic balai, above, on high,
on the uppersideorpart, all con-
sist of the preps, e, i, or a, q.v.,
or bi, b' or ma, mi, q.v., and a
word signifying high, up, or
the upper part and side, for
which see ulua, elag, lua, laga,
infra.
Balo nia, v. t., dd. balo sia, or
bilo sia, bulo sia, bulu gia,
bunu lia bulu nia, bano lia, to
wash (anything) to wash (by
rubbing) : fafano, or bafano,
q.v., to wash the hands. [Sa.
fufulu to rub, to wash, My.
basuh to wash.] A. masa n. a.
maus' to wash ; to rub with
the hand.
Z?aloa, s., c. art. na^aloa, a
valley, lit. what is hollow or
[balu-sa
concave, -a being the a. ending.
[Ma. wharua, a., concave, s.
valley.] See 6ala ill.
Z/aloleba, s., the stomach : 6alo
cavity. See 6ala in., and
leba, laba, big.
Balntu, v. i., d., to go there,
or thither (away from the
speaker), dd. banutu, binotC,
binats, net, to set out, go
away (from the speaker), hence
a common word of farewell to
one departing is Ku balotu
you are going away, to which
the one departing replies Ku
mato you remain. See banotu.
Z?alua, s., a hole or hollow in a
rock : see 6ala in.
Balu-saki, v. t., to paddle (a
canoe), row (a boat) ;
Balu-sa, v., to paddle, row, balu-
sa sa paddle or row with it (a
paddle or oar). [Epi dd.
mbeluo ka, mbahua kin, v. t.,
An. aheled (aheleth) to paddle,
to row, to sail, Am. fuloh to
paddle, Fi. ai voce an oar, voce
to paddle, to row, voce-taka,
v. t. (= balu-saki), Pa. palusa,
Ml. d. masu, Ml. A. sua, Malo
mo sua, Ta. asua, Fut. sua,
Mg. voy, act of rowing, mivoy
to row, voizina rowed, fivoy
an oar, My. dayung an oar,
d - ayung, bard'ayung to row.]
Note. — Balu-saki is the
same as voce-taka (pronounced
vothe-taka) the saki or taka
being the transitive termina-
tion, i.e., the prep, connecting
the verb with its object, and
consisting of two preps, com-
bined, sa or ta and ki or ka.
The first of these preps, is seen
balu-sa]
in the d (th) of aheled, and in
the z or zi of voizina, and sa
of palusa. The verb " to
row" is balu, voce (vothe),
(m)beluo, (m)bahua, voy, niasu,
and without the preformative
b' (v', m',) asua, sua, cbayung,
and the 1 in balu, c (th) in
voce, h in mbahua, s in sua,
d in dayung, all are varia-
tions of the same original
consonant which is elided in
voy. The word for "oar," ai
voce, fivoy, is in Ef. uose, d.
uohe (wose, wohe), Fut. foi.
In Fut. the connection be-
tween sua to paddle and foi
an oar or paddle is not so
apparent as that between Ml.
P. su to paddle, and bos a
paddle, because in foi, as in
voy (= Fi. voce) the s has
been elided ; and the con-
nection between Ef. balu to
paddle and uose a paddle is
not so apparent as that be-
ween Epi mbahua to paddle,
and voho a paddle, Epi d.
bahua to paddle, bono a
paddle. See uose, infra. A.
jadafa, or gadafa, kadafa (or
'athafa), Amharic kazaf (or
'azaf), to propel with oars,
to row, Mod. A. kaddaf, or
'addaf, part, mo'addif (anc.
mo'addif, or mo'azzif, cf. voce
(vothe), bose, uose, voy, foi).
Sua is without the preforma-
tive, cf. 'azaf a, 'addaf : balu
seems to have the same prefix
as Sa. pale to row, without
which is Sa. alo (ps. alofia),
and alofa'i to paddle, row, and
with another vei'b, Sa. taualo,
32 [bax
to row, to keep on rowing.
As to the prefix in balu com-
pare that in batok, batu, q.v.
Balu na, or fralu na, s., relative,
friend ; a brother's brother,
or sister's sister. A. ma'lai
helper, relative, friend, asso-
ciate, walai to be closely re-
lated, to be a friend, helper.
Z?alu-naki, v. t., to be a balu to
a brother or to a sister.
Z>alu gor ia, v. t., help, befriend,
take the part of. See gor ia.
J5aluk, s., c. art. na&aluk, an in-
let or small bay, a cul de sac :
6a, and luku.
Bamasok6 sa, v. t., come upon,
find : ba go, and masoko, q.v.
Baraau ria, v. t., d. baraau sa,
come upon, find it; ba go, and
mau (sa), q. v.
Bamau, v., to reach to, or term-
inate at, as i bamau nalia uane
it reaches to, or stops or term-
inates at, that place ; hence,
absolute, i bamau it terminates,
stops, or ceases : ba go, and
mau, q. v.
Bamu na, s., the shoulder blade,
shoulder, d. bau na. [Tali.
papa the shoulder blade]. See
6a6a a board.
Bamu na, s., d. for babu na, q. v.
Ban, v., d. for man ; anl, q. v.,
c. preformative m.
Ban, v. i., for bano.
Ban, s., and baniben, s., armlet,
worn between the elbow and
the shoulder, and woven so
that the outer surface consists
of different coloured beads
(carved out of shells) arranged
in regular figures. [Malo ban,
Epi beni]. Der. uncertain.
BANl]
Bani, v., to act violently, to
oppress, as ru bani kiena tliey
violently destroy or take away
;i man's property (at his house
or plantation), as in time of
war, or as ;i punishment for
crime; baniban us ia follow
him, acting oppressively, per-
secute him. H. yanah to act
violently, to oppress: bani has
the preformative as in batoko,
balu, &c.
Banako, v. t., dd. binako, bunak,
to steal, banako sa, and banak
la, (I. Imnako n', steal it. [Ma.
whanako, whenako, Fi. butako,
Ero. prok, Ml. fenake, My.
cholong, Ja. nolong, Mg.
halatra c. pref. mangalatra,
id.] A. saraka, n. a. sark',
Mahri heriq, heliq, and desoq,
to steal. Ef., Fi., and Er.,
&c, have the pref.
Zianaga, s., mats, d. banu ; so
called because they are plaited,
see bau. [Fi. ibi, Epiyembi.]
Banei, v.i., to come here (to the
speaker) ; same meaning as
banimai, or banu-mai. [Ml.
P. vine, id.]
Banei, s., d. bane, volcano : see
bani a, v. t. [Pa. banei id.]
Bani a, or ban ia, v. t., to burn ;
to roast, to cook by roasting
on the fire; ben or fen cooked
or roasted. The n is not
radical : dd. beni a, banu sa,
whence banus. See banei ;
and dd. ubu, upu, of (ov), um,
iia (uwai, oven (cooking), fire-
place. [Sa. faafana, to warm
up food, mafanafana, to be
warm, To. mafana, heat,
warmth, Ma. mahana, warm,
33 [banomai
Ta. mahana, warm, the sun, a
day, Fi. vavi-a to bake, My.
bu to roast, grill, broil, Ja.
panas hot, warm, panaskan
to heat, Mg. fana, voafana,
warm (applied to food cooked
and warmed the second time),
mafana, mafanafana, warm,
hafanana, s., heat, manafana
and mahafanafana, v. t., to
heat, mihafana, v. i., to be hot,
grow hot ; and Mg. memy,
Sa. umu, oven.] H. afah, to
cook, to bake, specially bread
or cake in an oven (Ch , S.
id.), A. wafa', whence mifa', an
oven, Mod. S. yafyana, a baker.
Banimai, v. i., to come here (to
the speaker), opp. to banotu
go there (away from the
speaker) : see banomai. [Epi
mbinime.]
Bano lia, d. balo sia, v. t., d. for
balo nia.
Bano, v. i., to go, go off, or
away. [Malo vano, Epi mbano,
mbene, Meli fano, Fut. fano,
Ta. uven, An. apan.] The
verb ban or bano is composed
of ba to go, and an adverbial
suftix or directive, for which
see under banotu.
Banomai, banamai, or banimai,
v. i., to come here or hither,
dd. ba be, umai, mai, be : bano
mai, or without the suffix no,
ni, ba, be ; with ba corrupted
to u, umai ; and, without bano
(or ba), mai, d., or be, d., as
a verb in the sense of the full
expression, bano-mai, or ba-be.
See ba, bano, supra ; and
under the following word.
[Meli fano mai.]
•1
BANOTU] 34
Banotu, sometimes pronounced
balotu, v. i., to go away (in a
direction from the speaker), to
go there or thither, dd. binoti,
banats, binats, and ndtu, net :
ba to go, and ndtu there
or thither. Notu, or net,
originally an ad. has come to
be used in some dialects for
the full expression, as a verb.
See the similar remark as to
mai, or be, under the preceding
word.
Note on the particles mai,
d. be (in banomai, babe),
notu (in banotu), and 'no (in
bano) : —
1. Mai, or be, coming
after a verb is an ad. or
" directive " signifying here,
hither. [So in Fi., Sa., Ha.,
Tah., To., Ma. (My. mari).]
Coming before a verb in
Fi. it signifies to come, as
an sa mai kauta I have
come to take ; so in Ef. a
mai buati I have come to
take, i.e., 1 (am) here to take:
in two Ef. dd. a m;d, a be, I
have come, or I (am) here ; as
" to come " is always expressed
in other Ef. dd. by banomai,
or babe, mai or be in those
two dd. may be regarded as a
mere abbreviation of bano-
mai, babe. So Mg. avy and
My. mari are also used as
verbs signifying to come.
Before a noun or the ad.
" where " mai signifies from in
Fi., Sa., Ha.. To. (mei, or me),
Ef. (bai, ba, be), and Mg.
(avy), thus Fi. maivei ? Sa.
maifea 1 Tah. mai hea 1 To.
[banotu
meife 1 or mefe ? Ef. ba se ?
bai se 1 or be sabe ? Mg. avy
aiza 1 from where 1 whence %
The Mg and Ef. are verbs — iba
se ? avy aiza izy? he comes
from where 1 In the other
cases the mai, as in mai hea 1
is called a prep. Ef. i ba, or
bai se 1 is, literally, he (is)
hither (from) where 1 and in
one dialect the prep, ki = from
is expressed as i ba ki e 1
he (is) here (or hither) from
where 1 In Fi. mai is also a
prep, signifying in, at. The
radical meaning of this par-
ticle is here or hither, and it
is an ad. consisting of the
prep, ma or ba (Ha. ma in,
at, to, kc. ) in, to, and the
dem. i or 'i, this (place), here,
hence mai, bai in or to this
(place), here or hither. See
Ef. d. i this, here ; and the
prep., in Ha. and Ma. ma, Fi.
vei, Mg. amy, under the word
bi (d. mi) infra. H. bazeh
in this (place), here, Amh.
bazih, and with the z elided
(bayh, or baih), here, lit. in
this (place), and with the
pron. 3 sing, instead of zch.
Mahri boh here, H. poh here,
lit., in this place.
'2. Notu, or lotu (nats, nat,
net) like mai in two dialects
has come to be used as a verb
(notu, net) with the same
meaning as banotu for which
it is used, as mai and be for
banomai, babe, for the sake
of brevity ; and like mai it is
a compound ad., consisting of
the prep, ni, or n' to (or ani,
BAXtj]
q.v.), as to which seem, infra,
and a dem., that, yon (place),
there, yonder, and signifying
to that i»r yon (place), thither.
3. The no, or 'no, in bano,
is the same as the no in notu,
but without the tu, i.e., it is the
prep, n', and o, dem. The dif-
ference between notu and no,
or rather between banotu and
bano, is slight, banotu being
simply a strengthened bano.
The difference between bano
or bani in banomai, or bani-
mai, and bano in banotu seems
to be that in the former bano
or bani or banc the dem. after
the prep, n' is wanting, thus
banimai go to here, banotu go
to there. T. nyo to there,
thither, Matt. ii. 22, nye, id.,
Matt. xvii. 20, xxiv. 28, xxvi.
36. Amh. with the prep,
wada, to, instead of ne (i.e.,
originally E. la, A. Ii, to,
cf. balotu), wadaziya, and
(z elided) wadiya to there,
thither. The tu in banotu is
dem., as in My. itu, that, situ,
there, TaSa. natu and atu,
that, E. uetu, that, H. zektu,
that.
Banu, s., d. 6anaga, q.v.
Banu sa, and banus. See bani a
to roast.
Biio, v. i., d. for ma, man, ba, ban,
bon. See am, v. i.
Baofa, s., d., menstruation, i
su baofa meamea (said of a
woman menstruating while
still suckling a child) : 6afa.
Bara, v. i., to be burned (as food
in cooking) : see buria, d.
bouria, or bauria, ta&ara. [Ma.
35 [bare
wera burnt, hot, s., heat, pa-
wera hot, Sa. vevela to be
hot, ps. velasia, vela, done,
well cooked, My. parik, marak,
to kindle, set on fire.] H.
ba'ar (Ch. br-'ar to burn, Pael
to kindle), to burn up, to
kindle, to be burned.
Bara, v. i., or a., to be barren,
d. oro. E. 'abara to be
barren, 'ebur barren.
Barab, v. i., or a., long, high (as
a hill). [Malo barauo, Fi.
balavu, Ml. U. periv, long,
also wide.] Ef dd. baraf,
baram, barau, birerife (see
laba, leba), prop, extended,
cf. Ml. U.
Baraf, d. barab.
Baragai, d., transposed for baga-
rai.
Bara tia, v. t., to beat. [Fi.
waro-ca, My. palu, Ja. pala,
Mg. vely.] A. wabala to
beat.
Bara tia, v. t., to bind together.
My. barot to gird, to bind
round.] H. hibar to connect,
join together. See farati, in-
fra.
Baram, d. barab.
Bara- tuna, s.. d. for bura.
Barau, d. barab.
Barau, v. i., to reproach, speak
loudly reproaching. See rau.
Bare, v. i., to be moved, move
about, bare ki, v. t., to move,
agitate, barefare ki, id. A.
farefara to move, agitate.
Bare, or barea, v. i , or a., d.
uorea, or orea, to be blind (a
man), to have a white speck
(of an eye whose sight is lost),
to be dirty looking, like a
BARETAU]
sightless eye (of half-raw food).
[Ml. A. bar, U. oror, Epi
mbili.] H. 'avar, E. 'awir, to
be blind.
Baretau, a., black and white
spotted (as a pig), also a yam
that has been peeled, or a tree
that has been barked, i bi
baretau : tau white, and bare,
for which see the following
word.
Barea, or borea, d., v. i., or a.,
black, dirty coloured. [My.
biru blue, TaSa. berika black.]
A. 'a'faru dust-coloured.
Z?aro, v. i., or a., to be heed-
less, taliga ba.ro deaf, d. na
ftaro one deaf, barobaro to be
heedless, indifferent, ta6aro
to be heedless, refractory,
lawless, barua free from, as
i tumana bisa barua ki nia
he declares himself free from
it (as a crime), mania to
cease, leave off, lo barua kin ia
see the nakedness of someone,
literally, or as to his poverty
or being devoid of food, &c.
See baror, bura. H. para' to
loose, let go, make naked,
paru'a lawless, Unbridled, A.
fara"a to empty, leave off, be
free from (as free from cares
or labour, careless, idle), 5,
tafarra"a to be idle.
Ba.ro, c. art. na&aro, s., one deaf.
Baro sia, or baru sia, v. t. This
verb was used thus in the old
days : to fell a big tree they
burned round the base of it,
then ru baru si. or baru hi
namalitera, that is, smashed,
broke, shaved, chipped, cut, or
scraped off the charred wood ;
36 [barua
then burned the new exposed
surface again, smashed or cut
off (with the karau tare) the
charred parts again, and so on
till the tree fell. On E. Mai
barusi naniu = Ef. koi naniu
(see koi). Tea farofaro that
which cuts, shaves, rasps off,
barobaroa (a. ending -a) fit for
rasping off (as sandpaper or a
grindstone). [Fi. varo-ta to
file, saw, or rasp, Sa. valu
scrape out nuts (=Ef. koi), to
scrape (as taro), ps. valua, Ma.
waru to scrape, shave, cut (the
hair), Ha. walu to scratch,
rub, rasp, polish, Tab. varu to
shave, to bark a tree, to scrape,
My. paras to shave, to pare close
to the surface, Mg. fara scrape,
scratch, make smooth.] H.
bara to cut out, carve out, &c,
A. bara' to cut out, to cut or
pare down, to plane and polish.
(As to the notion of breaking,
cutting, separating, which is
inherent in the radical syllable
H. par, see under H. parad
(Ges. Diet. ) The same is
found in the somewhat softened
syllable bar, A. and H.)
Baroaki, d. See boroaki.
Barobaroa, a. See under baro
sia.
Baror, s., one careless, heedless,
lawless, wicked, foolish. See
fearo.
2?aro8aro, v. i., or a. See under
ba.ro.
Barua, v. i., or a., made naked,
devoid of, clear or free from.
See baro.
Liarua, or uarua, v. i., or a., tat,
big, large. [Mg. baribary,
barubaruta]
37
[batu
bary, large, full, well made,
Fi. vora to grow fat or stout.]
H. bara', to grow fat, bari'
fat, A. wara' to be fat.
Barubaruta, a., fat ; ending -ta :
barua.
Barubarutena, a., fat ; ending
-tena: barua.
Ba-si a, v., go upon, tread upon,
basi naniatuna tread upon
something : ba to go, and
t. ending si [Fi. va-ca.]
Basa, to speak. See bisa.
ifostf a, v. t., to break off (as a
branch from a tree), to break
off with a snap or jerk, fiasu,
id., mafasu d. moas (mowas)
broken off, 6ase-raki, takes a
different object, as base nara
nakasu break off the branch of
a tree, base-raki na-usu break
off from a reed (the husk or
covering, so as to make it
bare), baseba.se raki nia, id.,
ba.su li a, t. ending li, to
detach, break off, ta&asuli de-
tached, broken off, separated.
[Fi. basu-ka, or -raka, to
break, also to open one's eyes
or mouth, basi-a, nearly syn.
c. basu-ka. Sa. fati to break
off, ps. fatia.] A. fas's'a to
break off, fassa detach, shiver
off, H. pasah, q.v., to distend,
open (the lips), A. fasa' to
separate, detach (as flesh from
a bone).
Basea, v. t., c. verb, suf., scold,
vituperate, rail at, d. syn. suer
ia : bakahasea, id. A. nabaza
to reproach, blame, rail at.
Basin, s., a bone piercer. See siu.
Baso ia, v. t., to pierce. See sui.
[Fi. veso-ka and sua-ka.]
Bastak, v., d. for bataka : basi,
taka.
Bastufi, v. t., cl., to follow, to be
like: basi, and tufi. A. tabi'a
to follow.
A'asu li. See 6ase a.
Bataka na, v. t., to be like,
equal to, sufficient for (bastuti
and mautaka nearly syn.): ba
to go, and taka like, similar
to.
/iatako na, or batoko na,, s., the
body, d. mole na. [Ta. buti,
My. batang, Mg. vatana.] A.
badano the body.
Bate, v.,' cl. for batu.
Bate, num., four. [Mg. efatra,
My. ampat, Sa. fa,] A. ar-
ha'at', four.
Bati na, s.. the teeth, a tooth,
also a shoot (of banana or
taro), a seed. [Fi. bati.] See
nabati na.
Bati-gat, and d. bati-gaut, s., a
thorny plant, with crooknl,
grasping thorns, like hooks :
for gaut, see under gau, tagau.
Bati-rik, s., mosquito : bati, and
rik, q.v.
Bat ia, or bati a, v. t., to do,
make, work at. [My. buat,
or buwat, to do.] S. 'bad, to
do, to work, work at, make.
7?atlk, d. uarik, v. i., or a., few,
to be few. See tik or rik.
Batira, s., precipice, rugged de-
clivity :
Batibatlra, a., rugged and pre-
cipitous : bati teeth, and end-
ing ra : nabatira, that which is
rugged (as a precipice), syn.
na tiroa.
Batok. v. i., d., to remain : toko.
Batu, v. i., d., to remain : tu.
BATU]
7?atu, s., na 6atu, an adult,
young man. A. fatiy' adult,
fata' young man.
Batu, v., d. bate, to close up the
roof at the ridge-pole with
reeds : na fatu the ridge-pole.
[Epi bofugo, v., id.] See fatu,
s., and bau. A. "ama to cover
a house, that is, its upper roof,
as with reeds.
Batua na, s., the knee : prob.
bau (q. v.) the head, and tua
leg. [Ml. A. lua leg, mbulua
knee, Ml. P. and Malo bau
knee.]
Batua ki, v. t, to go from (any
thing or person) : ba to go,
and tua ki to place, lay down :
lit. go laying down or leaving.
Bau na, s., d. for bamu na, q.v.
Bau, s., one slain. [Ha. po,
slain, lost, hidden]. See s. bog.
Bau na, s., the head : a head or
chief, specially, d., maternal
uncle, that is, head of the
family. [Malo batu, San Cris-
toval bau, head : Tah. fau a
kind of head dress, a god, as
being head or above, a king
or principal chief, as being
above others.] A. hamaiu the
head : the head and chief of
a tribe or family
under bau sia and mau
Bau lulu, s., a proud person, lit.
high head : lu.
Baua, or uaua (waua), s., a pillow:
preceding word and ending -a :
also, v., to pillow one's head.
Bau-maso na, s., portion of the
property of one deceased in-
herited by a member of the
family : bau, and maso, q.v.
For bau see s. bau sia.
38 [bau
See egg.
Bau, v. t., to be above, cover,
surpass, i bau gor ia. See
tabau :
Bau sia, or fau sia, v. t., to
fasten together ; to plait (a
mat ) ; bau rarua fasten to-
gether (the parts of) a canoe ;
bau uago fasten a pig to the
carrying pole : ora naui i bau
the yam vine fastens on or
round the stake ; redup. bau-
fau; bau-maso (maso a portion)
the portion collected or fastened
or gathered together, bau-terag
ia fasten — to dry it (as wet
cloth), i.e., fasten it on some-
thing in the sun or before a
fire. [Sa. fau (Ma. hou) tie
together, fasten by tying, ps.
fausia, To. fau fillet round the
head, turban, Fut. fausia to
fasten, tie, Fi. vau-ca to bind
together, Sa. fau-la'i to be
heaped up, to abound, My.
ubung to join, connect, &c.]
See mau. H. 'amain to gather
together, to collect, to join to-
gether, A. 'amma to put on
the head a fillet, to be a chief,
to be an uncle, "amma to
cover, to fasten (a camel), H.
'amam to cover, hide, fig. to
surpass, A. "amma, 4, to dip,
&c.
Bau gor ia, v. t., to cover over :
tabau sa to be above (as
covering a thing), to be over,
surpass him (in dignity or
rank). See under preceding
word for bau.
Bau or fau, bao or fao, v. i., or
a., new. [Malo baro, Ml.
mermer, Motu matamata, My.
baharu, Sa. fou, Fi. vovou, vou,
BAULI a]
Mg. vao (havaozana) new.]
A. mahdutli, part, of liadatha
to be new, new. H. hadas',
S. lidath, id., E. hadas, to
renew.
Bauli a, v. c., to buy by exchang-
ing .;
Baulu, or faulu, s., the thing
given in exchange wherewith
to purchase something, barter
(wherewith to buy by ex-
changing). See aul ia, ul ia.
Bau-ragia, or bau-teragia. See
bau sia.
Baus ia, and bausus ia, v. t., to
ask him (or her), bausus ia sa,
ask him it (or about it) :
Bausu ki, to inquire about (a
thing), bausu baki to inquire
at (a person), to ask, to ques-
tion (a person). See us ia.
Bauria, d. for buria, q.v. See
bara.
Z>ea (kbe, or bwe), s. See nafiea.
Be, d. mai, ad., here, hither ; d.
to come here, like mai, q.v. ;
also d. for ba, bai, to come or
go from, as i be sab mai 1 he
comes from where hither 1
Be emia, v. t., to have it, i be
nalo he has a thing, d. i
bienia he has it: bienia, bi enia.
Be, or bea, dd. bei, mia (tiamia),
v. i., or a., to precede, go
before, be first, first. [Sa.
mua, and mua'i tirst, muamua
to go before, first, Lakon mo,
Volow mag, Arag moana first,
Fi. mada to precede.] A.
fuhal mouth, entrance (as of
a river), hence the first or
foremost part of anything,
Amh. pat, or fat, fore-part,
and c. a. ending fatanga first.
39 [bei
Be, d., a particle used after
interrogatives, then, now, thus
ua be 2 sa be (sab) ? where
then 1 takani aga bat ia be ?
how shall I do it then (or
now). In other dialects it is
not used. H. 'epo' then, now,
as ayeh 'epo' where then 1 eg.
'epoh (poh here) where? how 1 ?
Be, fe, conj., if, should; ku f6
bano i fe uia should you go it
were well, i be fano i be uia
should (or if) he go it were
well. [Ta. ip, Fut. pe, if.]
Amh. ba, be, if, should (re-
peated in each clause as in
Ef., Isenberg's Gr., pp. 158-9).
Be a, or fe a, red up. befe, v. t ,
to read, also to count. E.
nabab to speak, recite, read,
eg. H. naba' to prophesy (A.
naba' to declare), from naba',
Hi. hibi'a to tell.
Be, or bea, red up. bebea, v. i.,
or a., to be great, wide ex-
tended. [Mg. be great, large,
Mota poa, Gao bio.] E. 'abya,
or 'abia to be great, wide, ex-
tended, 'abiy great, large.
Bega, d. baga, q.v., a hill.
Bei ki, or bai ki, d. bi ki, v. t., to
show : d. syn. bisai ki. A.
balia to appear, be shown,
manifest, show, divulge, in-
dicate ; hence
Beifei ki, make manifest, in-
dicate.
Bei, v., bei ki to watch for (as
for an animal to take or kill
it) ; d. bu to see, look at. A.
ba"a (ba"ai) to watch, observe,
look at, look out for, rush
upon (the prey) from an am-
bush, seek, &c.
BEl]
Bei, or 6ai, a thing hidden, con-
cealed, i bi 6ei it is hidden.
[Mg. anna, My. buni, To.
fufu, Ma, Ha. huna, Fut.
funa, Epi mbin, Fi. vuni,
hidden.] See afa : eg. to the
word there given are A. "abai,
H. haba', A. li'aba', to hide.
Bei, d. for be, or bea, v. i., or a..
to precede, first. .
Bei or bai, d. ba, prep, (in this
form as a prep., but see bai,
v.), used mostly after verbs,
connecting them with their
object : lo to look, lo bei a
look upon it, see it, d. lekba
(the hnal a is made long by
the absorption of the pron. of
the third person ) ; taruba to
fall, taruba bei a fall upon it,
d. ro to fall, ro bei a to fall
upon it ; an to be, to lie, an
bei a lie upon it ; toko sit,
toko bei a sit upon it ; ba to
go, ba bei a go or tread upon
it (for instance, upon tilth in
the path, ba bai intai); le ba i
look upon it, see it, d. libi sia
or lebi sia (i.e., le bi sia look
upon it): the final i in bei or
bai helongs to the pronoun of
the third person. [Fi. vei to,
d. va.] E. ba, A. fi, bi, H.
b'.
Bei, s., na bei saki ni aliati the
ascending cloud of dawn, the
dim cloudy or misty appear-
ance preceding daylight at
dawn: d. in tei saki the rising
cloud. See tai ni lagi. A.
"ainma (S. 'am) to be covered
with clouds, as the sky,
"ammai dust, darkness "am-
ma.t' cloudy.
40 [bele
JJeie, or fefe, s., oven cover
(made of leaves) ; a covering
trap (for catching fowls). [Sa.
veve oven cover of leaves.]
See (6otia) bo.
Beigo, or baigo, s , a trumpet
(shell) ; d. a kind of flute
(cocoanut shell). [Sa. fagu-
fagu a flute, To. fagofago a flute
blown by the nose.] A. baka
to blow a trumpet, ba'ku, or
ba'ko, a trumpet.
Bela ki, v. t., to gird (oneself),
bela ki na tali put on one's
girdle or belt ; to tie or fasten
anything or carry anything
between one's girdle and the
lower part of the belly : hence,
to take with one, to have with
one or attached to one. See
6ala in. The s. is nafelaki, d.
nabiilai, or 6alai, what is
fastened or girded round the
loins, girdle.
Belaki, v. i., to be pregnant :
bala, in.
Belaki, s, c. art. nabelaki, d.
syn. intamate, great heathen
feast or series of feasts periodi-
cally held at every village, at
which there was abundance of
food, singing, and dancing :
prob. so called because of the
abundance of food, and friendly
feeling : ?;ala in.
Bela, or fela, if perhaps, if in-
deed, conj. be, and ad. la.
Bela, v. i., to be smooth, level ;
bala I.
Ztela, d. for 6ala II., q.v.
Bela-tagot. See 6ala II.
Bela-galu. See frala II.
B<Ae, s., the dead body of a pig :
said to be so called because its
hrle]
belly swells. Zfala HI. [Ha.
pele to swell out, have a large
belly.]
i?ele na, s., the belly (or ?/ala
na); the womb; a mother (dd.
syn. eri na, raite na, susu na);
a source, as be\e ni torogo the
source or master of the torogo
(a species of divination), also
6ele nai (naui) kanoa the be-
ginning or feast of the first
ripe yams : ftala III.
Belbel, d. for bile, bilebile, q.v.
Beles, s., c art. nebeles, a dance
in which the two parties keep
meeting each other. 8ee lasi,
tilasi.
Ben, or fen, a., cooked, broiled,
roasted : bani a.
Beni a, d. for bani a.
Ben, d. for ban. See am to be,
abide.
.Ztelu ki (kwelu ki), v. t., to
fold, to double, taAelii (tak-
welii) fob led, doubled ;
Zfclu to be doubled up, as it were
folded together, hence to be
hidden, to hide oneself, 6elu
ki to be hidden from, also
uelu ;
Beluuelu, v. i , or a., folded,
hence limp, doubled up, and
beluueluki, a., doubled up,
uneven, limp, limber, weak,
flexible. [Ha. pelu to double
over, bend, or flex, as a joint,
to fold, doubled, folded over,
pelupelu to double over and
•over, doubled over, 8a. inapelu,
mapelupelu- to bend, stoop,
Fi. belu-ka to bend, curve,
kabelu bent, Mg. valona
folded, doubled.] H. kapal to
fold together, to double, part.
41 [bebd
ps. doubled, Ch. kapel to
double, roll up, S. Ethpe.
'ethkfel, or etkfel, to be
doubled, folded together.
Bera, or fera, v. i., to crumble,
fall to pieces, berafera, and
taberafera to crumble, fall to
pieces, be scattered about in
fragments ;
Bera ki, v. t., to scatter about,
tabera ki to scatter about,
make to fall to pieces, and
beraferaki, v. t., and taferafera
ki, v. t., na feroa, s., a crumb,
sabera ki, v. t., to scatter,
saberak, d. saberik, v. i., to
fall to pieces. [Fi. vuru-taka
to crumble, vuruvuru, v. i., to
crumble, and S., a crumb,
Mg. miveraberaka, v. i., to
crumble, mahavera, v. t., My.
ambor scattered, tabur to be
scattered ; Ja. sabar to scatter,
to strew, My. sibar to strew,
scatter.] E. farfur a crumb,
Talmud parpor from H. pur
to break, Pilpel pirper to break
in pieces : " this is the original
power of the biliteral par,"
Ges., s. v. parad, then applied
to scattering, &c.
Bera gia, v. t., d. birigia, q.v.
Bera kati a, d. bera tia, bera tiki
nia, v. used as ad., fully,
thoi'oughly, accurately ; also
a., as tea berakati na a thing
fully his, a thing his own.
Probably connected with bura,
d. biri, to be full, full.
Beru, v. d., syn. uma, to clear
for a plantation, to cut down
trees, cut or clear the jungle.
[Mg. firala (fira cut, ala wood,
forest), miferala cut down
bes] 42
wood in order to make some
use of the ground, clear the
forest, Ja. tipar felling and
burning the forest for culti-
vation, Ma. para to cut down
bush, clear.] H. bere', Piel of
bara' to cut down — "go into
the wood and cut out room
for thee there " Josh. xvii. 15.
Z»es, or iesu, s., dry wood, hard
dry wood used for fencing. A.
yabis' dry (wood), Nm. yabis
dry (wood).
J5es, d. besu, s., a young pig
whose mother is dead and
which is brought up as a pet
and is therefore tame and
gentle; also a motherless child,
syn. mitabusa. So called from
being deprived of the mother's
milk, and, as it were, arid.
See preceding word and busa :
A. yabisa to be dry.
Beta, or feta, s., a tribe, a crowd
or lot of people, or of animals,
accompanying each other, as
nabeta Togoliu the tribe of
Togolius, the Togoliu crowd,
set, or lot ; a shoal, nabeta
naika, a shoal of fish. See
bita, bita-naki, ta.
Beti, or bati, s., in p roper names,
as Togoliu beti, Metanibeti,
&c. : beti seems a form of the
word bati (see nabati na) and
prob. means chief, or head of
the family.
2>'eti, s., a kind of spear pronged
with sharpened human bones,
and feathered : prob. so called
because pronged or toothed.
See nabati na.
]>i, v., d. for umba ki, q.v.
Bi, or fi, dd. mi, bai, v., to be,
[bi enia
only used before substantives,
or words used as substantives,
as i bi natamole, fatu, nakasu,
it is a man, stone, tree, ru hi
natamole uia they are good
men. [Epi nibe, ve, to be,
Ml. P. fe, A. mbe, be, U. vi.]
This is the prep, bi, fi (or bai)
come to be used as the verb
to be, somewhat similarly to
E. bo, M. A. tih and fi. But
the word is not used imper-
sonally in Ef. as in E. and A. ;
it is more used in Ef. and Epi
than in Ml. Compare Ges.
Diet., s. v. be (Beth essentiae).
Bi enia (d. bi emia, or be emia),
v. t., to have ; i be nalo, or i
bieni nalo he has something :
enia is the pronoun him, her,
it, suffixed to eni (for ani, q. v.)
the prep, or transitive particle,
the verb being bi (or be),
which (see preceding word)
denotes also to be. In E. bo
denotes to have, as well as to
be, and governs the accusative.
Dillmann, Gr., §176, h, §192,
1, b.
The Ef. i bi enia may be
simply he is to it, i.e., he has
it ; thus i ti-ka ki nia denotes
either he is not to it, or he
has it not = i ti bi enia he has
it not ; so (d.) i be (be e)
nalo he is to something, i.e.,
has something, i ti be nalo =
i ti-ka ki nalo he has not
anything. Note that ti-ka is
written tika, q.v. It is equally
correct to say namuruen i tika
ki nia he has not laughing
(lit. laughing is not to him),
and i tika ki namuruen he
BI KlJ
has not laughing (lit. he is
not to laughing) : the former
is the order of words in ex-
pressing the notion " to have "
or "to have not" in H., A.,
and S., "is to him," or "is
not to him."
Bi ki, v. t., d. for bei ki, q.v., to
show.
Bi, s., only in meta-ni-bi small
openings in the ends of a house
through which light comes,
and which are left uncovered
in thatching. Of same stem
as preceding word, whence is
A. bullu a name of the sun,
and huh' the uncovered part
of a house or tent.
Bia, or fia, d. blsa, or flsa [Malo,
Santo, ifec, visaj, v. i., or a.,
how many 1 as ru bia 1 they
are how many ? natamole bia 1
how many men 'I And, not
interrogatively, ru bia, they
are so many, few, natamole bia
so many men, i.e., a few men.
[Sa. fia, ad., how many l Fi.
vica, ad., how many 1 Ta.
kuva, ad. , how many 1 My.
barapa (apa) how much, or
how many, much, many, some,
Mg., ad., firy how many? mi-
tiry, v. i., into how many parts
does it divide 1 ?] The final
part of bia or bisa, namely a
or sa, is the interrogative pro-
noun, as is apa in barapa. In
sa the s is a dem. prefixed to
the interrogative pronoun, and
probably the r in Mg. ry is
likewise a dem. The prefixed
bi or fi is the reflexive verb
preformative, Ef. hi or fi, Sa.
i"e, My. bar, or ba (ber, be),
43 [bi
Mg. mi (fi), as the My. ba-
rapa seems to indicate (and
the r of barapa must in the
absence of anything to the
contrary be regarded as a
dem. like the r in ry and the
s in sa). On this reflexive
verb preformative bi, My. ba
(be), Sa. fe, Mg. mi (fi), see
next word following. In sup-
port of this view let it be
observed that bia or bisa in
Ef. is never an adverb and is
a verb, being usable as an
adjective only as every verb
in the language is. In bakafia
or bakafisa (q.v.) make how
many times 1 (Fi. vakavica)
the causative verb preforma-
tive baka has the same effect
as in bakarua, bakatolu, ifec.
In A., S., and H., how many?
how much 1 is expressed by
ka, or ke, as, prefixed to the in-
terrogative pronoun, the com-
pound signifying literally " as
what " ? H. kamah, S. kima',
A. kam, and with a different
interrogative, kay, kain' quot
(how many % so many). Com-
pare Tanna keva, d. kuva.
Bi, or fi, reflexive verb preforma-
tive (ba, or baka, fa, or faka,
being the causative verb pre-
formative), as ru atu gia, v. t.,
they smite him, ru fiatu,
v. r., they smite each other,
they fight, auli a, v. t. ,
exchange, replace, substitute
for it, bauli a, or fauli a,
v. c, nearly the same, make
to take the place of, barter
for it, ru biauli, v. r., they are
bartering with each other, or
BI
44
[bibisinu
they are replacing each other
or taking each other's places
(as men at the oar). [Sa. fe
*' tlie reciprocal particle " pre-
fixed to verbs, Fi. vei, My.
bar (i.e., ber) and be, prefixed
particle sign of the neuter or
intransitive verb, Mg. mi
reflexive verb preformative
(Griffith's Mg. Gr., p. 112),
and with ha (the ka in baka),
miha : the r in My. bar or
ber (see under preceding word)
is held to be a dem. or pro-
nominal particle like the ha
in miha and maha (ka in
baka), and n (or na) in Mg.
man, mana, My. mang (the
ba or ma in these being the
causative verb preformative).
See ba and baka.] H.
mith-, mi- (as in middabber),
for the A. it-, i-, see Wr.,
Gr. I., §111, participle, Anc.
muta-, Mod. mut-, Ch. mit-, S.
met-, or nieth-; the m- belongs
to the participle, and without
it the prefix is in H. hit or
hith, Ch. it, S. et or eth, A. it
■(for ta) ; and when the t of
'this prefix was assimilated to
the initial radical of the verb, as
it often was, it became simply
i- followed by a doubled con-
sonant, as in H. hiddabber,
A. issakata. Of this only the
prefixed i could remain, and it
has become the prevailing
form in such languages as Sa.,
My., Mg., or Ef. It may be
remarked that in Mg. in all
verbs of this reflexive form
this prefix occurs without the
in, in the future and past
tenses, as simply i. As to
signification of verbs with tins
prefix in A., H., and S., they
are primarily reflexive, then
reciprocal or passive (intransi-
tive) or transitive, governing
an accusative. In Ef. verbs
of this form are reflexive, or
recip., and intransitive, rarely
transitive.
Bia, bibia, d. biau or beau, s., a
child, youth, bia kiki little
children, bia turiai young
men ; and in names of child-
ren as bia-naru, &c. [TaSa.
pipi infant, Ml. IT. bibi in-
fant, Ml. A. pepe infant, and
Fut. foi, in foimata, eye (but
lit. pupil of the eye), Ja. bayi
infant, child.] A. bu'bu' a
little boy (from baba to say
papa), the pupil of the eye, (at
Damascus) bubu a little child.
Biau, or beau, s., wave, waves
[Sa. peau, id., My. ombak, id.]
E. ababi, A. 'ubab', i.q. 'ubab'
flood, waves, from 'abba to have
broken waves (the sea). Hence
Biatiau (for biaufiau), v. t., to lie
raised in waves, rough (as the
sea). [Sa. peaua rough (as the
sea), lit. wavy, full of waves ;
peau and the a. ending a.]
Biauli, v. r., d. bioli, barter or
exchange with each other ;
take each other's places, as
men at the oar or other work,
spell each other.
Bialo, v. r., to wave (beckoning) ;
reflexive of alo-fia, q.v.
Bib, s., d. for 6a6a, a board.
Bibisinu, v. i., to ring, sing (of
the ears) : sinu ; bibi is the
preformative bi doubled.
bibe]
Bibe, v. i., or a., for bebea.
Bi6ila, v. i., or a., V)ig, great :
redup. of 6ila.
Blfera ki, v. t., to show by a
fera (or omen) : fera.
Z>'igo. See buigo.
Bikutu ki, v. t., speak to each
other (against someone in
his absence) ; decide about
(someone). See kutu ki.
Bila, v. i., shine, lighten, gleam,
Hash, appear ; bilafila, redup.,
to do so repeatedly : lo bila
ki glance at ; fila lightning ;
bule-meta eyeball (gleaming
part of the eye). [Sa. pula, pu-
pula, pulapula to shine, may be
same.] A.barak, or bara', shine,
gleam, flash, glitter, appear ;
lighten (lightning), 2, open
the eyes, glance at, bark'
lightning, pi. buruk, H. barak,
S. barka : hence bila, or fila,
bile, or file, s., lightning : c.
art. nafila.
Bila ia, or bilai a, v. t., pick up,
gather up (anything, as fallen
leaves, fruits, fish lying on
the ground, &c. ) ;
Bila guru ki, bili lua, bili sai,
&c. See guru, lua, sai. Bilai
has the pref. b'. [Fi. vili-ka
pick up, as fallen leaves or
fruits.] E. 'araya gather (as
fruits, herbs), glean (as after
reapers) : c. preformative.
Mia, also (dd. mbula, bur) ;
Bi&ila, redup. (intensive), and
i?ilena, bi6ilena, v. i., or a. (-na,
a. ending), big, large, great,
[Mg. bolobolo, mibolobolo, a.,
thick, close, dense.] A. 'abula,
'abila to be thick, big, 'aban-
bal' strong, great, large.
45 [hilaki
Bile, or bila, v. i., to be quick ;
hence sudden, confused, in-
accurate, to err, make a
mistake : redup. bilebile (d.
belbel) quick, sudden, bilieli
sudden, quick, hence con-
fused, erroneous : tabile to be
hasty, commit an error. Often
used adverbially, as ba bile-
bile go quickly, si bile shoot
missing (lit. hastily, errone-
ously, not hitting the mark),
&c. H. bahal, bahel, prop, to
tremble, be in trepidation, Piel
to hasten, to hasten (as if to
tremble) to do anything, Hi.
id., Ch. (behal) Ithpeal inf.
hitbehalah, s., haste, speed,
with prefixed be, ad., quickly.
Bile, d. bile, v. i., to dispute,
wrangle. [My- babil to
wrangle, squabble.] E. behil
(2) contradict, tabahala dis-
pute, wrangle, bahl dispute,
altercation, wrangle.
/j'ili, v. t., bili meta shut the eyes,
redup. biliuili, id. (of many) ;
hence
i>lli, s., a blind person (with
closed eyes) ; and
Bilil, s., a tree (whose leaves at
a certain stage of their growth
cleave together) : d. bilbilo
wink, close the eyes. [Cf.
Ma. kimo wink, kikimo keep
the eyes firmly closed.] A.
"amas'a blink, wink, close the
eyes.
Bili a, v. t., d. for be\\i ki, q.v.
hilaki, v. i., to be terrified,
tremble (as it were) with fear.
H. balah to be terrified, to
fear, Piel billeah to terrify,
and suffix ki.
bile]
Bile na, s. See 6ele na mother.
Zfrle-raeta na, s., nephew or niece,
child of a man's gore na, that is,
his full or uterine sister. Lit.
mother, i.e., source, of the
tribe or family, such nephew
being a man's heir (and not
his own son).
Bilaga, v. t., bilaga sa, seek,
search for it. See laga, laga
sa, id.
Bilele, v. i., r., to turn hither and
thither, to go backwards and
forwards, round and round :
lele.
Bilele, v. i., r., d. for bitoli, q.v.
Biliasa, ad., the morning (lit.
awaking) of the day after
to-morrow : bulo, asa ; bill as
in bili-bog, bilimitamai.
Bilibog, ad.(d. bulbog), morning:
bulo, bog.
Bilieli, v., see bile, bilibile, to be
quick, &c.
Bilikit ia, v. t., to peel (as a
banana). [Cf. Fi. loqa-ta to
peel.] E. laliasa to peel.
Bilimitamai, ad., the morning
(lit. awaking) of the morrow ;
bilimitamai ki nia the morrow
following it, sera bilimitamai
every recurring morrow : bulo,
mitamai.
i^ilis ia, d. bo\is ia, uolis ia, v. t.,
to spread out anything on the
ground as a mat ; hence to
make abed ; hence na uol, s.,
that spread out, a bed, d. na
mauol ; and from this latter is
mauoli ki make a bed with
(something), spread it out for
a bed. [Mg. velatra, mivelatra
to spread, expand itself (be
spread out), mamilatra, v. t.,
46 [bilulu
to spread.] A. faras'a to
spread out anything, as a mat
on the ground, spread (a bed
for anyone), hence fars" a bed.
TJiliti, s., the fat in the belly of
a pig: connected with be\e na,
the belly. A. badana to grow
fat.
Bilisai, v., used as ad., together,
as i tili bilisai ki nia he told
(two or more things) together :
it is really a v. t., and tili
bilisai ki, lit. he told gathering-
together it: bila ia, or bilaia,
and sai (see saisai).
Bilo, v. i., d bulo, q.v., to awaken,
to open the eyes ; bulo nia, d.
bulobulo i, v. t., to awaken
(from sleep), to cause to open
the eyes. [Sa. ala to awake,
Ma. ara. v. i., wake up, whaka-
ai*a, v. t., rouse, Fi. yadra, open
the eyes, awake, yadrava,
watch for, vakayadra-ta, to
awaken.] H. 'ur to awake,
be awake, cause to awake,
Hi. to arouse, awake (from
sleep) ; to watch, followed by
the prep, 'al, to watch over
anyone. Ef. bilo has the pref.
b'.
Bilo sia, v. t., d. for balo nia,
wash.
Bilora, for bulora, q.v.
Bilu, or biliu, v. r., to go back-
wards and forwards between
two places or parties: liliu,
liu.
Bilu, uilu, uulu (wulu), q.v., to
dance (a woman or women ;
men dancing are said to sali).
Bilulu, v. r., vie with each other,
contend with each other for
superiority. A. 'ala' ('alu),
BILUBAKl]
3, vie, compete, contend for
superiority : see lulu, or lu.
Bilu&aki, v. r., to land cargo
from a ship, or to land pas-
sengers (land each other):
lufta-ki.
Bimeta na, v. and s., to be his
guide, lit. his eye : bi to be,
and meta eye.
Binako, v. t., d. banako, q.v.,
to steal : bi, or ba, pref.
Binaka, s., mats, cloth: see fomu.
Binata, and (Id. bunats, and
Binauta, v. i., to be numb,
devoid of feeling, as one's
limb from stoppage of circula-
tion of the blood in it : bi to
be, nata a person (as if the
limb belonged to some other
person). See ata.
Binen, v. i.. d. syn. c. banotu,
q.v., and baina, q.v. ; the
difference between binen and
banotu is that the former has
the final n = there, the latter
tu = there ; the difference
between binen and baina is
that the latter has elided the
n of the prep, and has i =
ne = to. For n or na = there
(that, sc. place), see uan or
uana that, yon.
Binats, d. for banotu.
Binoinoi, v. r., be confusedly
together (as different kinds of
things, people of different
districts or languages), tumara
noinoi ra :
Binofinoi, a., confused, perplexed,
d. bunofunoi : noi, nea.
Binote, d. for banotu.
fiinu na, s., head or first part,
as 6inu nafanua head of the
country (the chief and nata-
47 [biri-ofa
mole tabu are said to be feinu
naf.), binu naui head of a yam,
syn. bau naui, 6inu namlt first
part of a mat, from which the
weaving or plaiting begins ;
hence
7>inu, v., as ftinu namit make a
beginning of a mat, make the
part from which the plaiting
begins : connected with bau
head, bau sia to weave or
plait, bau namit plait a mat.
See bau.
7>inu, v. i., to whistle, dd. 6in,
boge. [Epi bobo, Am. mofm,
Ml. P. and U., puinpuin,
winwin, Sa. rnapu, To. mabo.]
A. fahlia, and fahfalia,
sibilavit.
Binunu, v., complete, ba binunu
ki, to go throughout, complete
(a piece of a fence) : nu, num.
Bio-so, v. i., to call or cry out,
shout, calling : bio, and so,
q.v. The verb bio, or. fio (see
rafioso), means to cry out,
shout. [Sa. piapio an outcry,
a shouting, Mg. feo voice,
sound, report.] H. pa 'ah, to
call, to cry out.
Bira gia, d.,
Biri gia, d. firi gia, v. t. , to carry
on the back, take, bring, lead.
[Epi mbario, carry on the
back.] A. liamala, to carry
on the back, bring, send, im-
pel to do something, S. limal,
collect, carry.
Biri-nala, s., the plaited or braided
(rope) handle of a carrying
basket : see ala, and bir ia to
plait.
Biri-ofa, s., the cloth in which a
child is slung and carried on
HIRAfJORO] 48
the back of its mother : biri
(gia), and ofa (ia), d. afaia,
both of which verbs signify
to carry on the back.
Biragoro, v., d. ftoragoro, q.v., to
make, break into a noise near
someone : see bora, ia, and
goro.
Biraka, v. r., to give presents to
guests at a naleouan (feast
after a death), lit. to give
presents (or rewards) to each
other : raka tia.
Birakana, s., the giving of such
presents.
Biri-raki, v. t., to give presents
to guests at a naleouan : biri
a (biri na&o ra, i.e., make their
hearts void of evil thoughts,
i.e., pleased or good), and raki.
Birausi, v. r., to follow each
other : rausi.
Bir ia, or biri a, v. t., to make
void, bring to nought, as
counsel, bisa biri nalo na : the
radical notion is break to pieces,
biri na maietoa break to pieces
or put an end to (one's) anger,
appease, biri nabo na bring to
an end the evil feelings of
one's heart, appease. This
verb is much used after other
verbs, as mitroa, bisa, &c,
think void, i.e., despise, &c,
and ha biri nafanua means to
go all through the land: tale
round, tale-firi all round ; re-
duplicated it is
Biiitiri, nearly the same meaning
as biri ia. H parar to break in
pieces, Hi. hefer to break, as a
covenant, make void, be void,
bring to nought : eg. para',
and following word.
[birigite
Bin's ia, v. t., to break down r
destroy, birisi nakoro break
down a wall : the notion of
breaking in pieces, asunder,
is implied in this word, which
is cognate with the preceding.
H. paras to break, break
down, ifcc.
.Biri, v. i., to warble, whistle
(birds). [Epi faru, forfaru.]
See bova, ia, iiragoro.
Biri, d. for biira to be full, q.v.
Bir ia, v. t., to plait a string or
rope. [Sa. fili to plait ; to be
entangled, involved ; filiga to
persevere, Ma. whiri twist,
plait, Ha. hili braid, plait,
twist, fasten, Tali, firi to
plait.] A. marra, 4, to firmly
twist (a rope) ; to wrestle, to
be locked together in wrest-
ling 1, 4), to fasten, 1, 4, to be
bitter (lit. and ti g.), 10, to
persevere, marira/,' a rope
firmly twisted together, or a
long rope, mumarr' firmly
twisted together (a rope).
Bir ia, v. t., d., to stick, stab,
pierce, as biri naui to stick a
knife or fork into a yam while
being boiled to know whether
it is cooked. See bur ia.
Birife, v. r., to seize, p U H hither
and thither (to take away a
man's property as a punish-
ment). See rau.
Birigirigi, v. r., to be moaning,
bemoaning oneself. See rigi.
Brigi, d., v. t., bri (i.e., biri),
prob. for meri, to do, make :
therefore it is bri-gi (biri-gi).
See meri.
Birigite na, s., d. for bura na,
q.v.
UIKIKl]
i/iriki, s., a jmrt, side. A. farlk'
a part, from faraka to divide,
separate, Ac. Hence
iftrlki, s., a "falling" star, a
meteor: used also as a name of
men.
Biri-sai, v. t., to pierce open,
birisai na ftago aso pierce open
the tunnel (or end of it j of
the robber-crab, fig. to lay
open some hidden wickedness:
biri to pierce, and sai, q.v.
Biroa, and biroaroa, v. r., to turn
each other (in some work,
causing' it to be clone in some
other way), as, when one is
doing some piece of work, to
make him do it some other
way is to biroa : see roa to
turn, to change.
Bisa, fisa, or basa, v. i., to speak,
na fisan, d. nafsan, the act of
speaking, speech, a word ;
tabisa to speak earnestly (ta,
q.v., and bisa), tafisafisa, d.
tafisfis, to speak earnestly ; to
pray (so used now in Christian
sense ) ; to utter inarticulate
sounds (as those made by a
cocoanut on the gravel which
a rat is turning about trying
to get at its kernel). [My.
bacha to read, recite, chant,
Tag. basa, Fi. vosa to speak,
talk.] A. nabasa and nabasa
to speak ; to peep or chirp (a
bird) ; nabsai' a word.
Bisafisa, v. i., redup. of foregoing,
to speak rapidly (as one in
delirium).
Bisa, or fisa, d. bia, q.v., to be
how many 1 so many, a few ;
blsa-mau, d. bisi-^a to be only
a few, few. See mau.
49 [bisi na
Bisab, d. for bisif, v. i., or a.,
surpassing, excelling, as form
bisab an excelling (big) turtle,
i uia bisif it is good, surpassing
or excelling. See safe.
Bisai ki, v. t., to show, d. bisa.
ki. See sai.
Bisakaui, d. for bisaku tia, q.v.
Bisaki (cl. biski), d. transposed
for bakasa, q.v.
Bisaki a, or busaki a, v. c, to
raise up, to place above, fig. to
appoint or make one a chief.
See saki.
Bisaku tia, v. t., d. bakasau, q.v.
See siku tia.
Bisalot (for 6osa-lot), v. i., to
clap the hands, lit. bring (the
hands) together, sound, or
crack : 6osa ia, and lot.
Bisau, v. i., dd. futum, busuf, or
busofu, bisobu, to sprout forth,
spring up. See futum.
Bisaui, d. for bisaku tia, bisa-
kaui.
Biseka, v. i., d., to sit (as talking
with a neighbour) : seka.
Bisela, v. r., to bear, bring forth,
give birth to : sela tia
Bisera, biserasera, v. i., to be not
of one size, to be different :
sera ia.
Bisere a, v. r., to be near : sere
a.
.Sis ia (kwis ia), or uis ia, v. t.,
to take with the hand, grasp,
take hold of, accept, receive.
H. kabas, Pi., to take with
the hand, hold, receive, A.
kabas'a take with the hand,
lay hold of, seize, S. libas to
compress.
Bisi na, or biisi na, s., the pos-
teriors, the backside, the
BIS IAj
rump. Compare busi a, d. for
muri a, q.v. [Mg. vody the
posteriors, My. buri the back,
the rear, Ma. muri hinder
part, Sa. muli the rump.]
Bis ia, or bisi a, v. t., to beget,
procreate, make to be born,
as a father his child ; maris
one begotten or born, na-
mafisien the being begotten
or born. A. nafisa to bring-
forth (ffl woman), manfus' one
born.
Bisi a, or fisi a, v. t., to rub one
stick on another to produce
fire, bisi nakabu produce fire
by friction. The rubbing
stick is pointed and rubs a
groove into the other, the
rubbed out dust at the end of
which gradually is ignited.
[Mg. fositra rubbed so as to
produce fire by the friction,
mifositra to produce fire by
friction.] A. fasa'a, 2, to rub
(a thing), so that its soft
and broken interior may be i
emitted.
Bis ia, or bisi a, v. t.,to uncover or
dig up anything buried under
ground, to dig up, or uncover,
by removing the covering
earth, a dead and buried body,
or any other thing buried in
or covered with earth, as a
yam, &c. A. nabas'a to un-
cover what was covered or
hid, as what lies hid under
ground ; to dig up again, or |
uncover by digging (a corpse).
Bisl6a, v. i., or a., d. for bisamau
(bisa-mau). See mau.
Bisif, v. i., or a., d. for bisab,
q.v.
50 [bital ia
Bisobu, v. i., to sprout forth,
spring up. See futum.
Bisua, v. r., to meet together, to
meet each other : sua.
Bisuaki, or fisuaki, v. r., or a.,
order or command (or send)
each other ; i bisuaki he com-
mands, that is, he commands
some other person, or persons :
sua ki.
Bisueri, v. r., scold or vituperate
each other : sueri.
Bisuraki, or bisureki, i.e., bisu-
raki, v., to speak, lit. to speak
for, about : although raki is a
t. prep, this word is commonly
used absolutely, nafisuraki
speech, a word or utterance,
nafisuraki sa bad talk : bisa,
and raki.
Bisuru, v. r., lie (deceive each
other), bisuru ki lie to (some-
one) : suru, d. soresore.
Bita, v. r., to be joined together,
associated (of men) ; bita ki,
t., make to be joined together,
or associated : ta, bita-naki.
Bita6elu, and, d.,
Bitafeta6elu, same as ta&elu :
belu.
Bitago, v. r., beg (from each
other, or one from another),
also bitag6 sa, t., beg it, i.e.,
beg (for himself) it : tago Ha
(q.v.) beg of him.
Bitaki a, v. t., to place or fix the
hot stones on the nakoau in
the oven, d. uataki a, bitaki
nakoau : taki a.
Bital ia, or bitali a, d., v. t., beg,
ask him (for something) : pre-
formative bi, and tali. [Sa.
fesili to question, ask, sili, ps.
silia, to ask, inquire.] A.
BITANAKI MA]
sa'ala to question, 5, beg, 6,
question, ask each other.
Bitanaki nia, v. t., r., to accom-
pany one, bita-naki : bita (see
til), and naki, t. prep.
Bitau sa, v. t., to invite, and
Bitautau (of many): tau, tautau.
Bitau ria, v. t , to marry her :
tau ria.
Bite, v. t., to cut ; bitesu, d.
biteiu, to cut reeds (see usu).
[My. potong to cut.] A.
batta (and batta) to cut ;
hence
Bite, s., an instrument for cut-
ting, knife.
Bite lua i. .See bute lua i.
Bitefa, v. r., to arrange them-
selves opposite to each other
for battle : tefa.
Bitei a, v. t., to paint, to smear
with intei ; tei turmeric, a red-
dish powder (made from a
plant) much used for smearing
the body, or wounds, or the
nafona (native cloth). A.
'a'da'u crocus, sanguis dra-
conis, a red gum used for
healing wounds, a plant with
which cloth is coloured or
tinged, yadda'a to tinge or
colour a thing with the thing
called 'a'da'u.
Bitelo, d. butol, bitol, v. i., to be
hungry. [Fi. vitolo to be
hungry.] A. falaha to have
an empty belly, tolilia id.
Biteriki, s., an old woman, a
matron, opp. to mariki an old
man, a senior ; ma-'riki, bite-
'riki, see fiteriki ; bite means
" woman." The common word
for "woman" in one dialect
is matu [Ja. wedo], q.v.
51 [bo
Bitia, or htia, v. i., to put forth
bati na (of bananas and taro,
i.e., to put forth shoots) ;
formed from bati by the a.
ending a. See bati na, nabati
na. Dialect syn. sulia, from
suli na.
Blto, s., one lame, H. pasali, to
be lame, pisseah, lame.
Bitoli, v. r., to pass (or go before)
each other : toli a.
Bit6 sia, v. t., to extend, spread
out (as cloth, &c.), H. matah,
S. mtah (or mathah, mthali),
spread out, extend.
Bitua sa, v. r., give it, place it;
hence bituana, s., a giving,
gift : tua i.
Bitua ki, v. t., place, lay down :
tua ki.
Bituietu&a, v. r., lit. to be touch-
ing each other (of things in a
series, then, to be continual,
uninterruptedly, constantly ;
not redup. it is
Bitub, to be touching or reaching
to each other, as in tale bitub,
it is all round (the two ends
of that which goes round),
meeting or touching each
other : tu&a ia. [My. tubi-
tubi, successively, uninterrup-
tedly.] _
Bituma ki, v. r., to point to with
the finger : tuma ia.
Bo, conj., particle connecting
verbs thus, i tulena bo lotu he
arose and worshipped i tili a
bo ban he said it and went
away : the bo can sometimes
be and sometimes is omitted
as i tulena lotu: d. syn. kai.
A. fa, Wr, A. Gr., II., §140,
" One finite verb may be put
bo]
52
[boa
in opposition to another. In
this case a) the first is the
preparative act, introductory
to the second," as in the above
Ef. examples : " the older and
more elegant form is to insert
the conjunction fa," its omis-
sion being a later construction.
As to the o in bo it seems the
same as the o in the following
word, q.v., but here denoting
the subject, i.e. bo = and he \
or and she, d. syn. kai.
Bu, d., other dd. fo. mo, uo, 6, a
particle used after another
particle to form the future
tense, thus i ga bo ban, dd. i
ga uo ban, i g'o ban, k'e fo ',
ban, i ba mo ban (or i mba
mo ban) he will go away:
without the bo (uo, o, mo, fo)
as i ga fan, &c, the meaning
is imperative, or permissive.
let him go, he must go, should
go, may go, lit. that he go, the
particles ga (or ka) and ba
being final conjunctions denot-
ing ut, that, to (as in, I told
him to go) : see supra ba,
conj., and infra ka (ga), conj.
In Ml. P., Motu, Ac, this ba
alone forms the future tense,
and in Florida and Vaturanga
this k' (ka, ga) alone forms the
future, thus k'e fan, i.e., ke
fan that he go, Ef., is in these
two languages not only equiva-
lent to this, but also equiva-
lent to ke fo ban he will go.
It is therefore manifest that
the particle bo dees not by it-
self express the future idea,
but, in Ef., is a mere adverbial
enclitic to a final conjunction
which does. It may perhaps
in this construction be best
rendered by ' then,' iga bo
ban he will go, lit. that he
then go, k'e fo ban he will go,
lit. that he then go. See the
following —
Bo, an adverbial particle used to
form the present progressive
tense, as i bo ban he is going :
i ban denotes either he goes
or he went. This is the same
particle used in the future
tense denoting "then." As
used in the present progressive
tense, it may be best rendered
literally by '■ now :" i bo ban
he now goes, he is now going.
H. 'epo, ad., properly here,
there, but always in reference
to time now, then : according
to Ges. composed of 'e demon-
strative and po or poh (here,
there, this latter being for
pahu or bahu in this or that
(place) (the prep, b' and pron.
3 pers. masculine).
Bo na, redup. bobo na, or bobo
na, s., the heart (i.e., the
mind, the seat of the intellect
and affections). The original
meaning is seen in the phrase
na kasu na6o na the carti-
laginous substance on the
front of the throat, lit. the
stick, or tree, of the bo
(pectus). [Mg. fo the heart,
mind.] A. bahw' the cavity
of the chest (pectus).
i/oa, v. i., to emit odour ; n&bo y
d. tamo, to emit odour, Jon
odour. [Ha. po, puia, id., My.
bau, Mg. fofona, odour.] A.
£aha,fall'a (fa'a) to emit odour.
HOli]
Bob', d., father (voc.) See ab,
babu, (fee.
Bobo. See bo na.
Bobo, v., as bobo ki atelagi to
hail the new moon by making
an exclamation or a series
of sounds like bo! bo! bo!
[Mg. babababa, cry, &c] S.
yabeb clanxit, H. yabab, Pi. to
exclaim, cry out.
Boboi, s., a mask, cover, or
disguise ; not only a mask for
the face, but a cover of the
whole body, made of kaka
naniu, etc., and painted so as
to appear terrific (to children) ;
used at the naleouan after the
death of a chief when the
naftea was set up. Perhaps so
called from covering oneself
with the mask or disguise.
See bo-fia, &c.
Bobu, s., redup., d. bua, grand-
father (voc), mother's father.
See bua, tobu na.
Bo-tia, and reduplicate
Bobo-fia, v. t., to cover, to be
upon a thing, or above it,
covering it ;
Bo-gia, v. t., or bu-gia, to cover,
to excel, to be above, over a
thing, covering, not implying
so close proximity as bo-tia ;
Bo -gor ia, v. t., bo-gia, and gor
ia, to be covering over — see
gor ia ;
Bog-kor ia, v. t., to be above,
over, to overtop, overshadow,
as a tree over a smaller plant,
a higher chief over a lower :
the g in bog is the g of bo-gia.
See kor ia ;
Bogi, or bog, s., darkness (from
its covering), night, also day
53 [hoka TIA
in counting as "third day,"
bog tolu, or mog tolu, <fcc, te
nabog some day, some time,
also naubog, i.e., na ubog ;
Bogien, s., darkness ;
Bog, s., a dark powder, used in
painting ;
Bog, s., symbol of chieftainship
(buried in the grave of a chief),
from bo-gia to excel, be over.
[Sa. po night, ps. pogia to be
benighted, Ma. po night, sea-
son, Hades (from being dark),
Ha. po night, darkness, v. to
be dark, become night, to be
out of sight, hence slain, lost,
to overshadow (as the foliage
of trees), assemble thickly to-
gether, a. dark, dark coloured,
ignorant^ obscure, popoi to
cover, poi, id., Ja. bungi night.]
A. "amma to cover, 4, to
submerge, H. 'amam to shut,
close, to hide, conceal, fig. to
surpass, excel, also to be hid-
den, A. "amma to be hidden,
covered with clouds (of the
sky), "amma' darkness, dust,
"ama to be cloudy (of the sky),
2, night came as a cloud,
'amo day, season or year, 'aniiy a
to be blind, hidden, "umiya
to faint, Sa. matapo blind,
matapogia to faint, Ef. meta-
buta blind (see infra, buta).
These words are all egg. ; in
Ef. the egg. are numerous. See
bau (head), &c ; cf. bau-goria
with bo-goria, <Src
Bok, redup. bokauok, v. i., on-
omat., to blow, to pant. [Ma.
puka to pant.] H. puali to
breathe, to blow, Hi. to pant.
Boka tia, v. t., to strike, bisa
BOKAS]
boka tia to reprehend. [My.
pukul, Mg. poka, strike.] A.
baka'a to strike with repeated
blows; to cut up; 2, reprehend.
Bokas, s., d. for bakas, flesh ;
Hades.
Bokauoka, redup. of boka tia.
Bokota, v. i., or a., dirty (as
water) : gota.
Z?olaf ia, d. for 6alaf ia : d.
bolbolaf ia.
Bolk sa, d. for 6ala sa.
itolau ki, to steer (a canoe or
ship) : bouolau.
Bole, d. buele, v. i., to be lost,
absent : buele.
Bolo, v. i., or a., to be empty (as
a cocoanut) : IjrIo.
Bolo, s., a small basket. [Ma.
paro a small basket, To. belu
a cup.] H. kpor, or kepHr, a
cup, E. kapar a basket.
Bolo, v., to do, redup. bolofolo, to
do, to act, nafolon, nafolofolon,
deeds (doing, acting), work,
conduct ;
Bolo, d., to behave deceitfully ;
and
Bolo sia, v. t., to do one, to treat
him (as in quarrelling), to treat
him, bolo sa, bolo uia ki, to
behave ill, to behave well to.
[Fi. vala, valavala, v. i., vala-
ta, v. t., to make or do, vala
to fight, valavala. s., work,
custom, habit.] H. pa'al to
make, to do, po'al or pool
deed, act, work, A. ba'ala
move oneself, act, do work, do
(something to someone), 8,
devise (deceit against some-
one), fi'l' action, work, fa'ihii
custom.
i?olis ia, d. for bills ia.
54 [box
Bolboloa, or boloboloa, d. for
6ale6alia, large.
Tfolof ia, d. for 6alaf ia.
Bologa, v. i., to turn itself about
(as something sinking in
water), tafiloga, id. See bulo
ki.
Bolu, v. i., to be blunt (as an
edged tool). A. bohira to be
blunt (as a sword).
Bon, bono, v. i., to be shut,
closed, stopped, bono sa shut
because of it, bon, bonbon to
crowd together, crowded to-
gether :
Bono tia, or bonu tia (and mono
tia, bunu tia, muntt tia), v. t.,
to shut, close, plug, stop,
block up, and
Bon, a., and s., 1,000, d. manu
1,000, bunuti, bunti, 100.
These words denote, lit., a
gathering, crowd. [Sa. puni-
puni shut in, close in, cover
over, punita'i to stop with,
tapuni to shut, momono to
plug, monoti to cork, plug,
puipui to shut, Ma. pani,
papain block up, kopani shut
to, close up, close in, Mg.
kombona or hombona shut,
closed, mikombona to shut,
close, coalesce, Ha. pani to
close, shut, stop, Sa. mano a
myriad, a great number.] H.
'amam prop, to gather together,
to collect, to join together,
then to shut, to close, A.
"amma to cover, to obstruct,
cover in front (as the mouth
and nose of an animal), 'aurni',
or 'amnion, a great crowd of
men. See monotia, munutia,
munuai.
BONCM.OR I A
| B0RA-KA1
Bono-gor ia, to crowd together
(gor ia) about hiin or it.
Bonbon, d., a., redup. of bon,
crowded together, nanier bon-
bon people crowded together.
Boolau. See boiiolau.
I. i^ora ia, or borai a, v. t., to
rend, split open, split; bornl
nabati na part the teeth, i.e.,
open the mouth to speak, hence
6orai to make a noise, bora\-
goro make a noise (as children)
about or near (one), bonu-
uora-goro, id., del. ftora-goro,
/ura-goro, id., iorurai, v. t ,
redup., rend, split open, elo
ftorora the sun (rising) rend-
ing or splitting asunder or
bursting through (the clouds).
ta6are (ta&arre), v. r. (passive),
to be split open, burst, hence
to be open (as a door), maora,
or mauora, redup. maoraora,
v. i., to be rent, hence uora a
place, especially a landing
place for a canoe (perhaps
from being an opening or split
in the reef), and, therefore,
often in names of places, a side
(of an island) as uora n tan,
uora n lig, lower, upper side
(of Efate), bora a basket
woven out of the frond of a
cocoanut palm whose stalk is
split asunder, and the frond
itself, bora the sides of the
head or face, the temples
(which women used to cut
and tear open with a sharp
shell (kai) in mourning for
the dead). A. fara' to split,
rend, slit, 5, tafarra' to become
slit, rent, burst, i.e., open,
farya£ tumult, clamour.
Bora, s., the temples : 6ora i.
Bora, s., cocoanut leaf, or basket
made of it, or plaited for
thatching houses : 6ora i.
Borabora, s., cocoanut leaf bas-
ket : 6ora I.
II. Bov.x, v. i., to spring up, sprout,
grow (of plants), be born (of
men) ; bakauora ki, v. c, make
to /;ora (men and plants),
nauora na, nauorauora na off-
shoot, offspring (of plants and
men), ura naui the vine of the
yam ; fara a cocoanut (fruit)
that begins to shoot. [Motu
vara to grow, to be born, Oba
fori to grow.] H. parah (A.
farih'a, 2) to break out, burst
forth (of the young as issuing
from the. womb), to sprout, to
flourish (a plant), Hi. to cause
to do so, sprout, shoot, H.
perah sprout, shoot, A. farh"
offspring, shoot or sprout.
/>'ora-bau, v. and s., over-head,
noon, only in the phrase elo i
ftora-bau the sun is overhead,
lit. splits-head : 6ora I., and
bau.
/>ora-goro, or torai-goro, or 6orai-
uora-goro, to make a tumult,
noise near (one) : 6ora I.
A'orai, s., c. art., the sugar cane ;
/>orairai, s., a reed like sugar
cane growing in streams. A.
bara', 4, to find sugar cane.
7>ora-kai, v. and s., to tear or
rend the kai (a shellfish, or its
shell): borai I. Men who were
worthless and died poor, and
had no pigs killed at their
death and burial, fcorakai in
Hades, their jaws being torn
and bleeding in doing so.
B0RA-KESE Na]
56
[BOS A I A
i?ora-kese na, s., gills of fish ;
bora, I., and kesa (dark coloured);
dd. morese na, kurumase na.
Borau, v. i., to ride or be carried
(on a canoe or ship, horse,
vehicle, or other thing), to
voyage. [Fi. vodo embark,
go on board, ride, Sa. folau a
voyage, the crew and vessel,
To. felau to navigate, make a
voyage, a canoe, a fleet of
canoes, a voyage, My. prahu,
prau a canoe, boat, ship, general
name forany kind of vessel, bar-
prau to travel by boat or ship.]
A. markab', E. markab a ship,
vessel, A. rakib' navigating,
voyaging, rakiba to be carried,
to ride (A. markab' denotes a
vehicle, carrying-beast, chariot,
as well as a ship), H. rakab to
be carried (on a horse, chariot,
the clouds, ifec. — so Ef.
borau).
Note. — A. markab' is an
infinitive, and therefore is
naturally in Ef . and Fi. a verb.
My. and Sa. a substantive,
and To. both a verb and a sub-
stantive.
i?orea, s., c. art. naborea, a
dream, or vision (in sleep) ;
fiorea, ki naborea, v., to dream a
dream, or see a vision (in
sleep). [Tali, ria a vision in
sleep.] H. mar'eh a vision (in
sleep), A. roya sleep, what is
seen in sleep, from ra'a' (H.
ra'ah) to see, then to have a
vision in sleep, E. id.
Bor ia, or bori a, v. t., to break,
bori nakasu break a stick,
mauori, mauoriuori to be
broken, and
Bori sia, redup.
Boriuori sia, v. t., break to
pieces. H. por inf. of parar
to break, break to pieces (pur
to break), Hithpolel to be
broken.
.Z?orroa, v. i., to grow crooked,
for ftoraroa : bora n., and roa.
Boro-silaia. See buru masila.
Boroaki, v., c. t. ending, to be-
queath to, or order to do (by will,
when dying) ; to commission
(one to do something), give
orders to. [My- pasan to com-
mission, enjoin, Sa. poloa'i to
leave commands (as on going a
journey or dying), to command,
Mg. hafatra (hafarana) a will
or testament, order, be-
queathed, ordered.] A. wasa',
2, to bequeath by will, 4, id.,
and to give power to, or com-
mission, by will ; to command,
to enjoin. H., Pi., sivah to
charge, command, delegate,
commission.
BorOri sia, contraction of boriuori
sia
itosa ia, v. t., to compress, manu
i tumana 6osa ia a bird com-
presses itself (with its closed
wings), i 6osai naniu he com-
presses a cocoanut (so as to
break the shell), press together,
squeeze (as a sponge), hence
boss,, or uosa, v. i., to be com-
pressed, i.e., narrow, and ta-
bosa, (sela uosa a narrow track,
natamole ta^osa a man thin
as if pressed together), re-
dup. uosauosa ; 6osa naru na
clap the hands, ftosa-lot clap
the hands with a sound, d .
bosa, ki, i.q. bosa, ia. A.
bosabosa] 57
bamaza to press with the
lingers or liand, to compress,
push, strike, bite, break.
Zfosa&osa, s., froth (coming from
the mouth, as of one in sick-
ness), sputum, (I. fut. [Mg.
fotafota slaver, spittle, foam,
• mifotafota to slaver, to foam.]
A. bozak', bosak', saliva, spu-
tum.
2>ota, v. i., and a., to be, or
become, different, other, alien ;
/iota ia, v. t., to divide, part,
make one remove from the
other, ftotauota (or iotdta) re-
dup.; i toko Aotauota he is in
the middle or midst, exactly
between two things, lit. he is
parting or dividing (the two
things), mauota, or maota, to
be divided or parted, hence na
maota the midst or middle
space between two things, i.e.,
the space by which they are
parted, removed, or distant
from each other. [My. beda,
or bida, distinct, separate, dif-
ferent, beda-kan to separate,
to distinguish, to make a
difference.] E. b'ud other,
alien, different, A. ba'oda, and
ba'ida to stand apart, be dis-
tant, remote, 2, 4, make to be
so, 6, to be apart from each
other, also to recede or go
apart from someone, 3, make
to be apart or distant, also to
go apart or be distant, bo'd'
distance : cf. bana&ota diverse,
different. Hence
/?ota, s., c. art., a person un-
married (apart) ;
Ztotauota, and
ZfotGta ia, v. t., redup. of 6ota ia.
[bua
/iotu, v. i., to swell (of a girl's
breasts). A. nabata, 3), n. a.
nobot', begin to swell (a girl's
breasts).
Boua (bowa), v. i., to rain, d. for
ba.
Boiia ki (bowa ki), v., d. ua ki,
to fruit, to produce fruit. Ch.
Pael 'abeb to produce fruit.
Bouolau ki, v. t., to steer (a
canoe or ship), then, fig., to
steer a country (bouolau ki na-
fanua), &c, that is, govern it,
bouolau ki emeromina govern
the world (of God). [Ml. dd.
barau, baro, walu, foro, Sa.,
Ha., uli, Sa., also, muli, My.
mudi in mamudi-kan, Ef.
uolau (wolau) in bouolau-ki.]
E. liadafa to steer (a vessel or
ship), then, fig., to govern men,
to steer, i.e., govern the world
(said of Jesus Christ), mahdaf
rudder, helm. See uolau, infra.
Note. — Bouolau ki is redup-
licate, see &olau ki (d.), id., and
uolau ki, and note the pref. b'
(for m) in iolau.
Bu, d., verbal pron., 1 pi., excl.,
dual moa : d. au, dual ara.
Bua, d. bobu (q.v.),voc, maternal
grandfather : c. art. tobu na,
q.v. [Fut. bua.]
Bu (nalo), v. t., to see (a thing).
See bunu, bunu sia. [Santo d.
vi to see.] A. ba"a' (final w
or u) to look upon, observe.
Bu, s., c. ai*t., a bundle. [Fi. ai
vau.] See bau si and afa.
Bua, v., divide, as ta bua i cut*,
divide it (cut it open), mafua,
and tabua, to be rent open,
cracked, ti bua i press rend it
(press burst it open, as new
bua] 58
[bd
GIA
wine old wine skins), and fai
(or fae) in magafai a half, a
division (of a thing), and lao
fai (see fai). [Sa. vaega a divi-
sion, vaevae to divide in parts,
cut up, mavae to be split, to
be cracked open.] A. fa'a,
n. a., fa'w', or fa'y', 1, 4, to
split, cleave, 7, to be open, to
be separated, rent, cleft.
i. Bua, v. i., to be empty, vacant,
having nothing (as an empty
cocoanut), tabu, i.e., ta bu,
men having nothing, or naked
(name applied to the naked
people of some neighbouring
islands, i.e., people who use no
waist cloth). A. bahiya to be
empty and bare (as a house).
II. Bua, and bubu, d. mobu,
v. i., and a., to be deep (as the
sea, or a pit), i toko bua (said
of a yam down in the ground),
ebu or ebua in the deep part
(of a thing), i toko ebu or ebua,
and sofa ni ebu is consumption
or phthisis in the deep part
(i.e., inside) of the body (deep-
seated) ; ebua the abyss, Hades,
Malo abua, id., bua-riri abyss,
Hades (riri to sink), and bu-gia,
or bubu-gia to sink deep, d. na
tibu the deep. [Ma. kopua
deep, An. ubo deep, Fi. tobu,
d. nubu, deep.] A. 'amuka
and ma'uka, 1, to be deep,
also, to be distant, far off
(emai, ufea), 4, make deep, 5,
to be deep, H. 'amak to be
deep, 'amek, 'amlk deep, E.
'amaka to be deep, 'muk deep,
ma'mak any depth, a valley,
the abyss (Hades).
in. Bua or fua (in na fua-goro,
d. na mua-goro, a spring on the
shore covered by the flood
tide), so called because the
sea mua gor ia flows over it r
and mua v. i., to flow (the
tide) ;
Buafua, v., na tas i buafua, or
naroa i buafua the sea or
current flows or carries things
floating on it ;
Bua tia, v. t., to take (make to
go) ;
Bue a, v. t., make to flow upon
(a thing), pour upon, moisten.
[Ha. puai to flow, as blood from
a vein, or water from a
fountain, to cast up ; to boil
up, as water from a spring.
My. buwang eject, expel, cast.]
H. naba' to bubble forth, gush
out, Ch., S., A. naba', naba".
" The primary syllable is ba' r
ba", like bak, imitating the
sound or murmur of boiling or
bubbling." Cf. egg. H. bu'a to
swell up, Arm. be'a' to boil
up, H. ba'ah make to swell
and boil, A. ba"a to gurgle out
(as blood). The connection
between the ideas of going
or flowing out and taking out
(making to go out) is seen in
the eg. Ch. nepak to go out,,
cans, to take out, and also in
H. yabal to flow, caus. to bring,
beai", carry.
Bubu, v. i., to gargle. [Sa. pupu
to gargle.] See under pre-
ceding word, and cf. A.
ba'ba', or ba'ba'u gurgling
sound of water flowing from a
bottle or flask.
Bua na. See bul na.
Bu £fia, and
bubu-gia]
Bubu-gia, v. t., to sink down, to
dip (anything), put it down
into the water ; uta bugi
rarua load a canoe deep ;
Bubu, v. i., to be deep : bua n.
Buele, d. bole, v. i., to be lost,
missing. [My. ilang to lose,
be lost, missing, Mg. very
lost, missed.] A. s'a'a to be
lost, missing.
Bugafuga, v. i., to be awake, to
awake, bugo nia, v. t., to
awaken one. [8a. fagufagu,
fafagu to waken, rouse from
sleep, ps. fagua, Mg. folia,
fohafoha imp., awake, mifolia,
v. i., to awake, mamoha, v.
t., to awake, fohazina being
awakened.] Nm. fak, v. i., to
awake, 2, 4, v. t., awaken.
Bugo nia, v. t., to awaken. See
preceding word.
Bui na, or bua na, s., c. art.,
backbone, tail, rump. [Fi. bui
tail, Fut, bua back, To. mui
after, the hindermost end, tip,
or extremity of anything, Sa.
muli the end, the rump, Mg.
voho the back.] See muri.
Buigo, or feigo, v. i., to lose the
way, be at a stand, perplexed,
not knowing the way. [Com-
pare Sa. pogia to be be-
nighted.] See bog.
i. Buka, v. i., to be filled, swell
out, as the belly when filled
with food, or as a sail filled
with wind ; namarita na i
buka his belly is puffed up or
swollen, or pants (with rage),
mafukafuka to be swollen or
puffed up, nafukana the being
swollen or puffed up. [Mg.
voky satiated, filled, mimoky,
59 [buka ia
v. i., mamoky, v. t., vokisana,
havokisana, My. bakat stuffed,
filled, Ma. puku to swell.] A.
nafah'a to inflate, 8, to be in-
flated, to swell, naphai' in-
flation of the belly, manfuh'
ventrosus ; obese.
Buka, s., a swell, as a ground
swell. [My. bakat, id.] Set
buka.
Buk, s., as nabuk natamole a
band of men, [H. puu, a
gathering or collection, sign of
plural number, he puu kanaka
a gathering or band of men.]
See buka.
Note. — This word is used
in Ef. also for a gathering or
collection of things, thus :
nabuk anena i oni au I am in
his debt, but lit. his collection
of things (which he has given
me) remains on me (i.e., I
have not yet repaid it).
II. Buka sia, or buki sia, v. t. r
to open, as a roll of cloth,
buka ua (uwa) open the oven.
[My. buka to open, unclose,
uncover, Mg. voha opened,
mimoha, v. i., mamoha, v. t.,
to open.] A. fakka, v. t., to
open.
ill. Buka, v. i., to bark (a dog),
buka ia bark at it, bukai
kusiie bark at a rat, d. syn.
oro-maki; also, buka to cough.
H. nabali, A. nabalia to bark
(a dog). Formed from the
sound. A. nabalia is followed
by ace. with or without a prep.
iv. Buka ia, v. t., to hit upon,
meet, fall in with, find, as i
ba bukai uago buele he hit
upon, met, fell in with, or
BUKARU]
found a lost pig. H. paga' id.,
as in Ex. xxiii. 4.
Bukaru, or bakaru, d. fakaru, v.,
to joke, jest, bukaru ki, v. t.,
mock, deride. [My. gurau to
joke, and kara, id., bargurau,
manggurau, joke, jest, mang-
gurau-kan, v. t., mock, deride.]
A. kahara, 5), laugh, joke.
Buko na, s., c. art., protuberance
or knob, as nabuko naui pro-
tuberance or knob of a yam.
[Ha. puu.] See buka i.
Bukoro, s., enclosure round a
house at its base, name of a
tree and its fruit (from its
kernel being enclosed), a proper
name (of men). [Ma. pukoro
sheath, case, halo, net.] See
koro.
Bukota, v. i., or a., to be dark-
coloured, dirty, blackish (as
water with dust or earth in
it) : gota.
Bukubukura, a., full of little
swellings (pimples) : ra a. end-
ing. [Ha. puupuu, id.; Sa.
po'u pimple, po'upo'ua full of
pimples.] See buka I.
Bukutu, s., a rise, hill. [Ha.
puu, id., My. bukit a hill.]
See buka i.
Bul-meta na, s., eyeball, gleam-
ing, part of eye. See bila.
Bula, mbula, d. for 6ila, q.v.,
big, large.
Bfile, a., adult, nafera bide a lot
of grown up men (adults).
A. bala"a to reach mature or
full age, bali" adult ; and
I. Bule, v. t., complete, used
after other verbs adverbially,
as i ba bule nafanua he went
completely through the land,
60 [bulo
le bule nagusu it (a canoe)
completely rounded the point,
nafisan i soka bule nafanua
the word shot (lit. leaped)
through the whole land, from
end to end, noai i sera fule
(or fulefule) nalia the water
ran completely throughout the
place. Bule is really a verb,
in these instances, in appo-
sition to the verb preceding
it, as he went — completed
(finished) the land, &c. [My.
bulah the whole, To. fuli all.]
A. bala"a, n. a. buhl" to com-
plete, go through to the end.
II. Bule, v. t., to strip off leaves,
ora naui i bule nakasu the
yam vine strips oft* leaves from
the tree, mafule to be stripped
of leaves (a tree). [My. bulus
stripped of leaves.] A. 'abala
1, 2, to strip off" leaves, foliis
jiudavit arborem.
Bfile, s., a shell, lit., gleaming,
shining, glittering, See bila.
Bullbog, d. for bilibog, for bulo-
bog : bulo.
Bull, s., a corpulent person ;
Bulia, a., swollen ; and
Bulifulia, a., swollen here and
there (the body), a a. ending,
and mabulu and fuluara, q.v.
[Sa. fula stout, fulafula swel-
ling, fulafula, fufula to be
swollen.] H. 'afal, prop, to
swell up, be tumid, A. 'afda
to have a tumour or hernia.
See telatela.
Bulai, s., d. for belaki, and
Bulai, v. t., d. for belaki, to gird.
Bulo, v. i., d. for bilo. Bulo is
also thus used : iga uo bulo (bo)
mai, he will come by-and-by,
BULO NIA]
lit. he will awake and come
(of a ship, man, or thing),
hence bulo-bog morning, lit.
awaking of day, or night,
bulo asa, bulo metamai, and d.
bulbog, <kc, and bilebog (for
bilo-bog) ;
Bulo nia, v. t., to awaken ; bulo
nameta na open his eyes ;
Bulobulo i, v. t., awaken him.
See bilo.
Bulo ki, v. t., to turn, to twist,
also bulo sia, bulu sia, buli
sia, tafolo to be turned, twisted,
tafulus to be turned, bologa,
to turn itself (as a thing in
sinking in water), taflloga, id.,
bulora, or filora (ending ra),
twisted, confused (as a lot of
things turned or twisted about).
[My. pubis, Ja. pulir to wring,
twist, to turn aside (out of the
way), to turn, turn round, Sa.
milo to twist, mimilo, milo-
milo, ps. milosia, milosi, to be
twisted, to be perverse, milo-
milosi, Pi. mulo-ca to twist a
single thread, Ma. miro to
spin, twist, mimiro to move
swiftly, miro, s., thread, a
whirling current of water.]
A. malla, n. a. mallo, to turn,
to twist round ; to twist one-
self about, malmala, 2, to roll
oneself about, malla to hasten,
move quickly.
Buloki, v. i., or a., to* be sticky,
d. bubulu. See bulu tia.
Bulora, v. a., or a., to be twisted;
a. ending ra. See bulo ki.
Bulu sia, or bulo sia, or bilo sia,
v. t., to wash. See balo nia.
Bulu sia, bulo sia, or buli sia, v.
t., to turn. See bulo ki.
61 [bulu aki
Bulu tia, v. t., to plaster, over-
spread with some sticky sub
stance (as lime, paint, pitch),
to cover with a plaster or
poultice, as a wound, nabulu,
s., plaster, (fee, bubulu, bulu-
bulut, buloki (and mabulu,
q.v.), to be sticky, as plaster.
[Fi. bulu-ta to bury or cover
with earth, to apply an ex-
ternal remedy, ai bulu an
external application or thing
that covers or buries, Sa.
puluti to glue, to pitch,
pulu glue, gum, resin, pulu-
pulu to cover the body with
a cloth, pupulu to interpose,
to meditate, ps. pulutia, Fi.
bulu-ta to repair an injury,
lit. to bury it, ai bulubulu a
peace offering, or thing offered
as a reparation of an injury.]
H. kapar, A. "afara to cover v
cover over: A. "afara to cover,
cover over ; to cover (white
hairs, with some dye or
tincture, Ef. bulu tia) ; to
pardon (sin), 2, to cover with
dust, H. kapar to cover, over-
spread with anything, as with
pitch, to pilch, Gen. vi. 14
(H. koper pitch); to cover (i.e.,
pardon) sin, Pi. to make expia-
tion for an offence.
Bulu, bulufulu, and fulufulu :
bule I.
Bulu, v. i., to fall down (as fruit
from a tree, &c), mala bulu
faint, fall down (a man), and
Bulu aki, v. t., throw down (as
firewood, &c), (make to fall
down). H. napal to fall, S.
npal, Ch. nepal, id., Hi. hipil
to throw down (make to fall).
BULU AKl]
Bulu aki, d. for bulo ki, to turn,
twist.
Bulum, or buluma, d. bulim, v. i.,
to be changed, lit. turned :
luma.
Buina, v. i., d. fuga, to flower or
blossom, nabuma na, s., its
flower or blossom. [Ml. P. pug
to blossom, pugan its flower
or blossom, Sa. fuga flowers,
blossoms, My. bunga flowers,
blossoms, Mg. vony flower, ma-
mony to blossom.] S. liabeb
to produce flowers, hababa', or
habobo', flower.
Buna sum ia, v. t., to cork, plug,
hence
Bunaso, or funaso, s., c. art., a
cork or plug : see bono tia,
or bunu tia, and sume lia.
Bunats, d. for binata.
Bunofunoi, d. binofinoi, v. r., to
be confused, perplexed. See
binoinoi : noi, no i, no ia, nea.
Buma, s., an insect that makes a
shrill sound in the jungle in
the evening, hence buma i gai
(the buma makes its sound) is
often used for "it is getting
dark," " it is evening."
Bunu, d. for fanau, q.v.
Bunu lia, v. t., d. for balo nia,
bulu nia,
Bunu sia (bu-nusi a), v. t., to see
(a thing) : bu.
Bunu, s., death, destruction, as
ru sua bunu ;
Bunu ea, v. t., to kill or destroy
(fish, men, &c), to extinguish
or quench (a fire, or lamp), ru
sua bunu they met destruction
(having fallen into the sea),
mafunufunu and mafunei, d.
fanei, to be ended, to be anni-
62 [bura
hilated. [My. bunoh to kill,
mambunoh, mamunoh to kill,
Mg. vono killed, mamono to
kill.] Hence
Bunufunu, redup. of preceding
woi'd. A. fana', disappear,
pass away, vanish, 4, make
disappear, destroy, annihilate,
5, destroy and annihilate (wipe
out) each other (in war), fani
caducus.
Bunu tia, v. t., same as bono tia.
Hence
Bunutia, s., hundred, d. bunti
(cf. bon) ; and
Bunuta (and bunta), v. i., or a.,
to be silent, lit. to be shut
(the mouth), ba funuta, be
silent, exactly equivalent to
the vulgar English " shut up,"
hence nafunuta, s., a silent
person, one that says little (a
term of praise).
Bur, d. for iila, bula, to be big,
large.
Bura, or fura, v. i., or a., to be
empty, to be devoid of, as i bi
an fura it is an empty shadow,
a bura ki nalo I am empty of
the thing, devoid of it, A.
fara"a, 1, 2, to empty. See
6aro. Hence
Bura, s., rubbish ; nabura naniu
the husk of the cocoanut,
nabura na the husk or worth-
less part of a thing : hence the
stalk of a fruit (as a worthless
thing thrown away as rubbish)
is called in different dialects
bura-tena, bura-gitena, bara-
tuna, biri-gitena, and miri-
gitena, i.e., the bura of it.
Bura, d. bin, v. i., or a., to be
full, bakafura to fill. [Mg.
burafura]
feno full, mam en o to till, My.
panoh full, mamanohi to till.]
H. mala' to fill, to be full, Pi.
to till ; with another verb, to do
anything full;/, i.e., thoroughly,
so Ef. bera-tia, d. bera-katia, as
lo b., look fully or thoroughly
■at it, i.e., watch it, rogo b.,
hear fully, i.e., obey, i uia b.
it is good fully, i.e., thoroughly
good, and it can also be said
tea berakati na, i.e., tea anena
berakati a thing fully or
thoroughly his ; A. mala', S.
mla', same as H. Hence
Burafura, furafura, s., the jungle,
forest, vegetation : so called
because it tills the land. A
place covered with any kind
of weeds, ifec, is called nalia
bura a full place.
Bura-gitena, and
Bura-tena, see bura, s.
Burasa. See marasa.
Burau, s., a long or tall cloud ;
the sky : eg. barau.
Bure ia, fure ia, or bure a,
burei ki, furei ki, v. t., to
wash, rub, as bure naui wash
off the earth from a yam,
furei ki natuo na cleanse his
feet, furei ki lu nasoga, bure
biakik wash, cleanse a child,
bure nabau na ki narora rub his
hair with oil, oil his hair. H.
marak (rub), polish, cleanse
by washing or anointing (egg.
marali, &c.)
Bure ia, or bura ia, v. t., d., to
leave, allow, forsake, abandon.
A. bara', 3, to leave, abandon.
[My. bir, to permit, allow.]
Burei a, d. marag ki, v., to spit
out, to spit, to spit on. A., 4,
63 [buru
mara"a to emit saliva, bar',
mar" saliva.
Bur ia, buri, v. t., to pierce,
stick, buri uago stick a pig :
d. for biri.
Buria, v. i., or a., to be swollen
(of the body), to have the
dropsy. [Ma. kopurua drop-
sical, My. buru elephantiasis,
burut hernia.] The a in buria
is the a. ending. A. nabara to
raise up, heap up, 8, to swell,
nabra£ a swelling on the body.
Buria (bauria, bouria), v., to
kindle or make a fire (in the
oven), ru buria ua (uwa), and
ru buria, they make a fire in
the oven, or, simply, they
make a fire, kindle up : this is
done every evening about an
hour before sunset. See bara
(H. ba'ar), and compare H.
bo'erah kindled (an oven).
Burog, v. i., or a., offensive,
mouldy, filthy (as food). [Ma.
puru mouldy, and kopuru,
kopurupuru, id.] A. mara"a
to be contaminated.
Buru masila, v. i., to roar (of
thunder), tifai i buru masila,
d. boro silaia, the thunder
roars, or thunders sounding :
for masila and silaia see sila.
[TaSa. biri thunder, and to
thunder, Ml. P. omburumbur,
Ml. A. amburambur, to roar
(of thunder), TaSa. roro to
roar (of thunder), Ml. P.
berver thunder.] H. ra'am
to roar (as thunder), ra'am
thunder, S. r'em to thunder,
ramo' thunder.
Buru, burufuru, v. i., or a., to be
short : d. mito, q.v.
I5URUMA
KI]
Buruma ki, or bSruma (or biruma)
ki, v., to be in the relation
of son-in-law to parent-in-law,
or of parent-in-law to son-in-
law, syn. monaki (nio-naki) ;
Buruma, or biruma, c. art. na
buruma, s., one in that rela-
tion, son-in-law, mother-in-law,
father-in-law : see mo na. E.
(liamwa) tallamwa to contract
affinity, to be joined in affinity
(with someone), to marry the
daughter of someone, talima
affinity, specially the relation
between a father-in-law and
son-in-law, then (abstract for
concrete) son-in-law.
Busa, v. i., or a., redup. busafusa,
to be young, springing up (of
plants and animals), hence to
be inexperienced, foolish, to
be spotted (the skin, as with
cold, &c.) [My. mud - a young,
immature, not deep in colour
(light), foolish.] A. wabis'a
to be spotted (with white and
black spots, as the nails or
skin), 4, to germinate, or put
forth plants (the soil).
Busa, s., or a., dumb, mute. A.
yabisa to be arid (see bes), 4,
to be silent, mute.
Busa, a., orphaned, meta busa
orphan. A. yabisa to be arid,
dry. An orphan is called
meta busa because deprived of
it's mother's milk. See bes,
besu.
Bust, v. i., to blow, spout (as a
whale). [Sa. pusa to send up
a smoke (also applied to spray,
dust, and heat), Tah. puha to
blow (as a whale), puhepuhi
to blow out of the mouth,
64 [but a
blow, as with bellows, Ha.
puhi to blow or puff, breathe
hard, blow a trumpet, <kc,
Mg. fofotra blowing the bel-
lows, mifofotra to blow the
bellows, My. ambus to blow,
make a current of air, am-
busan bellows, ambusi to blow,
drive a current of air.] A.
nafatha, i.q. . nafah'a, to blow
with the mouth, blow out,
puff, eject venom from the
mouth (as a serpent), eject
spittle (a man).
Busa, s., nabusa a mist. See
under preceding word.
Bus ia, v. t., d., to lay down,
leave, and bis ia in turu bis ia
leave, abandon, allow ;
Busfus ki, d., redup., d. for
bure ia, or bura ia, q.v.
Busi a, or fusi a, v. t., d. for
muri a, q.v. [Mg. fody re-
turned, sent back. ]
Busa ia, or fusa ia, v. t., break
or smash to pieces, smash (as
a yam), mafusai ps. H. pus,
or fus to break in pieces.
Buta, d., in meta-buta blind, lit.
eye dark. [Fi. matabuto faint,
buto darkness, Sa. matapo
blind, matapogia faint, My.
buta blind.] See bog, batu.
A. 'amiya to be blind, "umiya'
to be faint.
Buta, or futa. v. i., to spring up
or out, as water from a
spring ; to spring up or out, as
smoke from a fire ; to spring
out, as a musket ball from
a wound — i si buta ia he
shot him, the bullet springing
out from or glancing off his
body, wounding but not fatal ;
butafuta]
Butafuta, d. futfut, redup., to
spring up or out, as water
from a spring ;
Butu-raki, or buti-raki, d., v. i.,
to appear, come in sight. [Ma.
puta, v. i., pass through, in or
out, come in sight, My. tfirbit
to issue, come out, emanate,
spring, arise, appear, escape.]
A. nabata to spring up or out,
as water from a spring, 4, ps.
form, to appear, go or come
forth, come in sight.
Butfiki, dd. mitaki, milai, q.v.
But, d. for iota, unmarried.
Butia, or buti a, or futi a, v. t., to
pluck, as a fowl, pluck out or
up, as weeds, mafuta to be
plucked. [Fi. vuti-a to pluck
feathers, hairs off animals,
hence, to pull up grass or
weeds, Sa. futi to pluck
feathers or hairs, fufuti, ps.
futia, My. bantun to pluck,
pull out.] A. namasa, 1, 2,
to pluck out, as hairs.
Buti a (for ba-uti a), v., d. for
bakauti a, q.v. [Mg. vita com-
pleted, finished, mamita to
finish.]
Bute (lua i), v. t., to praise. A.
madaha to praise.
Z?uti na, biti na, s., a knob or
excrescence growing on a tree,
a joint (from its bulging out).
See 6otu.
Butili, bitili, fitili, v. r., to speak
of each other, speak of one
behind his back : tili a.
Buto, v. i., to germinate, bud.
A. nabata germinate. Hence
Buto na, s., bud, d. muto na.
Buto na, s., navel, then middle;
malebuto (lit. the place of the
65 [e
middle), the middle (of the
body, a land, anything), d. but,
hence d. tu-but rainbow, lit.
stand in the middle (of the
sky). [TaSa. buto navel, taga
nabute stomach, To. bito, Sa.
pute, Tah. pito navel, Tah.
pitopito a button.] See pre-
ceding word and botu. : the
navel is the knob, as it were
the bud (bursting or swelling
out). (Compare navel, from
nave, prob. from nabh to
burst.)
Butol, v. i., d. for bitelo, q.v.
Butua, v. t., d. for bitua, to
place, lay down, give ; ta
bituatua to speak (or pray)
while giving (or laying down)
an offering (to the natemate).
Hence
Butut, s., a place where offerings
to the natemate are put : now
used for " altar."
Note. — The verb butua or
bitua is the reflexive of tua
ki : ba butua ki go backwards
and forwards between two
things, to halt between two
opinions.
Buturaki. See under buta, supra.
E
, article, for a, sometimes i :
a, ne, na, in.
E, dem., this, that, as mal e (for
mala uai) that time, then : e
is a contraction for uai : ras
uai this time, now. See i
(d.), dem. This e, or i, is
used also as a tense particle —
see i.
6
E, or i, prep., in, on ; t. prep. :
ani, ni, a, i. [Sa. i in, at,
with, to, from, for, of, on, on
account of, concerning, Ma. i
of, Arc, and t. prep., My. i t.
prep., Fi. e, or i, in, with or
by (instrumental).] A. li,
H. le, T. ne, Gurague ya,
or ia.
E, inter, ad., where 1 See se.
Ei, ad., yes. [Mg. ey, Sa. e, id.]
A. ey, or ei, yes.
Ei a, or ei ia, ad., yes, that's it :
preceding word, and dem.
Ei eri, ad., d. syn. ei a : ei, and
eri dem.
Ei, ad., here, d. i, q.v.
Ei (e-i), ad., no, it is not. [Er.
eyi, Mg. ai, id.] Neg. ad. e,
and i, dem. H. 'i, E. 'i, not.
Eba, v. See tali-eba, tali-ofa.
Ebau, ad., at the head (of the
island, i.e., the east), opp. to
etu at the foot (west) ; e prep,
and bau.
E6ago, ad., in the end (of the
house), inside : e prep., and
?,ago.
Ebua, or ebu, ad., in the deep :
e prep., and bua n. Also
ebua, s., the abyss, Hades.
Ebut d., in the middle ; e prep.,
and but, d. for buto, q.v.
Egura, s., the stick used for
spreading (scraping) out the
heated stones of the oven : e
art., and gura ia.
Eis, ad., same as ais.
Eka na, s., a relative, family
connection. See aka.
Ekatema, ad., on the outside of
the house, outside : e prep.,
and katema, q.v.
Eksakes, d. for kesakesa, q.v.
GG [enu
Eko, s. See neko.
Ekobu, ad., in the inside, in the
house, inside : e prep., and
kobu.
Eia, d. for elau.
Elagi, ad., and s., above, heaven :
e prep., and lagi, q.v.
Elalo, or elalu, ad., in front,
before : e prep., and lalo, or
lalu, see alo, or alu na.
Elau, ad., on the sea, by the sea :
e prep., and lau
Elo, s., d. alo, the sun : ali.
Elo, or el', v. i., to be sweet,
pleasant, agreeable, redup.
lolo. [Ha. olu to be pleasant,
agreeable.] A. hala', halw', id.
Elol, ad., d., in the belly, inside :
e prep., alo na, lalo na.
Eraai (or emai), ad., in the dis-
tance, afar, far away ; d. ufea :
e prep., and mki. [Sa. mao,
mamao to be far off, distant,
mamao, ad., far off, distant.]
A. ma'oka to be far off, dis-
tant, ma'k' distance.
Emalebuto, ad., in the middle,
inside : e prep., and malebuto
na.
Emate n, s., d. for namatigo na,
the grave : mate.
Enea, or inia, d., personal pron.,
3 sing., he, she, it, dd. nai,
niga, kinini.
Enera, or inira, pi. of preceding
word, they, dd. nara, nigar,
kiniara.
En', vulgar pronunciation some-
times heard for nunu to wipe,
rub off.
En!, v., d. for ani, contracted en,
an, to abide, be.
Enu, pers. pron., 1 sing., I, dd.
anu, kinau, kinu, keino.
EKE NA]
Ere na, or eri na, d., motlier. See
ani na, note.
Erai, dem., d., this : arai.
Eri, dem., this. See arai.
Erik, dem., this, here. See s.
arai and ka.
Eru, dem., same as eri, d. nro, lira.
Eru, s., c. art. nieru, arms, war :
aru na.
Esan, ad., here, there, and
Esanien, id., and
Esas, id. : e prep., and the de-
monstrative particles se, na,
cj.v. See ais (eis). [My. sini,
sika, here, sana, sanan, situ,
there, and with prep, disini
here, disana, disitu there, Mg.
ato, eto, aty, ety, here.]
Esega. See asaga.
Esike, s., a forked stick, that
which sike tia grasps, seizes :
sike tia, e art.
Esai, or esei, s., the open, open
space, d. esai leba a road, lit.
_ big open space : sai.
Eso,or esa,d.,ad.,yes: ei (supra),
_ and so or sa, dem.
Esu, d., ad., outside, away, e
prep, and su. [Of. Fi. esau
(e sau) on the outside, sausau
outskirts, sausau kei vuravura
ends or outsides of the earth.]
H. hesu, or ksu only, pi.
kaswe, kiswoth ends or ex-
tremities (of the earth), A.
kasa', n. a. kasw', kaSa' to
stand apart, be afar off.
Esuma, ad., in the house, at
home : e prep., and suma.
Et, v. i., or a., d., to be many.
Cf. A. 'ada' to be many.
Etaku, ad., at the back, behind.
[Sa. i tua, id.] E prep., and
taku na.
67 [PAFINE
Etan, ad., on the ground, down :
e prep., and tano the ground.
Etu, ad., at the foot (of the
island, i.e., the west, opp. to
ebau) : e prep., and tua na
the foot.
Eiio (ewo), ad., no, it is not : e,
_ as in ei, and uo dem.
Euta, ad., on shore, ashore, on
land, opp. to elau : e prep.,
and uta.
F
a (and fe or fi), inter, pron., c.
dem. sa or se, safa, sefa, what ?
also where 1 It is ma in
matuna, q.v. A. ma', H. mah
what 1
Faa na, s., d. mao na, the thigh :
mao. See bua, lai.
Fa, or ba, q.v., to go.
Fafa-sia, v. t. , redup. of ba-sia, to
tread upon (of many).
Fa, d. for mau, in mal fa nin =
male mau ua = this very
time, now.
Fafan, for bafano, to wash the
hands.
Fafaga, redup. of faga.
Fafatu, v. r., to trust, confide,
fafatu isa to trust or confide
in him, or in it. See under
fatu.
Faflne, s., d., a woman (i.e., wife-
man), and, a., female. Fa-fine
(see Note 3, infra) is fa (for
which see mera, infra, man in
general), and fine a female,
and denotes lit. female-man, as
ata-mani denotes lit. male-man.
[Sa. fafine, Fut. fine, Mg.
vavy, My. paranipuan woman,
FAGAN IA]
female, bini a wife.] H.
nkebah, f., a woman, a female
(a genitalium figura dicta) of
persons, and of beasts, S.
nekebta', pi. nekbata'.
Note 1. — Tbe ni in fafine,
fine, the same as the ni in
kuruni and atamani and the
final n of the My. parampiian,
is a suffixed particle ; fafi-nl
is thus the same as vavy, and
the difference between fafi-m
and fi-ni is that the former has
fa or va prefixed. In fy (fi,
vy), as also (as it occurs in
various dialects) in fu, ueo,
bio, bo, foya, bayi (Santo d.
nekepai), bai, bua, the ancient
feminine termination, t, or th,
as in the H. form of the word,
i^ not heard : it is heard, as
in the Aramaic form of the
word, in matu (iv/ra), bite
(-riki), or fite (-riki), Ja. wedo,
other dialects but, fid.
Note 2. — In Santo dd.
occur katsai, karai, a woman,
female : with katsai compares
Ysabel gase ; and with karai
Efate kurui, or koroi, kuruni,
nagurui, naguruni, Wango
urao : these belong to another
stem, for which see s. v. lai.
Note 3. — The fa, or va, in
fafini, vavy, is the same (by
elision of the r) as the para in
My. parampuan, Ja. parawan
or prawan (Ta. dd. pilaven,
bran, New Guinea d. mer-
wine).
Fagan ia, v. c, same as bagan ia,
q.v. Hence
Fagafaga, v., redup., and
Fagafaga, s., a bait, and
68 [fakaruku
Faga, s., that which is given to
eat, food ; a present, a bribe.
Fai (vai), c. art. nifai, dd. noai
(n'uai, i.e., n'wai), nai (n'ai), s.,
water. [An. inwai, Er. nu,
Ml. nue, Epi ue, Sa., Fut. vai,
Ma. wai, Bouru dd. wai, waili,
Ceram dd. wai, waeli, arr, My.
ayer, i.e., ay (ai), and er.] H.
ma' unused in sing., pi. maim
construct, me' water; Nm. mai,
E. mai, water.
Fai, v. t., d., divide or cleave, as
lao fai plunge into, cleaving
("with a spear) : bua to divide,
cleave, and see also maga-fai.
Fai, s., a skate (fish). [Cf. My.
pari, Tag. pagi, skate fish.]
Der. unknown.
Fakal ia, same as bakal ia i.
Hence
Fakal, a. (in active sense) kano
fakal a comforting person,
comforter (in passive sense),
uago fakal domestic or tame
animals, lit. pigs cared for, or
taken care of.
Fakalo, or fakal, s., war. [My.
barkalahi (kalahi) to fight, to
quarrel, kalahi fight, quarrel.]
(Mahri ghorat war), H. garah,
Hith., to make war (with any-
one).
Fakamatua, s., c. art., an ancient
story : matua, tuai.
Fakamauri, i.q. bakamauri, q.v.
Fakarago, s., c. ai't., the rough
prickly scab that forms on a
sore : rago.
Fakarogo, i.q. bakarogo
Fakaru, i.q. bakaru. See bu-
karu.
Fakaruku, s., the under part, as
na fakaruku ki nakasu the
fakasa]
under part of a tree (i.e., shade
or shelter under its overhead
foliage), ki nauot (tig.) the
shelter or protection of a chief :
rukua (and the caus. prefix).
Fakasa, s., a festival : bakasa.
Fakataliga, s., an ear pendant :
caus. prefix, and taliga.
Fakatokoi, or fakatokei, i.q.
bakatokoia.
Fakau, or fakaua, s., d. fikau,
tikaua, a messenger, ambas-
sador, agent sent to do
something for a chief or com-
munity ; and
Fakau, or fakaua, s., a message
such as the agent sent by a
chief or a community carries
to deliver, i ofi nafakaua he
carries the message (of state).
See kau, gau, giasp, take hold
of, carry, &c. [Sa. fe'au to
send for (v. r.), fe'au a message,
To. fekau to bid, command,
order ; a message, order ; My.
and Ja. panggawa a grandee,
a noble : in Java it is the
title of the five chief coun-
cillors of state, and the word
is derived from gawa to bear
or carry, convey, bring, Ef.
kau to carry, (as a club), Fi.
kau-ta to carry, Sa. 'au to send,
'au mai to bring, 'au'auna a
servant, 'au a troop, gang,
shoal, bunch (of bananas), Ef.
makau a bunch or cluster (of
fruit), d. umkau many, all
(collected).]
Faki, or fiki, transitive particle,
connecting the verb with its
object, after or suffixed to
the verb, consisting of the
preps, fa, or fi, and ki.
69
[faxua
Fala, s. (see under frala II.), a
ship's yards.
Falafala, s., cross sticks fastened
on a tree for a ladder to climb
it : 6ala n.
Falea, s., a cave. [Tab. farefare,
a., hollow, fare a house, Ma.
whare, Sa. fale.] See iala in.
Fain ia, or bam ia, v. t., to eat.
[Tali, amu to eat.] H. ba'am,
A. fa'ama, to have the mouth
full, to swallow down.
Fanau sa, v.t., d. bunu to teach,
to instruct : to preach (recent
use). [Fi. vunau-ca to ad-
monish, harangue, preach to.]
H. bin, Hi. to teach, to in-
struct, A. bfina, 2, 4, make
clear, explain, lucidly expound,
5, render lucid.
Fanauen, s., c. art., the teach-
ing, i.e., either the act of
teaching or the thing taught,
law (as " law " of Moses, re-
cent use).
Fanei, v. i., d., to be extin-
guished, out (of a fire) : bunu
ea, bunue a.
Fanu, s., darkness, shade, only
in kot-fanu, evening, lit. time
of shade, d. rag melu. See
melu.
Fanua, s., inhabited country,
land, My. banua, id. [Malo
vanua house, Santo d. venua
house, village.] H. banah, to
build, as a house, ps. part,
banu' built, binyaha building ;
A. bana', S. bna'.
Note. — The Santo word has
best preserved the primary
meaning house, or building ;
then a country, district, or
land is called banua, or fanua,
FARA KI NAM ETA
na]
70
[fasu
because, like a house or village
(or building), it is the dwelling-
place of men.
Fara ki nameta na, v. t., to fix
the eyes, stare with open and
motionless eyes. Nm. fajar,
or fagar, 2, fix (the eyes),
stare.
Fara, s., c. art., a cocoanut (fruit)
that begins to shoot. [Cf. Fi.
vara, a cocoanut ready to
shoot ] Ztora II.
Fara, s., a chafed place on the
skin, especially on the thigh
(from being rubbed or chafed
in walking) : baro sia.
Fara, or fera, s., a row, or rank,
or band ;
Farafara, or ferafera, s., a row, a
. lot, a band (as of sores on a
limb), lit. a number of rows ;
Bifara ki, or bifera ki, v. c, to
put or arrange in rows. [My.
baris a line, row, rank, file,
troops, mambaris, v., and baris
kan, v., and barbaris, v., bari-
san parade, place where troops
are exercised.] H. ma'arakah
(and ma'aroth for ma'arakoth)
disposing, ranging in order, a
row or pile, battle set in array,
army, or band ; from 'arak to
arrange in order, or in a row.
Fara-bule, s., c. art., a rank, row,
or band, of adults or full-
grown men : fara rank, and
bule adult.
Fara-kal, c. art., a row or band
of men connected together by
relationship, as of brothers :
fara, and kal, su bakal ia.
Farati, s., c. art., sticks fastened
above and upon the rafters of
a house : a. pr. name (the
name of the chief of Sesake,
the chief binding the people
together as the nafarati (lit.
that which binds together) do
a house.) [My. baroti rafters,
Fi. vorati upper cross beams of
a house.] From bara tia, q.v.
H. hibar (E. aliabara, v. c.) to
bind together, connect or join
together.
Fare, farefare. See bare, bare-
fare, to move.
Farea, s., the public house of a
village, d. fare outside. [Mota
varea outside, Ml. P. vere, Ur.
vari outside, Mg. ivelany out-
side (i-velany).] A. barriyy'
outer, external (Ct. barri),
Nm. barrani outer, exterior,
(and barra, out).
Farea, d. for bi reko to be poor :
reko ; and bi to be.
Farofaro, a., tea farofaro, a thing
that rasps, &c. : baro sia.
Fasi, i.e., fa-si, v. t., tread upon,
fasi koro bind together the
reeds of the koro-fence (which
is done by treading upon
them) : basi a.
Fasu (na meta na), s., d., eye-
brows, tafasi, v. r., to make a
sign with the eye. A. "amaza
to make a sign (with the eye,
eyebrows), 6, make such signs
to each other.
Fasu, fasua na, s., a part, por-
tion ; member (of the body).
[Sa. fasi a piece, a place,
fasifasi to split up in pieces,
fasi to split, beat.] H. basa'
cut in pieces, A. bas'a'a
cut, cleave, bas''a£ part, a
piece, eg. H. badad to divide,
bad a paii;, pi. members of the
fata]
body, A. badda separate, dis-
join, budd' portion, part (of
anything), badad' part. See
s. v. H. badad.
Fata, s., a bench, shelf, stand,
platform, del. ucnr', uer6,
uete, kofeta (i.e., kofeta.) [Sa.
fata raised house for storing
yams in, a shelf, a bier, Tali,
fata altar, scaffold, piece of
wood to hang baskets of food
on, &C., Mg. vatra (and vata)
box, shelf for keeping rice,
&c] H. 'omeel platform,
place, 'emdah a lodging (place).
See fatu.
Fatok, same as batok and
matok : toko.
Fatu, same as batu and matu: tu.
Fatu (see matu ki), hence fafatu,
v., to trust in, rely upon, con-
fide in ; matu ki (na koro) to
set up the posts or supports (of
a fence), palo fulsit, stabilivit ;
na matu na, the column of the
back, that is, the backbone
or vertebral column ; also,
post or stake (of a fence) ; fatu
stones or rocks ; na fatu
na bones ; fata (see ante) ;
uota (wota) a chief (column
or support or upholder of the
people). [Mg. vato a stone,
My. batu a stone, Sa. fatu a
stone, core or stone of fruit,
faafatufatu to persevere inde-
fatigably, fatu (-amoa) to have
a swollen shoulder (fron bear-
ing burdens), Tah. fatu the
gristly part of an oyster, the
core of an abscess, fatu lord,
master, owner.] A. 'amada
1, 2, 3, to sustain, prop up,
. make firm or stable, with a
71 [kka
column, post, or stake, (matu
ki), 8, to rely upon, trust or
confide in (fafatu) ; also, 1, to
have the hump or the back
contused with carrying (a
camel), H. 'amad to stand (be
firmly set), confide in, endure,
persist, persevere (cf. Sa.;,
A. 'imad higher structures,
column, stake, 'amod' prop,
column, stones put in the
ground for supports for the
foundation, column, prop of a
family, chief, lord, the back,
'amid' column and chief or
prince (of a people), H. 'amud
column, pillar, platform, scaf-
fold. See fata (ante).
Fatu, s., c. art. nafatu, the ridge
of a house, ridge-pole : see batu.
[TaSa. papatu, id., Malo uobatu,
id., Ml. U. uobut, Fut. tau-
fufu, id., My. bubungan,
babungan, and bumbung, Ja.
wuwung, id., Mg. vovonana,
id.]
Fatuna, s., and ad., d. for ma-
tuna, q.v.
Fau, same as bau, a., new.
Faulu, s., barter, i.q. baulu.
Faum, d. fau, new ; na faumuen :
perhaps for faumau, redup.
Faus ia, same as baus ia, ask,
question ; hence
Faus, pr. n. (Questioner), a spirit,
officer of Saritau at the gates
of Hades.
Fe a, and fefe a, same as be a,
befe a ; nafeiina, nafefeana, s.,
the act of reading, or counting.
Fe, conj , if, should, for be.
Fe, d., conj., then, but. A. fa, id.
Fea, same as be, or bea, to pre-
cede, first.
fefe]
72
[fifis ia
Fefe, same as befe.
Fei, or fe, d., inter, pron., who ?
[Sa. o ai, Tah. o vai, Ta. ba,
Er. me, id.] H. ml, A. man,
men, mun, or min, also often
pron. 3 pers added man hu
who 1 (who-he ?), contracted
manu, menu.
Feifei ki, same as beifei ki ; na-
feifeien, s., the act of indicat-
ing or showing, or the thing
by which something is made
manifest ; a sign, token.
Feko, s., a cockroach, and similar
insects.
Felak, s., c. art., d., a tribe, or
family clan, dd. syn. metarau,
kainaga : 6ala in.
Felaki, s., c. art., girdle to which
the nafon, or loin cloth, was
attached : it is about six inches
wide : belaki.
Fera, c. art., a row. See fara.
Fera-bule, fera-kal. See fara-
bule, fara-kal.
Ferafera, rows. See farafara.
Fera, c. art., s., an omen, also
fefera • the natamole tabu hav-
ing poured out some namaluk
(kava) to the natemate drinks
off his own cup, and then
looking into it sees some blood,
or a human hair, or some other
thing, which is called fera, an
omen, or indication, good or
bad, as the case may be : or
he perceives the omen, good
or bad, by " lo namo," which
is another species of divina-
tion.
Fefera ki, or fera ki, and bifera
ki, v., to show by a fera, as
the natemate are supposed to
do (see under the preceding
word) ; to give an omen. [Mg.
fambara an omen, presage,
My. fal omen (A.)] A. faT
omen.
Fera, v. i., fera ki, v. t., ferafera,
v. i., ferafera ki, v. t. ;
Feroa, c. art., s., a crumb : bera,
bera ki.
Fet, s., a bird's nest, made like
a platform of woven twigs.
[Sa. J'ataniga, a nest.] See
fata.
Feta, c. art., s., a tribe : beta.
Fete, or fite, c. art. nafete,
inter, pron., what 1 Nm. made
what ?
Fetta, s., soapstone, a soft stone
that can easily be cut : fatu
stone, and ta to cut.
Fi, v., to be : bi.
Fi, prep., after verbs, or bi, on,
&c. A. bi, fi, id.
Fiare ki, v., to go into the
presence of someone, to be
unabashed ( opposite of maliare,
or maliere). See rairai.
Fiatu, v. r., to smite each other,
to fight, war : atu.
Fieie, v. r., d., to speak, con-
verse. A. liara, 6, to converse,
talk together.
Fifi, s., anything binding round,
as a fillet or turban, &c, then
a thing going round, as a ship
round a cape or island, then
hostile talk (with which one's
adversary as it were binds
him round) ;
Fifi ki, v. t., to go round, as a
yam vine round a stake, a
ship round an island : fifi is
for fifisi, redup. of fisi, q.v.
Fifis ia, v. t., to bind round :
redup. of fisi.
fikit]
Fikifc, or tikat, v. i\, to be
savage, given to biting, lit. to
bite each other : kat ia. [ Fi.
veikata, id.]
Fikoba, v. r., lit. to chase, or
pursue, each other : koba sia.
Fili, or fila, c. art., same as bila,
lightning : bila. [Sa. uila,
My. kilat, Mg. helatra, id.]
Fillflli, s., a gleaming or flashing
shell worn as an ornament :
bila.
Filora, same as bulora, and,
redup.,
Filililora. See bulo ki.
Finieri, v. r., to be doing some-
thing to each other, usually in
a hostile sense, to be fighting :
meri.
Fimuri, v. r., to be returning
each other, dismissing with
presents, repaying : muri.
Finaga, c. art., s., food : kan ia
(in finaga the k is elided
after the prefixed fi.) [My.
makanan, Mg. fihinana, id.]
Fira nia, v. t., supplicate,
or pray, him, and without
object, fira to supplicate, pray,
also bifira, bifira nia. [Tali,
pure to pray, pupure to pray
frequently.] H. falal, Hithp.,
to supplicate, pray.
Firaka, v. i., to delay. A.
'araka, 5), to delay.
Fisa, v., tisan, c. art., s., to
speak, word : bisa.
Fis ia, or fisi a, v. t., to bind
round, to bind about, as a
fillet, turban, or vine round
the head, a string round a
parcel, a bandage round a
wounded limb ; fisi namanuk
to bind up a wound ; a yam
73 [firi
vine binds round a stake
(twines round it), and fisi
name to twist a rope (bind
round the one strand on the
other — this is usually bulo ki) ;
a whip or rod binds round the
body to which it is applied,
hence tale fisi a to flog (see
tale to go round), lit. to go
round binding about, d. mafisi
a to whip, flog : often the final
s is elided hence fi-gote fia to
flog him to pieces (for fisi-gote
fia), lit. to flog — break him,
and see fifi (supra), and tafifi ;
the word of an adversary is
said to fisi the object of his
anger, that is, bind him
round ; fisi uago bind round
a pig (in order to its being
carried slung to a pole, so
that it may not be hurt).
[Sa. fisi to entwine as a
vine, To. fi to twist and fihi
entwine, twist, Ma. whiwhi be
entangled, whakawhiwhi wind
round, fasten, My. pusing to
turn round, twist.] H. habas'
to bind, bind on, bind about,
as a head band, turban, tiara,
" the seaweed is bound about
(fisi na bau gu) my head,"
Jon. ii. 6 ; to bind up a wound,
to bind fast, shut up.
Fisi, a. used as s., i bi fisi (a boy
that is circumcised, ru tefe a i
bi fisi they circumcise him, he
is fisi). A. 'afsa'u e praeputio
apparentem habens glandem
paer, faSa'a a glaude prae-
putium reduxit puer.
Firi na, c. art., s., d. fiti na,
q.v.
Firi a, or fir ia, v. t., same as bir
FIRl]
ia, to make void, bring to
nought ; hence
Firi, in tale-firi, round bringing
to nought, i.e., all round.
Firigia, same as biri gia, to
carry.
Fisau na, s., d., as nafisau naui
= ora naui, the sprout, shoot,
or vine of a yam : bisau.
Fisiko na, s., flesh. [Cf. Bu.
juku, My. daging, id., TaSa.
veseko, id.] Cf. E. siga flesh.
Fiso, c. art, s., an annual reed-
• like plant whose top is used
for food. [Sa. fiso a species
of reed.] Der. unknown.
Fisuaki. Same as bisuaki.
Fisueri. Same as bisueri.
Fisuraki, c. art., s., talk, speech :
bisuraki.
Fisurakien, c. art., s., the act of
talking : bisuraki.
Fisurua, c. art., s., a lie, or lies ;
and
Fisuruen, c. art., s., lying :
bisuru.
Fiti na, c. art., s., d. firi na, the
rib, or ribs, side. [Er. mperi,
Santo d. porera na, Ma. rara,
Mafoor raar, rib.] H. sela',
Ch. 'ala' rib, side, A. s'il', rib.
Fitaua, c. art., s., d. syn. with
fakaua or fikaua : tau.
Fit, v. i., d., to run. Cf. A.
fadda to run.
Fiteriki, or biteriki, s , an old
woman, matron, lady, as
mariki an old man, senior,
sir : mariki is ma' man, and
riki old, and fiteriki is fite
woman, and riki old : for fite
see under fafine and matu ;
and for riki or 'riki old, what
follows. [Ma. ariki first-born
74
[fu na
male or female in a family of
note, hence chief, priest,
leader.^ E. leheka to advance
in age ; be the hrst-born, or
eldest, in a family ; be senior ;
alhaka to grow old, lhik
advanced in age, aged ; con-
tracted lik chief.
Fitefa, same as bitefa.
Fitili, same as butili.
Fitia, same as bitia.
Fito na, s., d., syn. 6ile-meta na,
q.v. : buto, v. i., and buto, &. v
bud.
Fo, d. for bo, particle used in the
formation of the future tense ;
Fuga, s., d. c. art. nafo, i.e., na
afo, whetstone, grinding stone,
and (because used as whet-
stone) pumice stone. [To.
fuaga (Ma. hoanga, Sa. foaga)
a grindstone, a whetstone,
fuafuaga pumice stone.] H.
hafaf to rub off, scrape off,
A. Iiaffa to rub off.
Fona, c. art, s., d. syn. tofe, the
native cloth, or clothing, made
from the bark of a tree. [E.
Mai funa, id.] H. hafaf to
to cover (kafah to cover, to
veil), A. haffa to cover with a
garment.
Fonu, s., the turtle or tortoise.
[Fi. vonu, My. paiiu, Mg.
fany, To. fonu] A. 'awinatf,
'ayinai?, the tortoise or turtle.
Fu, v. i., d. for mil to hum, buzz,
lago fu humming or buzzing
fly (blow fly) : mu.
Fua na, or bua na, s., nafua n
rarua, the bottom (outside) of
a canoe or ship, lit. the back,
syn. na matu n rarua : bua na,
bui na.
FUAGORO]
75
[OA
Fuagoro, s. See muagoro.
Fuata, v. i., or a , to have raised
stripes on the skin (as from
blows with a rod, or as are
formed by the veins on the
arm). See bua ill., and bua
tia : the radical notion is
swelling otct : ending ta.
Fua tia, i.q. bua tia.
Fuga, d. buma, q.v.
Fugaga, v. i., to well up, spring,
bubble up, welling over or
spreading asunder (as a
spring) : fua, or bua ill., and
gaga, for which see maga.
Fugafuga, v. i., or a., i.q. buga-
fuga. [Sa. fagufagu.]
Fugafuga na, s., as fugafuga
nabiau, the whitened or
breaking crest of a wave, lit.
its blossom : fuga.
Fule, and fulefule, or bulefule.
See bule I.
Fulu, and fulufulu : i.q. pre-
ceding word.
Fuluara, v. i., or a., to have
swellings : bulifulia, q.v., syn.
Fulus, v., to turn : bulu sia.
Fumafuma na, s., d. syn. fuga-
fuga na, q.v.
Funaso, c. art., s., stopper :
bunaso.
Fura, same as bura, to be full.
Furei, s. See futei.
Furei ki, v. t. Seebureia: rub,
cleanse ; furei ki natua na,
cleanse his feet, as by rubbing
or scraping them on a scraper,
&c.
Furei a, same as burei a, or bura
ia, to leave.
Furiana, c. art., s., the being
swollen, or having the dropsy :
buria.
Fus ia, same as bus ia, d. uiur
ia.
Fusa ia, same as busa ia.
Fusfus ki, same as busfus ki.
Fut, c. art., s., d. for 6osa6osa.
Futei, dd. furei, futrei, mitoi or
mitei, s., the white ant. See
rei, tei. [Sa. loi, Tab. ro, ant,
gen. name.]
Futfut, d. for butafuta.
Futum, v. i., dd. bisau, busuf,
busofu, bisobu, to sprout forth,
spring up, grow. [Fila, Meli,
Aniwa, Fut.. somo, To. tuba;
Sa. tupu, My. tumbuh, J a*,
tuwuh, Mg. tombo, id. In Ef.
(but not in all dialects) sobu
denotes also the first springing
forth or beginning of any
thing, as i sobu it sprang
forth, i.e., began; ru sobu meri
a they began did it, i.e., they
were the first who did it, were
the first beginners of the doing
it.] H. samah, Kal and Piel,
to sprout forth, to grow (as
plants, trees, the hair), and
tig. used of the first beginnings
of things which occur in the
world, as Is. xliii. 19, " Be-
hold I make a new thing ;
now it shall spring forth," Hi.
make to sprout forth or grow,
and tig. make something spring
up or exist, H. semah off-
spring, Ef. atuma, id.
G
(pronounced ng).
Ga (nga), d., pers. pron., 3 sing.,
he, she, it (nom. suf. n, or
na). [Ma. nga pi. art., Sa. na
<ja]
he, she, this, that, these, those
Ha. na, pi. art., and sign of pi.
number, My. iha (inya) he,
she, it, they.] Mod. S. ani,
'ni, they, also sometimes he
or she, and pi. art. (St., p. 22,
and fol.)
Ga, conj., usually go, q.v., and :
ka, in kai, conj.
Ga, final conj., that, ut, d. ka, or
k', q.v.
Ga, dem., this, here, there,
always (in this form) suffixed
as in nag, naga, q.v., alaga
(alia ga) this place, or place
here, i.e., here (d. li ke, see
ke) ; hut alaga may be a con-
traction for alia naga : ka.
Gabuer, a., and s., grey-haired,
aged, a grey-haired, i.e., aged
person : kabuer.
Gafa, s., a fathom (six feet).
[Sa. gafa a fathom.] A.
karnai (Nm. kama) a fathom
(six feet).
Gafikafi, s., a small basket ; and
Gaflkafi, v., to feel for or take
hold of a thing in a basket
with the fingers. A. koffai a
basket, kaffa to take stealthily
between the fingers.
Gaga, v. i., to well out, or bubble
up, as water from a spring, in
fugaga. See maga.
Gai, orgei, redup. gaigai, v. i., to
cry, sing, &c. : kai or kei
Gai (ga, final conj., and i, tense
and mood particle of the fut.)
See i.
Gaigai, v. i., to pant, be out of
breath. [Sa. ga'ega'e to be
out of breath, Ha. nae, naenae
to be out of breath, to pant.]
S. kah to pant.
76 [galu
Gai-tagoto, v. i., to scream (as in
pain) : gai, and tagoto, for
which see koto to break.
Gakalau ia (gkalau ia), redup. of
galau ia.
Gakarafi (gkarafi). See karafi.
Gakasi (gkasi). See kasi.
Gakatak (gkatak). See kati.
Gakau sa, v. t., to grasp (as an
oar, in pulling, or a branch of
a tree) : usually pronounced
gkau. See gau, kau.
Gakua, inter, ad., used with
verbal prom, as i gakua how?
lit., let it be as what ? indefi-
nitely, let it be as somewhat,
let it be so, thus, yes (assent) :
ga, final conj., and kua, q.v.
Gala, v. i., or a., small : kala.
Galakala, v. i., to laugh. [My.
galak to laugh loud continu-
ously.] A. karkara to laugh
loud and long, karkara to
laugh, cf. kalla, 7, to laugh.
Galau ia, v. t., to cross over, d.
(transposed) lakau ia, q.v. E.
lialafa to cross over, ahlafa
make to cross over.
Gale-baga, s., d., bowstring :
kale-baga.
Gal ia (al ia, kai ia), v. t., to stir
round (as water or any liquid).
[Ma. ngaru a wave, ngarue
shake, move to and fro, Ha.
ale well up, aleale make into
waves, stir up, as water, ale a
wave, Sa. galu a wave, gagalu
to be rippled, galu to be
rough, break heavily on the
reef, &c, My. * alun, Mg.
alona, a wave.] H. galal to
roll, hence gal fountain, well,
pi. waves, S. galo' a wave.
Galu, c. art., s., husks, peel, etc.
GALU TIA]
(for pig's food), better part of
a thing; pudenda; d. the
inner bark of trees : see kalu
tia. Cf. Ch. gilla', S. gelo',
gullu chaff, <fec, a
better part of a
A. gillu,
covering,
thing.
Galu tia, v. t., galuti nilsu to
put the bowstring on a bow,
na&ela galu covering board on
end of a canoe ; and
Galu, c. art., s., bowstring.
See kalu tia.
Galugalua, v. i., or a., d. sagalu-
galu, to be aged, experienced
(of persons), to be mature,
also to be worn out as with
age (of anything), as if to be
full of agedness, and mere
husk or skin : it has the a.
ending a ; nagalu matua an
aged, full-grown, or full-
bearded person, or one not
immature. A. galla, 2, to be-
come aged and expert or ex-
perienced.
Gan ia, ganikani a, v. t., to eat :
kan ia.
Gara, v. i., to be dry : kara.
Garagara, v. i., to be strong,
vehement, and garakarai :
kara, karakarai.
Gara sa, v., to meet (any person
or thing), to come upon, hit,
as ru ba gara nata they went,
met a person, i ba gara sa it
(as a calamity) came upon
him, i si gara sa he shot (hit)
it or him, i bisa gara sa he
spoke met. (or hit) it, i.e., he
spoke to the point. H. karah
and kara' to meet.
Gara ki, v. See kara ki.
Gara, d., pers. pron., 3 pi., they:
77 [gere na
ga and 'ra. [Ma. ngara they,
them.]
Gar ja, v., and, redup.,
Garikari a. See kar ia.
Garo i, v. t. See kar ia.
Garu tia, and redup.,
Garukaru. See karu tia.
Garei ki. See karei ki.
Garaf ia, v. t. See karaf ia.
Gari, a., d. for kasi.
Gasa, inter, ad. See kasa.
Gas ia, v. See kas ia.
Gasua, and gasukasua, a. See
kasua.
Gat. See gaut.
Gat ia, v. See katia.
Gat, v. See kat.
Gatikati. See katia.
Gati, d. for kasi.
Gato na, d. karo na.
Gau, v. t., to grasp : kau.
Gaua, a., barbed (of a spear) :
kau, v. t., tagau. It has the
a. ending a.
Gaut, d. gat, in bati-gaut a plant
with kook-like thorns, lit.
grasping teeth : kau, v. t.,
'tagau.
Gel ia, v. t., to clasp (in order to
lift or carry), carry away ;
Gele tia, v. t., id. ; and
Gelakela, v., used of many carry-
ing away. See kele tia and
kalu tia.
Gel ia, for gal ia.
Gema, d., verb suf., 1 pi., excl. :
garni, nami.
Genii, d. gami, nami, nom. suf.
1 pi., excl.
Geraf ia, for garaf ia.
Gere na, s., in mele-gere na the
hollow in the tail of a fish.
[Ml. P. kare, tail ; My. ekor,
ikur, tail.] H. 'ahor, A.
<;esaJ
78
[r;0BA
'oll'or', hinder part, rear, end ;
Nm. ekir, end.
Gesa, gesakesa, for kesa,kesakesa.
Gi, prep., and ki, q.v., to,
belonging to, of.
■Gl, s., porpoise : perhaps so
called because of the squeaking
noise it makes on rising out
of the water. See next word.
Gia, gki, giki, v. i., creak, squeak,
ping, moan. [Fi. gi to squeak,
Sa. 'i'i squeak.] A. nakka,
nakik' creak, <fcc.
'Gie na, or gia na, s.
kiha na and gisa na,
•Gie sa, or gie ki, v.
ceding word), to
acquire a name for or in con-
nection with something.
Giki. See kiki, small.
•Gil ia, or kil ia, or kili a,
to dig. [Sa. 'eli, My.
Mg. hady, to dig.] A.
n. a. karw', to dig.
Note. — Kili natano dig - the
ground, kili ki nakasu natano
dig a stick into the ground.
Gkiliki (i.e., gikili ki), redup.,
intensive, as ba gkiliki
natuoma dig thy feet (into the
ground), i.e., stand firm, or
simply ba gkiliki.
Gkita, i.e., gikita, v. redup. See
gita, kita.
Ginit ia, v., gini gota fia. See
kinit ia.
Girigiri, v. i., or a., to be bright,
brilliant, shining, polished.
[To. gigila bright, brilliant,
polished, My. gilang and gilau
to shine, glitter, be bright,
brilliant, dazzle.] A. gala' to
be clear, shining, &c, galiyy'
bright, shining, polished.
name, dd.
q.v.
(see pre-
have or
v. t.,
gali,
kara',
Note. — The A. word also
denotes to be or appear un-
covered : Ef. d. karo to be
unclothed, have the clothes
removed, naked.
Gis, or gisa, ad., together, lit. as
one, with numerals, as rua rua
gis two two together, in twos,
and so with all the numerals.
H. k'eliad as one, i.e., together,
Ch. kahada. See ki as, and
sa, s, one.
Gisa. See kisa, or kesa.
Gisa na, s., c. art., name, dd.
gie na, kiha na (for kisa na).
[TaSa. kitsa, Ml. U. se, Malo
isa, Epi (Ba.) sia, (Bi.) kia,
Ta. dd. rige (narige), na'ge
('ge), An. da (tha), Fi. yaca
(yatha), Am. sa, Paama isa,
Ta. d. lige (nahge).] A. 'ism'
and sim', H. s'em name.
Note. — The Ef. gisa (kiha,
gia) has the dem. k' (or g')
prefixed, as Epi kia and
TaSa. kitsa. This dem. is not
prefixed in Epi sia, Ml. se,
Am. sa, Malo and Paama isa :
in all these the final m of the
the original is elided, as it is
in tra (q.v.) blood, and nu
(for num) ; this final m ap-
pears as ng in Ta.
Gis ia, v. t., to feel, touch, and
Giskis, redup. See kis ia.
Gita ia, v. t. See kita ia.
Gite troa i, for gita troa i. See
kite troa i.
Go, conj., connecting substan-
tives and sentences, and.
[Ml. P. ga, ka, Ml. U. ko, Fi.
ka, and.] Ami), ka and (with
numerals).
Goba (gote fia), v. t., to cut, as a
OOBA SIA]
liiikoau with a knife. [Mg.
kafa cut, mikapa, v. t., to cut.]
H. gub, A. gaba, to cut.
Goba sia, v. t. See koba sia.
Gobera, or gobara, s., or kobara,
side, as kobara kerua the other
side : ko deru , and bora i.
Gofu sa, v. t. See kofu sa.
Gofkofua, a. See kofkofua.
Gkofita (for gokotita), a., sticky,
gluey. [Mg. tita, fitaka, clay
adhering, wet, sticking to.]
A. 'amada, 2, 5) to be wet so
as to stick (earth or clay).
Note the prefixed ko (or go),
as in Fi. ka, Ja. ka, the
sense of the compound being
passive.
Gogo, v. i., to wade, to wade half
swimming ;
Gogo, s., an aquatic bird. [An.
agag to swim, Sa. 'a'au to
swim, Fila kaukau to bathe,
Ma. kau swim, wade, Ha. au,
auau, swim, bathe, hasten, cf.
Ja. kumbah to wash.] A.
liamma, 1, hasten, 4, bathe, or
wash oneself in cold water,
10, bathe in hot water ; and,
general term, wash the body.
Goi a, or go ia, v. t., or ko ia, as
goi naniu to rub, scrape, or
grind out by rubbing or scrap-
ing the kernel of the cocoanut,
suru-go ia (cover-drain out) to
cover with one's mouth the
the aperture of a drinking
vessel and drain out the con-
tents, koi a mark or boundary,
also koika nafanua ; redup.,
Goko ia, v. t., to scrape (nafona);
to mark paint, or smear
(nafona, i.e., native cloth), koko
the paint used for this, gokoi
79 [gkon
(or gokai or gokei) nafona.
[Sa. 'o'ai to mark or paint
native cloth.] H. hafeah, i.q.
Iiakak cut into, hack, engrave,
carve, draw, paint, delineate,
hok a defined limit, a bound,
A. hakka, 3), grind by rubbing,
1), hack, cut, pierce, 7), drain
out (as milk), hakka scrape,
rub ; hence also
Gko, or goko, v., to cut into, cut,
hack, always followed by
another verb, as gko bora, ia,
gko gote fia (used of cutting
up the nakoau or native pud-
ding), na kokoen, s., the cutting
up.
Gokolau, see gakalau (gkalau ia).
Gule, s., a cripple, one lame.
A. gayala to be lame.
Gkola (gokola). See kola, ko-
kola, to be dry.
Gkola. See kola shout.
Gkolau. See kolau.
Goi! na, c. art., s., bird's beak,
lips, mouth. [Sa. gutu mouth
(of animals, wells, bottles),
Ma. ngutu lip, rim, whaka
ngutungutu grumble at, scold,
Fi. gusu mouth, Fut ragutu
beak.] A. nakara to peck
with its beak (a bird) ; to
scold, nakra< foramen (gulce),
mankar bird's beak.
Golo&a, v. i., to be filthy, dirty.
Karafa, 3, to be defiled, 4, to
be infected, contaminated,
Nra,, 4, to disgust.
Golu tia, v. t. See kalu tia.
Gon, v. i., to be firm, fast : kon.
Gkon (kokon), redup. of pre-
ceding.
Gkon (gokon), v. i., to be bitter :
kon, kokon.
f;ONAl]
Gonai a, v. t. See konai a.
Gor ia, or kor ia, v. t., to enclose
or surround with a fence
(nakoro) ; then to enclose as
with a fence a sick person
(shutting out and prohibiting
evil spirits or evil influences
from him) — this is done by
the " Sacred Man" (natamole
tabu) — hence gorokoro to
divine, and nekoro divination,
or incantation, with its accom-
panying rites ; redup., gorokor
ia (native Christian prayer,
Atua 0,ba gorokoro gamia uga
toko loga namolien anago —
O God, enclose us that we may-
abide in the loga (enclosure)
of Thy salvation) ; gorb sa to
conceal it (as a crime with
which one is charged) ; gor ia
to prohibit, as tuba gor ia
prohibit, impede, obstruct,
bisa gor ia speak impede, or
obstruct him ; tu gor ia stand
obstruct ; gkoro (gokoro),
v., and nakokoro, s., a pro-
hibition, also an obstruction
or thing put to close up or
obstruct the entrance to a
house, a door. This verb is
much used after other verbs
as ba gor ia to go obstructing,
i.e. to meet, d. bakor to meet,
or rather to come or go before,
i.e., appear before (anyone),
then to arise, come into sight
(as a man, ship, &c.), and
take place (as an event) ; meri
gor ia, bati gor ia, like gor ia,
simply mean to enclose or
surround with a fence, sera
gor ia to enclose or encircle
(the head) with a fillet, hence
80 [gota
seragoro-bau a hat • gore na a
brother's sister, or sister's
brother, brother and sister
being children of the same
mother, or of the same na-
kainaga. A. liagara impede,
prohibit, interdict, 2, to have
a halo surrounding it (the
moon), (see koro), 4, to
conceal ; lligr', hogr' a fence,
a wall, what is prohibited,
genitals of a man or a
woman, kindredship, relation-
ship, hagir' a fence ; H. hagar
to gird, hagdr a girdle, clad.
Nm.,2, to fence round, confine,
forbid ; E. hagar town, village
(Fi. koro, id.)
Gore na, s., brother's sister,
sister's brother. See under
preceding word.
Goro, v. i., or koro, to snore.
[Ma. ngongoro (redup.), My.
ngorok, Mg. erotra, id.] H.
naliar, A. (h'arra, h'arh'ara)
nah'ara, S. nhar snort, breathe
hard through the nose, E.
nghera snore ;
Gore na, c. art., s., the nostrils,
nose, dd. usu, gusu. [Fi. ucu,
Sa. isu, Ma. ihu, My. id'ung,
Ja. irung, Mg. orona, nose.]
H. nlilraim, du., the nostrils,
S. nhiro' the nose, A. noh'ra<
aperture of the nose.
Gorot ia, v. t., to cut round, as
to cut round a stick in order
to break it ; hence
Goro gote fia, v. t., cut round,
break it (as a stick). Nm.
h'ara^ to shave off" in turning,
H. hara£ (q.v.), S. hrai cut in,
engrave. See karati.
Gota, redup. gogota, v. i., or a.,
GOTA
FANU]
81 [gura IA
black, dirty, bukota dirty (as
water with dust or earth in
it). [Gilolo kokotu, kitkudu,
black.] A. Katarna to be
dusty, 9, black, katim' dirty,
black, katam' black, blackish,
Ac.
Gota fanu, s., or ad., evening, d.
kot' fan, d. syn. rag melu, lit.
time of dusk, or sunset : gota,
or kot', a time (see kota). A.
wakata, 1, 2, to fix a time,
wakt' a time, a point or part
of time : fanu. [Santo punu
to set (the sun), puni dusk.]
H. pun (perhaps i.q. A. 'afana
= 'afala, cf. H. 'apal, see
melu) to set (as the sun), to
be darkened.
Got, v., cut. See koto fi.
Gote fi, v. t. See koto fi.
Gotokoto, v. i., to begin (break
or cut, as it were, into the
doing of something, " break
ground " in the matter), as
i gotokoto bat ia he began —
did it : koto fi.
Gil, d. mu, norm suf., your, 2
pi. (ku verb, prom, 2 pi.) :
separate prom, 2 pi., kumu.
Gu, dd. mu, kama, verb, suf.,
you. See preceding word.
Gu, d. k (for ku), nom. suf., 1
sing., my, as narugu my hand.
Gua, inter, ad., how ? lit. as
what 1 It is used with the
verbal prons., as i kua it is
how 1 Indefinitely i kua it is
so (assent), lit. it is as some-
what : kua and gua are equally
used, d. kasa as what 1 how 1
The sole difference between
kua and kasa is that in the
latter the dem. s' is prefixed
to the inter, prom See ka as,
and sfi what 1 Ch. kgmah how ?
(as what 1 ), A. kama' as, so.
Gua, v. i. See kua.
G-uku, v. i., to shrink, shrivel, be
incurved, maguku to he in-
curved, ^uku rumu ki mo na
to shrink or incurve the bosom
to her son-in-law (of a mother-
in-law shrinking together and
covering her bosom and face
so as not to be seen by her
son-in-law), d. kuku ruma
[Mg. kainkana aged, kainkona
bent, curved, shrivelled.] E.
guihkua (gwihkwa) to be in-
curved, bent, specially from
old age, hence guliuk' one aged,
bent, and shrunk together.
Guku-taki, v. t., to make guku.
See guku.
Gulu tia, v. t. See kalu tia.
Gulu, v. i. See kulu.
Gum ia, v. t., or kum ia, to
absorb in the mouth fas a
lolly). H. gama' to absorb,
to drink up, to swallow, i.q.
Ch.
Gum ia, v. t., dd. urn ia, gu ia
(gw ia), m ia (mw ia), to seize,
grasp, catch, hold, with or in
the hand. [Sa. 'u'u to take
hold of, to grasp, ps. 'umia,
Pi. qumi-a, ququ, id., My.
gangam, Ja. gagam to clutch,
to clench, the fist, the clenched
hand.] A. kamkama to collect,
to seize or catch with the
hand, to take.
Gunut ia, v. t. See kinit ia.
Gura ia, v. t., to scrape off, gura
ua to scrape or rake off the
heated stones from an oven,
magir ia, v. t., scrape, magura,
CURE SIAJ
v. i., or ps. a., diminished,
lean, igura, d. igiri, the stick
for scraping or raking the
stones from an oven, gura biri
ki (d. syn. sera biri ki) to
startle (one) (as by coming
behind one and suddenly lay-
ing or sweeping the hand on
him) : kar ia, garu. H. gara'
to scratch, to scrape, scrape
off, then take away, withhold,
to diminish, Ni. to be taken
away, withheld. Note the Ef.
magura denotes lit. taken
away from, i.e., diminished,
lean, with the prep, ki, magura
ki to withhold from (one),
meta magura ki he eyes with-
holds (something) from (one)
he is stingy ; in one d. i meta
makur ki is said to denote he
eyes withdraws from (one), he
is covetous, lit. he eyes scrapes
off (from someone).
Gure sia, v. t., to gnaw : see
gura ia and kar ia. [Sa. gali,
gnaw, Fi. quru, v. i., quru-ta,
v. t., to eat anything unripe,
to scranch, eat ravenously, to
gnaw, My. greb to gnaw.]
This word seems properly to
denote scranch, scrape off,
absorb, H. gara' scrape off, A.
gara'a to absorb, swallow.
Guru ki, v. t., to gather together,
guru-maki, v. t., id., or kuru
ki, kuru-maki, gkuruk (guku-
ruk) gather together (with-
out object) ; and
Gui'ua, s., c. art.,' a field (of
battle, of yams), so called be-
cause men or things are
gathered together in it : kuru.
H. gur, 3), to be gathered, to
82 [i
gather together, 'agar collect,
gather in.
Gurui, and
Guruni, s., c. art. naguruni, a
woman, wife, female. See
fafine, Note 2, and lai.
Gusu, v. i., to stoop. A. nakasa
to stoop.
Gusu na, s., c. art., the nose :
gore na.
Gusugisu ki, v. den., from pre-
ceding word, to nose (a thing),
i.e., smell it. [Mg. oroka
(from orona the nose), mioroka
to kiss by touching noses.]
Gusi, v. i., to be crooked, con-
torted, magusl crooked, con-
torted. A. 'akis'a to be
crooked, contorted, 5, id.
Gusu, v. i. See kusu, kosu-mi.
Gusu-mi, v. t. See kosu-mi.
Gut ia, v. t., and gukut ia
(gkut ia). See kut ia.
Gutu ki, v. t. See kutu ki.
1
verb, pron., 3 sing., he, she,
it, sometimes pronounced e ;
also dd. i, e, verb, suf., 3 sing.,
him, her, it. [Epi Ba. o, Epi
Bi. e, him, her, it ; Fut. i,
Ml. P. i, TaSa. i, he, she, it.]
Separate pron. nai, dd. inia
or enea ga, or niga, he, she, it.
I, dem., d., this, here, d. ei, rag
i, for rag uai, this time, now :
like e, q.v., contraction of uai.
I, or e, a tense particle used
after ka (sign of past tense, as
i ka fano he went), and ga,
and ba (final conjs.) thus, i kai
bano he had gone, i gai bano
"2_
let him have gone, the notion
expressed being that the action
(as going) was done or is to be
done before the doing of some-
thing else. Dialect syn. ko,
ba i bano = ba ko bano = that
thou have gone, lit. that thou
now (before something else to
follow) go. [Of. e after verbs
in Ha. and Tali.] Probably the
dem. e this or that i contrac-
tion of uai, this, now, that,
then), thus i kai (or ka e) bano
he went then (that time), ba i
bano go now (this time), d. kui
ban, you now go (as bidding
farewell).
I, in ei, it, or that, not that, no :
syn. eiio.
I, no, compare e in ei. [This
neg. ad. is seen in Sa. i (in i'ai
no), To. i (in ikai no) ; for the
kai, see tika.]
la, verb, suf., 3 sing., dd. i, e,
him, her, it.
I, prep, (also e), contracted from
ni (li), often t. prep. [Ma. i,
id.]
Note. — The verb, suf., 3
sing., is often combined with
this prep, ia, d. i, for iia, ii.
la, s., d. for bia, child,
lak, s., d., mother (vocative). See
aka and i art. [Mg. kaky
and ikaky, my father (voc.)]
Ibe ! iebe ! iboi ! interj., ex-
clamation of wonder, surprise,
and pleasure, d. bai. See bai ;
i as in io, iore.
Igam (i, art), dd. agam, nigami,
kiganii, kinami.
Igin, d., ad., here ; i prep., and
gin (or kin), q.v. [Sa. i 'inei,
Fut. ikunei, id.]
83
[IN
Igira, d. for igita.
Igiri, s., and
Igura, s. Same as egura.
Igita, dd. agita, nigita, kigita,
nininta : i, art., and gita, for
nita.
Ika, s., c. art. naika, fish. [Sa.
ia, My. ikan, Santo d. ika.]
Of. H. dag, pi. const, dege
and dagah, const, degath, fish.
It is possible that ika is the
same by the elision of the d.
Iki, a., small, little; in kariki
(kar' iki) little children. See
kiki. [To. iki small, little.]
Ikin, or kin, s., c. art. nikin, a
bird's nest. [Mg. akany.] H.
ken, A. wakn', wukuna^,
id.
Ilibagoen, s., a basket with
closed bottom, a purse, or
wallet : ala (basket), 6ago,
uon.
Ili-hki, v., also lele- or lili-fiki, d.
syn. kelu-faki, as rarua i ili-
tiki nagusu the canoe rounds
the point, or cape. See lele,
lili ; fiki or faki is a com -
pound of the two preps, fi (or
fa) and ki.
Ilisela, ad., throughout, for lili -
sela, lit. all round (throughout)
the way : lele (or lili) sela.
Imrum, d. imrau, ad., inside the
house : i prep., moru hollow ,
um house. See katema.
In, s., c. art. nln, the wind, the
air : lagi. [My. angin, Mg.
anina, the wind.]
In, dem., this, d. na. [Cf. Sa.
nei this now, Mg. iny that,
this, My. ini this.] S. liana
this, Ch. 'alien, Assy, annu,
this.
inia]
inia, inea, or enea, d., pers. pron.,
3 sing., he, she, it.
Inin, here : i prep., and nin this.
Inini, d., s., c. art. nainini, spirit,
soul. See anu.
Inira, inera, or enera, d., pers.
pron., 3 pi., they.
Inira, or nira, or nera, d., verb.
suf., 3 pi., them.
Inuma, s., d. for isuma.
Io, ad., yes. [Sa. io, Fi. io or
ia yes, Ja. iya.] H. 'Ihu', E.
'ewa, yes.
lore, ad., d. ore, yes. [Fi. iarai
yes.] From io, and ri dem.
See eri.
Iru, or eru, or ru, verb, pron., 3
pi., they, d. lu, or u.
Ira, or era, or ra, verb, pron., 3
dual, they two.
Ira (d. ir), or ra, verb, suf., 3 pi.,
them.
Isi, s., c. art. naisi na, basis,
foundation ; naisi matua na its
great foundation, naisi matua
nafisan the great foundation of
the discourse or speech, its text,
naisi namal the foundation of
the affair ; and
Isuma, d. inuma (s to n), s., a
clearing for a plantation, lit.
the foundation of the clearing
for cultivation. See urea. A.
'iss', &c, a foundation.
Is, ad., or interj,, no, not so.
[Mg. isy, id.] I, neg. ad., and
s' dem. See se.
Ita, s., c. art. naita, d. for nata,
a human being, man. See ata.
Ita, interj. of exhortation, come!
now then ! come now ! [Ta.
ita, id.] A. hi'ta adesdum,
adeste.
Itaki, s., dd. otaki, uataki, a
84 [ka
split stick for grasping and
lifting hot oven stones, the
native tongs : i art., and taki.
Iu, or eu, verb pron., 3 pi., d. for
„ iru, or eru, they.
Iu, s., c. art. naiu or naiyu, d.
for nausu. See usu.
K,
., d., verb, suf., 2 sing., thee,
d. ko. A. ka thee.
Ka, ki, or ke, ad., as tera ki
mala move (lit. fly) like a
hawk (of the dancing of
women who move with both
arms stretched out like the
wings of a hawk) ; usually
prefixed to another particle, as
kite as, kasa as what 1 d. kua
(kuwa) as what ? A. ka, H.
ke as.
K, d. gu (ku), nom. suf., 1 sing.,
my, as naruk my hand. [My.
ku, Mg. ho.]
Ka, k', tense particle, past in-
definite, as a ka bano, I went,
i ka bano he went, d. ki ban
he went (ki is k' tense particle,
and i he, the verbal pron.
being after the tense part.,
whereas in i ka it is before it).
In one dialect the particle te is
added, as a kate ban, ku kate
ban, i kate ban, &c. In
another dialect the particle te
is added thus, kate ban (k'
tense part., a verb. pron. I,
and te tense part.) I went,
kute ban (u represents the
verb. pron. you) you went,
kite ban (i verb. pron. he or
she) he went, tu kute ban (1
«2
pi., incl.), agam kute ban (1
pi., excl.), we went, kute ban
you (pi.) went, ru kute ban
they went : used sometimes
for pluperfect. See te. As
to ki ban he went, it may also
denote the present, " he goes,"
or what practically is not dis-
tinguishable from it. [Fi. ka
a sign of the past tense, some-
times of the present.] See
the word following the next.
K', d. ga, d. ka, final conj., that,
in order that : prefixed to the
verbal pron. it loses its vowel :
in the d. in which this particle
is pronounced ga, the verb,
pron. is put before it — i ga he
that, i.e., that he, d. ke (k'
that, e he) that he, ka (k' that,
a I) that I, d. a ga : the order
seen in ka that I, ke (or ki)
that he, is the older and more
correct : examples, ka fan that
I go, ke fan that he go, let
him go, and so with every
verb in the language. This is
not a tense but a mood, though
the idea of futurity is implied :
to make the future tense fo
(see bo, mo, uo) is added, thus
ka fo ban I shall go, I will go,
ke fo ban he will go (he shall
go is rather ke ban, i.e., he
must go, but also let him go,
and he may go, and to go or
that he go). As final conj.
A. ka', H. ki, that, in order that
(with the future), Latin ut
(with the subjunctive). It is
not surprising that k' in
some dialects denotes the
future. Thus in Florida it
denotes the future, as ke bosa
85 [ka
(k particle of tense, e he) he
will speak, compare Tigre Mat.
xvi. 27 (when the Son of Man)
shall come (&tmatse), for the
simple future in Ethiopic: this
Tigre ki is k' the particle
in question (A. ka') and i, verb,
pron. or preformative, 3 sing.
[Ef. d. ga, d. k', final con-
junction, Ysabel ge, gi, Rara-
tonga ka, usually kia, Ma. kia
(the a is a dem. added), To.
ke, Mg. h' : Raratonga ka,
future, in some places past,
Florida k', future, Mg. h',
future.]
Ka, d., dem. ki, or ke, this,
there (near), as nauot ka this
chief ; ke, and ga in naga. See
word after next below. [My.
iki, ika, iku, this, that, TaSa.
aki, or ake, this.] E. ka dem.,
seen in zeku, Amh. yeh, orihe,
for Ike this, Arm. dek, dak,
deka', dake', A. daka. With
the Semitic demonstrative ka,
Dillmann, Gr. Eth., § § 62, 65,
seen in these words (whence
E. kia, prefixed to personal
pronouns) compares probably
Assy, aga this (Sayce, Assy.
Gr.)
Notb. — This Semitic dem.
ka is seen also in E. 'elku,
'elketu, Ch. 'illek, A. 'olaka,
&c, these, those.
Ka, prep., usually ki, rarely ka,
as d. i ba ka tafa (commonly
i ba ki tafa) he went to the
hill : ki, or gi (ngi) is to, be-
longing to, of, for, from, and
transitive prep, after verbs ;
prefixed to the nom. suf. it
forms poss. prons., as kagu,
ka]
kama, kana, &c. ; kana his, for
him, is syn. c. kakana, kanana.
[My. ka to, unto, towards,
after, according to, much used
in composition in the forma-
tion of other preps, and ads.,
as in kan transitive prep, after
verbs, and akan to, etc., and
particle of the future tense,
Mg. ho to, for, belonging to,
and particle of the future
tense, Ma. ki to, towards, 4c,
and, after verbs, transitive
prep.] Arali. ka to, of, from,
Himyaritic k? or ki after
verbs transitive prep. ; H. ki is
a conj., that; compare 'ad ki
until (conj.), or until that, with
E. and Amh. 'eska, 'es, for H.
'ad, prep, to, unto. Thus the
same particle which is a final
conjunction (see above, under
k' (ga, ka), final conj.) in A.
and H. is a prep, in Him-
yaritic and Amh.
Ka, or ki, dem., rel. pron., art.
(same as word before the pre-
ceding, above), prefixed to
nouns, as kafika the scented,
that which is odorous. kalu??n
that which lumi, spider ; to
numerals, as karua second,
katolu third, &c. (twoed, &c.) ;
to poss. pron , as kakana,
kanana, kinin, kiana ; to pers.
prons., nom., kinau, kigita.
[My. ka, Mg. ha, Ja. ka, Fi.
ka, Ma. (katea, koiara, &c.) ;
and see under baka, note ]
Kaba sia, d. See koba sia, to
follow.
Ka&e, s., a small basket. [Ma.
kakapu a small basket for
cooked food, so called from
86 [kabuera
being curved (kapu) like the
hollow of the hand (kapu).]
S. kapo' poculum, H. kaf, or
kap, hollow of the hand, pi. a
hollow vessel, pan, or bowl,
H. kafaf to bend, curve.
Ka&6, s., a kind of crab.
Kabe, d. kafini, s., a pigeon, d.
kime. [Ma. kukupa, Tah.
uupa, Am. um, Epi ama, id.]
A. llama' pigeons.
Kabu, s., d. koau, the native
" pudding " (tied up in a
bundle, and cooked in the
oven) ; the main article of
native food : see kofu. [Tah.
ohu a bundle of some food tied
up and baked in the native
oven, Sa. 'ofu'ofu to envelope
in leaves (for cooking).] A.
kobbai, kabab', "kibby", the
national dish of the Arabs,
made of pounded or brayed
wheat and fish or flesh,
gathered into a round mass,
and cooked in the oven. See
the verb under the word kofu.
Kabu, s., fire ; and
Kabu tera gia, v., to burn heating
it (cold food), to warm or heat
(cold food). [My. api, Sa. afi,
Mg. afo fire, Sa. afia, ps., to
be burnt accidentally.] S.
hab to burn, A. hobahib'
(redup.) fire.
Kabu, s. , in talekabu na. See
kobu.
Kabuer, v. i., or a., to be grey-
haired, aged ;
Kabuer, d , s., a husband, lit.
an aged man ;
Kabuera, d., s., a wife, an aged
woman, d. abuera, or abura,
c. art. nabuera, nabura (k
kaf|
elided). A. kabira to be ad-
vanced in age, kabir advanced
in age and fully grown, E.
'eber old woman (k elided).
Kaf, v. i., to be bent (as with
hunger). See also kai. [Ma.
kapu curly, kapu the hollow
of the hand.] H. kafaf to be
bent, kaf hollow of the hand.
Kafika, s., the rose apple. [Fut.
kafika, Fi. kavika, Ml. P.
havih, Malo avica, TaSa.
kabika (khabika), id.] H.
tapuali an apple (so called from
its scent, from nafah), A.
toffall' an apple, not only the
common one, but also the
lemon, citron, ttc.
Note. — The ka-, in kafika.
is not for ta-, but the Oceanic
prefix ka, that (that which).
Kafini, s., d. kabe, q.v.
Kafikafi, v., gatikafi, q.v.
Kafu tia, or gafu tia, v. t., to
wrap up (a thing, as a stone,
with cloth, so as to cover it
all round), same as kofu sa,
which is used of thus wrap-
ping up food to be cooked ;
hence
Kafukafu na, s., pellicle, as of an
egg or fruit (its wrapper or
covering), d. kamu.
Kai, v. i., to be bent, for kaf,
q.v.
Kai, conj., d. syn. bo, conj., q.v.:
ka (see ga, conj.) and i, he, she,
it.
Kai, or kae, tense particle (com-
pounded of ka, q.v., sign of
past tense, and i or e) of the
pluperfect. See i.
Kai (or kei), gai, v. i., to cry,
sing (men, birds), sing out,
87 [kala
sound, <fec. [Ml. P. keke to
sing.] E. nakawa to sound,
give forth a sound (of the
human voice, songs of birds,
«fec), A. naka'a to cry out,
sing out.
Kai, s., a sharp shell used for
scraping : goi a.
Kaimi sia, v. t., to make to exist,
as (the heathen used to say of
the sea, &c.,) i tumana kaimi
sia it made itself to exist ; and
Kaimis, s., c. art. nakaimis one
that does anything hiddenly
and wonderfully, as destroy-
ing an enemy by changing one's
form magically and deceiv-
ing, &c. H. hum arise, exist,
go forth, grow up, stand (be
fixed), Hi. cause to arise, exist,
A. karna, 2, rightly appoint
and dispose (a thing), 4, pre-
pare (evil against a person), &c.
Kainaga, s., c. art., a tribe or
family clan. [Sa. 'aiga a
family, relations, To. kainaga
a meal, victuals.] See kan ia.
Kakana (kakagu, kakama, kaka-
gita, <fcc), poss. pron., syn.
agana, Ac, q.v.: kaka (= aga)
is ka dem. or rel., and ka
prep. [Epi gka, gkana his,
&a]
Kakei, s., c. art. nakakei, a story
(traditional). A. liaka' to
narrate, Nm. liuceya, narra-
tive, tale.
Kaka, s., kaka naniu. See under
aka.
Kakat, s , a bite. See kati a or
kat ia.
Kala, v. i., or a., little, small.
See under bakal ia II. [Mg.
kely, id.]
kal] 88
Kal, s., a child. See under
bakal ia i.
Kalai, d., s., a spider's web, and
d. nilau, and
Kalau, d., id., lit. that which is
woven. [My. labalaba and
lawalawa a spider.] H. 'arab
to weave. See kolau.
Kalau, gkalau. See galau ia.
Kale-baga, s., d. kalemaga, bow-
string (made out of the baga
or maga tree) : kalu.
Kali, s., native spade, digging
stick : kil ia.
Kal ia, or gal ia, q.v., and redup.,
Kalikal ia,
Kalu, and galu, s., bowstring,
kalu nasu : kale in kale baga.
See kalu tia.
Kalu, s., d. kul, cloth, clothing,
lit. a covering ; and
Kalu tia (same as galu tia), d.
kulu tia, v. t., to cover, as
with a mat or rug, i kalu ki
nakalu he covers (himself)
with cloth or clothing, i kalu,
d. i kulu or i gulu, middle
sense, he covers (himself), as
with bedclothes, i.e., mats or
such like, also to put the bow-
string on a bow (or galu tia),
and to clasp round with the
arms ( a violent man, to re-
strain him, or a pig, &c,
stooping to lift it in order to
carry it) : the vowels of this
word are changed in kalu,
kulu, kele (galu, gulu, gele),
golu. See similar changes of
vowels in the My. word under
kela, infra. A. galla, 2, to
cover, 5, to be covered, clothed,
gullu coverings, clothes, &c,
as rues : the idea of covering
[kamkam
arises from that of wrapping
round or rolling up — see the
eg. H. galal to roll, and its
related words in Ges. Diet.,
and see below, under kela,
kelu.
Kalumi, s., the spider, lit. that
which lu»ii. See \umi to
swell.
Kama, d. for kabu, in anekama,
q.v.
Kama, d., verb, suf., 2 pi., you,
d. mu.
Kamam, d. for kinami, q.v.
Kami, d., pers. pron., 2 pi., you.
Kami a, v. t., to seize, grip, take
with the fingers, or with
nippers, compress or squeeze
between two things (like alat
ia) ; same as kamut ia, q.v.
Kamu na, s., pellicle, d. for
kafukafu na, q.v.
Kamut ia, or gamut ia, v. t., to
take, grasp with the fingers,
nip, then (like alat ia) to nip
or cut with scissors, to cut the
hair ; hence
Kam, s., c. art. nikam, native
tongs (a split stick for grasping
hot oven stones, and lifting
them), lit. that which (kami
or kamut) nips, seizes, grasps,
d. kau, q.v., or gau (agau), and
Kamkam, s., scissors. [My. cubit,
or chubit, Ja. juwit, to nip,
pinch, My. angkub = agau,
tongs, nippers, Ha. umiki to
pinch with the fingers, Fi.
qamu-ta to take hold of, or
hold as with pincers, to shut
(the mouth), ai qamu, anything
to qamuta with (My. angkub)
as pincers, bullet mould, vice.]
H. kamas to squeeze together,
KANA-]
hence to take with the hand,
kamat to hold fast with the
hands, to sieze firmly, kafas
contract, shut (as the mouth),
kabaS to take, grasp with the
hand, A. kabasa to take with
the tips of the fingers, kabas'a
take, gi'asp with the hand.
Kana-, pref. to nom. suf., forming
poss. pron., kanagu, kanama,
kanana, ifec. : kanana, d. kinin,
is syn. c. kakana, q.v. [Epi
kana-, d. kona-, as kanaku,
my, &c] Kana- is ka, dem.,
and na, prep. See ni.
Kana, v. i., also kin, and ki, d.
kano, to shrink from, to be
unable ; i kana bat ia he is
unable to do it (shrinks from,
or is afraid), i sua bo kin, or
bo ki, he takes (acquires) a
mind shrinking from, afraid,
unable (to do something). H.
ka'ah to be fearful, faint-
hearted, A. ka'a to abstain or
decline from fear.
Kan ia, v. t., to eat, redup. kani-
kani: tea kanien that which
is for eating, nakanien act of
eating, the eating, food, finaga,
q.v., food, bagan ia to feed,
make to eat, or fagan ia, q.v.,
and faga, fagafaga, nakabu
faga devouring (eating) fire,
nalagi kanikani a strong wind,
kana a squall ; kainaga a
tribe, family clan (from eating
together). [Fi. kana to eat,
kani-a, to eat, vakani-a feed,
cause to eat, used also of the
heat of the sun, and violence
of the wind, Sa. ai, My. makan,
Mg. (m transposed) homana,
hanina, to eat.] A. 'akala to
89 [kanoa
eat, 3, eat together, 4, to feed,
cause to eat, 'akll' one who
lives with one, messmate,
familiar friend (cf. kainaga,
and A. 3), H. 'akal to eat ; A.
'akala, 2), to scratch (thehead),
'akila to be itchy, Ef. makini-
kini to be itchy.
Kana, s., a squall. See under
preceding word.
Kanau, or kanao, s., d. kanoa,
kano, child ; nasutna ni kanoa.
or kano, the womb, lit. house
of the child (or fcetus). In E.
Mai this is called kiri fanau
the cover (kiri = kuli = skin
or covering), or skin of the
child. This word is familiarly
used by men to each other as
a vocative, as kanao, or kano,
mate ! (child !), pi. kanu maga
you people, d. nakanoa, kano
ni Efate man of Efate, pi.
nakan Efate people of Efate,
lit. children of Efate, d. nati
ni Efate (see ani, ati, child) :
hence kano is sometimes equiv-
alent to " person," as kano
sa, kano uia, a bad, a good
person ;
Kan, c, art. nakan, children (of
a place) ;
Kano, or kanoa, s. — see kanao ;
Kanoa, s., c. art. nakanoa, see
kanao. [My. kanak child,
related to anak, id., as Ef.
kanao to ani, q.v., child : that
is, kanak and kanao have the,
prefix ka, and kanao = that
born, that which is born, so
Mg. zanaka (anaka), with a
different prefix or article, and
Sa. fanau has the prefix fa or
£', the anau being identical
KANO]
with the anao in kanao.] A.
walada, H. yalad, E. walada
to bring forth, bear (of a
mother), to beget (of males),
and used in E. also of
the earth bringing forth its
produce.
Kano, or kanoa, d. kanau, or
Kanoka, v. i., or a., to be pro-
duced (as it were born, of
yams), nam i kanoa (d. kanau)
the yam is pi'oduced, born, or
growing (as if the insat had
brought it forth new born),
naui kano new or growing
yams. See preceding word.
Kara, or gara, redup. garagara,
v. i., or a,, strong, hard, and
d. karakarai, or garakarai,
strong, tagaragara strong,
vehement. [My. kras hard,
violent, strong, vehement,
force, Mg. hery power,
strength, force, might, mihery
strong, powerful, mighty, hery
being forced to, compelled,
constrained.] See next word.
Kara, or gara, redup. garagara,
v. i., or a., to be dry, bagara
ia, v. c, to make dry, to dry
(a thing), nakaran the being
dry, also the being (bare and
dry) poor, poverty ; kara dry,
then (see preceding word)
hard, strong, stiff, rigid (as
dry wood). See also kara, s.,
and makarakara, v. i., infra.
[My. kring dry, kring kan to
dry (a thing), Mg. haraka
dried up, scorched, parched.]
H. harar to burn, be hot (cf.
A. liarra, E. liarara) ; the
primary idea is that of "the
shrivelled roughness of things
90 [kar ia
that are dried or scorched,'*
Ges. ; to be burned, to be
dried up.
Kara, s., c. art. nekara, the
nettle (so called from its
burning ; compare makarakara
to be burning, to be hot, as
the mouth with pepper, or the
skin stung by a nettle). See
preceding word, and compare
H. liarul the nettle, so called
from its burning, from the
root haral = liarar.
Kara ki, or gara ki, v,, to seize,
grasp, and
Kar ia, or gar ia, v. t., to
scratch, scrape, shave, seize,.
redup. garikar ia, also karu
tia, or garu tia, v. t., to
scratch, and karo i, or garo i,
v. t., to scratcli, scrape, redup.
garokaro, and karokaro, karo-
karoa, or garokaroa, itchy,
scratchy, scabby, and garu
and tagaru, v. t., to seize,
grasp, garu sera (grasp every-
thing) be grasping, redup.
garukaru, id., karo to scrape,
sweep, to swim (i.e., sweep
with the arms — to swim with-
out doing this is afa, or of a),
karati, karakarati scratched,
marked, scored ; kari, s., a
plane (from being moved with
a sweeping or sawing motion,
or shaving) ; kare sia, or kares
ia, v. t., to scratch, scrape ;
gure sia, v. t., to gnaw,
scranch. [My. garis, Ja.
garit to scratch, score, garu to
rake, &c, garut scratch, scrape,
claw, garok to scrape, garap
grasp at, garaji a saw, greb to
gnaw, karat, karot, kfirot
KARATl]
grind or gnash the teeth, make
a grating noise, karut to
scratch, karok to rub, curry
(a horse), kikir to rasp, file, a
rasp, file, avaricious, Mg.
haratra shaved, manaratra to
shave, kory gnaw, sci'ape, Ei.
kari, or karikari, v. i., kari-a,
karitaka, v. t., to scrape, karo-
karo prickly heat, itch, Sa.
'ili a rasp, file, saw.] A.
garra to drag, snatch, sweep,
seize, H. garar to scrape,
sweep, saw (primary meaning),
to drag or snatch away, to
saw (niegerah a saw), to gargle,
produce rough sounds in the
throat (see Ef. karo, throat,
ivfra), cognates S. gra' to
shave, H. gara' scratch, scrape
(see Ef gur ia, magir ia), &c.
Karati, and redup.,
Karakarati, a., see kar ia.
Karaf ia, v. t., to scratch, scrape
(the earth or ground) ; hence
Karafi, v. i., to creep on the
ground (as it were scratching
or scraping on the ground) :
see kar ia. Karafi a is kara fi a,
fi, q.v., prep.
Karaka, v. i., to move tremul-
ously (creep), as crabs and
suchlike animals do; karaka
ki naburuma (a mother-in-law)
creeps or shrinks away from
her son-in-law (ti'embling and
afraid) : kara-ka, compare pre-
ceding word.
Kare sia, or kares ia, d. karas ia,
v. t., to scratch, scrape, and.
from the idea of scraping to-
gether, beinggathered together,
Karesi, or karisi, s., a cluster
(as of cocoanuts), and
91 [kas.v
Karesibum, pr. n., of a person
mentioned in a myth, one of
the two sons of a woman who
came down from heaven, lit.
blossoming-cluster. See kar
ia.
Karei sa, d. karei ki nia, v. t., to
dislike, be averse from, hate.
[My. iri to hate, Mg. hala
hated, detested, abhorred.]
A. kariha to dislike, abhor.
Karei, or garei turi a, to dislike
(the thing he is bidden or sent
to do) abiding with him (some-
one). See turi a, and cf. kita
roa sa.
Kari, s., a plane. See kar ia.
Karl, v. i., to hasten, takari, id.
[Cf. Ma. kari rush along
violently.] A. kara, 1, 8, to
hasten.
Kari-iki (kariki), s., little child,
little children, and
Kari-kiki (karikiki), s., id. (kiki
little), and
Kari-riki (kai'iriki), s., d., H.
'eker a shoot, and riki little.
Karo, karoi, garoi, v. i., to swim
(sweeping with the arms) : kar
ia.
Karokaro, and
Karokaroa, scabby, itchy : kar ia.
Karo na, s., c. art., dd. gato na
(garo na),kanro na, the throat,
gullet. H. garon the throat
from garar (see kar ia), E.
guere the throat.
Karo, v. i., d., to be uncovered,
have the clothes off, naked.
H. galah to be naked. See
girigiri.
Karu tia, or karut ia. See kar
ia.
Kasa, and kasafa, also kasana,
kasana]
inter, ad., as what 1 how 1
why 1 d. kua : ka, ad., as, and
sa, or safa, q.v., what 1 ?
Kasana, inter, ad., as what 1
kasa, with the dem. na suffixed.
Kasau, s.. c. art., small brand),
fruit stalk, nakasau na its
small branch, d. (transposed)
sakau, id., and also a reef.
See sakau. [My. gusong a
reef of rocks.] A. kas'ib'
long and slender bi-anch, H.
liisbe', pi. const., " the ends,
i.e., the roots of the mountains
(in the depth of the sea),"
Jon. ii. 7; perhaps the branches
of the mountains (running out
into the sea).
Kas ia, or kasi a, gas ia, v. t., to
rub, wipe. [My. gosok, gosot,
gosoki, gisik, kisil, to rub,
Mg. kasoka rubbed, mikasoka
to rub.] A. kas's'a, 3), to rub,
lias'a' (kas'w') to rub, wipe.
Kas-toru, s., handkerchief, lit.
sweat-wiper : kas ia, and
toru, q.v.
Kasi, v. i., or a., to be sweet,
redup. gkasi (gakasi), dd. gari,
gatr, kati. [Of. Mg. hanitra
fragrance, manitra sweet smell-
ing, My. manis sweet, luscious,
•mild, gentle.] A. nakusa to
be sweet, nakls' sweet, frag-
rant with sweet odour.
Note. — The k elided and
initial n retained in My. and
Mg., and the final has also
been elided in Tah. mona
sweet, and Ef. mina sweet,
pleasant.
Kasu, s., an old man, a kind of
priest or sacred man. [Fi.
qase an old man.] S. kas'is'o
92 [kat ia
an old man, a priest, from
kas' to grow old (Freytag),
A. kas's' a Christian Presbyter.
Kasu, or kas, d. kau, s., c. art.
nakasu, tree, wood. [Epi. dd.
iesi, lakai, Ml. dd. nice, nai,
TaSa. tagai (taghai), Fut-
rakau, Sa. laau, My. kayu,
Mg. hazo, tree, wood, Mg.
hazo hard.] H. 'es tree,
wood, Ch. 'a', from H. 'asah,
A. 'asa' to be hard, firm.
Note. — Kasu has the art. k.
Kasua, or gasua, d. kasu, v. L,
or a., hard, strong, redup.
kaskasua, id., nakasuana, s.,
the being hard or strong,
strength. [Ja kakas hard,
firm, rigid, stiff, cf. kuwasa
strong.] H. kas'ali, A. kasa'
to be hard, stiff, H. kas'eh
hard, firm, fast, strong, power-
ful.
Note. — In Ef. naiona i
gasua his heart is hard, meri
gasua ki nia treat him hardly,
or with violence.
Kat, or kati, v. i., to thunder,
tifai i kat, or i gat, the thunder
thunders. See following word.
Kat ia, or gat ia, v. t., to make
fast, as nakasu i gati natua na
the log makes fast his foot, i.e.,
jambs it and holds it firmly
fixed against something ; to
compress between two things,
hence to bite, redup. katikati,
na kakat, s., a bite, fikit to
bite each other, savage, to be
pressed together, hence to be
inspissated, clotted, curdled,
katak, redup. gkatak, gakatak,
with the suffixed k as in kanok
or kanoka ; nalagi i katikati
KATAU]
the wind becomes fixed (in a
certain direction) ; i tua gat
ia sa he gave him by compact
or computation for it, i mate
gat ia he died by compact or
computation for it, i.e., he died
for it as for sin ; i kati, or gati,
to thunder, is said to be the
same word, tifai i gat, and
when a " thunderbolt " rends
a tree it is said tifai i gati
bora, ia the thunder bites, rend-
ing it (6ora I.) The Efatese say
that the thunder has teeth,
and the idea in tifai i gat is
that the tifai is biting i.e.,
grinding its teeth together, or
rending with its teeth. [Ma.
kati block up, closed, kakati a
bundle, sheaf, and, v. t., tie
up in bundles, katikati, v.i.,
champ, move the jaw as in
eating, Fi. kata (vei kata =
fikit) to bite, a., close together,
as boards on a floor, My. gigit
to bite, gigitan a bite, Mg.
hehitra, s., hold, grasp, seizure,
clutch, bite, kaikitra a bite,
bitten, manaikitra, v. t., to
bite, kekerina being bitten.]
A. 'akada to bind, fasten, to
make a compact, to compute,
to coagulate, become clotted,
inspissated.
Katau, s., a kind of crab. [Cf.
My. katam a crab ; to nip,
snip off.] Cf. A. katama to
bite, cut off. See koto a kind
of crab, infra.
Kati, d. for kasi, sweet, redup.
kakati.
Kate, tense part., d., past, a
kate, ku kate, i kate, au kate,
ifcc. : ka, and te.
9:3 [kau
Kate, d. Same as a kate, but
with the a verb. pron. after
the k', or between the k' and
te. See ka.
Kate, s., c. art. nakate, any-
thing, a thing, lit. the that-
that, d. nete (ne te, the that).
See ka, and te. [Fi. ka a
thing,]
Kate, s., kate ni rarua the stick
on the outside of the canoe
superstruction on the side opp.
to the sama.
Katema, ad., outside of the
house. H. hus outside, and
ema house. See imrum, suma.
In ekatema, q.v.
Katoro, s., a basket. A. ka'tarai
a basket.
Kau, or gau, redup. kaukau (c.
art. agau, d. ni kam, tongs,
forceps, nippers, for grasping),
v. t., to grasp with the hand, i
kau na&e he grasps a club
(carried on his shoulder), then
to carry anything on the
shoulder, i kau nauos he grasps
the oar (in rowing), i kaukau
nara nakasu (the flying fox)
grasps the branch of a tree
(moving along it as it were
hand over hand, till it finds a
resting place), hence ba kaukau
(of men) go seeking a resting
place. See kam, kamut ia
[My. gawa, Fi. kau ta, to
carry.]
Kau, d. au, a lizard, perhaps
from grasping or clinging.
Kau, v. i., to bend (as with
hunger), also kai, and kaf, q.v.
Kau, s., d. for kasu, tree, wood.
Kau, v. i., or a., d. for kasua,
hard, strong.
tcaua]
Kaua, s., an open worked wicker
basket or trap for catching
fish : so called because
Kaukaua, a., full of openings or
apertures, as if windowed, or
apertured : the final a is the
a. ending. A. kaww' an
opening in a wall, kawwai
a window (Nm. couwa dormer
window), Ch. kaw a window,
from kawah, or kavah.
Kaukau, s., c. ait. nakaukau,
the upper cross (i.e., above
and across the kiat) or binding
sticks between a canoe and its
outrigger (sama) ; from grasp-
ing or holding together, kau,
v. t.
Kg, or ke (cf. kei), dem., this.
See ka, id., and ko id. ; kerua,
ketolu, d. karua, &c.
Ke, d., that he, k', final conj.,
and e (or i) verb, pron , 3 sing.:
ka, k.
Ke, keke, interj. See ake ! and
ako ! [Florida ke ! keke !]
Ke, d., verb pron., 2 sing., you,
dd. k, ma, ko.
Ketaku, or keitaku, s., the
end of a canoe, . ad.
for ko itaku. See
hinder
behind
kobe.
Keikei, s., c. art. nakeikei, tattoo
marks or lines upon the skin.
[Fi. qia to tattoo.] See goi a
(or koi a, or kei a).
Kei naniu, for koi naniu. See
goia or goi a.
Kei, d , dem., this, that (near),
for koi, q.v.
Kekel, s., d. for kal, child,
infant. See under bakal ia I.
Kei, redup. gkel (kekel), v. i.,
to sweep round or wheel in
9-1 [kelu
curves (of a bird in flight with-
out moving its wings) ; and
Kela, s., the curved beam or
wall-plate that goes round the
end of a native house ; and
Kele tia, v. t. (see golu tia,
gele tia, gel ia, gulu tia,
kalutia), as keleti, kei, or golu
nasu put the bowstring on a
bow, nuana i laba i keleti
nara nakasu its ( a tree's) fruit
plentiful bends the branch of
the tree, i keleti wago (or
other heavy thing to be
carried) he stoops down and
clasps the pig (or other heavy
thing) to lift and carry it,
hence kelakela, or gelakela (of
a people carrying such things,
as in going to a naleouan) ; and
Kelu-faki v. t., to round or
double a cape (of a canoe or
ship), eg. syn. ili-hki ; and
Kelu, a., going round, as bagana
kilu its (the army's) rear or
hinder part (see bago, baga)
going round, making a detour
(to surprise the enemy). [My.
guling, goling, giling, gulung,
to turn round, revolve, roll,
roll up, igal to whirl, curly,
and ikal to whirl, gyration,
Mg. kodia a wheel, rolled,
mikodia, mikodiadia to roll,
and mikodinkodina, ifec, also
koriana, twirled, mikoriana to
twirl, and mitsingerina, mit-
singeringerina to turn, wind,
roll, revolve.] H. 'agal, i.q.
galal, to roll, to revolve, 'agar,
hence 'agur revolving, whirling,
gyrating (of a bird in flight),
A. karkara to turn (a mill)
round, 2, to revolve, wheel (as
ken]
a bird in flight), H. gilgal a
wheel, ifec.
Ken, for kana, v. i.
Kerikeri, v. L, to be deep, as a
pit, the sea. A. Ra'ara to be
deep.
Kesa, kesakesa, gesa, gesakesa.
See kisa.
Ki, ad., see ka, ad., as : also in
kite.
Ki, d., that (because) he : k',
that, and i, verb, pron., 3 sing. :
ka, k\
Ki, d., deni., this, or k6, id. : ka,
dem.
Ki, v. i. See ken, kana, d. kano.
Ki, prep, (the usual form), c.
art. aki the, that which to, or
of, also gi, agi. See ka, prep.
Ki, same as ka, art.
Ki, redup. kiki, v. i. See gi,
gki (giki), v. i.
Ki, d., verb, pron., 2 pi., you,
dual kia : ku.
Kia-, or kie-, pref. to the nom.
suf. forming possessive pro-
nouns kiagu, kiama, kiana,
kiagita, kiagami, kiainu, kiara
or kiata : kiana his (countiy,
plantation, house, vicinity) ;
kia (or kie) is ki, dem., the,
that (same as the first ka in
kakana), that which, and a or
e, q.v., prep. The use of
kakana is different, his or
its (as a weapon to kill him,
a door for a house, oar for
a boat, ifec.) [Epi kiaku,
kiamo, kiano, kiandro, kie-
memi, kiemiu, kialo, same as
Ef. kiagu, kiama, &c]
Kia, d., verb. pron. 2 dual, you
two, d. ko ro. [Epi ko, An.
ekau, id.]
95 [kili
Kiag, d. for kiama, thy (vicinity) :
kia-, and g suf. pron., 2 sing.
Kiat, s., c. art. nakiat, the sticks
which cross from the canoe to
the outrigger (sama) joining
them together. [Sa. Tah.
iato, Ta. niciatu, Fut. akiato,
Ha. iako, id., Ma. kiato
thwart of a canoe.] A. gaiz'
pi. gawaiz', 'agwiza£, gizan',
Sic, beam which crosses from
one wall to another joining
them together, from gaza to
cross over, go across.
Kie, s., c. art. nakie, the plant
whose leaf is baked, dried, and
split into thin threads to be
woven into mats, &c. [Sa.
'ie a fine mat, cloth.] See
under neko.
Kigami, d. kinami.
Kigita, d. syn. nigita.
Kiki, v. i., or a., and iki in kariki,
small. [To. iki id.] See under
neko.
Kikita, or gkita, redup. of kita.
Kilakila, a., knowing sagacious,
shy, i meta kilakila (of an
animal). [Fi. kila wild, sus-
picious, on the lookout, as an
animal.] A. 'akala, 1, 2, to
be intelligent, prudent, saga-
cious, 'akil', a., id.
Kil ia, or kili a, v. t., to dig,
hence kali, s., a digging stick,
and nakili, s., a current (as in
the sand, lit. that which digs).
[Sa. 'eli to dig, Ma. 'eli to be
dug, My. gali to dig, Mg. hady
ditch, trench, &c, dug, mihady
to dig.] E. karaya, A. kara',
H. karah, Ch. kera', to dig.
Kili, s., c. art. nakili, d., a cur-
rent : kili a.
KILIKILl]
Kilikili, v., redup. of kili a, used
of many digging : ru kilikili
they (as the people of a dis-
trict and whose yams are ripe)
dig.
KUiti, s., a sow, a mother-pig.
[An. karite, or kerite, an
animal that has had young.]
Kiliti, lit. that brings forth
(young), or the bringer forth,
i.e., mother. See ki or ka,
art., and for liti, see ani, note.
Kin, s. See ikin, nest.
Kin, el., clem., this : ki dem., and
in dem. [Assy, agannu this,
aga dem., and annu dem.]
Kinam, d. kinami.
Kinami, pers. pron., 1 pi., excl.,
we, they.
Kinau, pers. pron., 1 sing., I,
shortened kinu, dd. keino, anu,
enu : ki, art., or dem. prefix,
and nau (for naku, hence nom.
suf. gu, d. k). [An. ainyak,
Epi. nagku, TaSa. enau, Sa.
o a'u (for ko aku), My. aku,
Mg. izaho, aho, I.] H. 'anoki,
shortened 'ani, Assy, anaku,
Aram, 'ana', 'eno', E. 'ana, I.
Kinit ia, also ginit ia and gunut
ia, v. t., nip with the fingers,
nakini na the fingers (nippers),
kini gote fia nip, breaking it
(reeds for thatching), hence
nakini-got reeds for thatching.
[Fi. kini-ta nip, pinch between
finger and thumb, Sa. 'ini to
take hold of with the nails,
pinch, ps. 'initia, Ma.' kini,
Ha. iniki, My. gantas (cf. Ef.
d. gint ia, for ginit ia) to
break oft", nip off, snap off.]
A. liarasa, to nip (with the
fingers), pinch, grasp with the
96 [kihi
points of the fingers or hand,
snip off.
Kini na, s., c. art., the fingers,
or toes, lit. the nippers, or
graspers ; also claws, talons.
Kini gote fia, v. t., and
Kinigot, s., c. art., see kinit ia.
Kintu, dem., that (near) : kin,
dem., and tu.
Kinu, I, see kinau.
Kiri, d., s., c. art. nakiri, d. syn.
ori, rubbing stick for produc-
ing fire. [Sa. 'ili rasp, file,
saw.] See kar ia, magiri a.
Kirikiri, s., gravel, pebble. [Sa.
'ili'ili, Ma. kirikiri, My. kri-
kil, karikil, karikil, gravel,
pebble.] H. garger, A. girgir'
a berry, from H. garar, see
kar ia, eg. A. garal' gravel.
Kirikiri, a., small, like pebbles,
in bia kirikiri little children.
See preceding word.
Kis, s., a shell, used for cutting.
A. giz'a£ a shell, from gaza'a
to cut.
Kis, d., dem., this, here : ki,
dem., and se, dem.
Kisa, a., in mita kisa blind (the
eyes sunk into the head). A.
has', id. And
Kisa, or gisa, v. i., or a., redup.,
Kisakisa, v. i., or a., to be
putting forth leaves, hence to
be green ; hence
Kisa, s., c. art., nakisa, d. takis,
a green stone or chalk (used
only for painting himself by a
a chief), a chief's grave (in the
bush, sacred). A. li'awisa to
have the eyes sinking into the
head, 4, to put forth leaves (a
plant), to germinate.
Kihi na, d. kui na, q.v. : kihi na,
KIS IA]
i.e., kisi na (h being for s in
that d.)
Kis ia, or kisi a, v. t., also gis ia,
redup. giskis, to feel, touch,
lo giskis to look, exploring (as
at a person's body partly un-
covered). A. gassa to feel,
touch, to explore or grope
with the hand or with the
eyes, H. gas'as', Pi., E. gasasa
to feel, touch, S. gas' to feel,
touch, to explore.
Kisau, v. t., d. kisur, to remove,
get out, stand apart : i kisau
ki nabua he removes from, or
stands out, or gets out of the
i-oad, ba kisau get out (of the
way), remove, stand away. A.
Rasa', kasww', kuguww', kasa',
to stand apart, to be remote.
Kistu, clem., this here : kis
dem., and tu.
Kisur (ksur), d. for kisau. See
(d.) esu.
Kita, a., little, small, li kita
small place (name of small
boat entrance of Havannah
Harbour) opp. to li leba big-
place (name of large entrance
to Havannah Harbour). [Sa.
iti, itiiti, small, few, Ma. and
Tah. iti, itiiti, small, little.
My. kate, kite, diminutive.]
E. liasasa, hasa to be small,
minute.
Kita (rare), or kite, ad., as, takes
the verb, pron., as i kite fatu
it is as (or like) a stone, kite
or kite uan as, as if, i bisa i
kite i maieto he speaks as if he
were angry, i marafi kite nifila
it is quick as lightning. A.
kada like, as this, as that.
See ki, as, and te, kite, or
97 [ko
kita, lit., as that, or like
that.
Kita, or kite, conj., or, d. ko :
rarua kite boat a canoe or
boat; inter, particle at the
end of sentences, d. ko, as i
bano kite 1 has he gone ?
fully this is, i bano kite i tika 1
has he gone or not 1 For
kite, disj. conj., see ko, conj.,
infra.
Kita, v., to divine, redup. kikita,
gkita, lit. to perceive or feel
with the eye or the mind (cf.
rogo, rorogo), bati kita ia, or
gita ia to try (cf. bati rog ia),
lit. make or do feeling or per-
ceiving or knowing or finding
out. [Ma. kite to see, know,
perceive, find out, discover,
matakite to divine, s. one who
foresees an event.] A. wag-
ada to find with the eye or the
mind (a thing sought), to per-
ceive by the feeling of the
body (a thing), or by the
mind, 4, make to find or to
perceive.
Kita ia, and gita ia, v. t., to hate,
redup. kitakita ia, to be en-
vious of, to hate ; and
Kita roa sa, or kita roa i, to hate
turning after him (someone),
as a boy sent a message meet-
ing another boy and (hating
to do the message) turns after
him to play. See roa. H.
kut, followed by prep, be, to
loathe* also kus and nakat.
Kita, in bakita and bakitakita.
See makitakita, id.
Kite. See kita, ad.
Ko, verb, suf., 2 sing., you (pi.
for sing.), dd. k, ke, ma.
S
KO]
Ko, d., verb, pron., 2 sing., you,
d. ku.
Ko, sign of imperative, 2 pi.
(sing, ba), lit. that you :
k' final conj., and o fragment
of pers. pron., 2 pi.
Ko, cl., ad. of assent., d. syn. na,
and red up.,
Koko, id., d. ko, interj. See
ako and kori : ko, dem.
Ko, ad., now, d. syn. uo (wo), as
i ko toko (d. i uo toko) he
now remains (has not yet gone)
ba ko toko remain now, or
just now, d. syn. ba i toko
(bai toko) ; and i ko toko, d.
i uo toko, in another d. is i ta
toko. For i, uo, and ta, see
these words. H. koh, ko'
(from kahu, k' as, and the
pers. pron., 3 sing., as a dem.,
like as this) (so, here), now.
[An. ko just now ; in this
way].
Ko, dem. See koi, kofeta,
kofakal : E. ku (ka dem., and
u (o) pron., 3 sing.)
Ko, d., disj. conj., or ; inter,
particle at the end of a
sentence as, i bano ko ? has
he gone 1 fully, i bano ko i
tika 1 has he gone or not ? D.
syn., in both uses, kite or
kita. [An. ka, id., Er. ku or.]
H. ki or, 1 Kings xviii. 27, syn.
c. A., S., 'aw, or, in this
passage).
Note. — Kite and ko have
both a dem. suffixed to ki, the
former te, the latter o (the o
in the preceding word), and
therefore lit. denote or — this.
Ko, s., c. art. nako na (for n
ako), the face, a part ; nakona
98 [kohu
his face (see nako, infra),
nakonako ki to face (someone),
nako nafakotoen a part of
the price, ba tu au nakon give
me a part, nakon ru bano
nakon ru toko a part (of the
whole number of men) go, a
part remain ; and, without
the article, shortened to ko,
as ko-be ni rarua, or nakobe,
the fore part of a canoe, ke-
itaku ni rarua, or nako-itaku
the after-part of a canoe ;
ko-be the part before, the
front, i baki kobe he goes to
the front, ke-itaku the part
behind, behind, i baki ke-
itaku he goes behind, or to
the rear. A. wag^' (wagto)
the face, a part or side, wiga£
a band, wagaha, 3, to face
(someone).
Koa, a., fibrous, stringy, as a
yam when cooked, naui koa :
aka, ako, and a a. ending.
Koakoa, redup. of koa, very
stringy or fibrous.
Koau, s., c. art. nakoau, d. kabu
the native pudding. See kofu
sa.
Koba sia, v. t., to follow, to
drive away, to pursue : i koba
na&ona he follows his own
heart (does or strives to do
what is in his mind) ; v. r.,
hkoba to follow each other, or
to drive away each other ;
Kobausi a, v. t., i.e., koba, and
usi to track ; to follow after.
A. kafa to follow, to drive
away.
Kobara, s., see gobara : ko dem.
prefixed.
Kobu, d. See kubu.
kofa]
Kofa, s., and red up.,
Kofakofa, s., an alcove, tem-
porary house or shed, tent.
H. kubali a tent, chamber (so
called from its arched form,
from kabab to make gibbous
and hollow, to arch, to vault).
A. kuhbat tent, vault, cham-
ber, hence the word alcove.
Kofakal, s., a herd of pigs cared
for, lit. the or that cared for:
ko dem., and fakal.
Kofe na, s., nakofena, his skull,
the skull. A. killf the
skull.
Kofeta, d., s., fata, q.v., with
dem. ko prefixed, a bench,
platform.
Kofu sa, v. t., to enclose (as
fish in a net), wrap up or en-
close (as a pudding in leaves,
to be put in the oven). See
kabu, d. koau, the native pud-
ding ; and
Kofukofua, a., redup., and with
a. ending a, bent up at the
edges, as a shovel, or any-
thing, as it were' rolled up or
turned over. The pudding,
koau, is laid on a mass of
leaves, very wide and long,
which are rolled up or over it
all round, completely enclos-
ing it, and then tied up. [Fi.
kovuta, kokofu blistered (small
balls or pimples), kovu banana
leaf in which native puddings
are done up, d., a coat, kovuna
to do up in a kovu, Sa. 'ofu a
garment, 'o'ofu put on a gar-
ment, 'ofu 'ofu to envelope in
leaves (for cooking), 'ofulua
twenty leaf dishes of native
food ; Ma. kohu, kokoliu, a.,
99 [koko
somewhat concave, bent or
warped so as to become con-
cave (cf. Ef. kofukofua), kohu
to cook in a native oven any
article contained in a hollow
vessel, To. kofu to enclose or
wrap up, to clothe, Ha. ohu
to roll up (as the sea that
does not break) a roller, a
swell, ohua a crowd of people,
ohui to twist round, ohuohu
heavy, burdensome, a wreath
worn round the neck, to dress
in uniform, Tali, ohu a bank
or ridge of earth thrown up, a
bundle of native food tied up
and baked in the native oven,
to bend downwards as the
branch of a tree, to stoop, to
twirl round as a wheel.] A.
kabba to roll up into a ball, to
make into balls (food) for
cooking, to invert, to stoop, to
be heavy, A. kobba^', kabab'
(see under kabu, d. koau,
supra) : kobba£ also denotes
a mob of horses, crowd or
mass of men, herd of camels,
a ball of threads rolled up to-
gether, a heavy ponderous
thing, a hill, kabkaba, 2, to
be wrapped up, enveloped, to
wrap up or envelope oneself
(in one's garment).
Koi, d., dem., this, d. kei : ko
dem., and i dem.
Koia (ko-ia, ko-ya), same as
preceding.
Koi, s., and
Koika, s., a boundary, from
Koi a, or ko ia, v. t. See goi a.
Koko, s., c. art. nekoko, reddish
juice or paint for nafona made
from a plant (also called ne-
KOKORO] 100
koko) : goko ia. [To. koka, ,
Sa. 'o'a, id.]
Kokoro, s. See under gor ia.
Kokoti, s., a net for catching-
fish : koto.
Kola, d., and redup.,
Kokola, v. i., to be bent, kola ki
na buruma (a mother-in-law)
bends or stoops to the son-in-
law. See kele tia (golu tia)
&c.
Kola, v. i., and redup.,
Kokola, v. i, or gkola, to be
arid, dry ; hence
Kola, s., a dry stick or log. A.
kahala, kohol', to be arid, dry.
Kola, v. i., and gola, and redup.
gkola (kokola), to call out,
cry out, to speak loud ; hence
Kola oli, s., echo, lit. calling out
like. See oli a. [Fi. kaila to
shout, Mg. akora, s., shouting.]
H. Kara' to cry out, call out.
Kolau, redup. gkolau. See galau
ia.
Kolau, s. See kalau, spider's
web, dd. kalai, nilau (i.e., lau) ;
namera kolau web of fat on
the inwards of a pig. [An.
nilva = kolau, nilvanilva —
namera-kolau].
Kolau (see preceding word), pr. n.,
prob. originally given to a
warrior full of stratagems.
See also the verb under kalau,
to weave, to lie in wait, watch
in ambush (as in war). A.
'aruba to be wily or cunning.
Kolobu na, s., its joint (of a
bamboo or reed), applied also
to the knobs or rivets on a
tank. A. karibu joint of a
bamboo or reed.
Kolofa, v. c, to be bent, as
[koro
with hunger or famine,
redup. gkoldfa. See lofa ia,
lofa. The prefixed ko is the
dem. [Fi. kalove bent, from
love-ca to bend.]
Komam, dd. kinami, kiraam.
Kon, v. i., or a. (with ending n),
and redup.,
Kokon, gkon, to be bitter (of
anything), kona ki to be bitter
towards (someone), namarita na
i gkon his belly is bitter (he
is angry). [Sa. 'ona, 'o'ona,
bitter, sour.] A. ko' and
ko'a' very bitter.
Konai na, s., c. art. nakonai na,
his gall or bile : kon bitter.
Kona, v. i., gona, to stand firm,
to be fixed, firm, then, to have
the mind fixed upon, to be
occupied with, kona ki. H.
kun prop, to stand upright,
Hi. to set up, found, then to
apply one's mind to, Ni. to
stand firm, fixed, steady, firm,
constant.
Kona gor ia, v., to stand firm
protecting him (as in war).
See gor ia.
Kona ia, or konai a, v. t., and
gonai a, to pierce (as a board
with an instrument like an
awl). E. kanawa to pierce.
Konai sai a, v., to pierce through.
See sai a.
Kore na, s., see gore na, brother's
sister, sister's brother, children
of the same mother (actually),
or, if not, members of the same
nakainaga.
Kor ia. See gor ia.
Koro sa, v. t., conceal it (as
misconduct of which one is ac-
cused) : gor ia.
101
[koto bolo
Koro, s., c. art. uakoro, a fence,
a wall, d. ara, c. art. nara :
gor ia.
Koro, s., a fish fence, enclosure
for catching fish ; a ring (or
halo) round the moon : gor
ia.
Koro, s., c. art. nekoro, incanta-
tation or rites of divination ;
and
Koro, v., to divine : gor ia.
Koroatalagi, d., or nakoroatelagi,
the sky, dd. koroinlagi, riki-
telagi, lit. the fence, or that
which surrounds or encloses
the atalagi, q.v.
Koroinlagi, s., d., the sky, lit.
the fence, or that which en-
closes heaven. See lagi, elagi.
Koroki, v., to insist (as in argu-
ment), provoke, irritate. S.
gareg (Pael) to provoke.
Kori, or koria, also kuri, or
kuria, s., a clog : cognate oro,
to bark. [Sa. uli, id., Ma.
kuri a dog. any quadruped,
To. kuli a dog, Fut. kuli, Ta.
kuri, Epi kuli, kuliu, TaSa.
vuriu, Malo vuria, Ml. kuri,
Mg. alikia, id.] A. gorw' a
young dog.
Kori, interj., also in akori, kori
la ! this now indeed ! here,
or there indeed ! : ko dem., ri
dem.
Koro, v. i , to snore. See goro.
Koroi, d. kuriii a woman ; and
Koruni, kuruni, q. v. See f aline,
Note 2, and lai.
Kos ia, kus ia, v. t., to cut or
shear off (as the end of the
outer covering of a young
cocoanut tit for drinking) ;
and
Kosu mia, v. t., to husk a cocoa-
nut, also kusu mia, gusu mia ;
i gusu, v. i., said of a ripe
cocoanut which separates it-
self and falls from the tree,
kusu mia or gusu mia, v. t., to
gather cocoanuts from the
tree, kusu, or gusu, v. i., to be
ripe, soft, makusukusu to be
ripe, soft, kusue na, s., the
soft place on the top of a
child's head, the last to close
up, makus, q.v., s., cutter or
knife. A. gazza to cut off,
shear; to cut (grass, &c.) in
order to gather provender, to
cut off the clusters of dates
from the tree ; to begin to
ripen (dates), 4, to have
(sheep) ready for shearing, or
ripe grain, to be ready to be
gathered from the tree (dates),
to be ripe or ready for gather-
ing (fruit of the palm tree),
for reaping (grain), for shearing
(sheep) ; migazz' a cutting
instrument.
Kosu, s., a cutting instrument
made of bone : preceding word.
Kosoafa, s., c. art. nakosoafa, dd.
nasoafa, soafa, a plant used in
ceremonial or ritual purifica-
tions : it is swept down the
limbs to carry away the un-
cleanness ; lit. the tree that
carries (away) : kosu (see
kasu), and afa ia.
Kota, s., a time, in i ta kota ki
(a person) he appoints a time
to or for (someone); and in
Kotfan, d. for gotafanu, gota
fanu, q.v., evening.
Koto bolo, s., a basket (see bolo).
[Ml. cat, Malo cete, To. kato,
koto]
Sa. 'ato, a basket.] A. ka'la?
a basket (for carrying dates).
Koto, s., a kind of crab : so
called from nipping. See fol-
lowing word.
Koto-fta v. t., kote-fia, kotu-fia,
gote-fia, redup. kotokote fia,
gotokote fia (intensive), to cut,
to cut oft', break oft* ; eni gote
fta to lie across it, bala tagoto
inclined across, across, ba gote
fta go across it, soka gote fia
leap across it; sai gote fia, tuba
gote fia pronounce judgment
against him, condemn him to
death, i gotokoto bat ia he made
a beginning, first did it (broke
ground in the doing of it),
makoto broken (a stick, or
anything), ceases (as war), a
makoto ki I cease from (a
thing, as a thing I have sold),
have no further connection
with, separate from, cease
from (a thing or person), kuti
nakoau cut up the pudding
(cooked), gkuti (gukuti) to
make a stealthy invasion or
inroad, i gai tagoto, or mako-
tokoto he screams abruptly,
cries out in sharp, sudden,
broken screams ; kokoti a net
(cutting oft' the fish) ; bagote
fia to buy it, make it separate
from its former owner) ; i
kote fiau isa he breaks me oft'
from it (a thing I possessed) ;
bikutu, v. r., decideabout (some-
one), bikutu ki nia decide about
him, sera makoto to be startled,
surprised, makot a place. [Sa.
'oti to cut (as the hair), 'o'oti,
'oti'oti, Fi. koti-va to clip, or
shear, ai koti scissors or shears
102 [kubu
(originally a shell or shark's
tooth).] A. kata'a cut, cut
off, separate, cross (a river) ;
cease; decide about (a thing) ;
to snap (as a rope, break) ; to
break off, cease from (a jour-
ney, Ac. = makoto ki) ; to
invade, or make an inroad,
stealthily &c. ; makta' a place.
Ku, verb, pron., 2 sing., and pi.,
you.
Ku, dem., this, as nai ku na, cl.
ga kin, this (is) he, or it, nai
ua naga, nai ua, nai naga, nai
kis. [My. iku that.] E. ku,
id. See ko, ka, ki'.
Ku, d., kua, or gua, v. i., to cry
out, vociferate, cry or call
out, low (an ox). H. ga'ah,
S. g'o' cry out, vociferate, low
(an ox).
Kua, gua, preceding word.
Kua, ad., inter., and indef. : gua.
Kuba na, s , c. art. nakuba na,
its or his day ; d. for uba na,
or ube na, q.v.
Kubega, s., d., a net (for catching-
fish). [Sa. upenga, Tab. upea,
Ma. kupenga, id.] A. kiftai
a net, from kaft'a to wrap
round, <fcc.
Kubu, s., inside, the belly, also
kobu, and kabu, d. kama (in
arekabu, q.v., anekama), then,
inside (a house), and with the
prep, e, ekubu, ekobu in the
inside, inside : then, ekobu in
one d. denotes also a house.
[Mg. kibo the belly, kobany
its centre or middle, kobony
the inside, inner part, entrails.]
A. ga'fu the belly, interior
cavity of a thing, inside (of a
house), from gafa to be hollow.
kufagufa] 103
Kufagufa, (I., v. i., to fly, to Hap
the wings, flutter. [To. kapa-
kapa to flap the wings, My.
kapak to fly, flapping the
wings, not gliding.] A. h'a-
faka 1, 4, to fly, to flap with
the wings.
Kui na, d., s., c. art. nakui na,
(1. kihi na (i.e. kisi na, in that
d. h is for s), the back, rump,
tail : kui na is for bui na, and
kihi na (i.e. kisi na) for bisi
na, by the change of b to k.
Kuku, v. i. See guku.
Kuli na (d. uili na), s., the skin,
bark. [Ha. ili, Ma. kiri, skin,
bark, My. kulit skin, hide,
pelt, leather, bark, rind, husk,
shell, Mg. hoditra skin, bark.]
See mulu sia.
Kulu, v. i., to wrap oneself up,
to cover oneself up (as in
bed).
Kulu tia, v. t., same as kalu tia ;
Kulu, s., c. art. nakulu, cloth,
covering, that which covers ;
Kulekule, or kulukulu, d., id. :
kalu.
Kuma na, s., or guma na, c. art.
na kumana, inner bark, pel-
licle or cover, as of an egg,
orange, &c. : d. for kamu na.
Kum ia, v. t. (see gum ia), to
absorb, redup. kukumi.
Kumu, d., pers. pron., 2 pi., you,
dd. akam and akamus, kami,
nikam, nimu, nem or neem,
egu. [My. kamu, Tag. kamo,
Ml. P. hamdi, Epi. kamiu, Ta.
ituma, id.]
Kunuti na, s., c. art. nakunuti
na, the kernel of fruits, as the
almond; also new yams : kano,
kanoa, kanoka. [Cf. To. kano
[kus
the inmost substance of any-
thing, kernels of fruit, also
flesh, kano he mata eye-ball
(Mg. anaka inanakandriamaso
pupil of the eye).]
Kura, s.j c. art. nakura, a plant;
so called from its bitterness.
Of a stingy man who with-
holds food from a visitor it is
said nalo anena i bi nakura.
See under gura ia.
Kuraf, d. for karati, q.v.
Kuri, or kuria, s., same as kori,
koria, dog.
Kuru, or kura, a., shrivelled,
dried, nali kuru shrivelled
dried leaves (as banana leaves
when withered and dry are).
See kara, or gara.
Kuru ki, v. t., to gather together ;
and
Kuru maki, v. t., to gather to-
gether ; and
Kuruk ; and
Kukui'uk (gkuruk), v. i., or
mid., to gather itself, or to
be gathered together : see
guru ki ; belonging to this
stem are also takara, crowd
(of men), and makara to be
gathered together, d. (trans-
posed) maraka, or meraka.
Kuruni, s., a woman. See fafine,
Note 2, and lai.
Kurui, s., and
Kuruku na, s., kuruku natua na,
the ankle : kuruk. The ankle
is so called because the leg
yathers itself, as ^ were, into
the knob of the joint.
Kurumase na, s., d. (transposed)
for borakese na, q.v.
Kus, d., v. i., to be hidden ; d.
gusu (i.e., kusu ), q.v., to stoop.
KUS IA]
104
[laba
As to connection of these two
meanings, see beln : a man
stoops to avoid being seen, or
to be hidden.
Kus ia, or kusi a, v. t., to go in
the track of, follow, usually
usia, q.v. (the k being elided),
rafe kus ia to go through
following it (as a pig going
through a hole in the fence of
a garden following another
pig), hence the proverb, uago
iskai i 6ora bua nakoro, uago
laba i rafe kus ia one pig
bursts open the fence, many
pigs go through the opening
following (or after) it : in takus
ia, rukus ia (nrukus ia) the k
also is not elided. See usi a.
Kusu na, d., s., dd. kui na, kihi
na, bui na, q.v.
Kusu, v. i., and
Kusue na, s. See kosu mia.
Kusue, or kusuiie (pronounced
kusuwe), d. kusu, s., rat (or
mouse). [Ta. yasuk, Ml. dd.
khasup, akasu, Pa. asua, Santo
dd. karibi, keriu, Ma. kiore,
Sa. iore, My. tikus, Mysol
kelof, Gilolo luf, lupu, id.]
A. kutrub 5 rat.
Kut ia, v. t., to cut, and
Kukut ia (gkut ia), red up. : i
gkuti ban he goes to make an
inroad stealthily (as in time
of war) ; also si kut ia ( si to
shoot) to shoot not killing,
but only cutting or wounding;
and
Kutu ki, bikutu ki, to decide
about (someone). See koto
tia.
Kutu, s., louse ; the back of the
head. Sa. 'utu louse, an in-
sect which eats the skin of the
hands and feet, My. kutu louse.
To., Fut., kutu, Ta. kiget, An.
cet, Ml. P. cut, Malo utu,
louse.] A. kud(la£, pi. kid-
dan, flea (and kiddan flea, an
animal biting like a flea),
kudad' the back of the head
between the ears, pi. fleas, Ef.
ftala kutu na the hollow of the
back of his head (6ala ill.),
from kadda to cut.
Note. — There is no other
word for flea in Ef., but to
distinguish a flea from a louse
the former is called kutu n
koria the kutu of the dog,
so Fut. kutu kuli, My. kutu
anjing (anjing dog), TaSa. utu
vuriu, but Malo utu (simply).
The Efatese say there were no
fleas in the island before
Europeans brought them. In
Sa. flea is 'ututiti, and in Fi.
kutu ni manuraanu.
L
a, d. le, ad., indeed, certainly,
surely, particle of emphasis,
as uisi la yes indeed, i la masi-
kina he indeed is one, or one
only, i le sa he is indeed bad,
i ga fano la let him go indeed.
[Sa. la, My. lah, id.] A. la
certainly, surely, indeed.
La ia, or lai a, v. t., to put out,
or eject from, the mouth, as
food, froth, the tongue (see le) :
lua.
Laba, v. i., to be much, many ;
laba or leba, labalaba or leba-
leba, to be or become big,
LA 15 a]
105
grow up, d. lafulafu to be or
become (grow) big, lalaba, or
leleba big, great, leba elder ;
tea laba or leba plenty, enough
(no more), it is enough, milaba
last, nameligu milaba i en lu
ua my last footprint is in this
place, i.e., I will come no more
here, tea milaba the last
(person or thing), i libi milaba
sa he looked upon it for the
last time, d. leb, indeed, very;
barab (barau, &c.) long. [Sa.
lava to be enough, indeed,
very, loa long (and leva long,
of time), Mg. lava long, tall,
continuing long (= Ef. barab,
baraf), My. luwas, luas wide
extensive, large, ample, Fi.
levu great, or large ; in great
numbers, all, as era sa lako
levu they are all, or many,
gone (= Ef. ru laba bano),
vakalevu-taka to increase ;
cause to be great or many,
balavu long.] H. rabab to
become much or many, to be
increased, to be much or
many, inf. rob a being much
or many, abundance, mul-
titude ; poetically multitude is
almost used for "all" (so in
Fi. and Ef. levu, laba), a
being great (of might), a
being long (of a way), rab
much, many ; enough, (it is)
enough (no more, cease, leave
off, so Ef.) ; big (great, large,
vast), applied to a wide
space, to a long way, and to
things generally in the sense
of great, big ; elder. The
cognate and supplementary
verb is rabah, to be multiplied,
[laga ia
increased, often to be many ;
to become great, to grow up,
to be great.
Labalaba, or lebaleba, v. i., and
a., redup. of laba, or leba,
v. i., and a., to be great, big,
as natasc leba the great sea.
See laba.
Labo, s. See leba : leba boa.
Laf ia, or lati a, v. t., to take,
take up, carry (a thing), take
up (a song). [Ha. lawe (ps.
lawea) to take, carry.] A.
rafa'a, to take up, carry.
Lati na, s., c. art., the cover,
sheath, or envelope of the
flowers or buds of the cocoa-
nut palm ; the hard substance
(of same shape) of the cuttle-
fish (d. namagi rofarofa =
little canoe of the cuttle-fish).
A. "ilaf a cover, sheath, or
envelope, H. 'alaf to cover,
to wrap up, A. "alaf a to
enclose in a sheath or vessel.
Lafuis, dd. rifalu, libuis, lifaru,
q.v.
Lafulafu, d., v. i., and a., to
grow up, big : laba.
Laga, v. t., to seek, search for,
laga sa seek it, bilaga sa, id.,
and redup.,
Lagalaga sa, v. t., id. (frequenta-
tive). A. rama to seek, search
for, n. a. maram'.
Laga tia, v. t., to raise, lift up
(as a thing from the ground),
and
Laga, s., that which raises: laga
laga ti (the planks of a boat).
Laga ia, or lagai a, v. t., to raise,
lift up (as the wind raises
thatch from a roof) ; then to
raise (a thing, so as to make
laga]
10G
LAGi
it conspicuous), as i mirama
laga tia it (the moon, &c.)
shines raising it (into view,
making it conspicuous) ; hence
Laga (without object) to shine
(to raise into view, make con-
spicuous), bisa laga tia to
speak raising it (into view),
laga tia to speak with a loud
voice, laga, v. i., to sing, and
Lagalaga, v., redup. (in all these
senses) : nalagalaga na, s., a
thing raised from or oft' some-
thing (as a scale from the eyes,
husk from grain, &c. ) ; malaga,
malagalaga, to be raised (so
as to be conspicuous, as a ship
on the sea); balaga tia, v. c,
to make raised (a tiling),
balaga-saki nia, v. c, Malaga
na (see under these words),
ta^alaga, v. r., to raise itself,
be raised (from above, or oft",
anything) ;
Lagi, s., with prep, elagi, ad.
(used also as a prep.) and s.,
the sky, heaven, above : ulua,
lua, lulu. [Sa. laga to rise up,
to raise up, redup. lagalaga, s.,
a stick for raising up flat
coral, v., to raise up (as a
heavy weight), lagalagaola to
raise the finger nails from the
flesh, lagi the sky, heaven, v.,
to call out with a loud voice,
to sing, Ha. lana to Hoat (on
water), float (i.e., be lifted up,
raised) in the air, lani sky,
heaven, luna the upper side of
anything, the upper, the above,
a., upper, higher, above, and,
with a prep., ad., or prep.,
above, Sa. iluga, id., My.
langit sky, firmament, lalangit
the palate, an awning, canopy,
Mg. lanitra sky, heaven.] A.
'ala' to be high, to be above or
upon (a thing), 2, to raise,
lift up, 3, to manifest, to call
with a loud (high) voice, 4, to
raise, 6, to stand out high, &c,
hence prep, 'ala' above, 'ilian'
and 'iliyyan' tall (high), high
voice, and 'illiyyuna the seventh
heaven, paradise, Assy. ad.
(used as a prep.) elanu, elan,
above, also ellaon, and elien,
elinitu high, a being high,
which has n the a. ending, and
suffixed to it the abstract
ending t in the usual way).
Lagaraf, v. i., or mid., to mourn
(as for the dead) : laga tia, to
raise, and teraf ia to scratch,
from raising the hands and
tearing or scratching the
cheeks in mourning (see 6ora
I., bora na the temples).
Lagafaru na, v. and s. com-
pounded, to raise its wings
(a bird) : laga tia, and afaru
na.
Lagafasu ki, v., make a sign to :
laga tia, and fasu na.
Lagilagi, v. i., to be proud, up-
lifted. [Ha. lanilani to be
high-minded, proud, show
haughtiness.] See laga tia.
A. 'ala', 5), to be proud.
Laga ki, v. t., to have, to possess.
See laka.
Lagi, s., c. art. nalagi, the wind :
other forms of this word are
In and redup. agiegi, with
article nin, nagiegi, the air,
the breeze. [Ml. nien, Paama
lag, Am. lig, yig, Fi. cagi
(thangi), My. angin, Mg. anina
LAf;0
io;
[lakk
the wind, Sa. matagi to blow,
be windy, ps. matagia, s.,
the wind, Ma. matangi the
wind, kotengitengi gentle
wind, kohengi or kohengihengi
wind.] A. nasama to blow
gently (the wind), nasani' a
light wind, na'sam' and nasim'
a light wind, breeze, air.
Lago, s., fly ; lago fu buzzing
fly, blow-fly. [8a. lago, a fly,
My. langau a large fly, a blue-
bottle.] A. lakka'u a fly, from
laka'aprehendit extremo rostro
rem.
Lago, s., the wooden pins whose
sharpened ends are driven into
the sama (outrigger), and
whose upper ends (crossed)
hold and bear up the nakiat
of a canoe. [Sa. lago props
of a canoe.] See preceding-
word.
Lagor, or lagora, or lagord, ad.,
d. labor, q.v.
Lai a. See la ia : redup.,
Lailai, v. t., frequentative or in-
tensive.
Lai, or lei, contracted to le, li, s.,
woman, as ie kiki little woman
(in addressing a female child or
girl), le or li meroan women,
ladies (in addressing an as-
sembly of women) : this word
is used before names of fe-
males, as ma, q.v., is before
names of males, as lei, le, or li
mako madam, mistress, miss,
or lady, mako. [Fi. adi, con-
tracted di, id., Mot a iro, ro, id.]
H. 'is's'ah, Ch. 'ita', S. 'atto',
A. 'untha, woman, Ch. emph.
'itta', 'intta', id.
Note. — For other forms of
this word see koroi, kurui,
kuruni. See under faflne, Note
2. Koroi, &c, have the dem. or
art. k' prefixed.
Lai, s., c. art. nalai, or inlai, or
nilai, sail (of a canoe or ship).
[Sa. la, Ma. ra, Mg. lai, My.
layar, id. ; My. layar, to sail,
to navigate, also barlayar and
malayar.] A. killa'ai sail of a
ship, kala'a, 4, to make sail, to
sail, to navigate.
Lailai, v. i., to be delighted, re-
joice. [Mg. laolao play, play-
things, milaolao to play.] A.
laha', n. a. lahw', to play ; to
be delighted.
Lai a, or lei a, or la ia, v. t., to
pluck, to gather (fruit), lai
nua nakasu to pluck or gather
the fruits of trees. See bila
ia, or bilai a. [My. lali to
pluck, to gather.] E. 'araya,
H. 'arah, to pluck, to gather
(as fruits).
Lai a, or lei a, v. t., to tie up, as
lei namanuk to tie up a wound.
A. 'ara' to tie up ; fasten.
Lak, d. for lako, q.v.
Laka, s., laka leo, foundation or
cause of a matter or aft'air ;
and
Laka, or lake, c. art. nalake na,
its foundation, then, its cause,
as nalake na tafa the founda-
tion of the hill or mountain,
Atua i bi nalakegita God is our
foundation, i.e., our upholder,
te uane i bi nalake nafakal
that is the cause of the war,
then nalakena because, lit. ita
cause ; and
Lake, or laki, v. i., to marry (of
a woman) : lake ki nanoi marry
JLAKAUj 10S
a husband, lit. betake herself
to a husband ; and lake kiena
betake herself to his house,
and then generally of anyone,
i lake he betakes himself (to
dwell somewhere), i lake en
lu ua he has betaken himself
to dwell here ; laga ki, v. t.,
to have, to possess, d. lakea ki,
telakie na its possessor, or
telake na, c. art. atelakie na
or atelakea na, or atelake na,
id., Atua i bi atelakea gita God
is our possessor, possesses us.
[Ma. taketake, a., well founded,
take, s., root, stump, post of a
pa, cause, putake, s., base,
root, reason, cause.] A.
rakaha to lean upon (some-
thing) ; to betake oneself (to
someone) ; to place upon,
found, as to found (his house
upon a rock), 4, to support
(prop up), 5, to abide (in some
place ; to use free power (in a
matter) ; rukah' the firm side
of a mountain, by which it is
upheld, pi. 'arkah' a founda-
tion.
Note. — The expression tu-
lake is composed of tu to give
(or tua), and lake, and means
to give in trust to (to give
relying upon or trusting in) — i
tulake is he gave in trust it, i
tulak ira sa he gave in trust
to them it (as a present or
money to be taken charge of
and conveyed by them to the
person for whom it is in-
tended).
Lakau, v. t., d. (transposed) for
galau ia, q.v., to cross over.
[Sa. la'a to step, to pass
[lako
over, ps. la'asia, redup. lala'a,
la'ala'a ; la'ai to pass over,
break over (as a wave over a
canoe from one side over to
the other), la'aga, la'asaga a
step, a stepping over.] Hence
Lakau, s., a crossing place in ;i
fence ; a stile.
Lako, s., d. lak, a small enclosure
(like a hole, for putting or
confining a pig in). See fol-
lowing word.
Lako, v. i., dd. laku, loku, loko,
roko, nrok, to stoop, be curved,
then stoop or crouch, conceal-
ing herself (as a mother-in-
law from her son-in-law), to be
concealed (as one stoops in
order to be concealed, see
6elu, kusu), redup. lakolako, c.
prep, ki lakolako ki to be
crouching and stooping and
concealed from (someone), toko
loku to abide concealed or in
concealment, luku, id., luku-
taki nia, or loko taki ilia, to
place him in concealment (as a
wounded warrior for surgical
treatment), ba lako-saki nia to
creep upon it stealthily (as a
hunter upon a bird), hence ba
lako to hunt (birds), lit. to go
concealed, luku or luk a hole
or pit, luku noai a well, lako,
or lak (see preceding word),
6aluku (i.e., b& luku) a curved
6a (concavity). [Fi. roko a
bowing form or posture, a.,
bent like a bow, ad., sa lako
roko goes stooping or bowing,
ai roko bowstring, roko-ta
bend a bow, roko-va bow to,
pay respect to, rokoroko, rev-
erence, respect, bakaroko bow
LAKOLAKO
100
[las ia
down with weakness, or go
stooping, Sa. lolo'u to bend,
bend down, bend round.] A.
raka'a, n. a. roko', or ruku', to
stoop, or be curved or bent,
to bow or be bent down (as in
prayer), ruk'ati a hole, pit.
Lakolako ki, redup. of preced-
ing word ; and
Lako saki, the same, c. compound
prep. saki.
Lakor, ad., i.e., la-kor, indeed
now : lakor is sometimes prac-
tically syn. with la as i fi la
mai matol, or i fi lakor mai
matol lie may indeed come to-
morrow, or the latter may be
rendered, lie may indeed now
come to-morrow. This is the
lit. translation, but it might
be expressed, he may perhaps,
or possibly, come to-morrow,
hence i lakor sa ko maki it in-
deed now is bad, or don't-know,
and simply i lakor sa expi*esses
that the thing very probably
is bad in the speaker's opinion,
who, however, does not state,
as a positive, ascertained fact
that it is so : la ad., and the
dem. particles ko and r' (ra,
ri, ro, ru).
LakurC, s., a kind of flute. A.
nakor' cornu, tuba, Nm.
naqour clarion, A. nakara, 3,
to make hollow, hollow out
(as wood).
Lala, s., an idiot, one demented,
a fool. [Fi. lialia, s., an idiot,
a., foolish, out of one's mind,
Mg. adala, s., an idiot, one
destitute of reason, a lunatic,
a fool, a., foolish, infatuated.]
See alialia.
Lala gor ia, v. t., to conceal,
deny : gor ia, and lala for
laulau, redup. of lau.
Lalo na, or lalu na, s., c. art.
inlalo na, the belly, then the
front (see elalo), and the
under side (as of cloth) : alo-
na.
Lam ia, d., v. t., to eat, hence
Latnien, s., c. art. nalamien, act
of eating, food. H. laliam to
eat.
Lao. See lau.
Lasa, or las, s., a bowl (as a kava
bowl), a dish, a cup. [Ml. P.
ras, Malo lasa, Santo las, id.]
A. tas' vasculum, Ct. tiiss, a
bowl, Nm. saucer, flat cup.
Laso na, s., c. art. inlaso na, the
testicles. [Pa. asi, Am. luho,
Ml. dd. lisi, erasi, Put. raso,
id., Sa. laso scrotum.] A.
li'isy', and ll'usy', and h'usyaf,
pi. ll'usa', the testicles.
Lasoa, v. i., or a., to have swollen
testicles : preceding word and
a. ending a.
Las, or lasi, v. i., or a., big, large,
great, sufficient ; and redup.,
Lasilasi, id. ; and
Las ia, or lasi a, v. t., to meet,
i.e., to suffice, be sufficient for,
as nafinaga i lasigita the food
is sufficient for (meets) us and
you, tilasi a, id., also to meet,
come upon, come across (a
person) i tilasinami nabua he
met us — them on the way,
bakatilasi a to suffice, redup.
tilatilasi a, id. A. 'aras'a to
meet, 'arus'a to be wide, large,
5, ta'arrasa, for which is used
also ta'arras'a to meet, 2, to
make wide, large.
lau] 110
Lau, s., the sea; usually with
the prep, e, elau, or a, alau, q.v.
Lau, s., c. art. nilau, dd. kalau,
kolau, q.v. [Bisaya lawa a
spider's web, Fi. lawa a net ;
an ambush ; to lie in ambush.]
Lau ia, v. t., to plant (a yam or
other plant) ; to plant any-
thing upright, as a post or
stake ; to plant (a spear in
anyone) ; laulua i to plant
(words in anyone), putting him
out, or exposing him in his true
colours ; lau suru ea to plant
(words, in anyone) tempting
him ; and
Lau, v. i., to stand upright (to
be planted), lau tu lit. to stand
planted, i.e., to stand upright ;
to fall down (planting itself),
as rain, &c. ; and
Lau gor ia, v. t., to plant, sur-
rounding or concealing him or
it ; redup. lala gor ia (for lau-
lau gor ia), id., intensive ; and
Lau fai ia, v. t., d. lau bua i, to
plant (as a spear, in anyone)
piercing him. See fai, bua.
[Sa. to, to plant, to build, to
fall (as rain), &c, To. tau to
implant, to plant, to drop, to
fall, &c.] H. nata', fut. ita',
inf. ntoa' to set (anything) up-
right, to plant (any plant); to
plant (anything, as a people) ;
to fix, fasten in ; set up (as
a tent, an image).
Launa, s., c. art. nalauna, redup.
nalalauna, a community, as
the people of a village or
district : rau. [Ha. launa, v.,
'•probably, a spreading out,"
to associate, be on friendly
terms with, a., friendly, social.]
[le
Lausa. See lousa.
Lausu na, s., the nose, d. for
nagusu na ; la art. (usually
na), and usu, for gnsu, q.v.,
nose.
Le, s. See lai woman.
Le, v. t., for lai a, or la ia: i le
mina he puts out the tongue.
Le, ad., d. for la.
Le, also leo, and lo, v., to see, as
lo nasan see evil, lo nafanua
see the land, to look, lebi or
libi (li bi) look upon, libisia
(d. limsi) look upon him, libi
nata look upon, see a person,
d. le ha, nata look upon a
person, le ba, ia, or le 6a i, look
upon him, see him, d. leka
nata look at a person, leka
look at him, see him ;
Lele is, redup., to look for it, d.
leoleo sa, rai, q.v., aspect,
look, forehead, rairai to be in
countenance, unabashed, un-
ashamed, leo, or lo, to watch,
i.e., to look, ba lo behold.
[Sa. leo to watch, redup. leleo ;
leoleoga a watching, leoleosa'i
to watch, My. Hat to see, to
look, liati, liatkan, &c, Mg.
hiratra sight, seeing, Fi. rai,
a., seeing, rai, rairai to look,
rai-ca to look at, rairai a
prophet (a seer), vakarai-taka
to show.] H. ra'ah to see,
ra'ah be look upon, see, ra'ah
'eth look at, Hi. to show,
ro'eh a prophet, seer, A. ra'a'
to see, 4, show, E. re'ya to
see. See also borea, naborea.
Le, leo, lu (in lu rik, d.), lo, s., c.
art. nale na, naleo na, nalo na,
his voice, speech, word, rogi
nalo na hear his voice, i.e., obey
LEA Kl]
him, or rogi berakati nalona,
or naleona, d. nalen ; without
the nom. suf. and with or
without the art. it signifies a
tiling, something, as nalo sikai
one thing, nalo laba many
things ; nalo nagiena on
account of, for the sake of,
his name, lit. the thing of
his name ; lo-soko true, lit.
true thing, le-soko, lo ialo
empty, worthless thing, lo sa
bad thing, lo uia good thing, d.
lo amau true, lit. true thing,
hence the expressions sera-
loamau, or sera-lesoko to
believe, seraloialo to deem
worthless, despise. [Sa. leo
the voice, a sound, leoleoa, a.,
loud talking, To. lea speech,
voice, language.] A. la"a' to
speak, n. a. la"w' sound, voice,
lo"a£ word, language, dialect
(see misleo, infra).
Lea ki (or le-aki), v. t., to throw
away, throw down (anything),
to throw down (as the wind
trees), and redup.,
Leleaki, v. t., intensive. [To.
li to toss (anything light),
liagi (liaki) to throw away,
lei and leilei to throw away,
leina a throwing away.] E.
warawa to throw away, throw
down.
Leana, v. i., or a., d. lena, d. leg,
to be straight (not crooked),
then to be right, upright,
righteous, bisa lena speak
straight, i.e., right, natamole
lena a straight, i.e., upright
or righteous man ; tu lena to
stand straight, stand up. [Fi.
donu straight, then righteous,
111 [leo
vakadodonu-taka to make
straight. Sa. tonu, a., right,
straight, correct, To. tonu
straight, direct, clear, faka-
tonu to make evident, mani-
fest, tonuia righteous, tu tonu
(stand) upright] H. thakan
to be or become straight, Pi.
to make straight, to dispose
rightly (proverbs).
Le ba i, le ba i, or le be ia, d.,
v. t., d. syn. le ka, to look
upon it : le to look, and prep,
ba.
Leba, redup. leleba, lebaleba
(intensive), v. i., or a., to be or
become big, great : nalebale-
ban, greatness, the being great :
laba.
Leba, s., c. art. naleba, s., a
species of earth, clay, mud,
dirt, lebalebara, a., dirty,
soiled (a. ending ra), d. leba-
leba, a., id. (a. ending a), d.
la6o (i.e., leba 60, or 6oa)
stinking leba slush, mud.
[Ha. lepo to be dirty, defiled,
soiled, s., dirt, ground, clay,
lepolepo dirty (intensive).]
A. tabi'a to be dirty, tabe',
taba' dirt, mud, taba'a to
impress or seal, 4), to make a
water vessel from clay, tub 'an
clay.
Lebaleba, v. i., or a. See leba,
laba.
Lebaleba, a. See leba, s.
Lebalebara, a. See leba, s.
Lebule, v., i.e., le (lele) to go
round, and bule, q.v., to com-
plete, to go completely round
(of a canoe, as round a point
or headland) : lele, ili-fiki.
Leg, v. i., or a., d. for lena, leana.
lei]
Lei. See lai, s., woman.
Leka, v. t., d. le to look, and
prep, ka to, at, leka look at
him, leka nata look at, see a
person : le.
Lele, or lili (lie, or le, Hi, or ili,
1') to wind, to go round, turn,
curve, as raru i sefa, soko, or
ba lele ki nafanua the ship
runs, moves swiftly, or goes
curving round the land
(island), natisan i soka lele
nafanua the word moves
swiftly round (i.e., all through)
the land, le-bule, q.v., le, or
li-taku na, or lele taku na to
turn behind his back, lele
takuna sa to turn behind one's
back with it (i.e., to do, say
something, concealing it from
someone), ili-hki, or lili-tiki
nagusu, to round the point or
cape (a canoe), ilisela or lili-
sela as i surata ilisela he
walked all the way, lit. round
the way (see sela), i talele (or
talle or tale) he turned aside,
i talele ki he turned or turns
aside from (a person or thing),
malele to be bent or curved
(as a branch of a tree heavy
with fruit), bilele, v. r., to
turn hither and thither, lusi a,
or lulusi a (i.e., lele usi a) lit.
to go round following or
tracking it, as lulusi noai sera
he follows the stream, walking
in the water, lusi nakasu
goes along a stick, lili maroa
lit. to go round turning itself.
[Fi. lele-ca to bend.] H. lul
to wind, twist about, eg. to
galal, 'ul, &c, hence lul, pi.,
winding stairs, lula' loops.
112 [les
Note. — See the cognate liu,
liliu.
Lele, s., tortoiseshell, the cover
of the turtle ; a tortoiseshell
bracelet. The shell of the
turtle is called lele from its
round or curved form. See
preceding word. [Mg. rere
the largest kind of tortoise.]
Lena, d. leana, q.v.
Lemina : le, v. t., to put out, and
mina, s., the tongue, to put
out the tongue, syn. lua mina.
See le, v. t.
Leo, to look, see le ; le or leo
goro gita to watch, look for,
expect us.
Leo, s., c. art. naleo, thing, affair;
hence
Leou;Tn, s., c. art. naleouan (i.e.,
naleo uan that thing, or affair),
a feast (in heathenism), or
heathen gathering, in which
offerings or sacrifices are made
to the natemate, and presents
given to the guests.
Ler, v. i., d. for liliu, q.v., to
retuni, go or come back, also i
mer ler brigi he did it again,
lit. he mer (q.v.) returned did
it.
Lesilesi, for lasilasi.
Les, s., c. art. nales, a plant with
thick dark leaf ; and
Les, a., dark or dusky, as in
fal'les (fale les) dark or dusky
cave (name of a big cave at
the entrance of Havannah
Harbour) ; ra les Dark-ra or
Dusky-rfi, a name of Hades.
See ra. A. la'isa n. a. la'as'
to become dark, or blackish,
'al'asu of a dark colour, dusky ;
multus et densus, de planta.
LEs]
Les, s., coral rock, or. stone. Cf.
A. radhal a rook in water ;
racial rocky, stony, a place
like a rugged hill.
Let, v. i., or a., to be stiff, rigid ;
redup.,
Lelet, id., intensive ; and
Let, s., spasm, rigidity, as in
tetanus ; and
Letilet, or
Letilot, v. i., to crackle, as the
bubbles of boiling water ; and
Letilot, s., c. art. naletilot, d.
naltelta, froth, i.e., lit., burst-
ing bubbles. See lita.
Let ia, for alat ia ;
Leti bati ore, same as alatera-
bati ;
Leti lua i, v. t., to grasp, or
seize, taking it away, leti lua
i kiana grasp it away from
him ;
Letileti, a. : natamole letileti, a
grasping man : alati a.
Li, s., place : for alia.
Li sia, v. t., to lay down, put
down, and
Li-saki, v. t., to throw down,
throw away : leaki.
Lia, s. Same as li, or alia, a
place.
Li, transitive prep. See ni, id.
Li, s. See lai, woman
Id, v., d. See lulu.
Ll/>a, s., an arrow with a broad
point (about the size of a
shilling) for shooting birds, or
the arrow head of such an
arrow ; and
Li6a ia, v. t., to shoot birds
with the liba (which does not
pierce them, but kills them by
a violent blow or shock). A.
lagafa to strike violently ;
113
[libit
lagif an arrow with a broad
head.
Libi sia (li-bisia), d. Ie6a i, or
leba ia (le-ba ia), v. t., look
upon him, see him : le to see,
look, and prep. bi.
Note. — In two other dd.
this compound occurs (the
prep, b changed to m) as lim
si or linn si, and lumia, or
lumia (lu-mi a), look upon
him.
Libo, v. i., hide, to vanish, dis-
appear, be hidden, talibo, id. ;
hence libo, s., a vanishing
demon, a demon that assumes
the aspect of someone to
deceive, and appears to one in
the forest, and then vanishes
after the evil deed is com-
mitted, leaving the victim to
return home to die ; liboki, c.
art. naliboki, a name of Hades
(the invisible world, or hidden
refuge or home of the dead) ;
Libo, s., an evil demon. See
libo, v. i.,
Liboki, s., c. art. naliboki, the
invisible world, or hiding place
where departed souls dwell,
Hades. [Sa. Ian to hide one-
self, lalan (of many), lafita'i
to conceal, lahtaga a hiding
place, Mg. levina buried, in-
terred.] A. s'aba', n. a. s'ab'a
and s'ubu', to hide (in the
earth), 8, to hide, be hidden
(hide one's self), cf. s'aba to
lie hid in wait for the enemy,
mas'ba' hiding place.
Libu, v. i., to be covered or dirty
with ashes, ash-coloured ;
Libu, s., an oven stone, the stones
that are heated red hot for
9
LILIBU
KI]
114
[likoliko
cooking in the oven (so called
because covered with ashes, or
ash coloured) ; hence
Lilibu ki, v., to put the libu on
the oven fire to be heated.
See abuobu.
Libu, or lebu, s., d., the middle of
the lower part of the body at
the upper part of the back of
the pelvis. [Ml. Ur. livu,
TaSa. libuka, the middle. | H.
leb the middle, heart, lubbu
cor et medulla rei, tfec.
Libuis, d. lifaru, q.v.
Lifa ia, v. t., to bend, and redup.,
Lifalifa ia, id., intensive; malibai,
to be bent, see also lofa, raa-
lofa, and lufa. [Sa. lavalava
wrapper round the loins,
lavasi to tie round and round,
entwine (as a serpent), lave-
lave, lave, to entangle, be
intertwined, intricate, My.
lipat (lampis, lapis, lampit,
lapit), Ja. lapit, to fold, lap,
lay in plaits, Mg. lefitra
folded, bent, plaited.] A.
laffa to be intricate, involved,
intertwined ; to wrap up,
wrap round, to fold : Nm.
wrap up, roll up, loffa coil of
turban, winding of road, lifafa
wrapper, envelope, bandage,
8, to be wrapt, &c.
Li-fiki, for ili-fiki, q.v.
Lifalifa, v. i., to blaze, nakabu i
sor lifalifa the fire burns
blazing, or putting forth
flames. [Ha. lalafa, lafalafa,
to blaze (of a fire).] A.
lahiba, n. a. lahb', to blaze, put
forth flames.
Lifaru, s., and a., dd. libuis,
rafalu, rlfalu, a part, some, as
natamole lifaru some men,
lifaru ru bano lifaru ru toko
some went, some remained.
[Fut. efaru some, many, Niue
(Savage Island) falu some.]
A. ba's'u a part, some, and c.
art. alba's'u some (== lifaru,
dd. libuis, rifalu, rafalu).
Lifu, s., d. for rifu, q.v.
Lifu, v. i., and redup.,
Lifulifu, v. i. (intensive), to be
covered, dirty, with ashes, as
in mourning, d. for libu, id.
Liga, s., d. taliga, ear, the ears :
taliga.
Liga, v. i., to sing, and redup.,
Ligaliga, id. (of many), and
Ligana, s., c. art. naligana a
song, d. nalag : laga.
Liglig, v. i., to be proud : lagi-
lagi.
Ligi sia, v. t., to pour out, maligi,
or maligsi, to spill, be poured
down. [Sa. ligi, liligi, ligiligi
to pour, maligi to spill, to be
poured down, maligi, s., a
pouring (of rain), Ma. ringi,
riringi to pour out, An. aijag-
jig to pour out.] H. nathak,
Ni. to be poured out (of water,
rain), Hi. hitik to pour out.
Liko tia, v. t., to tie, fasten
(with a rope, as a boat to a
ship, an animal to a stake,
&c), and
Liko, v. i., to be fastened to,
affixed to, adhere to : i liko sa it
is fastened to it, as a leech to
the body, &.c. ;
Liko, s., c. art. naliko, a rope
for fastening or suspending ;
Likoliko, redup. of liko tia (used
of fastening or suspending the
yams to a horizontal pole).
LIKAU]
[My. lakat to adhere, lakatkan
to fasten, Ja. rakat to adhere,
Mg. raikitra, stuck, adhered
to, miraikitra to adhere,
rekitra, id., mandrekitra to
fasten.] A. 'alika to adhere,
he affixed, be fastened to, 2, to
suspend, 4, make to adhere,
fasten, 'alako a rope.
Likau, for lakau, v. t.
Lilia, d. for liliu, q. v.
Lili-maroa, v. i., to go round
turning itself : lele, or lili, and
maroa.
Liliu, v. i., to return, go or come
back : liu.
Lima, num., five ; d. c. art.
nalima na his hand ; bakallma,
q.v. [Sa. lima live, the hand,
My. lima, Mg. dimy five, Epi
jimo (and limo) five, juma
hand ; d. lima, yima, or sima
hand ; d. lima five, ma hand ;
An. nijman, or nikman ( = Ef .
nalimana) his hand, five.] A.
ll'amsa^, li'ams' five, alli'ams
digiti ; Mahri khomo, Sokotra
khemah, five.
Lim si, d. for libi sia, q.v.
Lina, s., the light. [Mota dina,
My. dina, Er. dan, day.] As
i en lina it is in the light (not
concealed), d. i en ali : aliati
ali.
Lirea, v. i., or a., for litea, q.v.
Lira, redup. liralira, dd. nrirnrir
(i.e., tirtir), litralitra, litalita,
v. i., or a., to be bright, shin-
ing, gleaming, brilliant. A.
nas'ara, 2) and b), nas'ira,
4, to be blight, shining,
gleaming, brilliant.
Lisoa, v. i., dd. tiso, toto : toto.
Lita, v. i., and liti, to crackle, to
115 [lita-kuruma
burst, explode, as wood, or a
stone in the fire, see letelot,
also lot to crackle (as a fire),
explode (as a gun), to sound
(as a crack or explosion), and
melita to crack or crackle (as
wood in the fire, &c), and
then nagiena i melita his name
resounds ; and
Lita ia, or litai a, or litai ia,
v. t., lita i lita ia a spark, or
fragment of something, burst-
ing or crackling or exploding
in the tire, leaps or explodes
on to him ; also, a wasp stings
him ;
Lita, s., a spark, fully lita na-
kabu (see preceding word) ;
also a red wasp (because it is
red like a spark, or because
its sting burns like fire) : d.
(transposed) tila ;
Lita-kuruma na, v., to have the
breast (kuruma, see ruma)
thrust forward or out (bulging
or swollen out), in a spasm
(the opisthotonic) of tetanus,
then, to be bulging or swollen
stiffly out (of the face of a
log or board that should be
level) : see let spasm, or
rigidity, as in tetanus ; let,
lelet to be stiff, rigid (of any-
thing, as of a dead body, kc.)
[Fi. lidi, lidilidi, to burst, or
explode, s., report of an ex-
plosion, as of thunder, or a
stone in a heated oven, lidi-ka
to strike in flying off, lidi ni
buka a spark, lidi-ka to crack
between the finger and thumb
nails, as a louse, My. latok to
crackle, to decrepitate, latup,
and latub, id., latum to boom,
litea]
or give out a booming noise.]
A. s'at'iya to burst, break (be
broken), 5, to burst, exploding
into fragments ; and, 1, to swell
out, stiffening, so that the
hands and feet stand out stiff
and rigid (of a dead body),
s'asa' to become rigid and
fixed ; to swell out, becoming-
stiff and rigid, so that the
hands and feet stick up (of a
dead body), 4, to make rigid
or stiff and fixed, s'ata' id.,
s'at'iyya£ fragment of anything
burst or exploded off or out
from it.
Litea, a., or v. i., dirty, to be
dirty, d. lirea : used of any-
thing, as cloth, &c. Also, as
in English we speak of a
" dirty-looking " sky or night,
so tokalau meta lirea dirty-
looking tokalau (tokalau is an
easterly wind). [My. latah,
Ja. latup, turbid, foul, muddy,
Mg. loto dirtiness, filth, dirty,
soiled, maloto dirty, filthy,
foul.] A. latah'a, n. a. lath',
to be dirty.
Liu sa, v. t., to go before, to
precede him, to be greater
than him, d. toli a, i.e., to, to
abide, to be, and 'li a to go
before, precede (this to may
be prefixed to any verb, and
is to liu and d. toliu sa =
toli a = liu sa, with the added
sense of continuance) ;
Liu uaki (waki), or liu aki (see
also lu-aki), v. t., to turn, as
to turn a stick end for end, d.
lia ki, and lilia ki ;
Liliu, d. lilia, cl. ler, v. i., redup.,
to turn back, i*eturn, go or
116 [loa
come back : biliu, luaki, q.v.
[Sa. liu to turn, to turn over,
to turn into, to change, redup.
liliu, liuliu, faaliliu to turn
round, maliuliu to be able to
turn, Fi. liu, v. i., to precede,
go before, be greater than,
v. t., liu-taka to precede, go
before, ai liuliu the first : liu
c. preps, e, mai, ki, eliu,
mailiu, kiliu, ad., before, afore-
time, preceding in time or
space, Mg. aloha (ha forma-
tive), a., fii'st, before, previous,
ahead, mialoha to precede, go
before, taloha before, My.
daulu first, to precede, Ja.
talu beginning.] A. 'ala to re-
turn, to rule; b), to precede, go
before; 2, to order to return;
to interpret (in Mod. A., espe-
cially in malicious sense), to de-
clare, institute, direct, define ;
hence tawil' interpretation of
the hidden sense, allegorical
interpretation, 'awwalu first,
before, the first thing, the
beginning, 'awwaliyyu first,
before.
Lo, s., d. li, alia, as lo koi, or
koia, d. li ke, this place, here.
Lo, s., thing, and c. art. nalo : le.
Loamau (lo thing, and amau
true), s., a true thing, truth,
a., true, d. syn. losoko or le-
soko (lo, or le. thing, and soko
true).
Lo, v. i. and t., to look, to see:
leo, le, icl.
Loa, s., c. art. naloa, dirt (on
anything).
Loa, redup., loaloa, a., and v. i.,
to be black, to be blackish.
See also malolo, or milo, mi-
LOA
l]
lolo. [Fi. loa a black cloud,
black paint for the face, loa-
loa, a., black, loaniniata the
black part of the eye which
surrounds the pupil, Ml. U.
aro, P. roro, dirty.] This be-
longs to the word following,
loa i, loa sia, loa ria, to smear
with lolo (the face), or with
intei (the body, cloth), hence
the body, etc., so smeared soon
becomes milo dirty, covered
with dirt, yellowish from the
intei (milolo), black from lolo,
nikis, loaloa. So H. hel'ah
rust (i.e., dirt covering) of a
pot.
Loa i, v. t., to rub, smear; and
Lo-fia, v. t., same as alo-fia, q.v.,
to rub on, to smear ; also
Loa sia, v. t., and redup.,
Loloa sia (d. loloa ria), v. t., to
rub, also to flatter ; hence
Lolo, s., paint (for the face).
[My. lulut, and lulur, to cleanse
the skin by friction and cos-
metics, to rub the skin with
cosmetics, to smear.] H. hala'
to rub, strip, A. hala' to rub
and to smear the eyes with
collyrium, halo' oil or paint
(used by women for their
faces), H. hala' (A. hala', see
elo, lolo, sweet, pleasant), Piel
to stroke, to soothe anyone,
from the primary idea of the
roots hala', llalah, i.e., that of
rubbing, hence to stroke any-
one's face, i.e., to soothe, flatter.
Lobu (1', art.), s., bamboo (the
plant) ; also bamboo water
vessel and bamboo knife.
[Santo lumuo, Ml. nambu (n,
art.), New Guinea dd. bau,
1 1 7 [lolo
if a, inba, diem (d', art.), kern
(k', art.), Sa. 'ofe, To. kofe (k',
art.), bamboo, Ha. ohe bam-
boo, a reed generally, bamboo
knife, a kind of flute.] H.
'ebeh a reed, A. 'aba'a^' a reed,
'abau reeds.
Lofa na, s., c. art. nalofa na,
his track (so called because
his track is marked by bent
grass, &c.) : lofa, lifa ia.
Lofa ia, v. t., to bend ; same as
lifa ia. [Sa. lofa to cower
down, crouch, Pi. love-ca to
bend, kalove bent.]
Lofa, s., hunger or famine (be-
cause it bends one) ; a sword
(because it is flexible) : lofa
lofa ia hunger or famine bends
him : lofa ia.
Lo-fia, redup. lolo-fia. See loa i,
loa sia.
Ldga (ending ga), s.,an enclosure,
the inside of an enclosure ;
given as d. syn. for elol ( in
the sense of enclosure, that is,
the inside of an enclosure).
See alo.
Lokoloko ki, same as lakolako
ki ; lako, v. i.
Loko-taki, v. t., same as luku-
taki : lako, v. i.
Loku, a., concealed, i toko loku
he remains concealed : lako,
v. i.
Lokuloku ki, same as lokoloko ki.
Lolo, s., voc, uncle, redup. of
alo ana, q.v.
Lolo, s., and c. art., a black paint
for the face (under the eyes) :
loa i, loa sia.
Lolo, s., c. art. nalolo, thread :
the native thread was made
by rubbing the fibre between
LOLO]
the hand and the thigh : loloa
sia,
Lolo, a., or v. i., redup. of Mo,
q.v., sweet, pleasant.
Lolo-fia, redup. of lo-fia, and
Loloa sia, or
Loloa ria, redup. of loa sia, q.v.
Lolo-mina, a., lolo sweet, pleasant,
and mina, q.v., gentle and
pleasant.
Lolofa, a., or v. i., d. lulum, lumu
to be wet, moistened : see tiu,
d. luma. [Fi. luvu to sink in
the water, luma to kill by
putting the head under water,
Ma. rumaki to dip in water,
Mg. roboka plunged, dipped,
soaked.] Ch. seba' to dip into
(H., A., id.) Ithpael 'istaba'
to be wet, moistened.
Lor, s., d. roro, the oily milk
expressed from the grated
kernel of the cocoanut for
puddings. See ror, roro ia.
Los, or loso, redup. lolos, or
loloso, v. i., or mid., to bathe,
to wash (oneself). [TaSa. lalos,
Ml. roso, Malo loloso, id.,
Ml. roso-vi to wash (clothes,
ifec.)] A. rahas'a, n. a. rahs', to
wash (clothes, the body), H.
rahas to wash (the body), to
wash oneself.
Losia, v. i. See lusia.
Lot, v. i., to crackle, as a fire ;
explode, as a gun, &c. ;
Lotelot, v. i., redup., to crackle
frequently and rapidly, as the
bubbles in a boiling pot ;
Lotelot, s., c. art. nalotelot, same
as naletilot, froth ; also,
Lot, s., c. art. nalot, froth (i.e., a
mass of bursting or crackling
bubbles). See lita.
US [LU
Louua, d. for loamau (lo a night,
and uua, i.e., uwa, for amau,
true).
Lousa, redup. lolousa, v. i., to be
wet, or losa, lolosa. See lusa.
Lu, s., d. for lo a thing, in lurik,
a thing, lit. little thing.
Lu, s., a place, for li, alia, as lu
ua, this place, here, lu uan
that place, there.
Lu, v. i., to rise up, as intano i
lu the ground rises up (as when
the swelling yams below heave
it up), redup. lulu, nabiau i
lulu the waves rise up ; also
lu, d. lua, to take up, then to
take out, away, also to throw
up (lua i and lua ki nia), i.e.,
to vomit, to put up, also to
put out, as to put out the
tongue, lua mina (also lai
mina and le mina) : lua, lua-
lua to take out, or put out
(anything, as yams from the
ground or a plantation, or
demons from a man possessed ),
lua nafunaso take out the cork
or stopper (take it up) ; lulu
to be uplifted, proud (see lagi-
lagi, liglig) bau lulu a proud
person (lit. high head), also
lulu, d. li, to vie with, contend
for superiority, bilulu, v. r., to
vie or contend with each other
for superiority, bilulu ki vie
or contend with each other
for superiority about (some-
thing) ; lu e a take it up (used
of water taking up a solid, as
a medicine, dissolving in it,
because the medicine, as a
preparation of iron, lies at the
bottom of the water, and, as
it dissolves, rises in it) ; na-
LU]
119
[luaki
kabu i lua nasu the tire puts
out, or scuds up, smoke : to this
stern belong also ulua to grow
up, uli, ali, .and ula, a leaf, and
lulu the hair (of the head,
face, or other part of the
body), redup. uluulua to be
growing up, putting forth
leaves, also to be hairy, to
be woolly (as a sheep) to be
covered with down (a plant) :
to this stem also belong (the
-ga, or -gi, being formative)
laga tia, laga ia, lagi, elag,
elagi, lagilagi, malaga, &c.
See supra under the word lagi.
[Fi. lua, lua-ra, lua-raka, to
vomit, Sa. luai to spit out,
Ha. luai to vomit, lualuai to
ruminate, chew the cud, to
raise the food again from the
stomach to the mouth, as
ruminating animals, Ma.ruaki,
Tab. ruai to vomit, My. luwat,
or luat, to vomit, luwar, or
luar, out, away, luwari and
luwarkan to put out, expel,
Mg. loa, &., vomit, mandoa to
vomit, loatra, ad., over and
above, loatra taken up, put
out, mandoatra to take out or
up, loarana being taken up.]
See A. 'alu, H. 'alah under
the word lagi. A. 'ala', n. a.
'uluw', to ascend, go up, be
above it, over it, overlay it,
become supernatant upon it ;
overcome, become superior ;
exalt (himself) ; recoil (from),
remove, or go away (from), 2,
to take up or off, 3, to vie, con-
tend, or compete for superior-
ity, 4, take up, take out, tire.
H. 'alah to go up : inanimate
things are also said to go up,
as smoke, a rising ground, a
plant which sprouts forth and
grows, whence the participle
'oleh (a plant) sprouting forth
(Ef. ulua, ulu), and 'aleh a
leaf (Ef. uli, all) ; used also of
things which are taken up,
carried away, Hi. (causative)
to take out or up (as out of a
pit), to take up, or away, to
put up (the oid, from the
stomach into the mouth, Ha.
lualuai), of ruminatinganimals,
generally, to make to go up
(out or away), E. redup. la'ala,
'a I 'ala to make to go up, lift
up, take up, le'lena height,
highness, &c.
Lua, v. t., see under preceding
word. This verb is much
used after other verbs, as sela
lua i bear or carry (taking)
out, or away, ba lua i, &c. ;
rniroa lua i think (taking or
putting) out or up (discover it
by thought), &c.
Lualua, v. t., redup. of preceding.
See lu.
Lua, s., c. art. nalua, a land slip:
lua, lu.
Lualua, s., c. art. nalualua. an old
plantation (out of which the
yams have been taken) ; the
hair or grass-like growth on
rocks under the sea : lua, lu.
Luaki, s., an allegorical utter-
ance, a proverb or parable ;
Luaki, v. t., i luaki natisan he
makes his speech allegorical
(tarns it from the obvious
sense), i tili luaki lau era sa he
utters a proverb ( parable, or
allegory) planting it on them
LUBA Kl] 120
(lit. planting, piercing, or fix-
ing them with it) : liu uaki,
or liu aki.
Lu&a ki, v. t., to pour out (as
water, grain, &c), lu&a, mid.,
to pour (itself) as rain ; also
used of pouring out anything
(as men) from a ship, lu6a
kira pour them out, or land
them, hence biluiaki, v. r., to
pour each other out, to land
(men) ; malu&aki to be spilt,
poured out (water or fluid),
talu&aki to be spilt or poured
out (as water or fluid). [My.
turn pah to spill, shed, pour
out, manumpah, id., Fi. livi-a
to pour gently, or in a small
stream, talivi to be poured
out, spilt. A. sabba to pour
out (of all things, and of things
dry) ; to pour, be poured out,
5, 7, 8, to be poured out, and
Saba, n. a. sa'b', to pour out.
Lufa, s., loin wrapper, girdle
round the loins. See lifa ia.
Lug ia, v. t., to bend, make
curved, and red up.,
Luglug ia, id., d. nugnug ia;
hence
Lug, s., c. art. nalug, d., the
native pudding (see nakoau,
kabu), so called because
wrapped in leaves which are
bent or curved round it.
[My. lengkok bent, crooked.]
A. laga, n. a. la'g', 2, to make
curved, to bend.
Luk, or luku, s., a hole or pit, a
well : luku noai well (pit or
hole) of water : lako.
Luku, a., same as loku.
Luku-taki, v. t., same as loko-
taki. See lako, v. i.
[lumlum
Luluk, s., a thing rolled up (as
cloth). See lulu ki (luluki).
Luko, v. i., same as liko, v. i.
Luku tia, v. t., same as liko tia.
Luko, s., c. art. naluko, same as
liko, s. ; takes the nom. suf.
nalukona, or nalikona, its
rope, i.e., the rope for tying or
fastening it.
Lukuluku, same as likoliko.
Lukoluko, and
Lukuluku ki, same as lokoloko
ki : lako.
Lulu, v. i., redup. ; and
Lulu, v. t., l'lu, d. li, vie, con-
tend with for superiority, dis-
pute with : lu, and see ban
lulu and bilulu.
Lulu, s., c. art. nalulu, as nalulu
nabau na the hair of his head,
nalulu na his hair : lu, and
see uluulua.
Lulu, v. i., to roll : i lulu ban, it
rolls away ;
Lulu ki, v. t., to roll up (as cloth
into a bale) ; hence
Lulu, s., c. art. nalulu, a roll, a
bale ; and talulu, and talu or
tal'lu, s., a roll (of cloth), a
crowd (of men), a herd (of
pigs), a heap (of stones) : see
also malilu to roll. H 'alal
to roll, hence to be round,
thick, eg. galal, lul, Ac.
Lulu, v. i., to sink, d. tutu, q.v.
Lulia, and
Luluia, v. i., for ululia : alialia.
Lumi a, i.e., lu mi a, to look
upon it, see it : d. for libi sia,
d. lim si, d. le ba i or le ba ia.
See le, leo, lo.
Luma, or lum, v. i., and redup.,
Lumlum, to be wet. See lolofa,
d.;
luma]
Luma, s., the wet, as luma iga
luma the wet is about to wet,
or will wet ("it will rain," or
" is going to rain ") ;
Lume a, v. t., lume nafanua to
wash (immerse) or cleanse the
land by a religious service or
ceremony performed by the
ii i.i :i n ii ili • tabu, or priest: so
if a man has been poisoned,
natamole tabu i lume a ki the
poison, cleanses or washes him
from the poison by a religions
service or ceremony. When
the land is suffering from
drought, natamole tabu i lume
a, or lumi a, and the hard-
baked and therefore barren
earth becomes soft and moist
(lum, lulum), clothed with ver-
dure, and fruitful, yielding
abundance of food ; redup.,
Lulurne a, id. The radical mean-
ing of the word is to dip, to
immerse (see under lolofa).
[Fi. lomo-ca to dip, to dye,
luvu to sink in water, to be
flooded (as the land).] H.
Saba', A. sab"a, to clip into, to
immerse, then to dye, to tinge,
S. sba' to tinge, Saba' to wash,
E. tarn 'a to tinge, to immerse
(in water). See also riu, tiu,
tutu, tuma.
Lume sia, v. t., to turn, d.
lume to wrap up, buluma, or
bulima, to be turned, to be
changed (in form or appear-
ance). [Tali, rumi to wring,
turn over, upset, Ha. limu to
turn, to change, to have various
appearances, limulimu twist-
ing, turning.] E. tavvim to
roll up, fold up.
121 [m'
Lumi, v. i., to swell up, d. lugi.
A warama to swell (eg. H.
'aram, rum).
Lusa, v. i., to be wet, also lousa,
lolousa. E. relisa to be wet.
Lusi a, redup. lulusia. See lele
(and usi a).
Lusia, v. i., to be dirty, faded, i
bi namau lusia (of a lazy,
languid husband). [My. lasu
languid, feeble, Mg. la/.o
fading, withering, faded.] A.
latha to dirty, to be slow, 5,
to be dirty, lutha£ langour,
laziness, 'alwathu languid,
faded, withered. See milesu.
ll± (ma, mi, or me), a formative
prefix or preformative particle :
the m' is sometimes changed to
b and f, as toko, or to, mato,
bato, or fato ; in the causative
prefix it is b' or f, being the
initial consonant of baka or
faka, rarely ba or fa ; in the
reflexive prefix it is b' or f,
being the initial consonant of
bi or fi. In bi, or ti, q.v., the
i is a fragment of the ancient
reflexive prefix, as the a in ba
or fa, q.v., is the ancient
causative prefix. In many
cases ma- (often mi) is found
prefixed to verbs having a
passive sense, the same verbs
being without the ma- active :
in these cases we may regard
the word as representing the
ancient ps. part. The pre-
formative m (originally ma) in
H. and Arm. me or m', A. mo,
122
[mbat
or mu, E. rua, Ainh. ma, was
attached to infinitives and
participles (active and passive).
Sometimes ma- in Ef., or m'
(b', f) is to be regarded as
originally prefixed to the sim-
plest form of the verb. See
mago (bngo), borau (A. rnar-
kab, an infinitive), &c.
M, ad., contraction of mo, q.v.
JMa, s., day ; in mas, maisa, mes,
masus (nanum, nana, nanofa,
nanoasa, nasa, uasa,a.sa) to-day,
lit. this day. H. yom, A. ya'm',
S. yom, Ch. emphatic yoma',
and sa, dem.
Ma, prep., for, contraction of
magi or of mane (d. mini), as
i manai (or maginai) bat ia, d.
i manena bat ia, d. i masa bat
ia. See magi. [Ma., Fut.,
<fec, ma, id.]
Ma, s., contraction for maga, in
names of places. [Ma. ma,
id.] Maga.
Ma, d. me, prep., with (of
accompaniment), and. [Ha.
me, Ma. me, with, and, Mg.
amana with, and, Mota ma,
me.] H. 'im, A. ma' with,
together with : may, like me,
(fee, sometimes be translated
by and.
Ma, v. i., for man! : ani, v., q.v.,
c. p reformative m'.
M;l nla, v. t., to rub, grind, or
grate (as yams) ;
Ma, s., c. art. nima, a fern tree;
the rough bark of it (used as
a grater) : nima that which
ma, i.e., grates. See foga, afo.
[Mg. fafa swept, cleared off,
wiped, cleansed, m ifaf a, mafaf a,
to sweep, wipe, clear away.]
H. liafaf II. to rub off, scrape
off, A. haffa to rub off.
Ma, s., a man, a male, opp. to
lai (lei, le, li) a female, a
woman ; used also before
names of men, as lai before
names of women ; as ma
tuele, Mr. tuele ; ma-riki lit.
old. man, senior, sir, often
used also before names of
men, like ma : ma is a con-
traction of mare, q.v. [Ysabel
(Gao) mae male, and used also
before masculine names.]
Note. — This ma (contrac-
tion of mare) occurs also in cl.
ma'ani, man! (sometimes pro-
nounced mwane, or moan),
and denotes male (the ni in
mani, like the ni in kuruni, is
non-radical, being a suffixed
particle), thus nata-mam, or
ta-mani, a male, male, lit. a
male human being, and in
another d. the initial m is
elided and for man! we have
anoi, q.v., a male, male.
Ma'ani, or maani, or man! (or
mwani, or moan), a., male, d.
anoi, s. and a., male : see pre-
ceding word. [Malo muera,
Oba amera, Celebes burani
(husband, Wallace), Ambrym
milig, Bali muwani, Epi d.
man, and Ef ta-, or ata-mane,
Epi dd. sumano, atamani (su-
mano, ata-mani), Ta. yeru-
man, TaSa. la-mani, Fi. ta-
ngane, To. ta-ane, Fut. and
Sa. tane (ta-ane), id.]
Mba, v. i., for ba, or ma, v. i. : a
mere euphonic change.
Mbat, s., d. nabe, a club. [To.
mata a kind of club.] Nm.
mabk] 123
nabboud a club ; also nabbout
a staff, club.
Ma6e, s., c. art. n&m&be, the
chestnut tree and its fruit.
[Tali, mape, id. ; also the kid-
neys of any animal ; An.
mop(o) the chestnut, also the
inside (i.e., belly) of a box,
inside (i.e., belly) of an ani-
mal, the pluck, the heart,
liver, and lungs, Malo mabue
chestnut.] See under amo,
amoanid.
Ma&elu, maielubelu, v. i., d. ;
refl. of 6elu ; to be bent,
doubled, folded : behi.
Ma6or, d. mauora, q.v.
Mabulu, v. i., or a., d. mafulu,
fat : bulia.
Mabulu, s., a large kind of pigeon.
.Mabulu, v. i., or a., sticky ;
waxy, as a yam when cooked :
bubulu, bulu tia.
Mafa, a., swollen, in las mafa, d.
las mUu, swollen testicles (mau
for mafu). H. bua', ba'ah,
A. ba"a' to swell. See fuata,
bua in.
Mafa, v. i., as i maf ban he goes
hidden ly or unobserved = i bi
bei ban ;
Mafa na, s., his being hid or
unseen (in going) : see bei,
and afa.
Mafa, d., v. i., or a., to be broken,
cracked, d. mafua, q.v. [To.
mafa crack, rent, split.]
Mafa ia, or mafai a, v. t., to
cover : 6o-fia.
Mafaifai, v. i., or a., to be
smashed to pieces : fai. See
bua to divide, cleave.
Mafaku, v. i., to be plucked up,
or out : baku sa.
[ma*;a
-M.itiiitiii, v. i., to be loosed, to
be made void : bir ia, v. t.
Mafasu, v. i., to be broken off,
snapt off. [To. mafacbi, id.)
Base a.
Mafis, s., a knife, d. for makus.
q.v.
Matisi, s., a child, one begotten
or born, and
Matisi, v. i., or a., to be begotten,
born, brought forth ;
Mafisien, s., c. art. namafisien
the being born or brought
forth : bis ia. v. t., to beget.
Matisi a, v. t., to beat : tisi a.
Mafu, s., c. art. namafu (d.
namam), a mist; cei'emonial
uncleanness : abu, abuobu.
Mafua, v. i., to be split, cracked :
bua to divide, cleave. [Sa.
mavae to be split, cracked.]
Mafukafuka, v. i., to be swollen
out, puffed up : buka I.
Mafule, v. i., to be stripped of
leaves : bule.
Mafunai, or mafunei, v. i., to he
consumed, annihilated, as wood
in the fire ; and
Mafunufunu, v. i., to be brought
to an end, to be ended, finished,.
annihilated : bunu ea.
Mafusai, v. i., to be smashed to
pieces, as a yam : busa ia.
Mafuti, v. i., to be plucked : but
ia.
Maga, v. i., to gape (see maka,
gaga, fugaga), open out, then
to wonder, then to gape or
open the mouth (to speak),.
to speak, maga asi is to speak
about it, lit. to open the jaws,.
part asunder the jaws (asi),
maga lua i speak it up or out,
lit. gape outing it, maga lo
MAC A]
124
[maga
saki, d. maka lo saki, to gape
looking up ; hence
Maga, s., a small canoe, namaga ;
and
Maga, s., c. art. namaga, d.
nabaga, the banyan ; and
Magan, s., c. art. namagan, the
art of gaping, wonder ; and
Magamaga, v. i., redup., to gape
often and rapidly, to pant ;
and
Maga-fai, s., a division, a part
(see fai, bua) ; and
Maga, s., the first part in names
of places, as gorges or valleys,
and especially of places in the
depths of the abyss of Hades ;
sometimes, but rarely, con-
tracted to ma, as niaga-tika, or
ma-tika, the lowest abyss in
Hades. [Ma. maga brook,
watercourse, ditch, and con-
tracted ma in names of streams,
Sa. faamaga to open the mouth,
to gape (To. fakamaga) ; maga
a branch (as of a tree, road, or
stream, or anything having a
branch, or forked), Tali, maa
cloven, divided, My. nganga
to gape, mangu wonder, amaze-
ment, mangah to pant, palpi-
tate, manga open.] E. naka'a
to gape, to yawn, to be rent,
parted or sundered, and of
water gushing forth (see
fugaga), A. manka' a place
where water remains (i.e., a
hollow, fissure in the earth,
or valley), nalia'a to rend
asunder, E. nka'a£ an opening,
gap, fissure ;
Maga, s., see above, in names
of the following places in
Hades, signifies chasm, yawn-
ing chasm, gulf, or abyss, of
which there are several, some
say six, one below the other,
viz. —
Maga-6oa6oa, evil-smelling abyss
— see boa ;
Maga-bua, profound abyss — see
bua ;
Maga-lulululu, sinking sinking
abyss : lulu ;
Maga-na6ona6o, evil smelling
abyss : na£o ;
Maga-seasea, abyss of oblivion :
seasea ;
Maga-tika, or ma-tika, abyss of
annihilation (this is the lowest
abyss) : tika ;
Maga-tiro, sinking abyss. See
tiro.
Note. — Magatiro in one
dialect is magalulululu in
another ; and niaga&oa&oa and
magana&ona&o denote the
same. Thus there are five
abysses yawning one below the
other in succession. All these
are below abokas, which is the
uppermost, and the first to
which departed souls go, and
also the general name of
Hades.
Magaliu, s., name of a place in
Efate, lit. the turning gap.
See liu.
Magali, v. i., to be turned round :
elo i magali the sun is turned
round (it is late in the after-
noon). See kelu.
Magasi, v. i., to speak about, lit.
to open or part the jaws :
maga, asi.
Maga, prep, and pron. of 3 per-
son, denoting with-them, thus
— (1) kihe maga 1 ? who they?
maga]
d. se mani '! d. se mai 1 d. fei
manag 1 (2) John maga, d.
John manag, d. John merauan
(or meroan), John and his
companions ; (3) natamole
maga, d. manag, d. mera uan a
man with them (i.e., a man
with those beside him), some
men, indefinite plural. The
literal meaning of maga in
(1), (2), (3j, is with-them
there : kihe maga ? who he
with-them there (beside him),
or together with them there
(beside him) ; John maga John
together with them there be-
side him ; natamole maga
the man together with them
there (beside him). It is
probable that maga is a con-
traction of which manag is the
fuller form ; and the -ga (for
naga) is the dem. there (see
ga, dem.) This manag =
with them there : in address-
a number the speaker says
tagu maga % or manag, or mera
uan, my friends, lit. my friend
with them there (beside you);
so tai manag, &c, brother with
them there (beside you),
brothers. The expression
mera uan is me with, together
with, ra them or those, and
uan, dem., (that) there, and
manag and maga differ in
having the r elided (as it is
in eu, u, for eru, ru, they,
verb, pron.) and the suffixed
dem. nag or naga, q.v., in-
stead of uan, q.v. Mani (and
mai) are not used as in (2)
and (3), but only as in (1) in
the above example. [Ma. ma,
125 [mago na
Ha. ma, Fut. ma, Ta. min, d.
mi (meh) pi., ml, dual.]
Magasaga, v. t., to make a saga
(crotch, fork) : maga, and
saga.
Magau, pr. n., c. art. namagau,
for nabagau. See bagau.
Magi (d. syn. mini), comp. prep.,
for, contracted ma, q.v. : magi
is agi, q.v., and m' on account
of, in, to, and thus aginai =
what is his, his, maginai on
his (account), in his (interest),
i.e., for him ; in one d. the
genitive prep, nig, q.v., of,
denotes also for, niga = his,
and also = for him. Both
magi and nig, when = for,
are placed between the verbal
pronoun and its verb, thus, i
maginai, or i niga mati, he for
him died. The prep, m' or mi
is, except in this case, mostly
used before the object of a
verb — see le bai limi sia, lu
mia, li bi sia, in which it occurs
as mi, bi, and ba, and see also
bai, or bei. [Mota mun for,
An. imi to, for, Ma. ma for,.
&c]
Magie na, prep, and s., for his
name, i magiena bat ia he for
his name did it, tuga magie-
gita bat ia let us for our names
(i.e., for each of us) do it, &c. :
ma, i.e. magi, for, and gie
name.
Magiri a, v. t., to scratch, scrape :
giri a.
Mago na, s., c. art. namago na :
bago na, q.v. for meaning and
origin, is the same word by
change of m (the preformative)
to b.
M AGO AGO]
Magoago (m J prep.), d., ad.,
dawn, early morning, lit. at
dawn. [Cf. Arag vaigogo to-
morrow.] E. golla to dawn,
goll dawn.
Miigoro, s. See muagoro.
Magura ki, v., to withhold from,
d. makur ki : gura ia.
Magura, v. i., or a., to be lean,
d. makur : gura ia.
Magura, s., c. art. namagora,
contraction of muagoro.
Maguku, v. i., to be bent,
&.c. : guku. [An. mecuc
old, wrinkled, makaka bent,
crooked.]
Magusi, v. i., to be crooked, con-
torted, cross-grained, as wood ;
also, nabona i magusi his heart
is crooked.
Mai, ad., here, as bano-mai to
come here, lo mai look here,
&c, and v. i., d. for the full
expression bano-mai, d. umai,
to come here. See banotu,
note, and bai, bei, be.
Mai, s., c. art. namai, a rope, a
string. See d. me.
Mai a, or ma ia, v. t., to chew
(softening food for an infant).
[Sa. mama to chew, ps. maia.]
A. ma"ma"a to chew (meat),
but not wholly.
Mai, d. for mani, as sei ? who (is)
he 1 se mai 1 who (are) they 1
See maga.
Maia, s., a species of banana.
Mai, distance, only in emai, ad.,
q.v.
Maita, or maieta, d., and
Maito, or maieto, d., v. i., or a.,
to be black, black. [My. itam,
Mg. mainty, Bisaya maitum,
Tagala itim, black.] A.
12G [maka
'adhamo' ('ahtamo, 'athamo,
tfec, id.) black, 'idhamma,
and 'itliamma [i.e., dahama,
taliama, 9), to be black.
Maieto, maito, v. i., to be angry,
maito sa to be angry on
account or because of it,
maito ki nia to be angry at
him, maito ki nia sa to be
angry at him on account of it.
A. ma'it'a to be angry, ma'it'o,
and ma'it'o angry.
Maietoa, and
Maietoan, s., c. art. namaietoa
anger, namaietoan the being
angry, anger.
Mailoa (ma-, prep.), s., ad., d.,
dawn, early morning, lit. at
dawn. [An. imraig to-morrow,
Mg. maraina morning.] See
aliati.
Mailua. See malua.
Mailum,mailumlum. See malum.
Maimai, v. i., to be in a tumult
(of haste or passion), namarite
na i maimai his inside (heart,
feelings) is in a tumult. [Mg.
maika, and maimay, a., hasty,
in a hurry.] A. ma'ma'a to
do a thing hastily, to be in a
tumult, ma'ma'al crackling
(of burning reeds or such like).
Main, v. i., to live : dd. mauri,
moli.
Maisa, ad., today, dd. mas, mes,
masusa. See ma, day.
Mak, v. i., d., to fall, become
mild, gentle, die away, as the
wind : eg. miio. S. mak to be
cast down, prostrated, humble,
mild.
Maka. See mako.
Maka, v. i., or maga, q.v., to
gape, to wonder, to be amazed,
MAKAKA
V2\
[makita
i maka sa, or maga sa, he is
amazed or gapes at (because
of) it ; and maka lo saki, or
maga lo saki, lie gapes looking
upwards. See maga.
Makaka, v. i., or a., to be ragged
or fissured, as cloth. See aka.
Makal, s., an ant (so called from
its smallness, or quick and
light movements) : kala, and
bakal ia II.
Makal, s., shame, pudenda. See
under bakal ia n.
Makal, v. i., or a., and redup.,
Makal kal, to be sharp : bakal
ia II. [To. machila, sharp.]
Makalakala, v. i., or a., to be
itchy : connected with makal,
ant, thus, makal i makamakala
ki nau an ant moves about on
(is creeping or running on)
me. and therefore a makala-
kala I am itchy : bakal ia II.
Makamakala ki, v., to move
about or creep on (one), of an
ant (makFd), hence makalakala
itchy.
Makara, v. i., to be assembled,
to be a crowd or many to-
gether, dd. maraka (trans-
posed), and mera, or mara (k
elided) : kuru, guru.
Makarakara, v. i., or a., to be
burning, as the throat from
eating currie with too much
pepper : kara.
Makas ia, v. t., to pluck out or
off, as a scab or anything from
the skin, loose bark from a
tree, husk from a cocoanut.
A. nakas'a, 3), to pluck out.
See bakasa ki.
Maki, v. t., to be ignorant of,
not to know ; redup.,
Makimaki, as i makimaki isa he
is ignorant of, does not know,
it;
Maki, don't know (in answer to
a question) ;
Maki, pr. n. of a demon or spirit,
one of the officers of Saritau at
the gate or entrance of Hades.
When the spirit of a deceased
person presents himself after
death for admission to Hades,
Faus (another spirit) asks
" Who is it 1 " If Maki says,
" Maki " (i.e., don't know) a
dreadful punishment is in-
flicted by Saritau ; if he says
" He is one of our people" ad-
mission without punishment
is given. [My. mukir, Ja.
mangkir (mungkir), to deny,
disavow.] A. nakira, 1, 4, 6,
10, to be ignorant of, not to
know, 4, to deny, to disavow,
Munkar' name of the angel
who together with Nakir is
said to have the office of
examining deceased persons in
the grave.
Makinikini, v. i., to be itchy :
kan ia. [Sa. ma'ini, ma'ini'ini,
to tingle, to smart.]
Makit ia, v. t., to seize or take
with the uataki (native tongs)
the hot oven stones, ru sela
uataki makiti fatu isa, or
maki fatu isa. H. hatah to
take, take hold of, seize. It
is once applied to a man, else-
where always to fire or burning
coals.
Makita, redup. makitakita, v. i.,
or a., to be bent, curved, only
in the expression lo makita to
look bent, i.e., to look round
or back, lo makitakita, id., d.
bakita, bakitakita. A. ka'at'a
to bend, to curve) mak'ut"
bent, curved.
Mako, and maka, s., offspring ;
in pr. names, as niaka folu, lai
or li mako, <fcc. : aka (ako).
[TaSa. niaka pi grandchild
(offspring, or offshoot, of grand-
father, pi), Fi. makubu, or
niokubu, grandchild.]
Makota, or makoto, v.i. , to be
broken, and redup.,
Makotakota, to be much broken ;
and
Makota ki, to be broken from,
i.e., to cease from (some person
or thing) ; and
Makota, s., a part (of a planta-
tion), a place, makot i milate
the place is cold, i.e., there
is no one about the place
(on calling at a house and find-
ing no one at home), makota
ua this place, lit. this part :
koto-fi a.
Makus, s., a wooden knife (used
for cutting up puddings), d.
mafis.
Makuskus, or
Makusukusu, v. i., to be soft
(ripe) : kosu mia.
I. Mala bulu, v. i., to faint, fall-
ing down (of men), to become
weak and falling down (of
breadfruit) — see bulu ; and
Mala, 8., faint, as mate ki mala
to faint, lit. to die in a faint ;
a species of hawk (of a
faded colour) ;
Malamala, v. i., to be foolish
(My. babal, silly, doltish), c.
art. namalamala, a fool, one
foolish ; and
128 [mala
Mala, s., c. art. nauiala, a fool,
one stupid, foolish, senseless ;
and
Mala nono, v. i., to abide sense-
less, deprived of sense or
motion (as by terror) : no to
abide. H. nabal to be or
become faded (used of leaves
and flowers falling off from
being faded), to fall down, to
faint, to lose one's strength (of
men : bulu, q.v., to fall down,
H. nafal, is eg. to mala, and
the two verbs occur together
(cf. mala bulu) in Job xiv. 18,
(of a mountain falling and
lying prostrate, like a dead
man) ; to be foolish (the mind
faded), flaccid, devoid of vigour,
stupid, nabal foolish, senseless.
II. Malamala, v. i., or a., to be
naked, naked ; and
Mala, s., or malala (intensive), the
cleared place at each village, in
the midst of which the nafoeas
are set up, and in which are
performed the sacrifices, sing-
ing, and dancing of the in-
tamate ; often in the names of
places (because cleared or bare,
because having a mala, or
cleared place). [Ma. marae
enclosed space in front of a
house, yard, Tali, marae, a.,
cleared, as a garden, or a place
of worship, s., the sacred place
formerly used for worship,
where stones were piled up,
altarserected, sacrifices offered,
prayers made, and sometimes
the dead deposited, Sa. malae
the open space where public
meetings are held.] And also
Mala, s. (also malo) a place or
malmal] 129
part (as of a garden), a part
of time, and
Malmal, s., a small place, or part.
See under ali or alia.
in. Mala, v. i., or a., d. malala, to
be loose, and redup. malamala,
id. A. lialla to loosen, mahlul'
loosened, loose, Ct. mahlul
loose.
Malamala ia, or malamalai a, d.,
redup. of (malai a) milai a, or
milei a, q.v.
Malafiafi, v. i., or a., to be thin.
[Ha. lahi, lahilahi, thin, My.
ramping thin.] A. raffa, n. a.
rafaf, to be thin.
Malari, d. for milati, q.v.
Malasilus, redup. of milesu, q.v.
Malat, s. See melat.
Malatiga, d. malandigi, ad., and
prep., near, malatiga ki near
to : mala place, and tiga, tigi.
Malau, v. i., to be bad tasted (as
stale food), to be corrupt (as
bilge water), faded (as a fallen
leaf). [Tah. marau old, worn
out, fading.] A malali'a to be
bad tasted, have a corrupt
taste (food), maluh'a to be in-
sipid (meat), malili" corrupt,
insipid (food).
Malei a, or male ia, v. t., to re-
quite, malei au isa requite me
for it. [My. balas, malas, to
reply, requite, Mg. valy, ma-
maly, to reply, requite.] See
liu, liliu : the idea is "make
return."
Maleoleo, d. malolo, v. i., to
become tame, gentle (i.e., in-
telligent), as an animal does
when domesticated. A. ra'a',
4, ; ar'a', n. a. 'ira', to become
prudent, intelligent.
[malkjo
Malebuto, ad. and s., middle
part; inside, heart: mal (mala)
place, part, e prep., and buto
the middle.
Malele, v. i., or a., to be bent,
curved : lele.
Malera, v. i., to be thin, running,
of a fluid, as paint. See lor,
roro, ro ia, roro ia.
Maler, d. mal6ru or maliru, v. i.,
to be transparent, shining (as
smooth water or glass re-
flecting the light : lira.
Maletileti, v. i., to be stiff" (as the
back, in some disease) : let, let.
Mali, and redup. malimali, v. i.,
to be drooping, as the coun-
tenance in shame ; and
Mali, s., c. art. namali, a plant
(which when eaten is said to
make one so) ; and
Malierl, i.e., mali-eri, v. i., to be
ashamed, lit. to be drooping
or abashed in the face or
countenance : see rai face,
forehead. [My. malu to be
ashamed, abashed, malumalu
bashfully, Mg. malo, malo-
malo, bashf ulness, mimalo, mi
malomalo bashful, meek-eyed,
shamefaced.] H. 'amal, 'amel
to languish, to droop, prop, to
hang down the head.
Maliblib, v. i., weak, limber, d.
maliflif : Ufa ia. A. laflafa
weak.
Malibu, s., widow (also widower),
i.e., one mourning, lit. covered
with ashes : libu.
Maliflif, d. maliblib, q.v.
Malifus, dd. malus, maus, v. i.,
or a., bent : lifa ia.
Maligo, v. i., to be dark ; and
redup.,
Id
MALIGOLIGO] 130
Maligoligo, id., intensive ; and
Maligo, s., c. art. namaligo,
darkness, d. malik, q.v.
Malik, v. i., redup. malikoliko ;
nauialik, s., to be dark, dark-
ness, d. maligo. [Epi miko-
leko, Vanua Lava malegleg,
meliglig, black.] A. halika
to be very black (holakliko
very black), part, mahluk'.
Malilu, v. i., to roll away, to
roll, malilu ki, v. t., to make
to roll, to roll (a thing) away :
lele.
Malilua, v. i. See malua.
Malio ki, v. t., to forget (a thing) :
lailai. [My. lalai, Ja. lali, to
forget.] A. laha, n. a. lohiyy'
being diverted to forget (a
thing).
Malis, d. for malus : malifus.
Malitiga, dd. maririgi, multig :
malatiga.
Malo, s., a place, part ; a part
of time ; mal or malo tageli a
crooked part (either a place
difficult of access, or crooked
conduct) : c. art. na malo na
the trunk (of a tree or the
body) : mala. See ali, alia.
Malo, s., a kind of rock in the
sea. [Santo malo a rock.]
Cf. A. marw' very hard stones.
Malo, v. i., to be weary, unwil-
ling, averse ; malo ki, v. t., to
dislike (a thing). [My. malas
averse, etc.] A. malla to dis-
like, to be tired, weary ; mallo
disgusted, wearied.
Maloi, s., a mask. [To. bulo to
mask, to veil, buloa and bulo-
bulo a mask ; veil for the
head. Ha. pulou to cover the
head, veil the eyes, s., a veil.]
[malumlum
A. barka'a to cover the face, to
veil, 2, to be covered with a
veil, veiled, burka'o a veil,
burku' id.
Maloiloi, v. i., to be feeble,
tottering from weakness. [Ha.
loeloe, maloeloe, feeble.] A.
la'la'a, 2, to be twisted and
moved (from hunger), to be
infirm and weak from disease
or languor.
Malolo. See maleoleo.
Malosu, d. milesu, q.v.
Malu, v. i., or a, to be bare,
cleared ; redup.,
Malumalu, id. See ali, alia,
mala.
Malua, v. i., to do anything
gently and quietly, not to be
in a hurry, to do after a time,
by-and-by, d. mailua, malilua,
d. malulu. [Fi. malua go
gently, not to hurry, by-and-
by, vakamalua gently.] A.
mahala mahlu, to do anything
gently and quietly, not in a
hurry, 2, to grant that a thing
may be done by-and-by.
Malubaki, v. i , to be spilt : luba
ki.
Malum, v. i., to be weak, faint,
soft ; to do anything weakly,
i.e., gently, not in a hurry.
Malumlum, redup., also mailum,
mailumlum. [Fi. malumu,
malumulumu, weak, faint, sick,
My. lamah, Ja. lamas, soft,
flexible, weak, feeble, faint,
Mg. lemy softness, meekness,
gentleness, malemy soft, meek,
gentle, TaSa., nalum, Ml.
malum, id.] A. s'a'afa, n. a.
S'a'f, s'u'f to be weak, infirm,
S'a'uf, id. ; also to fold, double,
MALUS] 131
mas''uf (part.) weak, debili-
tated.
Mai us, d. for nialifus.
Mal-tageli. See malo, s., and
tageli.
Mam, v. i., or a., to be soft (as
ripe fruit), ripe. A. ma'w'
ripe or ripening dates, ma'a,
to have such dates (a palm),
ma' soft, mild (of food).
Mam, s., c. art. namam, d. for
mafu.
Mama, s., voc, father, dd. ab,
abab.
Marriau, redup. of mau, q.v.
Mani, v. i., or man, contracted
ma, to abide, to be : am.
Manamana, s., c. art. namana-
mana, a pudding mixed with
pig's fat wrapped up (munu
tia) in leaves to be cooked in
the oven ; a captive taken in
war (because such were cooked
in the oven and eaten). See
munu tia, bunu tia, &c.
Manag, d. maga, q.v. : manag,
i.e., ma with them or those,
nag (clem.) there.
Manaki, ' v. i., to stay for the
night, to rest, as a guest ;
Manaki, s., c. art. namanaki, one
who does so, a guest. [My.
rnanang to rest.] Mod. S.
maneh to rest, Mafel, i.e., the
causative with the preforma-
tive m ; H. nuah to rest, A.
nali'a to kneel down, as a
camel, monah' a place where
camels lie down (to rest or
sleep).
Mandu, d. for matru.
Maneinei, v. i., to be weak. A.
na'na'a to be weak.
Mani, as sei who (is) he ? se
[manubu
man! who (are) they ? d. kihe
maga 1 See maga.
Manifenife, v. i., or a., to be
thin. [Sa. manifl, manihniti,
My. mimpis, mipis, nipis, tipis,
Mg. manify, thin, hanifisina
being made thin.] A. nahifa
and nahufa, n. a. naliafa^,
naliif, manhuf thin, slender.
Ct. nahif thin, nahafat thin-
ness.
Manru, d. for matru.
Manu, s., a multitude ; d. a
thousand (d. bon a thousand),
manumanu (cl. bonbon) a very
great number, or multitude ;
see bon, bono tia, bunu tia,
munu tia. [Sa. mano a great
number, manomano innumer-
able.]
Manu, s., a bird, birds. [Ja.
manuk, Ta. manug, Er.
menok, Vanua Lava mon,
Tag. ibon, Poggi umah, Sa.
manu, id.] H. 'of birds, fowl
(feathered creatures), 'uf to
fly ; E. 'awif to fly, 'ef a
bird.
Manumanu, s., a streamer or flag
of a native canoe sail : preced-
ing word. [Fi. manumanu, id.,
also a bird.]
Manu na, s., the palate and
upper part of the throat. A.
lianaku the palate and lower
part of the mouth answering
to it (eg. nanoa na, q.v.), A.
lianaka to rub food with the
palate, 2, to rub the palate.
Manua, v. i., to be finished,
ended ; and
Manunu, id., d. manubu. See nu.
Manubu, v. i., to be finished,
ended ; and
MANUBUNUBU]
Manubunubu, id., redup. : nubu,
num, nu.
Manubunubu, d. matumutumu,
to be soft, sleek, as the skin
of a newly born pig, or of an
infant. See nubu, tumu, noba.
[Ha. nopunopu to spring or
swell up, a., soft, spongy,
thoroughly cooked, plump, fat,
swelled out, nopue plump,
round, as a well fed, fat hog.]
Manugnug, d., v. i., to be bent :
luglug ia.
Manuka, s., c. art. namanuk,
wound. [Sa. manu'a to be
wounded, s., a wound.] A.
naka' to wound.
Mao na, s., d. faa, thigh. [My.
p'aah, id., also the limbs or
quarters of a slaughtered ani-
mal, Mg. fe the thigh : cf.
Sa. vae the leg, vaega a
division, vaevae to divide in
parts, cut up a slaughtered
animal, mavae = Ef. mafa, d.
mafua, and see Ef. fai.] See
bua (also fai, maga-fai).
Mao, and redup.,
Maomao, v. i., to be gentle, mild.
A. mahiha to be mild, eg.
mak.
Maoni, v. i., d. mani : am, v. i.
Maole, or mauole, s., c. art. na-
maole, a bed ; hence
Maole ki, v., to make a bed with
(something) : d. uol, see bilis
ia (bolis ia, and uolis ia).
Maon, s., d., c. art. namaon,
sweat : der. uncertain.
Maora, v. i., to be rent, redup.
maoraora (intensive) : bora ia.
Maosa, d. taos, v. i., to be
fatigued, tired. [Fi. oca
(otha) weary, tired.] A.
132 [marase
fatha', 4, to be fatigued,
weary, 'aftha' fatigued, worn
out.
Maota, or mauota (mawota), v. i.,
to be parted asunder ; redup.,
Maotaota, id., and
Maota na, s., c. art. namaota,
interval : bota, ia.
Mara uoka, a., having the hands
chapped with hard work, as
with digging with the kali, or
with using an axe, naruna i
bi mara uoka : maras, and
boka tia (or uoka tia).
Mara, v. i., to rest, stop, mara tu
stand still ;
Mara bakarogo, v. i., or a., to be
quiet, rest quiet, peaceable :
mara, i.e., maro, q.v., and
bakarogo.
Marag ki, v. t., d., to spit out,
to loathe. See burei a, burog.
Marafi, v. i., to hasten, be quick;
redup.,
Marafirafi, id. See sarafi. S.
rhab whence sarhab, Pael, to
hasten, mesarhiba sudden,
mesarhlbat hastily, quickly.
Uhlemann (Syr. Gr., §25, A, b)
gives sarheb (Saphel, similar to
Aphel) to permit to hasten,
and to hasten = arheb (H.
rahab to urge on, press, «fcc.)
Maraka, v. i., or a., to be willing,
desirous,
Marakaraka, id., redup. See
raka.
Maraka, or meraka, v. i., d. for
makara, q.v.
Marase, v. i., to be softened or
excoriated (as the hands with
work), to be peeled off, exco-
riated, tamaras peeled off" (of
the skin of a body softened
maraserase] 133
or macerated in water). A.
maras'a, maratha, to macerate
in water, rub, scratch with
the nails ; and
Maraserase. l'edup., to be peeled
or excoriated here and there,
as the skin. Compare marato.
Marasa, or murasa, d. burasa,
v. i., used as an ad., gently,
slowly, by-and-by, as ba
marasa mer ia do it gently,
not in a hurry, slowly, or by-
and-by. A. ratha to delay,
to be slow, 2, soften ; be
fatigued, murayyath' slow.
Marate, v. i., or mareti, to be
excoriated, peeled, as the hand
with hard work. See marase.
H. marat, to make smooth ;
to polish ; to make bald,
t pluck out the hair ; marut
to be peeled (as the shoulder
with carrying burdens) Ch.
to pluck (wings), to be
plucked, A. marata to pluck
from the body (hairs), 3,
pluck out hair and wound
with the nails.
Maratg, or maretS, a., in fatu
marete oven stones (hard,
smooth or bare stones, worn
smooth by the sea) : preceding
word).
Mare, v. i., to be turned, lo mare
to look turned (round), look
back. See roa, rea.
Mare, s., a man (male, not fe-
male), Sir, Mr., as Mare uota
Sir or Mr. uota : see ma,
maani, or man!, and mariki.
[Tah. maroa a boy, a male
(tamaroa boy, tamahine girl),
Motu mero a boy (not a girl),
Malo muera, Oba amera, a
[maro na
male, vir.] Ch. mare' lord,
S. mar, A. mar' (also homo,
see infra mera), mor', mir', id.,
mara'a, 2) to be virile, mascu-
line, and brave, as becomes a
man.
Mariki, s., lit. senior, sir, old
man, Mr., opposite to lite rikl
matron, old woman, Mrs. : ma,
for mare, and riki.
Marita na, or marite na, s., the
belly, bowels, also a rope or
string; hence
Maritausa, v. i., to be angry, or
marita sa, or marita na i sa :
and marita uia to be well or
kindly disposed. See sa, uia.
A. muryita' the belly. See
the verb under marate.
Maritau, v. i., to wither, be
withered. A. saha, 2, v. t., to
wither or dry plants (as the
sun, wind), 5, tasawwaha to be
withered.
Maro, v. i., to breathe, to rest,
be quiet, to be glad, restful,
contented, satisfied ; maro ki,
v. t., to perceive the odour of
(to breathe or inhale the odour
of), to smell ; redup.,
Maromaro, v. i., to breathe ; to
rest ; hence
Maromaroan, s., c. art., the act
of breathing or resting, rest ;
and
Maro na, s., c. art , breath. A.
raha, n. p. marob, to rest (i.e.,
respire) ; to be glad ; to per-
ceive the odour of ; to blow
(wind), 2, to be quiet, to rest,
4, to breathe, H. ruali to
breathe, blow, Hi. to smell ;
to be pleased, glad (smell with
pleasure).
Maroa, v. i , to turn round : roa.
Maro&aro&a, v. i., to fall down,
as the smoke of a fire signal.
See taru&a.
Marou, and ruarourou, s., d.
(transposed) for rum a.
Maru, v. i., or a., d. meru, to be
limpid, clear, pure (of water).
A. namiru, namliu, id.
Maru, d. for matru, q.v.
Maru sa, v. t., to rub ; mastur-
bate ; to joke. A. marah'a,
n. a. marh'u, to joke, to anoint,
to soften (the body with oil),
H. marah to rub.
Maruen, s., c. art. namaruen,
joking, &c.
Marua, v. i., to cease, leave off',
marua ki to cease from ; and
Maruana, s., c. art., cessation :
baro, v. i., barua.
Mas, s. See maso.
Mas, ad., d. for maisa, mesa,
masusa.
Mas, and sam, ad., alone, only :
ma for mau (as in sikei mau),
and 's, sa, one.
Masa, d., v. i., to go, to walk.
A. mas'a, id.
Masana, s., c. art. namasana, the
going, walking.
Masa ia, v. t., to rub, rub off,
masa ia nafo rub it on the niifo
(to rub the rust off' it) ;
Masamasa ki, redup., rub (as
the rust oft' a needle, on a
stone) ; and
Masamasoa ki, v. t., end. 'a, to
stroke, smooth, flatter ; and
Masa, v. i., at ease (as wild
animals in their lair, as if
smoothed into gentleness) ;
Masamasa(n)ta, d., v. i., or a.,
end. ta, smooth, as a board :
134 [masere
dd. musi ki, mus ia, to stroke,
smooth, rub. H. mas'ah to
stroke, anoint, A. masaha to
stroke, to flatter, wipe off,
ma'asa to rub strongly,
ma"as'a to rub gently, masili'
smooth, S. ms'ah to anoint ;
to measure; A. masaha to
measure (land), H. mis'liah,
mas'liah a part, a portion (Ef.
mas, maso, mis, id.)
Mas, s., also maso, mase, and
mis, a part, a portion, a place
(part of the land), as bau-maso
na, q.v., masleo a portion of
speech or words, as of a song,
masleo naligana, a portion of
human speech, dialect (see leo),
maso ua this part, or place.
See preceding word.
Mas', or masu, v. L, d., to come j
hence
Masuen, s., c. art. namasuen, the
act of corning. E. mas'a to
come (H. masa' means to come
to, i.e., to attain to, to arrive
at, anything).
Mas ia, v. t., to shave, as masi
nasina to shave the chin or
part of the face covered with
the beard : masi noai shave
off the surface of water, bail
out : hence, redup.,
Masimasi, v., to bail out (a canoe
or boat), and
Masi, s., a knife, and
Masimasi, s., id., d. mismis. A.
masa to shave, musa' pi.
mawasi a knife.
Masaki. See misaki.
Masei, s. See masoi.
Masere, s., c. art. See miseri.
Masere, v. i., to be treated
kindly : sere a, bakasere a, te
MASERE
135
[masol
inasere, one treated kindly, as
a beloved child.
Masere, v. i., to be torn : sere.
[Fi. kasere, id.]
Masi&a, v. i., to be broken, done
into fragments ; and redup.,
Masi6asi6a, id., intensive: si&a ia.
Masi-6alo, s., wilderness, lit.
empty part (of land). See
mas, maso.
Maslka, v., in sera maslka sa to
desire, covet (a person or
thing). A. s'aka, 5, to be
desirous of.
Masiki na, d. mihi (for misi),
v. i., taking the nom. suf.
agreeing in number and per-
son with its subject as, a
niasikigu I alone, ku masikima
thou alone, i masikina, or
f masikinia, he alone : siki, and
pref. ma.
Masila, or masili, v. i., to be
thin ; and
Masilasila, d., I'edup. ; and
Masila na, s., c. art. namasila
na, chip, shaving. See sila ia.
Masila, in buru-masila, q.v. See
sila.
Masirsir, d., v. i., to sob (as after
crying). A. zahaia to utter
the voice, to give forth a
sound, to pant or gasp with
vehemence and groaning.
Mas-leo, s. See mas, s., part or
portion, and leo voice, speech.
Maso, s. See mas, s., a part,
portion, place.
Maso, v. i., or a., to be cooked,
done, d. mahi. [My. masak,
Mg. masak a, Ma. maoa, and
maoka, and maonga, cooked,
also ripe, Bugis motasok ripe,
Tah. maoa cooked, ripe, Fut.
moa, Santo, d., maa, cooked,
To. momoho ripe.] A. sawa'
2, to finish off (see infra su,
si), 8, to be finished ; and (of
food) to be cooked, done ;
Nm, (Part.) mostewi cooked
(meat), ripe (fruit).
Masoi, masoei, or masei, s., star,
stars, d. mohoi, c. art. na-
mohoi. [Epi d. mohoei, Fila
masoi, Fut. fatn, Sa. fetu,
Santo dd. vitu, matsoi, vitui,
vitiu, My. bintang, wintang,
and lintang, Mg. kintana and
vasiana, Tag. bitoin, Sumbaw a
l)intoing, Sulu bitohon, Tobo
toi, Matabello toin, Menado
bituy, Sanguir bituin, Cajili
tulin, Mayapo tulu, Gani
betol, id.] A. dara'a, 7), n. a.
duruw', to glitter and twinkle
(a star), durriy' glittering and
twinkling (star), and dar'ariy'
glittering and twinkling stars.
Masoi, or masei, star, is used in pr.
n., as Masei, Mare Masei, &c.
Masok, v. i., to be violently
agitated or enraged, as namari-
tama i masok, lit. his belly or
his bowels leaped up : soka
to leap.
Masoko, a., true, exact, to the
point, as nafisan masoko a
word or speech true, exact, or
to the point ; as an adverb,
bisa masoko to speak truly,
exactly, or to the point, ba
masoko to go exactly, ba ma-
soko sa go exactly upon it,
&c. : soko.
Masol, v. i., to turn aside, de-
cline. A. zala, n a. zuwul', to
decline (as the sun) ; cease to
be in place, remove ; start on
masu] 136
a journey and change one's i
mind.
Masu, s., c. art. namasu, the time
of harvest, or of plenty of food,
opposite to sukei, q.v., lit. the
coming, namasu nafinaga the
coming of food, as yams,
taro, bread-fruit, &c. : mas'
(or masu), v. i., to come.
Masua na, s., c. art. namasua na,
the top, crown, or summit (of
anything) : sua, su.
Masua, v. i., or a., to be bald.
A. nazi'a to be bald about
the temples, manzu''.
Note. — Sa. tula, My. sulah,
Mg. sola bald, A. sali'a to be
bald on the fore part of the
head, sul'ai place of baldness.
Masuku-taki. See musuku-taki.
Masula ki, v. t., to scorch (as the
skin of a pig in order to its
being scraped and prepared
for cooking) : sulu.
Masusa, ad., for mas, maisa, to-
day.
Mat', v. i., to ebb; to be low
water ; hence
Mat', s., c. art., namat, the ebb ;
low water; the shore left bare
at low water. [Sa. masa to be
low tide ; to be sour ; to have
an offensive smell ; To. maha,
mam ah a, to ebb, Pi. mati, to
ebb, and s., namati the ebb.]
A. matha to macerate and
dissolve (a thing in water), H.
masas, eg., to melt, flow down,
to waste away.
Mata (or mwata), a snake. [Sa ,
Fut., Fi. gata, id., Malo moata,
Santo dd. mata, maura, My.
ular, id. (Ma. ngata snail,
slug, leech).] A. ll'ata to creep
[matigo
along like a thread (a serpent),
mah'lt' place of a serpent,
through which it creeps.
Mata, s., the eyes, usually mita,
or meta, q.v.
Mataisau, s., a carpenter. [Sa.
mataisau, id.] ;
Matakseu, d., id. Mataisau is lit.
the eye (or director %r master)
of cutting. See (mata), meta,
and sau.
Mataku. See mitaku.
Mataloa, s., a pig with crooked
tusks, one on each side, that is,
a mature, full-grown pig. A.
sala"a and sala"a to have or
acquire a tooth or tusk on each
side.
Matata, s., a phosphorescent
worm (which gleams brilli-
antly). [Fi. matata to clear up,
as the weather, the sky.] A.
S'a'a to shine ; Nm. mos'ui
phosphorescent.
Matau, s.,d. na mitau, an anchor:
tau.
Matautau, v. i., to utter sounds
as one in sickness or pain, to
groan, moan. A. 'aha, n. a.
'awh', to say ah ! alas ! oh ! to
be in pain, (2), 5, id. With
matautau cf. A. part, of 5.
Mate, v. i., to die ; and redup.,
Matemate, v. i., to be quiet, soft,
gentle ; and
Matien, s., c. art. namatien, act
of dying, death :
Matigo na, s., c. art., the grave,
d. emate n ; tamate. v. i., to
become calm (wind, wave), s.,
peace, a calm ; also a series of
feasts or festivals held every
fifth day (see d. syn. belaki).
[Sa. mate, My. mati to die,
M ATI RATI R A
137
[.maturu
Mg. maty, a., dead, matimaty
lukewarm.] A. mata to die ;
to become calm (the wind), 4,
to soften by cooking. This
word occurs in all the Semitic
languages.
Matiratira, v. i., or a., to be
shining, bright (as any polished
surface). See tare.
Matiu, d., v. i., to sink. See tiu sa.
Mato, and
Matoko, v. i., to remain, abide,
to sit : to, toko. [Mg. raito-
atra, mitoetra, mitoitra, mito-
moetra, to reside, dwell, abide,
sit, rest.]
Matol, ad., to-morrow : tola.
Matoltol. See matultul.
Matu, v. i., to abide, to abide
standing : tu.
Matu, s., c. art. namatu, d.,
woman : fatine. [Ja. wedo,
Sula nifata, Tidore foya, id.]
Matu ki, v. t., to strengthen or
support with posts (a fence),
matu ki nakoro ; and
Matu na, s., c. art. namatu na,
post or stake (of a fence) ; the
backbone, vertebral column,
the back : fatu.
Matru, v. i., to be thirsty, to
thirst, dd. manru, mandu,
maru. [Sa. galala to have
intense thirst, Ml. P. meruh,
Epi mereu, TaSa. maroku,
Malo madoce, Bugis madoka,
Santo (Pelia) marara, Marshall
Islands maru, New Caledonia
malu, to thirst.] A. "alia, 1,
1)), and 8, to thirst, "alall'
thirst, "all' thirsty, ma"lul'
intensely thirsty, &c.
Matua, v. i., or a., to be old, ma-
ture, elder, then (full-grown)
large, great ; also wise, op-
posite to busa, as meta matua
wise, lit. old or mature, i.e.,
experienced eye, bo matua,
wise, lit. old, mature, i.e., ex-
perienced heart; te matua the
aged, or the ancients ; meta
matua ki to withhold from (a
person, something);
Matuatua, redup. of preceding
word, very old ;
Matua, s., or ad., the right hand,
or side : tuai. [Sa. matua
aged, elder, mature (matuatua,
dim.), a parent, Fi. matua
mature, My. mantuwah a
father or mother-in-law, Mg.
matoa eldest son or daughter,
matoatoa a ghost, apparition,
Malo matua right hand.]
MatCiki, a. used as s., one trusted
in, confident, brave, as a
warrior : tuki. [Mg- matoky
confident, brave, trusting.]
Matulu, v. i., or a., to be swollen,
thick ; and redup.,
Matultul, id. : telatela, telatelana.
Matumutumu, d. manubunubu,
q.v.
Matuna, s., and ad., c. art. na-
matuna, d. fatuna, something,
anything, somewhere, any-
where, somehow ; also a ghost
or appai-ition, lit. something :
ma, or fa (the inter, pron.
used indefinitely), q.v., and
tuna, dem., te (or tu) with the
dem. na added to it. See safa,
or sefa. H. mah anything,
something, whatever, Ch. mah
di whatever, what that, that
which, A. ma' that which,
whatever.
Maturu, d. matur, v. i., to sleep,
MAU]
bakamaturu ki to put or make
to sleep. [My. tidor, Ja. turu,
to sleep, Mg. tory, s., sleep,
rnitory to sleep, Bugis matinio
to sleep, Ml. P. nietur, Malo
inaturu, TaSa. tsuruve, Santo
dd. chinaru (tshinaru),chinavo,
chiranu, noro, rontui, An.
umjeg (umjeng), Fi. moce
(ruothe), Sa. moe, ps. moea, to
sleep.] H. yas'en, A. wasina
to sleep, sina<', H. s'enath, and
s'enah, sleep.
Mau, v. i., to recover from sick-
ness, be well : abu.
Mail, v. i., a., and ad., to be
together or all together (as a
number of men), to be whole
(of a thing) red up. mamau, id. ;
nai mau it wholly, or only (of
a substance), nara mau they
wholly or only (of a number
of persons) ; and
Mau na, s., c. art. namau na, d.
nabai na covering of it (a bird),
i.e., its feathers ; na mau the
bunch of feathers worn as an or-
nament on the top of the head ;
na mau nasuma (d. na bau
nasuma), nakasu, the top of
the house, of a tree ; mau
naliati (d. bau naliati) mid-day ;
Maumau, s., redup., the surface
of the land or sea. See bau,
bai. [Epi momou the whole,
Ha. pau, a., all, ad., wholly,
Mg. aby all, every one, the
whole, Ma. hou a feather (see
under bau sia).] H. 'amain,
A. 'amma, to gather together
(see bau sia), to be or become
universal, to include or affect
all, to cover wholly (see deri-
vatives, Lane's Diet.), complete
138 [mau
perfect, universal, whole, nu-
merous, all.
Mau, or amau, a., true, lo-amau,
or lo-mau, a true thing, d.
mauri, or mori. [Tah. mau
true, Fut. mari, To. mooni,
Ma. pono, Sa. moni true] ; and
Mau, a., used as s., one firm,
intrepid, bi'ave, i.e., warrior of
such a character, also, in Mau-
tukituki, pr. n. of a mytho-
logical hero. [Sa. mau to be
firm, to be decided, unwaver-
ing] ; and
Mau sa, v. t., to come upon, ob-
tain, find, bamau ria reach
to. See bamau. [Sa. maua to
obtain, reach to, Tah. mau to
seize, take hold of] ; and
Mau asa, d. mau is, v. t. (to trust
in), to desire, tea maumauen,
a thing trusted in, or desired,
te namauena, id. [Ma. po-
pono to covet] ; and
Sera lo-amau asa, v. t., to be-
lieve on or in (him or it).
[Ma. whakapono, Fi. vakabau] ;
and
Mau, ad., very, indeed, continu-
ally, as bisa mau to speak
continually, toko mau abide
continually, constantly, <fcc.
[Ha. mau continually] ; elagi
mau above indeed, in the
highest place, toga mau very
far away, malitiga mau very
near, etaku mau, or mau-
mau (intensive) behind indeed,
the last (as the last day),
male mau ua naga this very
time, d. mal fa nin (fa for
mau), bisa mau few indeed,
very few, d. bisiba (ba for
mau), sikei mau one only.
ftAU-TIAJ
[Fi. dua bau, Sa. tasi pe, one
only] ; mas (for mau sa only
one), and sam (for sa mau one
only), are like sikei mau (but
without the kei suffixed to the
numeral sa or se) ; ti bano
mau did not go indeed [Aniwa,
Fut., si fano ma, si fano mana,
id.] ; this mau after a verb
preceded by the negative is
very commonly used, but may
be omitted, and ti bano, ti
bano mau, are both used,
though the latter is the more
common. H. 'aman to prop,
stay, sustain, support ; to
carry (sustain) a child ; 'amen
to be firm, unshaken, faithful,
A. 'amuna to be faithful,
'amana to confide in, trust,
'amina to trust, be secure ; H.
Niphal to bear in the arms, to
be firm, to be of long continu-
ance, continual ; to be sure,
certain ; Hi. to lean upon,
trust, confide in, believe ; stand
firm, still, A. 'amana generally
the same ; S. 'eman to perse-
vere, be constant, and, con-
trarily, to cease, A ph. to
believe, 'amen, &c, verily,
truly, certainly, E. 'aman id.,
also truly, and 'amanawi, id.,
'amana to believe ;
Mau-tia, v. t., to save, to pro-
tect : mu-tia.
Maua ki, v. t., to give food to
(people, as to those who have
been doing something for one) ;
and
Maua, s., c. art. namaua, food, or
provisions. A. mana to give
food, mawunai provisions.
Mau, d. for mafa, swollen.
139 [me
Mauaua (mawawa), v. i., to be
separated. See mafa, bua.
Maiiori (mauori), v. i., to be
broken, and redup.,
Maiioriuori, intensive : bori a.
Mauri, s., as mauri nalagi the
place where the wind ends at,
to leeward ; the left hand or
side, opposite to matua. [Sa.
muli matagi, To. mui matangi,
the place where the wind ends
at, Ma. maui, Malo marao, Ta.
maul, Epi dd. mali, mau, left,
on the left hand.] See muri.
Mahri manghura behind.
Mauri, v. i., to live, dd. mairi,
mole, bakamauri make to live;
Maurien, s., c. art. namaurien,
life. [Fi. bula, Sa. ola, Fut.
mauri, My. idup, Ja. urip, Ta.
murif, Mg. velona, to live,
Epi d. meouli, mauli.] A.
'as'a, n. a. 'ais", ma'as", ma'Is"
to live, 4, make to live.
Mauri, a., true, tili mauri speak
true ;
Mauri, s., c. art. namauri, a
prayer or incantation, lit.
what is true : mau true.
Miius (mawus), d. for malus
(malifus).
Mauta, d. mautu, s., a rising
ground ; one's native land : so
called because (i tu mau tu) it
remains firm or continuing.
See mau. [Sa. mauga a hill ;
a residing at a place (from
mau).]
Me, prep., d. ma, q.v.
Me, or mea, v. i., to make water ;
also, redup.,
Meme, id., and
Me, s., urine, me-riki dysuria,
lit. small or scanty me ; and
me]
ZNIe, or mea, v. i., to How, wet,
us i mea the rain pours out, i
me nakoau it (a fluid, as water)
Hows upon or moistens the
pudding ; nai me a flood or
freshet, lit. flowing water, d.
naum a stream, lit. flowing
water; na bisi me semen geni-
tale. [Mg. mamany to urine,
amany urine, Ha. mi, mia, inimi,
to make water.] A. maha
to have water (a well), leak (a
ship), 2, to pour water; to wet
with water ; emit water (the
ground), ma' juice (of any-
thing), semen genitale (H. me),
H. me (of the feet) euphemism
for urine. See Ges., Diet.,
s. v. ma', who gives a root mo'
to flow.
Me, s., c. art. name, d. namai, a
rope, or string. [Sa. maea,
To. maia, id., Mg. fehy tied,
mifehy, mafehy to tie, kofehy
a cord or string, i.e., that
which ties.] E. mawaklia,
contr. moklia to tie, bind,
mokll a bond, band, rope,
vinculum.
Me, and
Meamea, long ; as tali me tuturu
(see tuturu), a rope long,
hanging down, i barau meamea
it is long, like a long streak of
water running down a tree, or
the face of a cliff. See me,
mea to flow.
J/emi, d., v. i., to be gentle,
tame : mao, maomao.
Mela, melamela, for mala, mala-
mala, fool, foolish.
Melat, s., c. art. namelat, or
malat, flower (of a plant),
then flower (of anything), that
140 [men A NA
is, crown or most excellent
part, as namelat natamole the
flower of men, the most ex-
cellent of men. A. warada
2, to flower, ward' a flower.
Mele na, s., c. art. namele na,
the hollow ; as nameleru na
the hollow (palm) of the hand,
d. nal'naru na (see alo, aru,
belly, hand), namele natuo na
the hollow (sole) of the foot
or feet, namele gere na the
hollow of the tail of a fish.
[Mg. faladia, i.e., fala dia, sole
of the feet.] A form of the
word be\e na belly, hollow.
Melesia,d. melesira. See milesia.
Meliboi, or melibai, v. i., to be
bent, as grass by the wind, &c. :
lifa ia.
Meliki, d., v. i., to be dilatory,
slow : malua, and suffixed ki.
Melita, v. i., to crackle, resound
(as one's name) : (lot) lita.
Melu, v. i., d. meliki : malua.
Melu, s., shade, rag melu time of
shade, evening, melu na its
shade, or his shade (protection) ;
Melu, v. i., to be shady (as the
day), and redup.,
Melumelu, id. [Sa. malu to be
shaded, to be protected, malu-
malu to be overcast, cloudy,
Mg. malomaloka shady, cool,
gloomy.] H. 'afel obscure,
dark (of the day), 'afal to be
obscure, dark : eg. 'amal or
'am el. See mali.
Melu, s., that which, or what
milu departs or removes (from),
separates (from) : milu.
Men, a. See mina.
Mena na, s., the tongue (of
animal) ; of fire (flame) ; of
MENA I A]
knife (blade or edge) ; of
breaker (edge of the wave) ;
to be the namena, or tongue,
of anyone is to be his spokes-
man ; hence
Mena ia, or
Menamena ia, v. t., to lick it
with the tongue, tongue it.
[Epi mena, TaSa. me, Santo
(P.) meme, Guebe mamalo,
the tongue.] A. manmul' the
tongue, from namala to be a
detractor ; to creep, climbing
up (a free), <kc.
Mer, ad., d. mero.
Mera (for mara), s., c. art.
namera, man in general,
people, as namera ni Efate,
the people of Efate : mera is
contracted to fa in fa-fine,
q.v., and especially Note 3.
A. mar', mir', a male, or, in
general, man, Ct. mir'a man in
general.
Merai, a, used as s., pertaining
to a male, the male organs of
generation, virilia : merai gara
(gara bare) addressed to young-
boys not yet wearing a waist
cloth, or naked ; a man is
sometimes jocularly or dis-
respectfully spoken of as
merai tamana the merai of his
father : mare, q.v., with the
a. end. i. A. mar'yy' virilis,
pertaining to a male.
Mera, s., d. mara, a rippling (of
water) : meromero.
Mera, conj., lit. with them, or
with those : me with, and 'ra
them or those, as John mera
Peter John and Peter ; this
can also be expressed John me
Peter, and John nara Peter
141 [merimeki
(John they Peter) ; with dem.
uan,
Mera uan, dd. syn. manag, maga,
as John mera uan John and
his companions, lit. John with
those there (beside him); mera
uan can also be used of inani-
mate things, as fatu mera uan
a stone with those (stones)
there (beside it), stones.
Mera, d. contraction for meraka,
maraka, for makara, q.v.
Mera, ad., again, d. for mero, q.v.
Merafalu, some, as koria mera-
falu some clogs : me with, and
rafalu, see lifaru.
Merafalu, s., c. art. namerafalu,
contraction of namera rafalu,
some people.
Mera gi, d. for
Mera kia, v. t., to go before,
leading, to lead.
Merakien, s., c. art. namerakien
act of leading, also meramera,
redup., leading, and namera-
mei"an, s., act of leading or
ruling, kingdom, that led or
ruled, natamole meraki, or
meramera, leading or ruling
men. E. marha to lead ; to
go before.
Merakolau, s., web-like fat on
the intestines (of a pig) : mera
fat (see merei), and kolau,
q.v., a web (spider's). In An.
this is called nilvanilva (redup.
of nilva spider's web).
Meraroa, v. i., to turn round : roa i.
Mer ia, v. t., to do, to make to
work, act, namerien, s., act of
doing, what is done, conduct ;
fimeri to be doing something
to each other, fighting ;
Merimeri, v., to keep on doing.
MERBl] 142
A. 'amila to work, Nm. to
work, act, be active, practise,
4, cause to work.
Merei, s., marrow ; eel ; cater-
pillar ; medulla of banana
fruit. H. merf fat.
Mero, ad., again, dd. mera, mer,
moro, mro, ro, and mo, m,
contraction of mero, as i mero
bano he again went, lit. he
turned went, d. i mer ler ban
he again went, lit. he turned
returned went : roa i.
Meromero, v. i., hoarse, gruff, as
i bisa meromero he speaks
hoarse, gruff. [Mg. barabara
hoarse, having a rough voice,
bara-feo a coarse, gruff voice,
farina hoarse.] A. "ar"ara, 1,
2, to make rough sounds in
the throat (whether with the
voice, or liquor, or the breath),
"ar"ara£ hoarse sound ; sound
of boiling water.
Emeromina, ad., and s., in the
world, the world, lit. in the
light, opposite to abokas in the
under-world, Hades (which is
dark and gloomy) : e prep.,
and meromina, s., formed from
mirama, or merama, to shine.
Meru, v. i., d. for mfiru, q.v.
Mes, ad., d. for maisa, to-day.
Mesa, ad., perhaps, expletive
used at the beginning of a
clause. E. 'emsa but if,
quodsi.
Mesau na, v. t., to desire, and
redup.,
Mesausau, desire much, be lust-
ful ;
Mesauen, s., c. art., desire, will,
what one wills : sau.
Meta, v. i., or a., to be raw, then,
[mil AGO
unripe, crude, ijreen. [Sa.
mata, raw, unripe, Mg. manta
raw, unripe, crude, green, My.
mantah raw, unripe.] A.
'anut'a to be raw.
Meta, s., the eye, the eyes : mita.
Metita, v. i., or a., to be rotten,
to be falling to pieces from
rottenness. A. tha'ita to be
rotten ; to be falling to pieces
from rottenness.
Mi, v., to be, d. for bi, q.v.
J/i a, redup. mimi a : for gumi a,
q.v.
Miel, v. i., or a., to be red, and
redup.,
Mimiel, id. [Sa. melomelo,
memelo, red, My. merah, red ;
the ruby ; bay colour in a
horse.] A. ma"ir' reddish,
'am"aru of the colour of red
clay.
Mihi, d., masiki, q.v.
Mikit ia, v. t., d. for makit ia,
q.v.
Mila, v. i., or a., to be shy,
skittish, to be wild, opposite
to malolo. [My. liyar wild,
untamed, shy.] A. hali'a to
be uneasy, timid, impatient,
shy. Hence
Mila, s., a wild animal ; a
warrior sleeping out in the
bush and watching to cut off
stragglers.
Milau, for malau, q.v.
Milaba. See laba.
Milag, s., a part, or half, c. art.
namllag. Ch. pelag a half,
A. filag' a part, a half.
Milago, v. i., d., to be sick, to
be ill, have a disease. A.
S'aniya, 2), n. a. s'ana' to be
ill, to be sick with a latent
milai.okn]
disease, Nm. mos'na' faint,
languid, moribund.
Milagoen, s., c. art., the being
ill, disease.
Milakesa, or milakisa, v. i., or
a., to be darkish green : milo,
kisa.
M'lame, d., s., c. art. nam'lame,
dew : mala clear (rainless),
and mea.
filiate, dd. malare, milanr, v. i.,
or a., to be cold, cold. [Sa.
maalili, Tali. mariri, Ma.
makariri, Fut. makiligi, id.]
A. makrur' cold, from karra
to be cold.
Milate, s., c. art. namilate, cold,
the being cold, also namilatea ;
and redup.,
Milauiilati, v., to be coldish :
milate. [New Hebrides, TaSa.
makariri, Ml. U. milas, Malo
macariri, Ml. P. mereus, Epi
meneni, cold.]
Mile na, s., place, its place, d.
for alia na, q.v., and see malo
a place.
Mile ki, mile raki, v. t., to seek
for (as for a pig in the bush),
milemile ki, id., also mole ki,
mole raki, molemole ki. A.
'ala, 2), to go through a place,
4, to seek for; to desire eagerly.
Mile, or milei, v. i., or a., used
adverbially, to be good, good,
as noa milei a tell good (well)
it, bati milei a make good
(well) it, syn. noa uia ki, bati
uia ki (uia good), dd. mita ki,
buta ki, as noa mita ki nia,
bati buta ki nia, id. [Rara-
tonga meitaki, Tah. maitai,
Niue mitaki, Fila, Meli, Ma.
marie, Ha. maikai, to be
143 [mina
handsome, good.] A. malih'
beautiful, good, Nui. melieh
elegant, good.
Milesia, v. i., or a., d., and
Milesira, id., to be faded, dirty,
mouldy : endings a and ra ;
and
Miles, v. i., or a., to be faded,
drooping, withered : lusiu.
[Mg. malazo withered.]
Miles, s., c. art. namiles, the
forest, the jungle, the bush.
[My. alas a forest, alasan a
forest country ; a foundation,
alas-kaki footstool, Mg. ala a
forest, a wood, Bugis alok, id.,
Fi. ra below.] A. 'aras'a and
'arus'a to abound in grasses
and herbs (of the land) ; 'ars"
the earth, soil, region, what-
ever is below, H. 'eres the
earth, land, country, region,
soil, Ch. 'Sra' earth ; below.
Miles, s., a plant with dark
leaves : les.
Milo, or miloa, redup. milolo, or
miloaloa, d. malolo, d. milo,
v. i., or a., to be dirty, to be
darkish, of a dark, dirty
colour : loa.
J/ilu, v. i., to depart, go away
(from), remove, namiluen, s.,
the removing, departure. See
s. v. lu. A. 'ala' ('alw) to
remove, or go away (from).
Mini, or mam, q.v.
Mlmi, s., voc, aunt (paternal)
See simam. [Fut. moma, id.]
Mimita, s., a sign, a showing of
something. See mita, mimita, v.
Mina, a., sweet, pleasant, nice.
See kasi. [Tah. mona, mona-
mona, momona, My. manis,
Mg. manitra.]
minranin]
Minranin, d., ad., now ; mi nra
nin, mi time, nra nin this
here ; as to mi compare ma
clay. E. yom to-day, now,
this time.
Mina, tongue. See mena.
Mini gia, d. minu gia, munu gia,
d, munuma (munu-ma), v. t.,
to drink, also minu, munu ;
hence namunuen and na-
munugien, s., drinking, drink.
[Fi. gunuva, unuma, Ml. min,
Malo inu, Epi muni, Sa. inu,
ps. inumia, s., inumaga, Santo
o'o-mia, ulu-mia, My. minum,
Mg. minona.] Ch. s'tha',
'is'tho', S. s'tho, H. s'atha,
E. sataya ; and with the th
changed to k H. s'akah, A.
saka', E. sakaya, to drink.
Mira gi, d. for mera kia.
Mirama, v. i., to be light, to
shine ; namirama, s., light ;
emeromina in the light, the
world ;
Mirama ni a, to shine upon or on
it, or him. [Sa. malama to be
light, malamalama, v., to be
light, s., light, malama, s., the
moon, a lamp, torch, Ha. lama
a torch.] A. lama'a to shine,
&c.
Mirara, v. i., or a., to be light
(not heavy), slender, small.
A. rakka to be thin, slender,
slight, rakaraka to pour out
not much (water or other
thing).
Mirati, redup. mh'atirati, d. min-
rat, minratinrat, v. i., or a., to
be loosed, untied : rat ia. [Ma.
matara,Sa. matala, matalatala,
Tah. matara, mataratara, to be
untied.]
144 [MiSERr
Misafe, misafesafe, v. i., to be
separated (as a cocoanut from
its branch) : safe.
Misaki, d. masaki, v. i., to be
sick, to have fever, to be ill.
[My. sakit, Sa. ma'i, Fut. maki,
Ml. P. mesek, Epi dd. msaki,
miei, id.] And
Misaki, or misakia, s., c. art.,
sickness. [Put. makiga sick-
ness.] A. s'aka', 2), to afflict
(someone, a disease), s'akah
disease, mas'kuww' afflicted
with a disease.
Misal, v. i., or a., to be removed,
separate (from others). A.
'azala to remove (one). 5, 6, 7,
8, to be removed, 8, separate
(from others), nianzul', separ-
ated, removed.
Misal, misalsal, or misali, misall-
sali, v. i., or a., to be light (not
heavy). See sail.
Misaru, v. i., to hang down, pros-
trated : saru.
Misei, or misai, miseisei, v. i., or
a., to be open, cracked : sai.
Misera, v. i., or a., to be parted,
disjoined (as joints), separated:
sera.
Miseroa sa, v. t., to desire, covet :
soroa, sa.
Miseroana, s., c. art., coveting,
covetousness.
Miser I, s., c. art., part of a
woman's dress, consisting of a
little mat, terminating in a
bulky fringe, attached to the
waist cincture and hanging-
down like an apron. See seri
A. 'azzara to cover the body
with the covering or garment
called 'izar', mizar', a garment,
covering, Nm. an apron.
misimis] 145
Misimis, s., d. masimasi.
]\Iisiniis, v., d. masimasi.
Misa, orwisa, v. i.,to be stinking,
rotten, decayed, wasted away ;
and red up.,
Misimisi, v. i., to be wasted away
(of a very old man). Ch. mesa,
S. msa to be decayed, putrefy.
J/ it, s., c. art. namlt, a mat ; so
called because plaited — see bau
sia, Ml. vij, Epi mbie, to plait
(a mat). [Ml. devij, Epi
yembi, a mat.]
Mita, v. t. (also rneta), to look at,
watch, observe, view, as i mita
natai-inlagi he watches or ob-
serves the cloud (to see if it
will rain) mita sa, or mimita
sa, look at, watch it (any-
thing) ; and mita gita, or
bakamita gita = leo goro gita
(see leo) watch, look for, look
out for (expecting) us : baka-
mita, v. t., same as mita.
[Sa. mata to look at, mata-
mata to look, to view, ma-
mata, id. (of many), Ha.
makai, makaikai, to look at
closely, inspect, search out,
spy, act the part of a spy, to
look on, look at, to examine
secretly for evil purposes, To.
mamata to look, look at, be-
hold, discern.] A. 'ana 1, to
emanate (water), to be a spy,
2, to flourish, produce flowers
(a plant), to show, make con-
spicuous, 3, to see, look at or
on, 5, to look at malevolently,
to look at well, accurately, to
be manifest, conspicuous, 8,
to look at malevolently, to be-
come a spy, to view or watch,
to look out for.
[MITAIL.AU
Note. — Mita is probably
mu'tan' Mod. A. mu'tan, the
n. ag. (Participle) of 8.
Mita na, s., c. art. namita na,
the eye, that which sees, looks
at, watches, or observes ; mita
noai a fountain ; mita the
beginning ; mita bud, shoot,
"eye" (as of a potato), bud,
germ, offshoot (of men) ; mita
nalagi eye of the wind ; mita
feagona eye of its end, point
of its end, end ; mita a win-
dow, door, or other opening,
as the eye (of a needle) ;
i bi mita na to be the eye (i.e.,
guide) of someone ; namita
nalo the eye (price) of some-
thing ; mita kita a spy (in
war), see kita ; mita ni elo
(or al) the sun (eye of light, or
fountain or source of light),
lit. eye of the sun. [My.
mata, Mg. maso, Sa. mata,
the eye, <fec, Fi. mata eye,
source, opening, point.] See
mita, v.
Mita, v. i., to bleed, mita ni a
bleeds on it, as i tumana
mita ni a, redup. mitamita ni
a, he bleeds on himself (covers
himself with blood), used also
of rust — it rusts (covers itself
with rust) : ra blood. [My.
bardarah, Bu. madara, to
bleed.]
Mita-6ago na, s., end, lit. point
of its end : mita, s.
Mita-busa, s., orphan child: mita
s. (bud, shoot), and busa, q.v.
Mitaga, and mitagataga, v. i., to
be heavy : d. miten, q.v.
Mitailau (mita-i-lau), s., d. syn.
bile-mita, q.v., lit. germ or
11
MITAKl]
source of the tribe or com-
munity. See lamia.
Mitaki, v. i., to be inclined to
one side : taki, ta.
Mitaki, i.e., mitaki, d. milei, q.v.
Mitakisa, s., blind, the eyes re-
receding into the head : mita
eye, and kisa.
Mitakitik, d. matakitaki, a., last
or first of a row (as of men) ;
from closing up, or, as it were,
binding together the series :
taki a.
Mitaku, or mataku, v. i., to
fear, be afraid ; mitaku or
mataku ki, usually contr. to
mitau ki, or matau ki, v. t., to
be afraid of, to fear ; baka-
mataku ki, to frighten (one) ;
hence
Mitakua, s., c. art. fear ; and
Mitakuen, s., c. art., act of fear-
ing, fear. [Sa. mata'u, ps.
mata'utia, My. takut, Mg.
tahotra, s., fear, matahotra,
v. i., to be afraid, to fear.]
A. taka', v. t , to fear (derived
from waka', 8), takiyyaf fear,
caution, taking heed, takwa,
fear of God, takiyy' fearing
God. See infra, mita-taku.
Mitamai, or matamai, or miti-
mai, ad., to-morrow. [Mota
matava morning, Sa. tafa to
dawn.] A. sabalia, 4, to be
morning, to be early, to dawn,
E. sablia to become light, or
day, to dawn, A. sabah' morn-
ing, masball' and musball'
morning, dawn.
Mitanielo, s., the sun, lit. eye
of the sun : mita ni elo.
[My. mata-ari, Mg. maso-
andro.]
146 [mitefutefu
Mitao, d., v. i., d. mitefe, q.v. :
tao, roa.
Mitarau, s., c. art. tribe, lit.
the bud, or germ, spreading
out into many branches : mita,
s., and rau.
Mitariki, s., the seven stars, lit.
little eyes : mita, s , and riki.
[Sa. matalii, Ma. matariki,
id -]. .
Mitariki, s., as, lo mitariki to
look with little (i.e. con-
tracted) eyes. Same word as
preceding.
Mitaru, v. i., to sink down : tiro.
Mitasabo, s., a stranger, lit. eye
not knowing : mita, sabo.
Mitataku, v. t., as, i tumana
mitataku na he heedfully
watches himself, he being
afraid watches himself : mita,
v. t., and see mitaku.
Mitau, or matau, v. i., to abide,
continue : tau.
Mitau ki, v. t., to fear : contrac-
tion for mitaku ki.
Mitaukien, a., dreadful, to be
feared.
Mitausi a, v. t., to look after :
mita, v. t., and usi, v. t.
Mitefe, d., v. i., to fall down, as
a portion of a precipice : tibe.
See roua, roa.
Mitefe-risu, v. i., to fall down (see
preceding word), rushing or
slipping to a distance : risu.
Miteftef, v. i., and
Mitefutefu, id., to twitter, chirp,
peep (of a bird or fowl), to
make a whispering noise (of
men). H. sifsaf to twitter,
peep, chirp (of birds), to make
a whispering, peeping sound
(of the voice of a wizard).
147
[mitroan
Mitei, or mutrei, s., c. art.,
breadfruit cheese (salt and
sour), that is, breadfruit fer-
mented and preserved. [8a.
niasi, id., My. masin, salt (as
water), Mg. inasimasina saltish,
rano-masina the sea (salt
water).] A. magi 1 salt (of
water).
]\litela, v. i., or a., to be broken
(as crockeiy, or pottery). A.
thala'a to break (the head),
muthalla' broken.
Mitela, s., c. art. namitela, a
fragment, lit. that which is
broken, the broken.
Miten, v. i., d. mitaga, to be
heavy, to be burdened : tien,
or tiena, q.v., as also tago,
tagie. [Mg. entana, s., bur-
den, voa entana lifted up,
mientana to set out, taingina
placed upon (a horse), tongoa
placed upon, My. tunggang
to lide, be conveyed by any
vehicle, tanggung to bear,
carry.] S. fan to carry,
Aph. to bui'den, load, ta'no' a
burden, H. ta'an, Oh. t6'en to
be laden, A. t'a'ana, 8, to sit
on a camel, H. sa'an to move
tents, go forward (as a no-
madic tribe), A. t'a'ana, id.,
E. sa'na, Sa'ana, to put on a
horse, &c, and consequently of
other things where one sits, is
placed, upon another, Seun
burden.
Miti, v. i., to move rapidly, to
strive, quarrel, to jump back-
wards and forwards excitedly
in a quarrel or a rage, to land
or remove from a canoe ; miti
goto depart or go rapidly
soratra
written,
spotted,
across (as an arm of the sea) ;
and redup.,
Mitimiti, v. i., to throb, flutter
(as the pulse). H. nasah to
fly, Hi. hissah to quarrel,
maSSah strife : cf. tiri.
Mitiri a, v. t., to write, to carve,
cut or make figures ;
Mitimitiri, a., figured, as cloth
("print");
Mitiri, d. mautsiri, s., c. art.,
writing, figures ; and
Mitirien, s., c. art., act of writing,
what is written. [Santo d.
turi, My. tulis to draw,
delineate, paint, picture,
figure, write, Mj
colour, writing,
misoratra to be
printed, of different colours,
and soritra, misoritrato mark,
engrave.] E. sa'ala to paint,
figure, A. Sara, 2, to figure,
paint, 5, to be formed, musaw-
wir sculptor, painter, Nra. 2,
to form, draw, trace, paint.
The radical idea is that of
cutting.
Mitiri, s., a kind of locust or
grasshopper (so called from its
mode of moving) ;
Mitiri, v. i., to leap flying (as a
grasshopper) : tiri.
Mitroa, v., to think, mitroa ki,
v. t., to think of or about,
dd. miroa, mitoa, mintoa,
minroa; redup.,
Mititroa, d. minintoa, v. i.,
be thoughtful, sensible ;
Mitroan, s., c. art., act
thinking, thought : ro, roro,
trotro, rara or trara, romi or
rumi. [Mg. eritra, eritraritra
cogitation, mieritra, mieritre-
to
of
JIITO]
ritra, Fut. mentua, To. nia-
natu (Sa. manatu), to think.]
S. 'etra'i to think, Ethpa. of
r'o', Ch. re'ah to think, H.
ra'ah, (3), to delight in, rea' a
friend, lover, one loved,
thought, will, Ch. ra'yon
thought.
J/Itu (mwito), v. i. or a., to be
short, red up.,
Mitemlto, id., d. buru, burufuru.
[Tah. mure, muremure, Ma.
poto.] H. liasar to cut, kaser
to be cut off, to be short, short,
A kasara to be short, 3), to cut
(hair), to make short, maksur'
short.
Miu, v. i., to be wet : eg. mea.
A. mai' fluid, ma'a to flow
gently on the surface, 4, to be
dissolved in liquid.
Miura, s., c. art., dew : miu, and
ura, q.v.
Mo, ad., contraction of mero.
Mo, d. for bo, dd. fo, uo, o.
Mb na, s., father or mother-in-
law, son-in-law. See buruma,
s. ; hence,
J/o-naki, v. t., to be related to
(one) in this relationship :
buruma ki. E. ham father-in-
law, son-in-law, A. ham', hamo,
ham'o, &c, father-in-law or
kinsman of the husband or
the wife, Nm. hamou father-
in law, hamaya mother-in-law,
H. ham, Assy, emu, father-in-
law, Samaritan, a son-in-law,
also, one espoused. " The
proper signification of the
word lies in the idea of
affinity."
Note.— E. Mai ma = Ef.
mo, Fila ma, brother-in-law,
148 [momoa
vuguna (vungona, nearly pro-
nounced like vumona = (in
meaning) Ef. buruma ; in
Tah. momoa to espouse, to
contract marriage.
Moa, d., verbal pron., 1 dual,
excl., pi. bu.
Moas, d. for mafasu.
Mobu, d. m'bua, v. i., to sink :
bua ii.
Mofa, s., when the blood of men
or animals has been shed, and
forms a pool on the ground,
one feeling the smell of it, or
of any similar thing, says i
naio mofa it smells mofa ;
taumofa (tau mofa) to make a
sacrifice or offering to the
natemate. See taumofa. A.
ma'haba£ a small pool.
Mok, s., water flowing from the
eye;
Mokemok, v. i., to flow from the
eye (of water), to water (of
the eye) : eg. miu, mou. H.
mug to flow, flow down, dis-
solve.
Mokot, d., s., tongs : mikit ia.
J/ola, v. i., to yawn. [Ma. ko-
whera to open, gape.] H.
pa'ar to open the mouth with
a wide gape, S. f'ar, A.
fa"ara.
Mole, d. 6alo, v. i., q.v.
Mole a, or mole ki, molemole ki,.
d. mile a, mile ki, q.v.
Moli na, s., d. batoko na, q.v.
Moli, v. i., d. mauri, to live ;
Molien, s., c. art., d. maurien,
life.
Momoa, or momo, d., v. i., to
yawn. [Tah. mama to open
the mouth, Sa. mavava, Fut.
mava, to yawn, Mg. vava the
momoa] 149
mouth, vavana talkative, vava I
opened, mi vava, v. i., niavava,
v. t., to open, vavatra spoken.]
H. peh mouth, A. fah' mouth,
faha to speak, fawiha to have
a wide mouth.
Momoa, v. i., d. for amoamo,
amo'mo.
Monamona, v. i., or a., to be
yellow. [Ma. pungapunga
yellow colour, Mg. vony, s.,
yellow, Amboyna poko, d.
apoo, Ceram poko, yellow, d.
uninim, My. kilning, id.] A.
faka'a, n. a. fuku', to be
yellow.
Monam, d. monau, s., c. art.,
grass (of any kind). A. nama'
to grow, namaya vegetation,
manma', place of (a tree's)
growth. The word " grass "
is connected with "grow."
Mono ti a. See munu ti a.
Mori, d., a., true, tili mori speak
true : mori true, used like
loamau, lesoko, also amori :
mauri, mau, true.
Morese na, s., d. borakese na,
q.v.
Moro, ad., d. mero, q.v.
Moru, v. i., to sink, or be
covered with water, as a canoe
in the waves ;
Moru aki, v. t., to sink, over-
whelm (a canoe), as, nabeau i
sera moru aki rarua the waves
rush, sinking, or covering, or
overwhelming the canoe ;
Morua, s., c. art., the deep, i.e.,
the deep sea ;
Moru, s., any deep place, as a
hole, pit, grave ; hence imrum
(d. imrau) inside of a house,
i.e., moru nasuma, or moru
[mot
uma, the hole, i.e., the inside,
of a house. A. "amara to
cover (a thing with water),
"amar' much water, deep (of
the sea), Nm. to overwhelm,
drown, "anira deep water,
abyss.
Mos ia, for amos ia, q.v.
Muso, s., the entrance to a har-
bour; a space or tract of
country, as that between two
mountains; pr. n. of the village
and district on the northern
end of Deception Island, at the
boat entrance to Havannah
Harbour, and in Ro-Moso,
name of an inland village and
district. H. mahoz a sea-
port, coast, Ch. id., also a
region, A. ha'z' border, side,
region, hence also a port.
J/ota, s., c. art., and redup.,
Motamota, id., rubbish, refuse,
as leaves of trees fallen on the
ground, &c. [Sa. ota rubbish,
Ma., Tah., ota, Ha. oka.] And
J/ota, v. i., or a., to be covered
with rubbish, dirty. [Sa.
otaota full of rubbish : a. end-
ing a.] A. "ota' rubbish,
refuse, husks, leaves, and scum
mixed together, "ata' to have
rubbish mixed with scum (as
a river).
Mot ia. See mut ia.
Mot, s. See mut, s.
Mot, or motu, s., c. art. namot,
as nataku namot back of the
land, or island ; lit. what is
broken oft", hence a district or
place. [Sa. motu islet, dis-
trict, motu to be broken oft",
ps. motusia, v. t. motusi, s.
motusaga, v. i. motumotu, s.
MOU]
motuniotuga, My. putus to
break, Mg. rnaito broken
asunder, snapped, maitoito
broken in pieces, otosana being
cut, broken, snapped.] A.
makta' a place. See the verb
under koto-fia.
Mou, moumou. Same as niiu,
q.v.
Blu, verbal suf. pron., 2 pl. v you,
d. kama.
Mu, v. i., to coo (as a dove), to
hum — see fu. [Tah. mu, a buzz,
mumu to make a confused
noise, as of a multitude of
persons talking together, Ha.
mumu, id., Sa. muimui, to
murmur, Put. mu to buzz, Mg.
moimoy hum, murmur.] H.
hamah coo, hum (as a multi-
tude), A. hamhamah to mur-
mur, &c.,Nm. to whoop, drone,
sing lullaby.
Mu nia, v. t., to take out (a
thing, as out of a basket;.
[Mg. voaka, mivoaka, to go out,
mamoaka to drive out, take
out.] See under bua in.
Mua, v. i., to flow out, flow (of
the tide) ; hence
Muana, s., c. art., the flood tide,
as opposite to the ebb ; and
Mua-goro, s., c. art., dd. fuagoro,
mkgoro, a spring of fresh
water on the shore that is
covered (goro) by the sea at
high water : bua in.
Mubu. See mobu.
Muku ti a, v. t., to cover or en-
close in leaves (as bananas, to
ripen them) ; to rub, wipe off;
and
Mukumukuen,s.,c. art., the doing
so. [Fi. moko-ta, to embrace,
150 [mulu na
to clasp round with the arms,
Ma. mukumuku, muku, to
wipe, rub.] A. liaka to sweep,
cleanse by sweeping ; to rub ;
to suri'ound, embrace, enclose.
il/uli a (mwuli a), v. t., to work
into a round mass, as dough
or clay ; to gather rubbish into
a heap ; to clasp a pig (or
man) round with the arms ; and
Mulimul, v. i., or a., round.
[TaSa. molmol, Ml. P. moro-
mor, Fi. momocpliqili, My.
bulat, Mg. boribory, round.]
This word radically means to
roll as to roll dough into a
mass ; to roll rubbish or
pebbles into a heap ; to roll or
clasp the arms round one. H.
'agal i.q. galal to roll, revolve,
'agol round, and is eg. to gulu
tia, itc.
Mulu sia, v. t., to strip off the
skin, and
Mulu, v. i., and tamulu, to cast
the skin (as a snake, a crab, a
scab, men in myths), redup.
mulumulu ; and
Mulu na, s., c. art., the skin
which is cast ; then, the lower
rank which a chief casts oft"
on his being promoted to a
higher. [Fi. kuli skin, kulu-
caka to strip off the skin, Mg.
hoditra skin, manoditra to strip
off the skin, hedirana being-
flayed, skinned, Ef. kuli, d.
uili (wili) and uli, skin, mulu
si a to skin, mulu, also tamulu,
to cast the skin, i.e., to be
skinned, or to skin oneself or
itself.] A. gild' skin, galada,
1,2, to skin, to strip off the
skin.
mulukn]
Muluen, s., c. art., act of casting
the skin ; namulusien, s., the
act of stripping off the skin.
Mulua, s., a grove or clump of
trees : ulua.
Mumii, a., saving, protecting,
preserving : inu-ti a, or mau-
ti a.
Munu gi a. See minu gi a.
Munu-nia, d. niunu-gi.
Munu ti a, v. t., to close up (as
a wound, a hole in cloth, ifcc.) ;
lience
Munuai, or munue, s., a sacred
man (natamole tab) who by
his natabuen, or magical
power, closes up, or heals,
wounds received by men in
battle : bunu tia.
Muri n, v. t., d. for mesau na ;
Murien, s., c. art., d. for mesauen.
Muri a, v. t. (d. busi a), to
return (as a thing borrowed),
to repay, recompense, requite
(for work done), to return (an
injury), repay (a person, for
an injury), redup. murimuri;
hence
Murien, s., c. art., the act of
returning, repaying, pay, re-
quital, recompense, retribution.
Muri na, s., c. art., the after part
of a thing (as of a stream, that
is, the place to which it flows
and where it ends), opposite to
namita na the fore part of a
thing (eye), beginning, source.
[Fi. muri-a to follow, also to
imitate, Ma muri rear, hinder
part, Sa. muli end, back or
hinder part, rump, mulimuli to
follow after, To. muli, mui, Ja.
buri, the back, rear, behind,
after, My.burit the fundament,
151 [MUSB
Mg. vody the posteriors, stern
(of a ship), voho the back, fodv
returned, sent back, namody
to return the thing bought,
verina returned, sent back, ma-
merina to return, send back.]
See also mauri, busi a, bisi na,
bui na, kui na, kusu na, kiln
na, fua na, bua na, gere na,
uri na. A. 'ah'h'ara to be be-
hind, after, Nm. mo'weh'h'ar
placed at the end, mouh'ir
stern, hinder part, 'eh'ir, end,
'uh'ur' behind, after part, H.
'aliar to be after, behind, 'aliar
after, behind, hinder part, ex-
tremity, 'ahor hinder part, rear,
meahor from behind, behind ;
also in Arm. and E.
Mutasa, d. marasa.
Muru, v. i., to laugh, muru ki to
laugh at (one). See bukaru.
[Motu kiri to laugh.] A.
kahara to laugh.
Murubua, s., a bat : moru, bua ;
from its dwelling in deep
holes.
Musa gi a, v. t., to take on
board a canoe or ship (men or
things) ; redup.,
Musamusa ; and
Musagien, s., c. art., and
Musamusoen, s., c. art., the act of
doing so ; and
Musi a, v. t., to put or drag
immersed in the water (a
thing, as a log) ; and
Musu, v. i., to dive (as a man),
to set (the sun) ; elo i musu
the sun sets, or has set. A.
"amasa dip, submerge, to set
(as a star), and K amasa dip,
plunge, dive, and maRasa im-
merse in water.
MUSI
A]
152
N'ABE
.Musi a, v. t., to remove a child
(from the breast), wean it ;
and
Mus (ki susu), v. i., to be re-
moved (from the breast). H.
mus' remove, take away.
Mus ia, v. t., rub, smooth, natter;
Musatnus ia, id., redup. : mos ia.
Musuku taki, v. t, to abhor :
siki naki.
J/ut, v. i., to slip or fall out, as a
rope out of a block. A. ma'ata
to take a sword out (of its
sheath), 8, 'amma'ta, id., also,
to fall out (as hairs).
Mu-ti a, v. t., d. for mau-tia, to
save, keep, preserve, protect.
A. 'amana, 4, render secure,
protect, give security to (some-
one). Hence
Mutien, s., c. art., act of saving.
salvation.
Mut ia, and mot ia, v. t., to
bind : ut ia, ot ia ; and
Mut, s., c. art., a bond, rope.
A. makata, 6), bind, mukt'
bond, rope.
JVlutui, v. i., to sneeze. [Sa.
mafatua, to sneeze.] A.
nafata (cf. 'afata, 2) to sneeze.
±\| a, ad. of assent, and interj.,
d. syn. ko : dem. na. H. na
indeed, &c.
Na, d., dem., this, as mal na
this time : in.
Na, sometimes a, also In, nl,
n, la (in lausu ), the article.
[Mg. ny, Epi na, Fi. na, a.,
8a. le, the article.] A. al,
hal, H. ha, A. a (the 1 being
assimilated to certain letters).
In Mod. A. al is pronounced
al or el, and 1'. In South
Arabia am was (and even still
is) used for al. A. al (and
H. ha) is sometimes used as
a relative pronoun ; so in
Efate : see nig, agi.
N', a particle expressive of past
time, in nanum, nasa, nanoasa.
[Mg. n', Sa. na, sign of past
tense.]
Na, d. n, and na or nia (in si-
kina, or sikinia), nom. suf.
pron., 3 sing., his, her, its.
[Sam. na, sing., Mg. ny, pi.
and sing., My. nia or na, pi.,
and sing.] See nai, note.
Na, d. n, verbal suf., pron , 3
sing., him, her, it. See nia
and nai, note.
Nabatl na, s., tooth, teeth; seed,
also the shoots from the roots
of a banana, and the shoots or
roots of taro. [Ml. ribo, Epi
livo, Sa. nifo (whence nifoa),
Fut. nifo, Mg. nify teeth.]
See also bati, beti, bitia or
fitia. A. nab', pi. nubub', &c,
tooth, teeth, naba, 2, 4, to put
forth roots (a plant).
Nafte, s., d. mbat, club. Nm.
nabboud and nabbout, id.
Na6e, or na6ea (nakbe, or
nakbea), d. nakima, s., a hol-
lowed log, set up in the middle
of the malala or mala, used as
a drum or musical instrument
in the dances of the intamate,
and on which the face or other
symbol of the natemate (the
deceased) is carved. [Sa. nafa,
To. nafta, Fut. kafa, a drum,
Ml. U. nambwi, id.] H.
xabis] 153
nekeb a hollowed thing, that
which is hollowed, used as a
musical instrument (Ezekiel
xxviii. 13), English Version,
"pipes:" "thy tablets and thy
pipes;" from nakab to hollow
out.
Nabis, s., end, the last, d. nakis :
bisi na.
Na6o, or naioa, d. tamo, v. i., to
smell ; and
Na6on, s., smell. [Sa. namu to
have a bad smell, To. namu
odour, either good or bad, Fut.
namu.] See boa,. A. faha, 6,
to emit odour.
Nabua, s., a road, path. A.
nabiyy' and nabiy', id.
Nafete, d. sefete, d. nefeha,
d (te)uase (wase), inter, pron.,
what ? which ? M.S. mudi, A.
mada, Nm. made, what? Na-
fete is na art., and fete, and
sefete, se dem., and fete.
Naga, or nag, dem., this, that :
na, dem., and ka dem., changed
to ga.
Nag, or naga, s., dd. lag, rag,
nrak, ran, time. A. 'an time,
and art. al, 1'.
Nagasa, inter, ad., when? i.e.,
naga sa ? lit. what time? also
indefinitely, when, whatever
time. Ml. U. seve-lig = Ef.
d. sefe-nag = what time 1 =
naga-sa ?
Nago, pers. pron., 2 sing., you,
dd. ago, ag, nigo, keiga, keina,
nego.
Nagore na, s., nostrils, nose.
See gore na.
Nai n, d. for nani n, child. See
nei n and ani.
Nai, pers. pron., 3 sing., he,
[nakonakoa ki
she, dd. cnrji, or inia, ga,
niga, kinini. [My. iny;i,
or inia (Ef. inia, sing.), pi.
and sing., they, he, she.]
M.S. ani (also enehe, anyaha),
'ni, na they, those (also enya
these), also ignorantly used for
sing, sometimes, S. hanun
(hanen), anun (anen), they,
these, verb. suf. enun (enen),
nom. suf. hun (hen).
Note. — Nai is na dem., and
i (for ni); niga is ni dem., and
ga (for na) ; ga is for na, which
is nia in inia, and na in nom.
suf.
Nai, s., water, d. for noai, nifai.
Nai, i.e., n art., and ai s., side
board of a canoe to keep the
waves out, a protector or
defence of a place (a warrior
who keeps out the enemy) ; d.
a fence. [Sa. ai a fence, a rail-
ing, ai to fence in, To. a
fence, Ha. pa, v. and s.] See
under baka, s.
Naita natuo, s., d. for ua-nate-
natuo the calf of the leg, hence
nalake naita natuo n the
ankle, lit. the base of the calf
of the leg.
Nakate, s., d. syn. nete, q.v., lit.
the that that.
Nakima, s., d. na6ea.
Nakis, s., d. nabis : kusu na,
kihi (or kisi) na.
Nakis, or nakisa, or nakes, s.,
green or blue paint : kesakesa.
Nako na, s., the face. See ko :
n. art., and ako ; hence
Nakonakoa ki, v. (formed by a,
a. ending, from preceding
word) to assume the face, or
appearance of (ki) someone;
NAKOXAKO KI
154
[x ATARA
Nakonako ki, v., to face (some-
one), i.e., front (him). A.
wagaha, 5, id., to front or
face each other.
Nalu, or nalua, an arrow. A.
nabl' arrow.
Namu, s, d., mosquito, d. na
mamamami (d. batirik =
small tooth). [Sa. mamu,
Tah. namu, ramu, Fut. namo,
My. namok, Bu. namok, Mg.
moka, MI. U. num, TaSa.
moke, Malo mohe, Ta. kumug,
An. inyum, Motu namo, id.]
See mu, v. The n in namu is
the art., and namu is the
buzzer or pinger.
Nanoa na, s., the neck, i.e., n'
art., and anoa neck, eg. manu
na, q.v. [Santo d. alo, d.
ralo, Bu. olong.] A. 'unk',
'unuk', 'anlk', neck.
Nfmua, s., necklace, beads, i.e.,
n' art., and anua. H. 'anak
necklace.
Nanofa, ad., d., yesterday, and
Nanoasa, ad., d. nasa, the day
before yesterday, and
Nanu, ad., d. nanofa, and
Nanum, ad., d. nanu, yesterday.
[Fi. e na noa, Santo nonovi
(pwanovi to-morrow), Epi
niobo (bani = maisa = to-day).]
Nan-ofa, nan-u, nan-um, con-
sist of ofa, u, urn, day (see
ma, s., day), and (Fi. e na
noa, e in or on, na the ; noa
past day = nu, num, nofa)
nan', i.e., na the art., and n'
particle expressive of past
time, as in nasa, infra.
Nanoasa (for nanofasa) has sa
(for rua, sometimes ra, 2) :
hence na nofa, lit. the past
day, and na noasa the second
past day, Nanoasa, nasa.
[Epi nua, d. niaha, Ta. d. neis,
id.]
Nao, s., d. noa, q.v.
Naob, s., lime, d. noba, q.v.
Nara, pers. pron., 3 pi., they (for
nai 'ra), d. gara, or nigara
(ga 'ra), d. inira (inia and 'ra).
See ra, ru, and nai.
Naro, d. for nalo. See lo a
thing.
Naroa, s., na, art., a cui'rent
(of water, especially in the
sea) : so called because i roa
tui'ns (itself). See roa.
Nasa, ad., the day before yester-
day, d. nanoasa : nasa is
without the article and for
noasa (in nanoasa).
Nasafa, inter, pron., also nasefa t
and nesefa : na, art., and safa,
or sefa, q.v.
Nasaga, s., na, art., a stretch of
sea between two places. See
saga.
Nasu na, na art., s., juice, what
flows out, or exudes. [Sa. su
to be wet, sua juice.] A.
nazza to exude, nizu flow,
water.
Nata, a person. See ata. Nata
na, or nate na, soul, spirit ;
Natamole, a living person,
Natamate, or natemate, a dead
person, a ghost, a demon, an
object of worship. See ata,
moli, mate, atamole, atamate.
Natara, s., n art., and atara a.,
a virgin, young woman ; na-
guruni atara a young woman ;
and naturiai a young man, bia
aturiai young men. [My.
dara, Ja. rara, a maid, virgin.]
NATE
15.')
[NETA Kb
A. 'a(|ara to be a virgin
('adera' a virgin), 2, to cir-
cumcise ; to begin to have a
beard (young man), 'icliir' a
beard, hence with a. ending
aturiai bearded, or beginning
to be bearded, a young man.
Nate, or natse, s., the banana,
or plantain, plant and fruit :
n art., and atS, or fuse. [Ml.
P. nevij, Ml. U. navits, Ero.
nobos, Epi vihi, Am. nohos,
Ml. dd. navis, abus, Paama
ahisi, Fi. vudi, Ulawa huti,
Put. vuji, Fila butsh', Aniwa
hutshi, Niue futi, My. pisang,
Ceram fudi, phitim, Sanguir
busa, Mg. ontsy, d. hotsy, id.]
A. muz', Amh. muz, id.
Nati-kuru, s., dried, withered
banana leaves. See kuru, a.
Natemate, for natamate. See
atamate.
Natoara, s., n art., a kind of
grass (sword grass). H. liasir
grass, A. li'a.s'ira to be green.
Naturiai, s., aturiai, a., young
man. See under natara.
Nau, s., reeds; Pan's pipes; for
nausu : na art., and usu, q.v.
Nau, v. i., usually nu, q.v.
Nau ia, v. t., to rub, wipe off.
See nu ea.
Naiia (nawa), n art., and aiia
(awa), q.v.
Ne a, for noi a, v., to dwell, or
be, beside (someone) : the verb
no is intransitive, and i is the
t. prep. [Fi. no to lie (of
things, not persons), Sa. nofo
to sit, dwell, remain, Ma., Tah.,
Ha., noho.] H. navah and
naah, to sit down, to rest, to
dwell.
Ne, clem., here, there, this, that,
uane, kine, netu. See in, na.
[Sa. nei this.]
Nei n, or nai n, s., his child, d.
for nani n. The n of ani, q.v ^
is elided : nai for nani.
Ntgo, pers. pron., d. for nagu,
q.v.
Neko (for naiko), s., n art., and
eko the wooden mallet for
beating native cloth (in
making it). [Sa. i'e, To. igi,
id., Ha. ku, kuku, to beat
native cloth.] A. waka'a to
beat, 7), to sharpen, make thin
a knife, 8), make slender, &c,
wahi' sharp, thin, slender. To.
igi means also small, Ef. iki,
kiki, id. ; and kie also belongs
here, the leaf being rubbed
and split into slender threads.
Neinei a, v., as boka neinei a
beat it soft, beat making it
soft (or weak). See maneinei.
Neru, naru, and nieru, war, lit.
arms : art., and aru, q.v.
Net, d. for binet, banotu, q.v.
Nete, s., a thing, anything,
something, d. syn. nakate :
art., and te, dem., lit. the
that. Nete ra their thing,
also ara te, id., agu te my
thing, ama te thy thing.
Netu, dem., this, that: ne, dem.,
and tu, v., lit. this or that
standing out or up.
Netua, d. nerua, s., twins, art.
andtua, or rua, 2, lit. the two.
[Fi. drua, icl. ; also double, a.,
as a double canoe, a double
fruit.]
Neta ki, v. t., to throw, net ia
to throw upon, hit with a
thing thrown. A. nada' to
SI]
156
[nixita
throw, H. nadah, Pi., to cast
out.
Ni, prep., of (genitive), to,
belonging to, also i, in, on, at,
with art. ani, q.v., t. prep,
after verbs, as mesau ni au
<lesire me (also mesau au, d.),
ri, as soka ri join on to, and
li, as taka li, d. taka ni, thrust !
•on to, also ra in raki, q.v., as
toko raki remain, or abide for,
i.e., wait for, or wait upon,
and i, as in no i, Arc. [Fi. ni,
1, or e, of, in, t. prep, na, ra,
raka, laka, Ma. i of, belonging
to, &c, and t. prep., Battak
ni, Bu. ri, Holontalo li, Tag.
ni, Mg. ny, n', any, of, be-
longing to.] A. li, H., Arm.
16, E. la, T. nS, id.
Ni, art., also na, in, n. [Mg.
ny, id.]
Ni, same as na, ad., and interj ;
!Ni, verb, suf., 3 sing., d. nia,
q.v.
Nia, verb, suf., 3 sing., same as
na, q.v., once (in sikinia, and
sikina, his one, he alone) nom.
suf. (which usually is na).
See nai, inia.
Niba ki, v. t., to throw away,
make to go away. A. nafa'
drive away, expel, hurl away
(as a torrent, rubbish, the
wind, dust).
Nifai, s., water, dd. nai, noai :
ni art., and fai water.
Nife ni, a., v. t., to fan, t. prep,
ni, lit. to wave, or brandish,
on or to ;
Nifenife, v. i., to fan, to wave
or brandish, as the branches
of a tree in the wind ;
Nife, s., a fan. H. nuf to wave
up and down, Hi. henlf to
wave, to shake.
Nig, d., prep., of (gen.) for
(dative), ni art., and g (for
gi), i.e., ki, q.v.), dd. nag,
nagi, nagki, and, art. with-
out its n, agi, d. agki (gk
for k).
Niga, d., pers. pron., 3 sing. : ni
art., and ga.
Nigara, d., pers. pron., 3 pi.: niga,
and ra.
Nigita, pers. pron., 1 pi., inch :
ninita.
Nikenika, v. i., to be silent,
quiet, or noiseless, or stealthy ;
also to move quickly along a
sharp ridge (of a mountain),
or along a log across a stream.
[Ha. nihi to walk very softly
and quietly, as on tiptoe, to
do a thing quietly or secretly,
nihinihi standing up on edge,
narrow ridged, or edged, Ma.
ninihi to move stealthily.] A.
naga' to hasten ; communicate
a secret, 3, act, or speak,
secretly (with someone), naga'
branch of a tree, higher part
of land, nagwa£ higher part of
land, a secret.
Niko na, s., the spine (ridge) of
a cocoanut leaf. See preced-
ing word.
Nin, dem., d., this : n art., and
in dem. [My. nun that.]
Ninita, or nininta, d., obsolete,
for nigita, niginta, pers. pron.,
1 pi., inch, we (and) thou, dd.
keigita, igira, akit, nikit : art.
ni, and nita (ni we, ta thou).
[An. inta, verb, pron., id.,
Santo d. niti, or inti, separate
pron., id., Ml. d. ante, id.,
157
[nunu-tafk
the cocoa-
niu, Er.
My. nior,
kula, Ms.
My. kita, Mg. isika, Sa. 'o i ta
(tou), id.]
Niti a, or nit ia, v. t., to plane,
shave (wood). A. nahata,
n. a. naht', id.
Niu, s., c. art. naniu
nut palm. [Fi.
noki, An. neaig,
Ceram niula, Ml.
nihio, Sa. niu, id. ; niu piu
fan palm (therefore niu is
a general name for a palm) ;
niui to sprinkle with the juice
of the cocoanut, Ha. niu to
whirl about.] A. nah'lu palm
(gen. name), nali'Tlu (coll.
name), nah'ala to sift, to pour
out or sprinkle (snow, as the
clouds), Nm., 7, to drizzle.
No, contr. n, in bano, ban,
banotu, &c. [Fi. yani, Sa.
ane, To. angi, directive ad.,
Mg. any there, in that place.]
Prep, n (ni), and dem. o.
No i a, or noi a, d. ne a, noi, d.
ne : hence redup. noinoi, and
r. binoinoi, d. binofinoi. See
ne a.
Nono, v. i., no (in no ia) redup.,
to abide, as mala nono abide
senseless. See also binoinoi
to abide with each other, and
binofinoi, or bunofunoi.
Noa ki, v. t., tell, lit. say to, dd.
ni ki, ti ki, nofa, q.v. ; noa i,
v. t., say or tell it ; binoa to
speak about each other.
Noai, s., d. nifai water ; for na
uai.
Noa, s. (for na ua), d. nao, a
swell, or wave. See uaua.
No&a, s., c. art. nano&a, d. naob,
lime (ashes of coral) ; and
No&ano&a, v. i., or a., to be
dusty, become dust, fly in the
air (dust). See abuobu. [Sa.
navu lime, Ma. nehu dust,
nehunehu dusky, whakanehu
reduce to powder.]
Noba nia, v. t., to wrap in leaves
with hot stones and cook, to
cook, d. tuma nia ; and
NoAano&a, v. i., to be cooked,
soft. See also manubunubu,.
and d. tomo or tumu, tumu-
tumua, matumutumu. [Ha.
nopu thoroughly cooked, soft,
plump, fat, swelled out, and
nopunopu spring or swell up
(in the mind), swell, be large,
round, spring up.] A. taballa,
n. a. tabh', to cook, roast, to
ripen, 2, to grow up, 7, 8, to
be cooked, tubbali' pi. of
tabih' fatness, tabih' cooked.
Nobu, s., flood, d. tobu. A.
tiif to flood (Ct.), tawwafu a
flood.
Nof, d. for num, v. i., q.v.
Nofa i, v. t., d. noa i, q.v., to
tell. A. naba', 6), 2, show,
declare, announce, tell.
Nono. See ante, no, nono.
Notlnoti, v. i., or a., to be
spotted (as an animal). H.
nakod spotted (as an animal),
Nm. nokta a spot, monakkat
spotted, H. nakad, A. nakata,
to mark with points.
Notu, d., contraction for banotu,
q.v.
Nu, v. i., d. num, q.v., hence
manua, manunu.
Nu e a, v. t., to wipe, rub off;
redup.,
Nunu ea, id., and
Nunu, s., a wiper, rubber, and
Nunu-tafe, s., the wrist, lit. snot-
anjANUA] 158
wiper. [Sa. nunu to grate
down, nuaga a grating down.]
A. thamma, 4), to sweep (a
house, or place), 5), to rub,
wipe off. Of. nu, A. tamma.
•See num.
Nuanua, v. i., to wave about, or
to and fro (as the branches of
a tree) ; nuanua ki, v. t., to
wave, make to wave, or shake
•(anything). H. nu'a to move
to and fro, wave to and fro,
Hi. move to and fro, shake.
Nua na, s., n art., and ua, q.v.,
fruit.
Nub, s., d. rub, q.v.
Nubu na, d. tumu na, s., c. art.,
the soft swelling protuberance
of anything (as of a yam)
growing. See no&ano&a.
Nubu, v. i., d. num.
Nuf, v. i., d. num.
Nugnug ia, v. t., d. luglug ia,
q.v. : hence manugnug, q.v.
Numnum ia, v. t., d. for nugnug
ia.
Nugnug, v. i., to be careless,
heedless, maturu nugnug to
sleep and be devoid of all care
or thought, be utterly heedless.
A. numa£ heedless, careless,
nama to sleep, doze, be quiet,
tranquil, 2, deaden (as pain).
Num, v. i., to be finished, com-
pleted, dd. nu, nau, nubu, nuf,
nof ; ru nau, nu, num, nuf ban
they all have gone, a bat ia i
nu I have done it, it is finished.
See manua, manunu, binunu,
manubu, manubunubu. A.
tamma, n. a. turn', &c, to be
all, whole, finished, completed,
at an end, and, transitive, to
complete, &c.
[ofiofi
Nura, s., syn. miura, q.v., for
ne ura : ura.
0.
, sign of vocative, interj., as
temanami o, O our father.
[Ml., Santo, Malo, o, id.] E.
o, id.
O, dem., io, ao, ore, or iore, q.v.,
and in otaki, q.v., also in ko
dem., and in bo (mo, fo, uo,
o), q.v. [Fi. o in oqo, Tah. o,
Mare o, Motu o, dem.] See
ua. M.S. hau, pronounced o,
dem., and egg., that is, the
Semitic pers. pron. 3 sing,
used as a dem., and as a verb
substantive.
O, verbal suf., 1 sing., me, d.
for au.
O, v. i., contr. for oni, q.v. ; also
in bao.
Ob, s., d., c. art. naob, d. noba,
lime (ashes of coral) : noba.
Of, s., dd. urn, ubu, ua, cooking
oven : ban ia.
Ofa, in taliofa, dd. taliaba, tali-
eba. See tali. Ofa to whirl
round. [Tah. ohu (also =
kofu, q.v., supra) to whirl
round, Ma. koumuumu, My.
ubang, mubclng.] E. kabab
to whirl round.
Ofa, i.q., afa to swim, be above,
float on ; and
Ofa ia, i.q. afa ia, q.v.
Of ia, or Ofi a, v. t., to be near
to, alongside of, d. afi a ;
Ofiofi, v., a., near to. [To. ofi
near to, at hand.] A. wahafa
n. a. wahf, to draw near to,
approach near.
OFA Kl
[Ulawa ilula,
lelu, Maklay
iur, id.l A.
to
Ofa ki, v. t., i.q. afa ki ; nalia
ofakien a place of burial, to
be buried in, naofakien act of
burying, burial.
Ofa, a., high, tall, as a tree.
[Mg. avo high, lofty, eminent,
proud.] H. gabah to be high,
as a tree, gobah height (as of
trees), pride, gaboah, high,
lofty, proud.
Ola, s., a spear.
New Ireland
Kiiste (N.G.)
'alia*', pi. 'alal', 'elaP, id
Oli a, d. uli a, q.v.
On, s., sand, d. aran, q.v.
Oni contr. o, d. ani, q,
_ abide, be.
Ore, d. or, ad., yes, that's it : o
dem., and re, or ri, dem., cf . iore.
Or, d., s., c. art. naor, or na uor.
See uoi'a.
Ora na, s., sprout, shoot, or vine
(as of a yam) ;
Oraora na, id. : bora, uora.
< >ran, and orain, d., s., sand : aran.
Oraorana, a., na a. ending, varie-
gated. [Tah. purepure spotted,
chequered, of diverse colours.]
E. liubur variegated, of various
colours, Ch. liabarbar spotted.
Ore, i.q. aure, q.v.
Ori a, v. t., to rub, grate, ori, v. i.,
to make a creaking, grating-
noise (as the branches of trees
rubbing against each other) ;
Ori, s., d. kiri, the rubbing stick
in producing fire by the
friction of two sticks. [Tah.
oro, Sa. olo, to rub, olo a plane,
My. urut, to rub, kukur to rasp,
Mg. otra rubbed, orina being-
rubbed.] H. garar to scrape,
sweep, saw. Cf. the cognates.
159 [ra
Oro, v. i., to grunt (a pig), to
growl, snarl (a dog), and with
transitive prep, oro-maki to
hark at (a person or thing),
bioro, v. r., to make a con-
fused murmuring noise (as a
crowd of men all speaking at
once) ; and
Orooro, id., redup., cf. uru, uru-
uru. [Ma. nguru, to sigh,
grunt, rumble, ngengere to
growl, ngeri to chaunt (in
launching a canoe, <fec),
ngengeri to grunt, My. kurkur
to grunt (a pig), Mg. erotra
to snore, erona, mierona, to
growl, snarl, roar.] A. nah'ara
Nni. to grunt, h'ara to low,
ll'arh'ara snort, snore, harra
to growl, snarl (a dog), to
creak, harhara£ murmur or
sound of copiously flowing
water.
Oro, d., v. i., or a., to be barren:
d. for bara, q.v.
Oroa, v. i., or a. Same as ora-
orana, to be coloured, varie-
gated : a. ending 'a, d. contr.
oro ; hence
Oroa, d. oro, s., a species of
grasshopper, so called from its
colours.
Otaki, d. uataki, s., native tongs:
o dem., and taki a.
Oti a, i.q. moti a, uti a, muti a,
q.v.
Ra,
d. nra, dem., this, that. See
arai.
Ra, s., a depressed place, damp
or watery : ruku.
RA NA]
Ra na, s., branch. [Sa. la, Ma.
ra, My. daan, Mg. rahana,
rahaka.] A. s'agna^, s'agan',
id.
Ra, or tra (ta), del. ta, nra, s.,
blood, inita to bleed. [Er.
de, TaSa. rai, Malo dai, Motu
rara, Sa. toto (redup.), Ja. ra,
My. darah, Mg. ra blood.]
H., E. dam, S. dein, A. dam',
blood ; damiya to bleed.
Ra, v. i., vociferate, in rasoso,
rafioso. H. ru'a, Hi. vocifer-
ate.
Ra, verb, and nom. suf., 3 pi. :
nara, they.
Ra, num., two : rua.
Ra tan ia, rara tan ia, trara tan
ia, tara tan ia, v. t., to forget,
lit. to think burying or cover-
ing it. See mitroa and tun ia.
Raba na, s., side (of a river or
valley). A. s'affai' id.
Rabaraba, v. i., to flap the wings.
A. rafrafa, id.
Rabaraba kaf (or kai), v. i.,
to be bent with hunger or
famine ; and
Raba, s., hunger or famine, in
li raba goddess, or she demon
of hunger (a "sacred stone ").
H. ra'eb, E. rehaba, to hunger,
H. ra'ab hunger, famine.
Rabag, see tabag,
Rafalu, d. lifaru, q.v.
Raf ea, v. t., to weave a reed
fence ; hence
Rafena, s., a reed (woven) fence,
d. rofe ; and
Rafeen, s., c. art., the act of
weaving a reed fence. H.
'arab to weave, intertwine, A.
'araba a knot, H. 'aruball
interwoven work, or network.
160 [raite na
Raf ea, v. t., to go through (as
through a hole in a fence, the
eye of a needle) ; and, c. t. prep.,
Rafe aki, v. t., to make to go
through. A. thakaba, n. a.
thakb', to perforate, bore
through, to go through (as
through the eye of a needle).
Rafioso, v. i., to call out as when
in terror or danger : ra v. i. ,
and bioso.
Rafite na, s., wall or side of a
house. E. arafete partition,
wall.
Raga-elo, d., v. i., to warm or
dry oneself in the sun (elo) r
raga is transposed for gara, as
baragai for bagarai.
Rag, s., time, c. nom. suf. ragi
na its time : d. ran, rani na,
dd. lag, nag. A. 'an' time, c.
art. al, 1'.
Rago, s., c. art., thorns, prickles,
a mass of thorny or prickly,
or rough and spiky, or jagged
matter (as twigs, &c.) ;
Ragoa, and ragorogoa, v. i., or
a., to be full of rago, as a reef
full of jagged, sharp rocks. H.
sinnah a thorn, seninim thorns,
prickles, from sanan, i.q.
s'anan, to be sharp, to prick.
Rago, s., rollers on which a
canoe or boat is hauled up.
Der. uncertain. [Ma. rango,
id., also a fly, Ef. lango.]
Rai, d. re, s., forehead, aspect,
face. [To. lae, My. dai, Ja.
rai, id.] E. rey sight, aspect ;
Rairai, d. tairai, v. i., to be in
good countenance. See baka-
rairai, and lo, leo.
Raite na, or reite na, d., s.,
mother. See ani na.
raka]
Kaka, v. i., to be willing, and
maraka ; also, redup.,
Rakaraka, id., and marakaraka,
id. ; also,
Rakana, s., the willingness,
readiness, tuga fat ia rakana
sikeimau let us do it, the
readiness or willingness for it
one only, i.e., with one mind
or will. S. regag to desire,
to will, Ethpael id., rega
desire, will.
Rakaf ia, and rakof ia, v. t., to
cleave to, and
Rarako, d. tarako, as toa i rarako
sits on, cleaves close to (her
eggs). [My. lakap to adhere.]
S. nliaf, etnakaf, to cleave to,
eg. E. lakaf.
Raka ia, v. t., to lift, raise up,
and
Raka tia, id. A. rakiya, 2, raise
up, make to go up.
Rakei a, v. t., to adorn, dress ;
turnana rakei a adorn or di*ess
himself ; and
Rakei, d. raki, s., c. art., dress,
adornment. E. sargawa to
adorn, dress ; this sa- is not
radical, and the original root
begins with rag, or raq (Dill-
maim, E. Gr., §72).
Raki, double t. prep., ra and ki,
raki na ; or
Raki nia, also d. raki te na
[Fi. raka, Maiwo lagi, Mota
rag.]
Raku sa, v. t., redup. raraku sa,
and taraku sa, and d. taku
tia, to remove anyone's things,
as in a flitting ; i raraku he is
doing so, or is removing to
another district, or flitting.
H. 'athak and Hi., to remove
161 [rasoso
away, take away, break up a
camp.
Rakua, and, dd.,
Rakum, rakoma, s., a crab : art.
ra. | Epi lakum, Fi. qumu-
qumu.] A. h'umh'um' a crab.
Rales, a place in Hades, lit. dark
pit, swamp, or depressed place :
ra, and les.
Rana, dem. and num., those two:
ra, 2, and na dem.
Rana, and redup. rarana, v. i.,
or a., to branch out : ra, and
a. ending na.
Ran, rani na. See rag, ragi na.
Ran, d., s., water : r' art., and
an. [Fi. drano, Sa. lanu, My.
danu, J. ranu, Mg. ranu.] A.
'a'n' fons, and art. al, 1'.
Rarua, d. raru, s., a canoe, boat,
or ship : r' art. [My. prahu,
Ml. ndrav, Segaar rai, Ta.
laou (laau), An. elcau, Er.
lo.] A. markab. See borau,
supra.
Ras, d. nras, dem. and num.,
these two : ra, 2, and s,
dem.
Ras ia, v. t., d. tas ia, to shave
(the beard or chin), shave (or
strip) off (as fruit from a tree,
shave or strip the tree). E.
las'aya to shave.
Ras, or res, d. tas, redup. reres,
or teres, v. i., to rustle, crash
(as the foliage of plants, or
waves of the sea, moved by
the wind, or men in a tumult).
H. ra'as' the primary notion
lies in noise and crashing :
used of the rustling of grain
moved by the wind, ra'as'
noise, tumult.
Rasoso, v. i., see rafioso ; rasoso
12
RAT IA] 162
to vociferate, calling (for help) :
ra, and soso.
Rat ia, v. t., d. tat ia, d. nrat, to
loose, untie. See niirati. [Sa.
tala, tatala, Tah., Ma., tara.J
H. nathar, Hi. hitir, to loose.
Rau', and ndau', v. i., d., to go.
Ct , rawah to go.
Rau, redup. rarau, v., to grope
for with the hand, seize, snatch
out or away. See birife, rifu.
[Ma. harau grope for with the
hand, Ha. lalau extend out as
the hand, Ma. rau catch, lay
hold of, gather, Ha. lau seize,
take out of a place, To. lau
nip, pinch] ; and
Rau, s., leaves (for food to be
cooked, and for putting food
on, as on a plate, when cooked).
[Mg. ravina, My. dawun, Sa.,
Ma, lau, rau, Fi. drau] ; and
Rau, s., as rau nasuma eaves of
a house, rau mita lashes of the
eyes, eye-lashes ; a tribe, group,
bi rau in parties, rau a fruit
that grows in clusters. [Ma.
rau 100, Ha. lau 400] ; and
Rau, in bakarau to divide, dis-
tribute ; and
Raua, rauraua, a., hairy, as a
rope, nakasu rauraua a tree
full of branches. [Mg. ravi-
ravy hanging over, suspended] ;
and
Rau, in barau, i.e., ba to go, and
rau speak violently and re-
proachfully. [Sa. lau speak,
abuse indecently] ; and
Lau, in launa, a community of
people living together. [Ha,
launa friendly, social ; lau to
spread out, be broad, as a leaf.]
H. 'araf to pluck, to seize, to
[reko
pull ; A. "araf leaves, "arafa
to pull out (as hairs), 'arf
mane of a horse, "urfa£' part
of collected hair, braid of
hair, rafu herd or flock,
warafa to be extended, broad,
rafa' to sew (from the plucking
motion), to make peace, con-
cord, warafa, 2, to part,
distribute, H. haraf, 3, to
carp at, scorn, A. rafraf
sides of a rope, branches of
trees hanging down, skirt,
vallance. These words are
all cognates, the radical part
being raf, which has the sense
of " seizing and plucking."
Rea, s., d. for reko, bisa ki rea
ki nau speak as a pauper to
me : reko.
Rea ki, d. nre a, d. roa i, roi a,
to twist, wring, strain out
juice by wringing, rei a, re-
rei a, or terei a, d. roroi a, to
moisten the pudding (nakoau)
with lor (the rich oily juice
of grated cocoanut). A. ra'a,
2, to moisten bread with fat,
ra"a, 2, id., 1, to bend, turn,
3, wrestle, 5, roll itself (an
animal), 6, wrestle.
Rei, s., c. art. nerei, a band of
men ; a clump of trees. A.
ra'a to grow, luxuriate, 2, be
congregated, ri'aZ' a band, a
crowd.
Rei, d. rea, d. reko, q.v.
Rei, d. tei, v., rei natano burrow,
or cover itself with earth, as
the white ant (futei, furei)
does. A. damma, 2), to cover
its hole with earth, diimna£'
ant.
Reko (see rei, rea, farea), s., a
RELUKO]
pauper, poor. H. rek empty,
vain, impoverished, poor.
Reluko (or raluko). See taluko.
Here, rerea, v. i., to break rush-
ing upon the sand or shore (of
waves), also tarere. Ch. re'a'
to break in pieces, H. ra'a', id.
S. etra're', id.
Res, reres, teres. See ras.
Ri, trans, prep., ra in raki. See
ni.
Ri, verb, pron., 3 pi., dd. ru
(eru) eu.
Ria, verb, pron., 3 dual, d. ra.
Ri a. See tl a.
Ri, or re, dem., eri, &c. : arai.
Riu sa, d. tuma ia, to point out.
See tiu.
Riu sa, riuriu sa, also tiu, or tu
sa, q.y.
Ribu, riribu, to sound (with a
trumpet), ribu aki baigo sound
a trumpet, taribu to sound
trumpets alternately (of two
men). See rubua.
Rifalu, d. lifaru, q.v.
Rifu, d. rife, d. lifu mita, s., eye-
lashes, and see birife or birifu
to snatch, pluck away, plun-
der. [Cf. My. rambiya, rambu,
rambut, Mg. rombo, rombotra,
rombitra, rombaka, My. ram-
pas, rabat.] See rau.
Rigi, ririgi, or tirigi, v. i., to
make a tremulous groaning
noise in suffering pain, birigi-
rigi. A. ranna vociferate,
utter the voice with weeping,
make a noise, twang, tinkle.
Riki, a., small, kari-riki, uarik,
batik ;
Riki, s., c. art. neriki, child, little
one. [Ha. lii, Tah. rii, Ma.
riki.] E. dawik to be small.
163 [roba
Riki, s., triki, nriki (d.), pud.
mul. A. rika', id.
Rikit, v. i., to be small : kita.
Rikitclag, d. for koroatelagi :
koro, atelagi.
Riri, in buariri (Hades), for tiro
to sink.
Riri, v. i., to fly, d. for tiri.
Riri, s., a spark : tiri.
Riri-mita, s., tears : tuau, tu-
turu. [To. tulu he mata.]
Risu, v. i., to move, shift : rosa.
Ro, ad., again, d. mero.
Roa i, v. t., to turn. See rea
ki, re a, mero, ro, meraroa ;
and
Roa-leo, and roaroa-leo, s., echo.
Roa, or roua (rowa), or troua,
v. i., to fall, dd. ro, rbuo,
touo, tibe (ndi&e), tao, mitao,
mitefe. [An. erop, My. ru-
buh, marubuh, rabah, mara-
bah, ribah, maribah.] H.
rafah, S. refo', etrafi, to cast
down, to sink, or fall down.
Ro na, rorona, s., thought, mind,
also trotro na, and d. nro n ;
and
Roro, or trotro, v., to think, rara
(&c.) tan ia, d. totu ; and
Ro-mi a, roro-mi a, v. t., to think
upon, delight in, love. See
mitroa.
Rbuo (rowo), i.q. rau', to go.
Ro, v. i., to fall, c. prep, ro bei a
fall upon it.
Ro5a, s. , affluence ; and
Ro&a-leba, s., great affluence, a
rich man. A. raf " affluence.
Roba gi a. See toba gi a.
Roba, roroba, or toroba, d. nrob,
v. i., or a., to be insane,
senseless. A. raba, 2), to be
insane, stupefied.
KOBEl]
Robei a, d. oro-bei a, v. t., to
snarl, snap, bark at or on : ro
for oro, and t. prep. bei.
Rfifa, s., a red or purple dye or
colour. A. sohba£ a red or
reddish colour.
Rofarofa, or tofarofa, v. mid., to
cover oneself with cloth, clothe
oneself, be clothed. H. 'ataf
to cover, be covered, be clothed.
S. 'taf, id.
Rofe, s., d. for rafena.
Rogo, rog ia, v. t., d. togi (ndogi),
d. nrog, also trog ia, to hear,
obey, to feel, know (as grief or
pleasure), rogo na&on to per-
ceive or feel or smell the odour
(of anything), rorogo, or torogo,
v. i., to be still, s., a species of
divination (in order to know
what is to be done) by a
certain movement in the
muscles of the arms or legs,
rogorogo ki to make heard,
report, rogoan, rogorogoan, s.,
c. art., report, taki rogo-saki
bend or incline oneself hear-
ing (a person), saki t. prep. ;
bakarogo, q.v. ; marogo, or
matrogo, or manrog, v. i., to
be idle, amuse oneself, marogo
ki to amuse oneself at the ex-
pense of (someone). [Sa. logo,
My. dangar, Mg. reny and rea.]
A. 'adina to hear, to know,
to feel the smell of, 2, cause
to heai', make known, pro-
claim, H. 'azan, Hi. he'zin to
hear, listen, to obey.
Rogo, trogo, in sera-trogo, s., any-
thing : rogo is r, art., and A.
hano a thing. [Santo sonu,
TaSa. kinao, Ml. nanu, a
thing.]
164 [rua
Roko, v. i., d. lako, d. nrok, to
stoop.
Ror, s., oil, also same as lor, the
oily or fatty expressed juice
of grated cocoanut used to
moisten or fatten puddings :
ro ia, roro ia, rei a.
Roro na. See ro na.
Roro ia. See ro ia, rei a.
Roroa, v. i. See toroa.
Roro-fi a. See toro-fi a.
Rosa gi a, v. t., to drag, haul,
make to move, shift, t. prep,
gi ; and
Rosa, v. i., to move, shift, trosa,
dd. nros, nrus, tosa, also rusa,
risu ; and
Ros, s., c. art., a breaker or
wave that sweeps up upon
the sand of the shore. [Sa.
toso, tosotoso, to drag.] A.
ra'asa to move, shake, drag, 4,
id., ra'asa, ra'as'a, to tremble.
Rot ia, or trot ia, v. i., to em-
brace clasping to the breast,
to embrace or encircle. [Mg.
trotro to embrace, to embosom.]
A. Sadara, 2, to girth (a camel),
Sadr', Nm, sadr, the breast
(bosom), My. d - ada,Mg.tratra,
An. riti, Fi. sere. Hence
Rot, s., anything going round
another as a band or girdle
(as an ulcer round one's leg,
ifcc.) ; and
Rot ia, as ta rot ia, ta rotirot ia,
or rutirut ia, cut a band or
girdle round (as in barking a
tree).
Ru, verb, pron., 3 pi., they :
eru, d. ri. E. 'ellu those.
Rii sa. See riu sa, tu sa, tiu sa.
Rua, num., two. See also tua,
ra (and sa, in uasa), d. nru.
RUB
[Sa. lua, My. clua, Ja. roro,
Mg. roa.] H. s'ne, &c, Mahri
tharo, Soc. tarawah, M.S.
trai.
Rub, s., d. roba, d. nub, d.
raba, s., q.v.
Ru&a, s., additional wife taken
by a man already married.
• TaSa. narau a wife, Mg.
rafy one of two or more wives
of the same husband ; ad-
versary, opponent ; rafitra
joining together, contention,
strife.] See rau. A. rafa' to
join, sew together, make peace,
2, to utter a formula of bless-
ing or prayer to a new spouse,
rafa', 2, id. (" May est thou
live with concord and with
children").
Ruiaki, s., a big flat nakoau. A.
ra"if, round thin cake baked
on the hearth.
Rubua, d. rufua, s., clamour ;
noise, tumult (as of mourners
in wailing). S. rhab make a
noise, uproar, tumult, utter
lamentations (Mark v. 38, 39),
eg. H. ra'am, v., to make a
noise, thunder, s., uproar,
clamour, tumult.
Ruku, s., a hole, cf. ra ; edible
clay found in holes, syn. tano
ra ; a bribe secretly given, or
given underhand to procure
the death of one hated, nafaka-
ruku hollow or hole under
anything, as a cellar under a
house, si ruku to go under
(through the hole or hollow
under) anything ; and
Rukua, d., s., a hole, pit, a hole
or hollow with water in it, cf.
ra. A. raka' to dig (the
165 [sa
ground) ; to revile (someone),
rakiyyatf a pit, rika' pud. mul.
Rum a na, s., c. art. nam ma na ;
n art., and ruma, or aruma,
and kuruma (in lita-kuruma,
q.v., the breast, bosom.) [Sa.,
Ha., uma, Motu geme, id.]
A. ha'zum' the breast, bosom.
Ruma, dd. bara, oro, v. i., or a.,
to be barren. H. 'arab, E.
'abara.
Ruma, and tiima, s., a pool of
water, d. transposed marou.
A. 'arlm' a hole, trench, or
hollow in which water is col-
lected.
Ru-mi a, ruru-mi a, v. t., same
as ro-mi a, also trutru-mi, tru-
mi : mitroa. Hence
Rumien, s., c. art., and rum-
mien, thought about, love.
Ruru, redup. of ru, riu sa. See
tiu, tu sa.
Ruru, v. i., to tremble.
Ruru, s., c. art., an earthquake.
[Tab. ruru, to tremble.] S.
r'el to tremble.
Ruru, s., a cluster. [Tah. ruru
to congregate.] See rei.
Rusa, see rosa ; rusa gi, see rosa gi ;
Rusarusa gi, redup., d. nrus,
nrusa gi.
Rutirut ia. See rot ia.
Rumo, d. ruma, pool.
s
kja, interrogative, contr. of safa,
sefa : s. dem., and a (fa).
Sa, or se, or s, dem., this, here.
H. zeh, E. ze.
Sa, d. for ta, neg. ad., only in
prohibitive clauses.
sa]
Sa, si, s. num., one, in gis (or
gisa), sam, mas, latesa, sikei,
sikatika.
Sa, s' (and see si), verbal suf., ?>
sing., with particle s, as in si,
q.v., him, her, it, d. a, as ti ki
nia sa say to him it, d. ti ki
nia a, id. : sa is s, t. prep., and
a, verb, suf., 3 sing.
Sa, s., d. ta, d. seat, q.v.
Sa, caus. pref. See sarafi, sabera,
sagalugalu, sagara, sigiri. [My.
sa, Tah. ta.] H. sha, Arm.
sa (Shaphel, Saphel).
Sa, v. i., or a., to be bad, evil,
sasa, intensive. [Fut. sa, My.
jahat, Pi. ca, Malo sat, Ta. ra,
Mg. ratsy.] A. sa' to be bad,
evil. Hence
San, s., c. art., the being evil ;
also the being ill, sickness,
misfortune, misery ; and
Sasana, v. i., or a., to be ill, have
a disease : -na, a. ending, and
sa redup.
Sabe, inter, ad., where ? sa, and
be.
Sabe li a, v. t., to bind, tie, d.
tami sia. H. samam, eg. A.
zamma, &c, to bind.
Sabe li a, v. t., to beat, slap.
[My. tampar, Ja. tampel, Fi.
saba-laka.] A. safa 'a to beat,
slap.
Saberi-ki, v. t., to scatter, break
asunder or to pieces, scatter-
ing, d. sabura ki.
Saberik, v. i., to be broken to
pieces, fallen or parted asunder.
[My. sibarkan, sabar.] See
bera, tabera. H. s'abar to
break to pieces : Gesenius
compares parar.
Sa&o, v. i., or a., ignorant, to be
166 [safari
ignorant, sasa6o to be ignorant,
to not know (his way), sabo-
naki, v. t., to be ignorant of
or about, dd. sub neki, sbuni ;
see also tasabo ; nasa6o (for
nata sa&o) a stranger (not
knowing the place), meta-sa/;o,
id. A. safoha to be ignorant,
6, id.
Safa, sefa, or sofa, v. L, to pant,
redup. sofasofa to hasten, to
run ;
Sufa, s., consumption, hard
breathing. [Mg. sefosefo,
sevosevo, sevoka, in haste,
bustling, to hasten.] H.
s'a'af to breathe hard, pant ;
to hasten.
Safa, sefa, sefe, inter, pron.,
what 1 c. art. insefa, nasafa,
what 1 Without the art. it is
used adjectively as sefe
nakasu what tree or wood ?
With the art. it is used sub-
stantively, as i tili nasafa
what does he say? Safa, is
sa, derm, and fa, inter, pron.
what 1 Compare nefe-te. H.
mah, A. ma, Himyaritic ba,
id.
Safana, c. art. nasafana, what
that, what (is) there ; safa,
and na, dem. : contr. sana.
[My. apa, mana, Sa. o le a (a
as in Ef. sa), se a, le fea, se
fea, Fut. tah a, tefe, tehe ;
rufe (dual), takafe (trial), efa
(plural), Ta. nufe, nufena, &c,
Epi ava-kai, vai, Malo sava,
savana, An. inhe, Santo nine,
Mg. ino, inona.]
Safaki, pr. n. Ma safaki, name
given to a man who had
buried a relative ; a sea
SAF IA]
animal, so called from burying
itself in the sand : afa ki.
Saf ia, or safi a, v. t., to pluck
or gather fruit ; to scrape, safi-
safi natano (with a hoe), sati-
safi-raki scrape, pluck off the
husk from (reeds), safi-nauot
to excel ; the chief ; safisafi
big, so bisab ; bisif excelling ;
misafe to be separated (as
fruit from a tree). See also
sifa, sift [Fi. sivi-a, uasivi,
excel.] H. 'asaf gather (as
fruits), assemble, draw back,
take, take away (as breath) ;
radical meaning to scrape,
yasaf to add, to increase, to
surpass.
Saga, or sega, s., a crotch, fork
(as made by two branches).
[Fi. saga] ; and see nasaga ;
Saga-fi, v. t., to take hold of
with a crotch or forked stick.
[Fi. saga-va take hold of with
with tongs.] See sega. A.
s'akka, 2, 5, to be sundered,
split (wood), s'ikka£ half of a
thing, part, distance.
Sag, ad., d., there. [My. sana.]
Sa, and g, dem.
Sagalugalu, d. syn. galugalua :
sa-.
Sagara, sa, v. t., to rub, grate,
ground on, as a canoe or ship
on a reef. [Ha. ili.] Gar ia,
and sa-.
Sago, s., a trumpet (conch). H.
thaka', E. takwa to blow a
trumpet.
Sai, v. i., to come forth, go forth
into the open (as men), saisai
to assemble, sai to shoot forth
(of a plant), buka sai (of a
blossom expanding into a
167 [saki
flower), sesai shoot forth (as a
serpent), misai to be opened,
cracked ;
Sai ki, v. t., make to go forth or
out (as the tongue, hand, any-
thing) ;
Sai a, v. t., to cleave, split,
open it (as a secret, &c), tili
sai a tell it out, Ac. ;
Saisai, v. i., assemble (come
forth of many) ; also to be
associated together, or have
in common, ru saisai isa,
saisai ki make to assemble ;
so or soa a follower, com-
panion, associate ; si to blow
(with the breath), to shoot
(with a gun), si to blow (the
wind), d. sui, or si a to rest,
or spell (one), to help ; esei in
the open, an open space ; bisai
ki to put forth, to show ;
Sai, s., c. art. nesai, a scented,
white-leaved plant. A. s'a'a
(y) to become open, be di-
vulged ; c. prep, bi to make
open, divulge ; to leave un-
divided ; to follow, 2, to roast ;
to blow (with the breath), 3,
follow each other ; to aid, 4,
make open, s'ai' associate,
follower, s'aya' common (to
many, see saisai), s'ai' com-
mon (to many), not distri-
buted ; made open, open ; s'I'a£
a band, assembly, s'ayu' a fire-
stick.
Saka-fe, s., first ripe fruits or
yams. [Ha. oo mua.] See
maso, and bea.
Sakau, s., a reef ; d. a branch.
See kasau. [Fi. cakau, Sa.
aau.]
Saki, v. i., to ascend, go up,
SAKl]
bisaki a, v. c, to put up, to
appoint (raise up) a chief ;
sakesake to be up, to sit upon,
tasaki, id., sakei ki to shout a
person's name, attributing
something (to him). [Sa. a'i,
Ha. ae, To. hake, Ma. eke,
whakaeke.] H. nasak, Arm.
nsak, imp., sak, id.
Saki, t. prep, sa, and ki. [Sa.
sa'i, Fi. caka, My. skan.]
Sala, s. See sela.
Sali, v. i., to move lightly, easily,
to dance, to float, drift ; sali
aki, v. t., to send afloat (a
canoe, or anything), to send
adrift, misal, misalsal, d. salsal,
light (not heavy), moving
easily, lightly. H. 'azal to go
quickly (spin along), A. 'azala.
Sali a, v. t., to weave. [My.
saring,] H. 'azal, S. 'zal, A.
"azala to spin, weave.
Sali a, v. t., to deceive; and re-
dup.,
Salisali, to deceive. H. s'alah,
Hi. to deceive.
Salube, d. saluke, v. i., to be
ignorant, not to know. A.
sarafa, 3), to be ignorant, not
to know.
Sam, a., or ad., one alone, only :
sa 1, and m for mau.
Samben, d., ad., there : san (sag),
and ben, v. i.
Sama ia, v. t., to rasp, scranch
(sugar cane, in sucking its
juice). [Ml. U. tsumwi, Ml.
P. jimue, Malo samai] ; hence
Sama na, s., dregs, shreds, as of
sugar cane with the juice
extracted, sawdust, «fcc. ; hence
Sama, v. i., or a., dreggy,
shreddy: -a ending. H. s'afah
168 [sarafi
to scratch, scrape, scrape off,
S. s'fa' to file, s'ofltha a filing,
paring : H. Pual to become
bald, bare, naked, exposed (as
one's bones). See infra, sema,
sesema.
Samit ia, also samat ia, d. sumat
ia, v. t., to beat, chastise.
[Fi. samu-ta, My. chamiti,
chamati, a whip or scourge.]
H. s'amas to thrust, to hasten
(see infra, sumati), s'amat to
smite, strike, A. s'amasa to
impel, thrust, s'amisa to hasten,
speak hastily, s'amat, Nm., to
whip.
Samura, s., a thing or word of
no consequence, that falls to
. pieces, as it were : for sabura,
saberi-ki
San, ad., there, here, esan, also
esanien. [My. sana.] Esanien
is esan there or here, and ien
it is. See am, v. i.
Sante, s., d. seate na, q.v.
Sao fi, v. t., to look upon, see, d.
sa fi, sao kiana look about (in)
his place or plantation. H.
s'a'ah, and s'a'ah to look, to
look about.
Sar ia, or sari a, v. t., to saw,
also seri a to cut with a sawing
motion, sara a saw. [Malo
sarosaro to saw, isaro a saw,
Fut. seria to saw.] H. nas'ar,
Arm. nsar to saw, A. nas'ara,
was'ara', as'ara, E. was'ar,
wasar, H. sur, to saw, rub,
sweep, &c.
Sara gote fi, to saw asunder. See
sera, seru, seri, sore, soro,
sar ia.
Sarafi, used as ad.; bat sarafi a
did it hastily, i.e., badly, con-
saria]
1G9
[SAU ROA Kl
fusedly, incompletely. See
marafi, and cf. tere ti, su-
mati.
Saria, v. i., to look around ; saria
kiana look about, or go about,
(in) his plantation. [Fi. sara-
sai'a, v. i., to survey, sara-va,
v. t.] H. s'ur (2) to look
around or about, (1) to go
about.
Saru, v. i., to hang down pros-
trated (as the broken branch
of a tree, or a broken arm),
misarn, id. A. Sara 'a to
prostrate, sari' prostrated.
Saru, v. i., to be loud, noisy,
speak aloud, saru goro speak
aloud or be noisy, drowning
the voice (of someone) ; and
redup.,
Saruru, v. i., to roar, resound
(as the sea, or a waterfall.)
[My. daru, Ja. saru, sru.] A.
Sarra, Sarir' to make a noise ;
to sound, to cry out vehe-
mently, make a great clamour.
Sas, esas, ad., here : sa, dem.
Sasana. See sa.
Sati na, s., the shrivelled and
worthless seed yam when the
new yam has sucked all the
substance out of it : sa.
Sau-fi, v. t., to scoop, or shave,
the surface oft' water ; to cut
or shave off the surface of
wood, sau-baba, an adze, lit.
plank shaver or cutter — see
mataisau a master cutter,
carpenter ; to strip off", peel
off (as clothes) sau lua i.
[Sa. mataisau, saufono, Ma.
hau, Tah., Ha., hauhau.] H.
s'a'ab to draw water. The
primary idea lies in taking off
the surface, eg. sahaf to
sweep, scrape off, hasaf to
strip oft', A. saliafa to scrape,
peel, or rub off, to shave.
Sau, v. i., to blow (wind) ;
Sau, s., c. art. insau, gentle
breeze, cold air, as in the
morning and evening, dew.
[Ha., Ma., Tah., hau, Sa. sau.]
H. nas'af to blow, nes'ef the
evening twilight, when a
colder gale blows; the morning
twilight.
Sau, v., to desire, mesau na, v. t.,
desire, tumana sau ki nia to
boast, speak well of himself,
praise himself (lit. desires
himself), sau roa i to mock
such a one by pretending
maliciously to join with him
in such boasting, insau a gift,
sau toga, id., a free gift, hence,
as ad., for nothing ; sau uia.
[Fi. sau vinaka] liberal in
giving, sau sa [Fi. sau ca]
stingy, sau mitaki, d., syn.
sau uia ; sau sera greedy
(desiring everything). A.
s'aha' to desire, 2, to say I
will give what you desire, 3,
to be like (someone), 4, to
give to one what he desires,
5, 8, to desire (a thing).
Sautoga, s. See preceding word.
Sau-taki, v. t., to place upon, as
food upon food already in the
oven, or as a speech upon a
speech by another previously
spoken ;
Sau roa ki, or sau rouo ki, v. t.,
to place (their voices) with
accuracy together, as giving a
shout all together : sau, and
rouo or roa ki to cast down,
SAUA IA]
or make to fall. H. sura (sam)
to put, to set, to place.
Sftua ia, v. t., to fix (as upon a
shelf, in a fork of a tree, &c. )
See soa ki (for saua ki) ;
Saua ia, v. t., to shoot with an
arrow called saua ;
Saua (sawa), s., a pronged arrow
(which adheres tenaciously).
A. nas'aba to stick, inhere,
be fixed tenaciously, 2, make a
thing be so, 4, id., nos's'aba^
an arrow, Nra. nas'ab, 2, to
shoot, squirt, fie, into.
Se, or s, dem., this, here. See sa.
S6 is the common form.
Se, inter, ad., where 1 See sa,
safa.
Se a. See so ia.
Sea, sesea, or seasea (redup.), v.,
to forget, be forgetful, sesea
gor ia forget him. See maga-
seasea. A. saha to forget, be
forgetful.
Seara, d., some, a few. S. z'ura
small, pi. z'ure' a few (Gen.
xxix. 20.)
Seatg, s., a firestick (by which
the fire can be rekindled), dd.
sante, ta, sa. See sai.
Sefa, sefe, or sift. See safa what 1 ?
This inter, is sometimes used
indefinitely in the sense of
whatever, however, as a belake
namanuka sifi naga I have
received, or I carry, a wound
however now (or here), fatu
sefa a stone however, or what-
soever. A. ma qualiscunque.
Sega, s., or saga, q.v., a crotch,
fork.
Sega, s., a part ; it takes the
nominal suf., as segamu a part
of you, segara a part of them
170 [sela Tr
or some of them, any part of
them, one or more of them.
See saga.
Sei, d. fei, inter, pron., sing., who?
pi. se mai, d. se mani, d. kihe
(for kise) maga. [Sa. 'o ai,
Tah. o vai. Ma. a wai (pi. a
wai ma), To. ko hai, a hai, Er.
me, Ta. ba (pi. niba min), Epi
kei, d. sie, Malo isei, My.
siapa, siyapa, sapa, mana,
Mg. zovy, iza.] H. mi who?
Note. — Sei is for sefei : se
dem.
Seka, v. i., to sit ; seka ki to sit
about, or on (someone, or
thing, consult about it or him) ;
biseka, v. r., to sit with some-
one, or with each other. H.
s'akan (A. sakana, H. sakan),
s'aken to set oneself down, to
lie down, to rest, to abide,
dwell.
Sek e a, ske a, v. t., to raise up,
set upright : saki.
Seke-mau, v. i., to swear, s6ke,
and mau true : a man who
swore, as in denying a charge,
often tore off" his loin cloth,
and imprecated all kinds of
calamities upon himself if he
were not speaking the truth.
A. sahaga to peel, scratch,
comb the hair, sahug' fre-
quently and rapidly swearing.
Sekof ia, v. t., to catch rapidly
with the hand (a thing
thrown). A. zakafa to take
rapidly, snatch, 8, to take with
the hand, snatch quickly.
Sela ti, v. t., to bear, carry ; d.
sola ti ; selasela (of many) ;
sela bear (a child), bisela v. r.,
to bear, bring forth, nafiselan
SELA GISA NA] 171
child-bearing, childbirth, d.
bisol. [Fi. cola-ta.] E. sawar
to bear, carry.
Sela gisa na, v. t., to call his
name (so and so) ; sela ki,
v. t., attribute to (one, some-
thing) ; sela go, as sela tera
ki go after (one), sela butuaki
go between two points, be of
two minds ;
Sela, s., road, path ; landing-
place of canoe ; a portion of
time (cf. mal place, time).
[My. salekan to call, saleh
proceed, saleh a road.] A.
s'ala' to proceed, 4, to call.
Sel ia, v. t., to bind. [Fi. soli-a.]
H. 'asar to bind, S. 'sar.
Sel sa, to be unable, selu bia be
able, sele atai naio na be able
to know his mind, d. for sili
atai na6o na, lit. to know
(how) to enter his mind, i.e., to
understand his secret views :
sili.
Seloa, s., a flat wooden dish.
[Mg. soliaka, flat, as a dish.]
H. selalia, pi., pans, such as
were flat and broad, not deep,
A. zuluh' large pans, E. sahl,
platter.
Sema, sesema, v. i., to be bare,
sticking out (as one's bones),
or as the point of an auger or
piercing instrument : sama ia.
Semasema, v. i., to rejoice. H.
samah to rejoice.
Sema ni, v. t., to praise, glorify.
S. s'abah, Pa., to praise, glorify,
Semanien, s., c. art., praise, glory,
also act of praising.
Samasamana, or semasemana,
v. i., or a., disgusting : -na, a.
ending. A. zahuma, H. zaham,
[sera ia
to stink, become rancid, filthy,
disgusting.
Semam, e., paternal aunt, ana
semam his aunt : susu, mam.
Semen, or saman, s., the out-
rigger of a canoe, or, more
accurately, the part of the
outrigger, shaped exactly like
a canoe, which floats in the
water. [An. jmaig, i.e. jimaig,
Ta. timen, TaSa. tsama, Fi.
cama, cama kau a canoe whose
outrigger is only a stick (kau),
in distinction from a double
canoe ; To. hama the smaller
canoe of a double canoe, My.
sampan a small boat, Mg.
sambo a ship.] A. safinaf,
safln', H., S., sefina, ship,
vessel.
Note. — The Tongan hama
suggests that the semen or
saman was originally not a
mere log fashioned into the
shape of a canoe, but a real
canoe, and that the outrigger
canoe of Oceania is a degen-
erate form of the " double
canoe."
Semani, s., the rudder, or steer-
ing oar of a canoe, d. uose-
man. [Paama seman, TaSa.
lamani.] Se in semani is
contr. for uose, q.v., oar, and
mani is manu, a bird, a figure
of which (a bird) was carved
on the stern of the canoe
where the steering oar is held
firmly in steering : hence the
rudder was called uose-man
the oar of the bird.
Sera ia, v. t., to bind, fasten on,
as the handle of a basket on
a hook, sera ki, id., sera-goro-
SERA LOAM AN J
172
[SERI
bau a hat, lit. fasten upon the
head. H. s'arar to twist, be
firm; S. s'rar to be firm, s'arar
to make firm, stable, Aph.
'as'ar to firmly believe. Hence
Sera loaman, seralesoko, believe
true ;
Sera lo&alo, sera teamole, believe
worthless, despise ;
Sera tea sa, sera tea uia, believe
bad, believe good ;
Sera masika, make firm desire ;
Sera sog, make firm sog, q.v. ;
Sera gor ia, make firm upon, or
covering.
Sera ia, v. t., to sweep (as a
house), tea sesera, a sweeper,
broom ;
Sera, v. i., to run (water, stream,
which sweeps its bed). See
under sar ia, saw, rub, sweep,
&c. Hence
Sera guru-maki, v. t., sweep
gathering together ; and
Sera kuruk, v. mid., id. ; and
Sera taua ki, v. t., sweep into
heaps ; and
Sera lo tua, v. t., sweep things
giving (them) to (someone),
used of men telling an evil
doer of his misconduct and its
consequences. Hence
Seralotu, v. mid., to repent ; and
Sera tua, v. t., to sweep (to-
gether things] giving (them)
to (someone), as a peace offer-
ing ; and
Sera biri ki. syn. gura biri ki,
to startle ; and
Sera makoto ki, id. See sar ia.
Sera gisa na, d. for sela gisa na ;
Sera usi, v. t., to call (pronounce)
after (one, as in learning to
read) : sela, and usi.
Sera lua, v. t., to remove (cloth-
ing, &c, from one ; also cere-
monial uncleanness, sera lua
namam), make to go out, or
away. A. sar a, 2, remove,
make to go ; sar', and sair', the
whole, every, part, some, any.
Hence
Sera, any, some ; sera-rogo, sera
nalo, something, anything ;
every, sera natamole every
man; the whole, all (with
nom. suf.) sera ra, serasera ra,
the whole, all, of them, every
of them, sera bakauti era
every of them all ; every
(kind), sau-sera greedy, ba
sera going every (where), a
vagabond ; also, d., i nuf sera
it is finished all [Fi. sara,
ad.] ; bisera, biserasera of
every kind (i bisera, i.e., i bi
sera it is (in) every (kind, or
sort).
Sera ia, v. t., to rend asunder, as
the two branches of a forked
stick ; misera rent asunder.
A. sara, 3), wrench asunder.
Sera, or sere ia, or serei a, v. t.,
to importune, entreat. A.
nazara to ask importunately,
to entreat pressingly.
Serab, v. i., to flow out (as of a
vessel, run over). A. sariba
to flow (of water), sarab'
flowing out.
Sere ra, v. t., dwell among, near
them, bisere to be among,
near, bakasere a, and masere,
q.v. A. 'asara, 3, to be near,
6, to be near to each other,
'isr' love, &c.
Seri, v., to be unable to do a
thing (from old age and infirm-
SERI A]
ity) ; seri nalo forsake, leave,
abandon a thing - , bakaseri a,
to loose (a prohibition, or
tabu). [Fi. sere-ka untie, un-
loose.] H. s'arah, Ch. sera, to
loose, Pi. s'ereh to loose, to
desert, leave.
Seri a, v. t., to speak of, decide,
consult about ; make a sign,
show. A. s'ara, 2, 3, &c,
make a sign, show, consult.
Seri a, v. t., to strain ; sari is
strain with it, nakalu sari
straining cloth. S. slal (sal)
to strain.
Seri a, v. t., to hollow out (as a
canoe). H. sur to hollow out.
See sar ia.
Seri, v., as seri taku-ra, to cover
their back, seri namaseri, or
namiseri, put on the miseri, q.v.
Seri a, seri goto. See sar ia.
Seritau, s., the cutter-up of a
human body for the oven,
Seritau, or Saritau, or Sara,
pr. n. of a demon who is lord
over the entrance to Hades,
and whose helpers are Mase-
asi, Faus, and Maki. See sar
ia, and tau.
Sere, as nakasu i tuba sere
nakalu the stick thrust tear-
ing the cloth, masere torn :
sar ia.
Sereserea, or seriseria, v. i., or
a., to be hairy, hirsute ; a.
ending a. A. s'a'ira to be hairy.
Sesere, d., rub, grate. Same as
sesera.
Sera mimi, d., syn. sera bakauti;
and
Serume (sera 'me) : sera, and me,
or mimi, contr. of mau, mamau.
Seru ea, v. t., rub, wash (clothes,
173 [siel
<fcc), seseru, rub (as oil on the
head). Same as sesere, sesera:
sar ia.
Seru, s., a comb. [Fi. seru, Sa.
selu, My. sisir, syn. garu.]
Sar ia.
Ses, d., to be small : sos.
Si, v. See su finished off.
Si a, v. t., scrape, cut (si nabora
na scrape the cheeks with a
shell removing the skin) ; sisi
a, reclup. A. saha', n. a. sahy',
scrape off, with the notion of
cutting. Nin. also to harrow
(the ground).
Si, sisi, to blow (wind, breath) ;
si a, v. t., to blow (a thing, as
the fire), to shoot (with a
gun) ; si-ruku : sai.
Si a, d. sui a, to help : sai.
Si, particle after verbs (t. prep.),
as libi si ; sa in saki, as rogo-
saki. [Sa. si, Fi. ca, My. s, Mg.
zi.] Assy, sa, prep., originally
dem., Mahri sh', prep.
Siba ia, d. suba ia, v. t., to break
(as a yam), redup. sisiba
and sibasiba ia ; masiba, ma-
sibasiba to be broken, na
masiba a fragment. [Fi.
sove, kasove, Mg. somba,
simba.] Ch. s'ibeb to break
in pieces, s'iba a fragment.
Sibu na, s., feathers (short) on
a bird's back. A. ziffu small
feathers (of a bird).
Sieg, v.i., to hang on the waist
cloth (of a woman) ; and
Sieg, s., c. art. nasieg, a woman's
waist cloth. A. was's'aha, v.,
id., wus'ah', s., id.
Siel, a., red. [My. serah.] A.
s'ahila to be of a dark reddish
(&c.) colour.
sifa] 174
Sifa, v. i., to depart, withdraw;
sifa ki, v. t., make to depart,
toss, throw away, sifesife,
redup. ; sifa, v. i., to assemble.
See safi.
Slfanua, s., a cannon, lit. shoot
the land : si fanua.
Sifili, and sifili ki, d., transposed
for sili fi, sili fiki.
Sifiri, s., parrot. A. safara to
sibilate.
Sig, v., redup. sigsig, v., to be
rebellious, disobedient; sigsig-
leo (leo thing, or voice) to be
disobedient, to sin, sigsigleo ki
to be disobedient to (one),
nasigsigleoen disobedience, sin,
bisig, v. r., to be disobedient
to someone or to each other.
[Mg. odina rebellious, miodina
to rebel.] A. 'asa' to be re-
bellious, disobedient, 'isyan'
rebellion, disobedience.
Sigir ia, v. t., or c, to strengthen :
gara, and caus. pref. si. [Cf.
syn. My. mangkras kan, My.
mampahery.]
Sikara, v. i., or a., prickly, spiny,
and of hair standing on end :
ending -ra. A. s'aka, 2, to be
spiny, hirsute, s'akai' spiny.
Sik e a, v. t., d. siko e, to
avenge : soka ria.
Sik e a, or sek e a, to raise: saki;
hence
Sike-rau, d. si-rau ki, or sie-rau
ki, to raise or lift up a leaf
(rau), presenting cooked food
to one to be eaten.
Sike, to be swearing, and
Sike-mau (see seke-mau), to swear
true ; and
Sike, v. t., to comb (the hair) :
seke-mau.
[siko ti
Sike ti, v. t., redup. sikisiki, to
grasp with tongs, or with a
forked stick ; hence
Esike, s., tongs, syn. uataki.
H. liazak to hold fast, stick
fast (A. liazaka), Hi. to take
hold of, seize.
Sikitau, s., only child : sikai,
sikei, totau.
Sikai, or sikei, num., one, d. siki-
tika (redup.) : tesa (in la-tesa,
q.v., d. la-teha), also in mas-
iki, d. mihi, also in gisa, mas,
sam ; and
Siki, with nom. suf. (translated
in this case as nominative, as
in H. and A.), as siklna (his
one) he alone, sikira (their
one) they alone, &c. In i
siklna uia (and similar express-
ions) the meaning is he alone
is good, i.e., he is incompar-
ably good ; and
Sikiskei, one (by) one ; sikiski
gisa one by one together, and
see bakasikei. H. 'aliad, Mod.
S. llda, &c.
Note. — The ki or kei in
siki, sikei is non-radical, as ka
in Mg. isaka, iraika. [Mg.
isa, iray, also isaka, iraika,
My. asa, sa, Sa. tasi.]
Siko e, v. t., to avenge, d. sik e a :
soka ria.
Siko sa, v. t., to gaze at ; siko
mau isa to gaze continually
(see mau) at, redup. sikosiko ;
hence
Siko, s., kingfisher, lit. gazer
(because it sits gazing into the
water for fish). H. sakah, Oh.
seka', to look at, to contem-
plate.
Siko ti, or siku ti, v. t., to
SIKI-NAKl]
adhere to (someone), continue
or dwell with. A. 'as'ika to
adhere to (someone).
Siki-naki, v. t., to abhor, loathe,
abominate, d. masuku-taki, or
musuku-taki. A. zahak, Nm.,
to take disgust for, loathe.
Sila ia, v. t., as ta sila ia chop,
peeling or shaving off, chop or
cut a thin shaving off; hence
Masila na, s., a shaving, chip ;
and masila, masilasila, to be
thin. [Mg. silaka and silatra
to peel, bark, skin, chip off.]
A. sahala to peel, bark, shave,
or scale off, mashul' small.
Sila, v., to crack, as thunder,
boro silai a, buru masila, id.,
silasila, redup., ta silasila, id.
[Sa. faitilitili, Ma. wbatiri,
Ha. hekili.] A. salla, salsala,
to sound, to crack (thunder),
musalsil' braying (an ass).
Sila ia, v. t., to help, aid, support,
strengthen, tasila (dd. tasiga,
ahika) helper, supporter, sil
wall plate (supporter of roof),
tua-sil givers of support (to a
chief, as giving food or other
aid when he is making a feast,
&c.) A. 'azara, 2, to aid, help,
strengthen, support, make firm,
H. 'azar to help, aid. Hence
Sil, s., wall plate (supporter) of a
house, help (tua sil give aid or
help).
Sila ia, or sela ia, d. sol ia, sila-
sila ia, v. t., to rub, as to rub
(oneself with oil, &c.) [Fi.
sola-ta rub, Sa. soloi wipe, Ma.
horoi wash, Ha. holoi wash,
wipe, brush, Mg. soroka
sweep.] Cg. sera, seru, &c. See
sar ia.
175 [si.MBOLO
Sili ki, or sila ki, v. t., make
to shake (anything ; if water,
to sprinkle), silisili ki, id., to
pour out, shake out, throw
away, throw down, ru sili ki
fisera they flee in different
directions (those overcome in
battle), lit. they throw (them-
selves, shake out, or scatter
themselves) in different (or
every, or all) directions. H.
zalal to shake, make tremble,
pour out, shake out, A. zalzala
to shake, make to tremble.
Sili, v. t., to enter, sila isa enter
it (a house), enter him, that is
enter under his protection ;
sili fi a enter into him (as a
spirit or demon into a man) ;
sili-faki, or sili-fiki make to
enter into, also thrust or throw
into (anything into anything).
[Sa. sulu thrust into, take
refuge, sulu-fa'i, and sulu-ma'i,
My. julok thrust into, Mg.
joloka enter, Fi. curu, curu-
curu, curu-ma, curu-maka,
enter, push, or thrust into.]
A. daliala, n. a. duli'ul', to
enter (a house) ; take refuge
with, 2, make to enter, 4,
make to enter, thrust, &c, in.
This word is used much with
t. prep, bi or fi, as in sili-fi, &c,
and to denote among other
things the entering into a man
of a spirit or demon. See
alialia.
Simi-ki-leo, or sima-leo, d. suma-
ki-leo, s., echo, lit. sound of
the voice. A. ziimatf vehement
sound, and leo.
Simbolo, s., d., a basket. Cf. A.
zibbil', zirnbiP, id.
sina]
Sina, or sine, v. i., to shine, be
clear, us i sine the rain clears
up, Fi. uca sa siga. [Fi. siga
sun, clay, My. siyang clay,
clear.] A. Salia', E. saliawa,
H. Sahali, to shine, be clear ;
sun, clay, in derivatives.
Sinu, sisinu, v. i., to be hot,
burn (of the grass on the hills,
yearly), to be inflamed (of
one's face) nako na i sinu his
face is inflamed (with passion) ;
hence
Sinu, s., c. art., the burning of
the grass on the hills ; a place
on which the grass has been
burned : see also tunu, bitunu,
d. bitsin. [Sa sunu.] A.
sah'ana, n. a. suh'un', to be
hot, sah'una and sah'ina to be
hot, 2, to heat, suli'n' and
Sull'n' hot, H. s'alian, S. s'lien,
to be hot, inflamed (sore), heat
oneself at the fire.
Siora, s., a pipe for drawing oft*
water from one place and
pouring it out at another ;
said to be for sie rau (for
sike rau, lit. lift up, dist-
ribute).
Sl-rau, or sierau, contr. of sike-
rau.
Sirak, a., used as s., for sitaki,
i.e., si taki blow, heeling over
(a canoe), a squall or high
wind : si to blow, and taki to
incline over.
Siri ki, v. t., to scatter, sprinkle,
of seeds, water, siri kia ki,
i.e., siri ki uia ki scatter or
sow well (seeds) ; and
Sirisir ia, v. t., to scatter (or
sprinkle) on him (as water or
blood spirting on one) ;
176 [siua
Siri, v. i., to sprout, shoot (of a
plant) ; and
Siria, d., v. i. (-a, ending), to
sprout, shoot ; and
Sirina, s., c. art., a shoot, sprout ;
and used of men, offspring ;
hence in proper names of
children and men, siri (seed,
offspring) as siri fakal, &c.
H. zara' scatter, disperse,
especially to scatter seed, sow,
bear seed (of a plant), zere'
seed, offspring, A. zara'a
scatter seed, to produce plants.
Sisi a, si a, redup. ; hence
Sis, s., a shell used for scraping.
Sisi, v. i., redup. of si to blow ;
hence
Sisi, s., a gun ; si fanua a cannon.
Sito, v. i., cacavit, A. s'aljata
8), cacavit.
S'iu, s., a pricker, or awl (a
sharpened bone). [To. hui,
needle or pin (of bone).] A.
s'i'a' a prick, spike. See sui.
Siua (siwa), v. i., to hunt for
fish, or shellfish (on the reef),
siue a (siua ia) v. t., hunt (fish,
or shellfish, on the reef). A.
safa (u) to examine or explore
the ground by the smell, hence
to hunt.
Siuer (siwer), dd. suuara, surata,
v. i., to walk, proceed, go away,
sisiuer, redup., walk about.
[Sa. savali, savalivali, sava-
liga.] A. safara, 3, n. a.
sifar', to make a journey, go
away.
Siua, or sua, cl. siuo (siwo), v. i.,
to descend. [Sa. ifo, To. hifo.]
S. s'bab, s'ab, part, s'o'eb (Acts
xi. 5) to be let down, to
descend.
so e]
So e, d. se a (for so ia), v. t., to
call (one) ;
Soso, v. t., red up., to call, sos ia
(for soso ia) call him : also in
bioso, rasoso, rafioso. E. saw'a
to call, H. s'ua', Pi.
Soa, s., c. art. asoa na, com-
panion, follower, or neso (art.
ne), especially of the opposite
sex, hence tauso, q.v. : sai.
[Fi. sa.]
Soi, d., v. t. See si a, to scrape.
[Fi. so-ya, soi.] Hence
Soi, or soia, s., the hole scraped
out for the yam to be planted
in.
Soa ki, soiia ki. See saua ki.
Soa ni, or soe ni, v. t., to mock.
A. haza' to mock.
Soar ia, or souar ia, v. t., to
abrade, scrape, scratch, as rago
i souari rarua the roller
scrapes, scratches, or tears by
scraping, or abrades (the bot-
tom of) the canoe, souasouar
ia, redup., and soara, or souara,
v. i , to split open (as a ripe
seed, pod, or banana), i.e., to
be abraded, or uncover or
abrade itself. S. safar to
shave, to abrade, H. safar (to
scratch, polish), to write, A.
safara to sweep, uncover the
face (a woman), to shine (the
dawn), H. s'afar (scratch, pol-
ish), be bright, beautiful, Ch.
s'efarpara, S. s'afra the dawn.
See ante, asouara, or asoara
the rainbow, i.e., the beautiful,
or brilliant.
Soata, v. i., to slip. A. dahas'a
to slip, E. dehas'a.
Sobu, v. i., to spring up ; also to
spring up, arise (of the first
177 [soK
beginning of anything), and to
begin, or be the first to do some-
thing. See futum (bisobu,
&c.)
Sobe na, s., c. art., the nape or
back of the neck. E. zaban
id., A. zabbunai neck.
Sofa, sofasofa, v. i., sofa, s. See
sefa.
Sog ia, or sogi a, v. t., d. sug ia.
Sogo ni a, v. t., to press upon,
compress (one, as by crowding
upon him), to straiten, sogo-
sogo ni, redup. ;
Sog, or sogi, s., what straitens,
compulsion, force, constraint,
&c, as i meri sogi au makes
or uses constraint or force upon
me (to compel me to do some-
thing), i tili sog soko ia he
declares force or compulsion
upon him (to make him pay
a fine, or to suffer death,
as the case may be). [My.
sasak straitened, sasakkan to
straiten.] H. suk, Hi. (A.
S'aka, 2), to straiten, compress,
press, urge upon, force, compel,
H. Soli distress.
Soga, s., c. art., d. nasok, dust,
rubbish, a lot of things
(belonging to one) ;
Sogasoga, id. ; hence
Soga-leba, s., a rich man, lit. big
lot of things ; and, d.,
Sogoa, v. i., or a. (ending, 'a), rich;
Sok, d. soga, s. ;
Soksok, d. sogasoga, s. ;
Sok-leb, d, soga-leba ; also
Sok, s., d., c. art., a cloud. H.
s'aliak dust, a cloud, A.
sah'k' ; the verb signifies to
rub, hence dust (from being
rubbed small).
13
soka]
178
Note. — Sogoa lit. signifies
full of dust, dusty, dust being
taken in the sense which is
given it in the vulgar English
phrase " to come down with
the dust."
Soka, v. i., to leap, jump, go
swiftly ; to be violently ex-
cited, inflamed with anger (of
the belly) ; soka ia, v. t., to
spear ; inivit mulierem ; soka-
ba, v. i., to go swiftly away,
hence, s., what goes swiftly
away, a worthless or lost thing
or person; soka-ba ki, v. t.,
throw away, make to be soka-
ba ; soka ki, v. t., make to
soka, throw. A. zak'k'a, 4),
leap, 2), inivit mulierem, 5),
go with vehemence, 6), to be
angry, burn with rage.
Sok, s., c. art., what stops or
blocks, as a dam : suk ia.
Soka ri, v. t., to join on to (one
thing on to another), then to
repay (one thing by another,
the one thing being regarded
as joining on to, or touching,
the other), to avenge (one
slain, by slaying another, also
sike a, d. siko e) ; soka-soka
ri, redup. ;
Sokarien, s., c. art., a joining, as
a splice ; repayment, retribu-
tion, vengeance ;
Soka-taki, v. t., to join on to, to
meet, tumara soka-taki ra
meet together. H. nas'ak (A.
nasaka), to join, 2), kiss (join
mouth to mouth), join on to
each other, meet (of two
things), Hi. to join on to (one
thing on to another).
Soko, v. i., or a., to be true,
[sono
true, as naleona i soko sa his
voice (prediction) is true as to
or about it (thing predicted,
as is known when it takes
place as foretold), le- or lo-
soki, a true thing, truth, tili
lesoko to speak truth, d. tili
mori speak true, d. tili lo-
amau speak truth. See also
masoko. [Sa. sa'o straight,
correct, right, My. sungguh
true.] A. sadaka, n. a. sadk',
to be true, H. sadak to be
straight, right, just.
Soli a, v. t , rub. See sila ia, id.
Soli, sosoli, v. i., to creep (i.e., to
rub or sci'ape along the ground,
cf. karafi) ;
Asolat, s., a worm : a, art. [Sa.
totolo, ps. tolofia, Fut. toro,
Ha. kolo, TaSa. tari, Malo
nsalansala, to creep, sulati a
worm.] H. zahal to creep,
crawl.
Sore, v. i., to lie, be untruthful,
d. bisuru ;
Soresore, id. H. zur to turn
aside, A. zara tell lies.
Sor ia, or sori a, v. t., to give (a
thing). [Fi. soli a give, My.
sarah and srah to submit,
sarah kan to give.] A. s'ara'a,
1, to submit, 4, to give.
Soro, v. i., to burn, flame, soro
fi, v. t., send a flame on to,
also to treat with violence, to
rush violently and with savage
rage upon (as a wild pig-
charging a man), bakasoro-
soro fi, v, c, make the fire to
burn up. [Mg. doro, sa, tolo,
matoro.] A. sa'ara to kindle
(a fire, war), 2, to rage (of a
camel), 3, to treat with cruelty
SOROA SA]
179
[.SU NA
and rage, so'r' blaze of fire,
rage, insanity, sa'ir' flame of
fire, fire bursting into flame.
Soroa sa, v. t., to covet, desire;
Soro, a. used as s., a covetous
person, and see miseroa. A.
s'ariha to covet.
Soroa, d., v. i., to be sick, ayn.
sasana. A. s'arro fever, and
a. ending, from s'arra to be
bad, as sasana from sa.
Soroa, s., c. art., d. tiroa.
Sore a, v. t., to saw (one, of the
breakers sawing one on the
reef) ; and
Soro aki, v. t., to make a man's
body saw on the reef (of the
waves or breakers) : sar ia.
Sos, v. i., to shrink, become con-
tracted, as cloth when wet,
india rubber, &c, to be small
(syn. mito), d. ses small, little.
A. 'aza', 4), to be contracted,
made small, also 'aziya, 3), to
be contracted, 2), to contract,
4, to diminish.
Su, sua, v. i., to rise up (tobu i
tubu sua swells up) as ground
in which the growing yams
are swelling (cf. lua) ; another
form of this word is tu to
stand up ;
Su raka ti, v. t. (to take up,
lift up), to startle ;
Sua i, v. t., to take up, lift up,
then to take, receive, obtain,
acquire, as i su naleo he
obtained something ; and to
bear, as i su nafolofolon sa
anena he bore his sin, i.e.,
he received its punishment;
and to meet, as i sua nata
he met a person, bisua, v.
r. ; su-naki to carry on the
head (of women), su-ni to
put on (clothes), hence susu
clothed (having clothes upon
or carried or borne by one) ;
to meet or take up the (odour
of a thing) su rogi na&on.
The notion of meeting is in
that of lifting oneself or rising
up against (one) ; and a
swelling in the skin is said to
sua, i.e., raise itself up, it rises
up ; su (nasuma), s., the upper
part (ridge-pole) of a house,
and masua, s., the highest part
or top of anything. Su or sua
is also used in proper names
of children, as Sua ragoa, &c.
H. nasa' to take up, lift up, E.
nasa' take, receive, A. nas'a'
be exalted, grow, to bear,
carry, to bear one's sin, that
is, to receive its punishment.
H. si', se'eth height, a raising
or lifting up, a rising up in
the skin, A. nas'a' to grow up,
to be raised, high, 4, to pro-
duce, 10, perceive or feel the
odour (of a thing), nasa' sprout
or shoot (of a plant) — sua (in
pr. names), young people.
Su, d. si, v., finished off, as i nu
su, it is ended or completed,
finished off, i bati su e a he
has finished off doing it ; i
bano su he has gone, he has
finished oft' going, completed
going. The word thus forms
with any other verb a com-
pleted tense denoting that
what is expressed by the first
verb is finished off. See under
maso to be done.
Su na, s., c. art., highest part (as
ridge of a house, or top of the
BO na] 180
head), cf. inasua na top (of
anything) : su, or sua.
Su na, s., c. art. nasu na, q.v.,
juice.
Sua, for suua (suwa), siua, siuo.
Sua, s., brother. See tai.
Suasua, v. i., to be willing ; and
Sua ki, v. t., to impel, order,
send. Seebisuaki. A. s'ayaya,
1, to be willing, to will, 2, to
impel.
Suara, or suuara (suwara),
susuara, d. siuer, q.v.
Suara, v. t., to meet (as a head
wind, any obstruction in one's
way) : sua, and ara, v. t.
Suer, v. i., d. suerai.
Suerai, v. i., to put out rai, i.e.,
tai, q.v., dung, cacavit : sui,
see si, v.t., and tai.
Suer ia, v. t., to vituperate, d.
sur. A. zara to vituperate.
Suba ia. See siba ia.
Su6e, v. t., to place, determine,
appoint, constitute, syn. to-
naki, as i su&e biri a he
appoints it over again (and
differently), syn. to-naki biri a,
as to appoint a day of meet-
ing, <fec, and afterwards to
alter the day, appointing
another ; i su6e roa au he
appoints me, changing, changes
or alters (roa to turn round,
to alter) the appointment be
made with me, as having first
appointed me a certain day,
he afterwards changes the
appointment to another day ;
hence
Su&e, s., what is placed, fixed,
redup. susu&e, as upright
stones firmly planted in the
ground, nafera susu&e a row
[SUBE
of such stones, su&e such a
stone, a statue, an idol, or
saci'ed stone ; a thing fixed
firmly, as a plank firmly
nailed, a stone firmly fixed, a
wind continuing firmly in one
quarter, nalagi i be su6e the
wind is firmly fixed (in some
quarter) ; also, custom, as a
thing fixed, suie nafanua
custom of the country, su6e
na its or his custom, also the
fixed nature, custom, or dis-
position, sube nig Atua i leg
the nature, custom, or dis-
position, or fixed character of
God is righteous ; su6e i to-
naki nafanua the fixed, or
constituted, or established —
fixed, established, or con-
stituted the country. In this
last sense it is a general term
used to denote either the first
or early or ancient inhabitants
of a place (the original settlers
of a district), or, which is the
same thing in another form,
the persons who figure in
Efatese myths, or the spirits
of such, now being natemate.
Su6e is also used as a proper
name of men, as Mariki Suie,
or Ma Su6e, Mr. Su6e (the
present Christian chief of the
village of Moso, in Havannah
Harbour), and of women, as
Li Su6e, Mrs. or Madam Su&e.
(See ma, and li.) [Ma. tupu
firmly fixed, Sa. tupua a stone
supposed to have been a man
petrified, an image, Fi. tovo
habit, nature, practice.] H.
nasab, i. q. yasab to set, put,
place, Hi. hissib to make to
subu] 181
stand, place, erect, set up (as
a column), fix, establish (as
bounds), Ho. to be fixed,
planted, yaSSib firm ; A.
nasaba to place, fix, set up,
declare, appoint, constitute ;
nasb' a thing set up, a statue,
what is worshipped besides
God, i.e., an idol ; naslb erect-
ing, setting up ; nasibal stones
placed or fixed round a water-
hole.
Subu. See sobu, v. i., and d.,
s., child, offspring.
Su-bua, v. t., to lift up, or
ascend, bursting or breaking
through (the ground, hence
subua (natano) a demon or
demons who do so), syn. su-
bora, ia, and sua-sai a : su or
sua to rise, or lift up, and
bua.
Sub-neki. See sabo-naki.
Sug ia, v. t., to kiss, d. sum ia.
Sug ia, v. t., to block up, d.
suk ia.
Sui a, v. t., d. si a, q.v., to help ;
to blow upon ; also (see sai a)
to make holes in (as a moth
in cloth) ; also to burn with
heat, as elo i sui a the sun
burns him ; and redup., elo i
tera suisui, the sun shines
burning (hot) ; and
Sui, s., heat ; sui ni elo heat of
the sun. See sai.
Suk ia, v. t., d. sug i, to block
up, obstruct. A. s'akka, 2),
3), block up, obstruct ;
Suk ia, v. t., to cause to stoop,
suki lifa ia (a burden) makes
him stoop, bending him ; to
still, as suki namaritana still
the commotion (of passion)
[SULU
within him, suki namaieto
stills the anger ; and
Suki, v. i., to be patient, firm,
quiet, still, sink (subside). H.
s'akak to stoop (A. s'akka),
subside, be appeased, Hi. to
still ;
Suki a, v. t., make fast, firm, seli
suki a, bisa, tili (&c.) suki a
tie firm, speak making it firm
and sure, meri sukisuki a make
firm, turi suki a nail firm.
A. s'akka, 3), adhere, cohere
firmly ;
Suki a, v. t., to stick, stab. A.
s'akka, 7), transfix (with a
spear).
Suka, v. i., to draw back, recede,
sukasuk, redup. ; hence
Sukei, or sukai, s., c. art., the
receding (of food), the annual
time of scarcity of food, opp.
to namasu. [Fi. suka, cf.
cuqa.] H. nasag, sug, to draw
back, retreat.
Suku ti. See siko ti.
Suku ti. See sike ti.
Sula, v. i., to rise up (as a rising
ground) ;
Sula, s., a rising ground. H.
salal to lift up, cast up a bank.
Suli na, s., shoot (as of a banana),
offspring (of man) ; hence
Sulia, v. i., to have shoots (as a
banana). [Sa. suli a young
banana, son of a chief.] H.
neser a sprout, shoot ; offspring.
Su-lua i, v. t., to bring up (a
child) : su, or sua, and lua.
Sulu ea, v. t., to scorch with
flame, illuminate with a torch
(ne sulu), and see masula ki ;
hence
Sulu, s., c. art. nasulu, a torch.
SUM A]
[Sa. sulu, v. and s., Ja. suluh.]
A. s'a'ala, 1, 2, 4, to kindle (a
tire j, 8, be kindled, 10, light
or kindle (a torch), s'u'ulu
flame of tire, mas''al' a torch.
Suma, s., c. art. nasuma, house,
d. uma, see also katema, im-
rum : the s' in suma is a dem.
or art. [My. rumah, Ja.
umah, Ml. im, TaSa. ima,
Motu ruma.] A. k'a'maf, pi.
him' &c, house.
Sum ia, v. t., to kiss, dd. sug i, sog
ia. [An. aijumnyi, to kiss,
8a. sogi rub noses, salute,
sogisogi to smell, My. chyum
to smell, to kiss.] A. s'amina
to smell. There is no trace of
this meaning in sum ia. In
E. sa'ama is to kiss.
Sum ia, v. t., to suck, as fat.
My. isap, An. admoi to kiss,
lick, suck, as fat. A. saliab,
Nm., suck in (liquid or air).
Sume li, v. t., to make a sucking
noise to (to attract one's atten-
tion). See preceding word.
Sumi li, v. t., d. sumo li, to shut,
close (as a door), to patch up,
repair (as a hole in a mat) ;
hence
Suinili, s., a thing like india-
rubber in a clam shell which,
when touched, causes the shell
to close ; an ornament (shell)
which stops up a hole pierced
in the septum of the nose. A.
samma, 4), to stop (as a bottle),
6), to patch up, repair (a thing).
Sumat ia, v. t., to beat, d. samit
ia ; d. sumanr i to beat, also
used as an ad., hastily, con-
fusedly, ineffectively, as lo
sumanr i, brig sumanr i, &c,
182 [su-rua
see, do hastily, confusedly,
ineffectively (cf. sarafi, tere
ti). See samit ia.
Sur, v. i., to go (of a departed
spirit going to Hades), to
writhe and twist with pain.
H. sir to go in a circle (eg.
s'ur to go, journey), sir hinge,
writhing pain.
Sur i, v. t., d. suer ia, q.v.
Sura ia, v. t., to root up, extir-
pate (as the things growing in
one's plantation). E. sarawa
to root up, extirpate.
Surata, sursurata, v. i., d. for
suara, to walk, go on a jour-
ney.
Suru ki, v. t., make to suru, i.e.,
to be covered, as by inserting
an arrow head into the (reed)
shaft ; and
Suru faki, v. t., make to be
covered, as by thrusting a
thing into the dust or earth ;
and
Suru goi a, v. t., to cover drain
out (as the milk of a cocoa-
nut) by covering the aperture
of the nut with the mouth
and draining out the contents.
For goi see go ia. Tasuru ki
to conceal, suruoli, dd. suruili,
suruauli (see uli, auli), to take
the place, or assume the form
of, hiildenly or stealthily, and,
s., a demon, or demons, who
do this to destroy men. [My.
suruk to conceal, Mg. sarona
to cover.] E. sawara to cover,
tasawara to be hidden, secret,
to hide.
Su-rua, s., upper of the two
ridge-poles of a house : su na,
and rua two.
suku ea] 183
Suru ea, v. t., to allure, tempt
(deceiving), lit. to deceive ;
Surusuru ea, id., redup. See
sore, bisuru.
Suruk, i.e., su-ruk, also si-ruk,
and sai-ruk (see sai, and ruku)
to go into the ruku (of any-
thing).
Surut ia, v. t., to scarify, make
fissures on the surface of any-
thing. A. s'arata to scarify.
Susu, s., the breast or breasts; a
calabash (round like a breast):
susu na, d., his mother, lit. his
breast, or mamma ; hence
Susu, v., to suck the breast. [Sa.
susu the breast, to suck the
breast, Fi. sucu the breasts,
to suck the breast, My. susu,
Mg. nono, the breasts.] H.
s'od, A. thidy', pi. thudiyy',
breast, breasts.
T
J. a, passive or reflexive passive
prefix to many verbs. [Fi.,
Sa., My., Ja., Mg., id.] A.,
E., ta, reflexive or reflexive
passive prefix to verbs.
Ta, nom. and verb, suf., 3 pi.
(very common), for ra.
Ta, s., for ata man, person.
Ta, neg. ad., not, dd. ti, tu, and
see sa. [Sa. le, My. ta, Mg.
tsy.] H. lo, le, li, Ch. la, A. la.
Ta ia, v. t., to chop, cut, also to
speak or utter (as it were
making a chopping noise),
redup. tata. [Fi. ta-ya, My.
tatah, Sa. ta, Mg. tatana.] A.
ha(l(la to cut quickly ; utter
speech quickly.
[ta
T', conj., that (because), ta that
I, te that he, te ku that you : te.
Ta, ad., now, dd. syn. uo, ko, i,
as i ta toko, i uo toko, i ko
toko, he yet (now) remains :
ta, dem.
Ta, verb, pron., 1 dual inch
[An. intau, Sa. ta, for taua.]
The ta of nigita, or ninita,
and -a, for rua two.
Ta, tra, or ra, d. nra, q.v., blood.
Originally ta, as in mita to
bleed.
Ta, s., d. sa, d. seate, q.v.
Ta na, s., friend, companion.
[Cf. Fi. tau, to, Ma. ta.] A.
Salii, contraction of sahib',
friend, companion, ya sahi
(cf. Ma. e ta !) O friend, com-
rade ! saliaba to be a friend or
companion, to take with one
as a companion, 3, to accom-
pany (someone), 8, to be com-
panions to each other. Hence
bita, and bita-naki, q.v.
Ta-atuta, v. and s. : ta cut, speak,
utter, and atuta, s., a fixed or
appointed time ; ta-atuta ki
appoint a time and place (of
meeting) to (someone). H.
'adad, A. 'adda, to number,
especially days, time, hence
S. 'acl'da, same as H. mo'ad,
a set time, appointed time,
eg. H. ya'ad, A. wa'ada, 3, to
appoint a time and place (of
meeting).
Ta-bau, s., syn. tagoto-bau, a
cap, or hat, lit. cut-head.
Ta, v., to bend, bow, incline,
extend, as ta bau bend the
head, bow, ta tuba strike^
turning aside, deflecting (a
spear, &c), ta gor ia extend
tab]
over it (of time, so many days),
ta gor ia extend over (or
cover) it (the day in the
past named). H. natah, fut.
yitteh, to extend, to incline,
to bow, to turn.
Tab, d. tiba, neg. ad., not : ta not,
and ba for ma as in Assy.
aama not, i.e., H. mah, A. ma,
used indefinitely.
Ta6a na, d. tauba na, s., side, or
shore (as a side). [Ma. tapa.]
A. tatf side, shore.
Taba ia, d. tama ia.
Taba, v. t., to be like, tabale to
be like that thing (taba le),
so, also tabalai, tabalan,
tabalas, tabalo uai (taba, lo
or 1' (thing), and uai, n, s,
i, dem.) to be like that or this
thing, tabalo uanaga, id. ; also
tabale sa 1 tabale safa ? to be
like what thing 1 to be how 1
[My. dama-kiyan so, Mg.
mitovy.] H. damah to be like.
Taba, s., property given away in
payment of a fine for miscon-
duct : ta to cut, and ba (away)
as in soka-ba.
Ta&a, v. i., to turn, bend, taia lo
sua, or lo saki, bend looking
down, or up, ta&a kai bend
contracting the stomach (as
to avoid a spear), bitelo ta6a6a
to be bent with hunger, also
tama, as tama-lu, d. tumalu,
to bend rising (in setting forth
or out), ta&a soka to bend,
leaping (as in climbing a tree),
d. tama or tuma soka, also, to
leap aside. A. dafa', 6, to
turn hither and thither, dafa'
bending, 'adfa' bent, curved (of
men).
184 [tabe
Tabaraba, for rabaraba.
Tabag, v. t., to slap. [My.
tapuk, Ja. tabuk). A. safaka
to slap.
Tabalaga, v. r. (see balaga ti), to
raise itself off, as a scab, &c.
Reflexive causative.
Tabalas', or tabalasoa, v. i.,
tabale, and aso to burn, to
peel itself off after a burn (of
the skin) : tabal' is the reflex-
ive of bale si, or bala si ;
and
Tabales, v. i., reflexive of bale si,
to peel itself off, as the skin
of one's lips ; and
Tabales, s., husk (as of cocoanut,
chestnut), finger nails.
Tabara, v. i., to be burned.
Tabara ki, v. t., to burn : bara.
Tabare, tabarebare, v. i , reflex-
ive of 6ora ia, to be split, split
open, to be open.
Ta6are, s., a male animal. Com-
pare E. taba't mas, a male.
TaAaro, ta6aro6aro, v. i., to be
heedless, careless, disobedient :
reflexive of &aro ; and
Ta&aro, d., s., senselessness, sin.
Ta'^asuli, v. i., to be detached,
broken oft*: reflexive of basu
li.
Tahau sa, v. t., to cover, to be over
(surpass, be above another) :
bau.
Ta6elu, v. i., reflexive of 6elu,
q.v.
Tab ea, v. t., to take ; and
Tabe, s., c. art. natabe, a freshet,
lit. that which takes, or
carries. [Fi. tabe-a, Mg.
taba.] S. nsab to take.
Tabe, v., to lean or incline,
tabe to osa lean abiding on it,
tabitab]
185
[TAG A
tabe ki lean upon, truat in (a
thing) ;
Tabitab, s., a thing leaned upon,
or trusted in. [Fi. ravi, My.
arapi.] A. safa, 4, to make
to lean or incline (a thing
towards a thing), 1, be the
guest of someone.
Tabei a, v. t., to desire or pur-
pose setting the mind on. A.
bayya, 5, id.
Ta6eti, v. i., to adorn oneself.
Ch. Sabet to adorn, Ethpa.
adorn oneself,
Tabera ki, v. t., to make to be
tabera scattered, taberafera, or
taferafera, to be scattered,
taberafera ki make to be so :
bera, berafera.
Tabes, s., axe: ta to cut, and bt-s.
Tabisa, v. i., to speak ;
Tafisafisa, v. i., to pray : bisa.
Tabilakigon, d. tabilagon, v. i.,
to stumble, d. tabila kon, id.
lit. to strike, or knock (the
foot) by mistake (hastily) fast
(that is, the foot caught fast) :
ta, bila, or bile, gon, or kon.
Ta6ora ia, v. t., to cut, splitting
(a thing) ;
Ta6orai na, s., c. art., the body
where it forks oft' or is divided
into the two legs : ta, bora, ia.
Ta6os, v. i., compressed, narrow :
6osa.
Tabu, s., naked people, people
of other islands of the New
Hebrides, so called by the
Efatese : ta men, and bua I.
Tabu, tab, v. i., or a., to be
forbidden, prohibited ; to be
sacred ;
Tabua, s., c. art., sacredness ;
and
Tabuen, s., id. A. dabba, n. a.
dabbu, to prohibit.
Tabua, v. i., to be split open,
cracked, also mafua : bua.
Tafa, s., c. art. natafa, a hill, lit.
that which goes up or is high ;
and
Tafa (d.), ad., high, above. [Fi.
cabe.] T. dayaba to go up.
E. diba above.
Tafagka, tafakaka. See baku.
Tafakarua ki, i.e.,ta utter, and ba-
karua ; to repeat a thing, as a
slanderer's words to the person
slandered.
Tafar. See taiar.
Tafasi, v. See fasu, eyebrows.
Tafe, s., c. art., d. tabe, freshet.
Tati na, s., and c. art. a, atah,
follower, successor of a chief
(next in rank), that is, his
present helper and right hand
man, and who is his recog-
nized successor. A. tabi'
follower, helper.
Tafea, d. for tofe, q.v.
Tafera, s., c. art., breaker,
breakers ; and
Taferafera, v. i., to break, as
waves, Ch. tebar, H. s'abar, to
break, mis'bar breakers. See
bera.
Tali a, v. t., to be near. A.
tafia to be near.
Tafiti, v. i., to be involved, en-
twisted : fiti, hsi.
Tatiloga. See bulo ki, and bol-
oga.
Tatilo, tafolo, taifolo, and
Tafulus. See bulo ki, bulu si.
Tatirohro, to be twisted (crooked) :
biri a.
Taga, s., basket, d. toga, q.v.; d.
stomach. [Sa. taga, taga 'ai.]
tagal]
Tagal, s., a hook for hanging
things on : tageli.
Tagaragara, v. i., or a., strong :
gara, garagara.
Tagaru, v. t., to grasp : kar ia.
Tagau, s., a hook, so called from
seizing ;
Tagau, tagaugau, v., to grasp,
seize ;
Tagau lua, select, lit. grasp or
seize, lifting up or out : gau,
kau.
Tagatag, s., a mist, or mass of
clouds : tagotago.
Tageli, tageligell. See takel.
Tagi, v. i., to wail, cry, ring,
sing, clank, hum, tfec. (as a
drum, <fec.) ; tagi si, v. t., to be-
wail, tagitagi, redup., natagien
wailing, sounding (in various
ways). [Sa. tagi, My. tangis,
Mg. tany, a cry, tomany,
mitomany to cry.] A. tanna
to tinkle, cfec, Nm. to clank,
ring, hum, tanien din, tantun
to tinkle, jingle.
Tagia, v., d. tine (ndine), to hoist
the sail on a canoe, tagi aki
rarua. See under miten and
tago.
Note. — The idea is that of
making the sail mount on the
canoe as a horseman mounts a
horse, or a burden mounts, or
is placed upon, the back.
Tagiegi, v. i., to be slow, dilatory.
A. 'aka, 5, to be averse, to
delay.
Tagotago, v., to be placed one
thing above or upon another,
as the stories of a house, banks
of clouds (see tagatag), genera-
tions of men ; and
Tago na, s., such a thing, or
186 [takani
things, as the story of a house,
a generation of men, leaves of
a book (which lie one upon
the other). See under miten
(and cf. tiena, tagi aki,
mitaga).
Tago fi, v. t., to beg, ask (a
person for a thing), tatago sa
beg, ask for (a thing) ; bitago,
v. r., to be asking, begging,
earnestly (from others). [Mg.
hataka.] E. tayaka (so Amh.,
T., Luke ix. 45) to ask,
tatayaka to ask earnestly.
Tagoto, s., tomahawk, axe : ta,
goto ; and
Tagote fi, v. t., to cut with an
axe.
Taguia, s., a heap (of stones) :
guru, kuru.
Tai or tae a, v. t., d. for ata ia,
or atai a, to know. H. yada'
to know.
Tai, s., excrement, filth. [Sa.
tae, My. tai, Mg. tay.] H.
Seah excrement, filth, from
yasa' to go out.
Tai na, s., d. ke sua, brother's
brother, or sister's sister.
[Fi. taci, Malo tasi, Ml. tesi,
Bauro asi, Epi tahi, Motu
tadi, My. ad-ik, Bu. anri, Mg.
zandry.] A. sinw', or Sunw',
brother, and art. ta.
Taiar, a., d. tafar ; fatu taiar, or
tafar, crumbling stone : bera,
taferafera.
Taifolo, d. tafolo.
Tairai, d. rairai.
Taka, a., such as, like, such like :
S. da'k, id. ('a'k, and d') talis ;
Takani (takan uan, takana uai,
tfec, putting any dem. after it)
like this, that, &c. ; so, in this
TAKA Nl]
187
way, La that way, thus, <kc. ;
also, interrogatively, how 1
S. da'k hana (for da'k see
preceding word), such as this,
like this. This S. word is
composed of d' (clem, or rela-
tive pron.), a', or ai (inter.),
k', as, like (ad.), and hana,
or 'na this ; without the d',
S. 'akana how 1
Taka ni, v. t., to thrust on, or
into (a thing), to thrust (a
thing), taka sila ki thrust
making to shake or fall. H.
dabah, A. dalia, &c, to thrust.
Takal ia, or tikal ia, d., v. t., to
carry ; hence
Tak'amo, or takaamo, to carry
on a stick across the shoulder:
takal and amo. S. s'kal to
carry.
Takara, s., the crowd, lit. men
(ta) gathered together (kara) :
ta, kuru, guru.
Takara, s., c. art. natakara, that
which seizes, or grasps, or lays
hold (of one), as the conse-
quence of some act, &c. See
kar ia, tagaru.
Takari, v. i., to hasten, go swiftly,
sail swiftly (as a canoe) : kari.
Takel, takelkel, v. i., or a., to be
crooked, then unrighteous, d.
tageli, tageligeli. H. 'akal,
'akalkal, A. 'akila, 5, &c, id.
Takes, d. for nakes, or nakisa :
kisa.
Tak ia, or taki a, v. t., to fasten
(as thatch on a roof, a rope on
a log, anything on anything),
and see mitakitaki ; to fasten
the tongs on an oven stone (to
lift it), bitaki a, uataki, otaki ;
and matuki trusted in, conti-
[taku xa
dent, brave ; and taki, s., a mass
of anything, as of yams grow-
ing together, as it were firmly
bound together. A. wathika
to trust in, be firm, steadfast,
confident, resolute, 4, to fasten,
to bind.
Taki, s. See under preceding
word.
Ta-ki, v. t., to incline, to pour
out (anything by inclining a
vessel) ; takitoincline(oneself ),
taki mita incline watch, taki
torogo-saki incline, hearken
to, lo taki look inclined, look
round or back, mitaki to be
inclined, lean over (as if ready
to fall) ; see si-rak, i.e., si-taki
a squall, lit. blow, incline (a
canoe, or cause it to heel over
on its side). H. sa'ah (A.
Sa"a') to incline (as a vessel
which is to be emptied) ; to be
inclined, bent, stoop.
Taku, v. i., to be after, behind,
d. nruk ; or itaku, inruk ;
Taku na, s., the back ; etaku or
itaku at the back, behind
(d. inruk), also outside (the
village), also the (time) behind,
or after (as opposite to the
time before, the past), as te
naliati etaku some day after,
as he died, sela itaku ru afa
ki nia some time after they
buried him, generally tau
itaku, naliati itaku, the years,
or days after (i.e., hereafter),
naliati itaku man the last day,
day of judgment. [Sa. tua,
Malo tura, Epi taka, Motu
dolu, the back.] A. t'ahr' the
back, E. dalir posterior part,
dahari the last, dellara after,
TAKUTAKU]
behind, daliara to be after,
behind.
Takutaku, v. i., to speak in an
unknown or foreign tongue.
A. thakthaka to speak with
foolish or senseless words.
Taku, s., brothers-in-law, sisters-
in-law, syn. tauien. A. 'aha,
5, to treat or act as a brother,
6, to be brothers and friends
to each other. E. ta'lia
agnatio, or cognatio, also
agnati who are as brothers to
each other.
Takuer, or takuwer, s., a big
man, a strong man : ta man,
and kuwer. A. kabura to be
great, of big body.
Takus ia, or takusi a, v. t., to be
like, similar to, also, with k
elided tausi a, id., and to
follow, also rausi a (t to r),
v. t., to follow, from usi a,
v. t., to follow, and also (in
rafe-kusi a) kusi a, id. See
usi a, and bausi a. A. kaSSa
to follow ; to narrate, and 5,
8, to follow ; 1, to be near,
10, to ask.
Taku ti, d. raku sa, q.v.
Talakolako, v. i., to whisper, i.e.,
to conceal what is being said
(from someone) : ta utter
speech, and lakolako.
Talekabu na, d. arekabu, q.v.
Tale is, v. t., d. tele is, to search
for. [Mg. tady.] A. dara, 2,
Nra., to rummage (vulgar), lit.
to turn over (things, in search
of something) ;
Tale, s., c. art., a belt, also a
rope, string ; and
Tale ki, v. t., to make to go
round (as a yam vine round a
188
[talemat
stake), tale is to coil round
something (as a snake), tale
ki maro (see roa) to whirl
round (as the eyes in dizzi-
ness), tale ki to twist round
one (crooked dealing, to injure),
talo round, around, taltal
round. [Mg. tady, mitady,
to twist, tady a rope, My.
tali a rope, string, bandage,
&c] A. dara to go round,
whirl, turn ; be dizzy, 2, make
round, 4, turn round, da'ro orb,
around, dairo round ; circuit,
&c.
Tale, s., c. art., the taro (so called
because round.) [Sa. talo,
My. talas, id.] See preceding
word.
Taleaba, and taltaleaba, v. i., to
whirl round (as a wheel),
taleaba ki, v. t., to make to
whirl round, to turn round
(as a grindstone) : tale and
aba.
Talebaga, s., d. syn. kalebaga,
bow-string : . tale, and baga, s.
(the tree from which the string
is made).
Talefa, s., a side region, circuit :
tale, and fa (ba) to go.
Talefan, s., the circuit of the
horizon : tale, and fan to go.
Tale-firi, a., all round (as round
an island, <fcc.) : tale, and firi
or biri.
Talle, or tal'le, v. i., to turn aside
(as from a path) ; and
Talele, id., talele ki to turn aside
or away from (a person or
thing.) See lele.
Taleuor, s., a side, circuit : tale,
and uor, or uora. See bora ia.
Talemat, s., plantation, enclosed
TALIALI
189
[tan I a
and cultivated field. Cf. H.
s'edernoth and s'eremoth id.
Taliali, v. i., to be slow, delay :
aliali. [Cf. Sa. tali, tatali.]
Talibo (see libo), to hide, be hid,
hide oneself.
Tali-si, v. t., to prize up, wrench
up (as the side of a flat stone).
See tila ia, or til ea.
Taliga na, s., c. art. nataliga na,
d. liga na, and nallga na, the
ear or ears : ta, art. [Ml. P.
ririga, Epi dd. tiline, seligo,
An. tikga, Motu taia, Sa.
taliga, Fut. tariga, My. talinga,
Mg. tadiny.] H. 'ozen, du.,
used also as pi., 'azt-naim,
'azene, S. 'adna, Ch. 'uden,
'udena, A. 'u(|n', pi. 'atfan',
and 'udun'. For the verb,
see rogo.
Tftlo, taloalo. See alo-fi.
Talo, a., round, and ad., round
about : tale.
Talokuloku ki. See taluko.
Taltal, a., round : tale.
Taltalurai, s., a sea snake covered
with round strips or bands.
Talu, or taliilu, s , a crowd, herd :
lulu.
Taluko, or taluku, and taluko-
luko ki, v., to conceal oneself
from ; atu taluko baki nia turn
away from, or conceal oneself
from : lako.
Talu&aki, v. i., to be spilt, poured
out, to pour itself out : lubaki.
Talug ia, d., and
Talum ia, d. See tulum ia.
Tarn ia, v. t., to add to, dd. tarn
ia, taum ia. A. s'amma to add.
Tama ia, d. taba ia, v. t., to
cover (as fruit, &c., covering
the ground, being abundant),
and see atarna that which
rubs, syn. ore. A. tamma to
cover with abundance (Nm.
smother, overwhelm), 2), to
scrape or shave.
Tama na. See tema na.
Tamaliam', v. i., to delay. A.
mahala, 5, to delay, and H.
mahah to delay, linger (pi'op.
to refuse, turn back).
Tamalu, v. i., to bend, rise (to
set out), to go or come forth,
set out : taba, lu.
Taiuate, v. i., to fall calm, be
calm (as the sea, the wind),
hence
Tamate, s., c. art., peace (oppo-
site to war), a calm, silence ;
also, the festivals in honour
and worship of the dead, at
which the people of different
villages assembled : mate.
Tamisal, or tamusal, s., an un-
married person : ta a person,
and misal.
Tamaras, reflexive of maras, q.v.
Tami sa, d. sabe li, q.v., to tie.
Tamo, v. i., d. na&o, to smell,
see nabo.
Tamon, s., smell, d. nafon.
Tamole, s., man : ta man, and
mole to live, living. [Fi. ta-
mata, Sa. tangata, My. orang-
idup, Mg. olombelona, id.]
Tamtam, a., dusky ; ragi tamtam
(syn. rag melu), evening, lit.
time dusky, or of dusk. A.
'atama to be evening, dusky,
'atama< dusk of evening.
Tamulu, v. i., syn. c. mulu, q.v.
Tanekabu, s., d. arekabu.
Tan ia, v. t., to earth it, to
cover with earth, then with
anything (tun ia) ;
TANU Ml] 190
Tanu mi, v. t., to cover with
earth, put into the ground ;
and
Tanu maki, id. ; hence
Tano, s., d. tan, earth of any
kind, soil, clay, ground, and
etan, ad. and prep., on the
ground, below. (Sa. tanu,
ps. tanua, and tanumia, My.
tanam, tanainkan, tanuman,
Sa. tanuma'i, tanuga, tanu-
maga.] A. tana to cover
with clay ; to cover, tino,
dialect tano, earth, clay.
Tanoabu, d. tanoafu, d. tanoau.
s., ashes, lit. earth or dust of
the fire : tano, kabu ;
Tanonon, or tanoonon, s., level
ground, d. ten : tano, and on6
reduplicated.
Tanotanoa, a., soiled with earth :
tano, and ending a.
Tanu ea, tanua, v. t., to spit,
dd. tani, taniu ; and
Tanua, d. taniu, s., c. art.,
spittle. [Sa. anu, ps. anusia,
Motu kanudi, ps. kanudia, Fi.
kanusi.] A. 'antha'a to vomit
(tha"a, 7, to come out and be
ejected from the mouth).
Tao, v. i., to fall, d. for roa
(rouo, touo).
Tao s, d., v. t., to lay down,
leave, permit, &c. A. wada'a
not used in perfect, fut. yada'o
imp. da', to lay down, leave,
permit.
Taosi, d. tausi a. See takusi a.
Taos, v. i., d. maosa, q.v.
Taoti na, s., bone, bones, weapons
made of dead men's bones.
[My. tulang, Mg. taolana.]
A. 'at'm', Mahri (m elided)
'atait (Von Maltzan), athath
[tas
(Carter), H. 'esem, pi. 'asa-
moth, id., often of bones of
the dead.
Tari a, or tar ia, v. t., to rub,
wipe (it), tari isa rub, wipe
with (it), d. tara ia rub or
scrape off (it), baka tar ia
gather. [Sa. tele.] See terafi,
karafi.
Tara, taratara. See tera to be
quick.
Tare, v. i., or a., to be pure,
clean, white, tartare whitish,
matiratira polished, bright,
shining. A. tahara, to be
clean, pure, H. taher to shine,
be bright, clean, pure.
Tare, v. i., to cry, call out (of
men) ; to call out, i.e., crow
(cock). A. saralia and Saril'
to cry, call out, sarlh' a crying
or calling out, a cock.
Tare re, v. i., to break on the
shore with noise (of breakers) :
rere.
Taroa, s., a pigeon. [My. dara.]
A. tair' id.
Taru si, or taro si, v. t., to pray
to (the natemate), tarotaro,
redup. [Sa. talalo, talotalo,
ps. talosia, Ha. kalokalo, Tah.
tarotaro.] A. sala', E. Salaya,
Ch. Sela to pray.
Taru&a, v. i., to be thrown down,
to fall ; taru&a ki, v. t., throw
down, make to fall, d. tarubik,
v. i., and
TaruOa, s., c. art., sticks thrown
on or laid across the rafters of
a house. H. ramah to cast,
to throw, S. remo', id., etremi
to cast itself or oneself. See
under eg. roa.
Tas, s., c. art., the sea. [My.
TAS IA] 191
tasik, To. tahi, 8a. tai.l A.
ta's' the sea.
Tas ia, or tasi a, v. t., to shave :
ras ia.
Tas, v. i., for ras, teres.
Tasafio, v. i. See sabo.
Tasiga, s., d. for tasila.
Tasike, v. i., to lift, raise (the
head) : saki.
Tasila, s., helper, assistant :
sila ia.
Tasmen, s., salt : tas the sea or
salt, and men or mena,
pleasant (so called because it
makes food pleasant tasted).
Tasuru ki, v. t., to conceal :
suru.
Tasuki, v. i., to bow : suki.
Tata, s., voc, maternal grand-
mother. [TaSa., Ml., tata,
father, Ml. and Malo tata
paternal uncle.] See ani na
(atene na, &c.)
Tata, redup. of ta to chop, cut.
Tatau fi, v. t., as bisa tatau fi to
speak, diverting or taking the
attention : tau.
Tata-gasi, v. t., tata same as
tatau (in preceding word)
redup. of tau, and gasi to
(wipe) stroke, smooth, flatter.
Tatalai, redup. of talai, also
tilai, titilai, v. i., to warm
oneself (at the tire). [Fi.
tatalai, Mg. mitolo (boho).]
H. dalak to burn, Hi. to heat,
Ch. delak.
Tatamares, tamares with ta-,
doubled.
Tatia or tati a, d. for rati a.
[Sa. tala, Tah. tara.]
Tatok, or atatok (or natatok, s.),
a., resident, native : ta man,
and toko.
[tau
Tatu, s. (see tui), a stake, post
(of a fence), then tatu nafanua
lord or chief of the land. A.
watada to fix, stake, make
firm, watadu stake, post, H.
yated pin, nail, then prince.
Tasilasila, v. i., to make a clear
startling sound (of men), to
crack (of thunder) : ta chop,
&C, and silasila. See sila.
Tau, tautau, v. i., or a., to be
pure, clean, white. [Ma. tea.]
A. nasa'a to be pure, white.
Tau, v. i., also mitau to be fixed,
abide, as i tau suma he abides
(in) the house, i tau nara
nakasu it is fixed or abides
(on) the branch of the tree
(as a bird or fruit), na6ona i
tau isa his heart is fixed on
(the person or thing), i tau
isa it is fixed, abides, or
(as fruit) hangs on it (the
branch) i tau ki nuana makes
to tau, as a tree makes fruit
to tau, yields (fruit), nakasu i
tau the tree yields (fruit), tau
isa to hold firmly (with the
hand), tau gi to grasp firmly
with the hand, to pluck off (as
a fruit), tau nata take hold
firmly of a person (taking him
to one's house as a guest), tau
e a ; mamitau, matau, d., an
anchor (what holds firmly),
tau ri to take hold of firmly,
or be fixed firmly to, to marry
(a woman), tau lua to attach
or be fixed firmly (to one),
bringing out one (as from
bondage, or from her rela-
tions), to redeem ; to marry ;
tau raki to attach firmly to,
as a boat to a ship to be
TAL"]
192
[taua
towed, bitauri, v. r., to be
attached firmly to each other,
to be married ; tau asa, to
measure (it), toii gi and ton
ni to measure, to weigh, and
to-naki (for tau naki) to place,
set, fix firmly, appoint, deter-
mine, establish, tau, s., a
measure, also to, toto, and (t
to r) boroaki to give commands
to one's family, to make one's
will, to commission (anyone
to do something), tau, redup.
tautau, v. t., to commission
(one to do something), hence
fitaua, c. art. na-fitaua one
commissioned, a messenger,
also a commission or message
(syn. fakaua, q.v\), also tau,
tautau to divert or amuse the
mind (of one), to fix his atten-
tion (as of a child to make
him stop crying), then to
deceive, to take up a man's
attention deceitfully conceal-
ing your real aim, belaki tau-
tau sa to lead one, diverting
his attention or soothing his
mind (with a view, when he
is off his guard, and in a
suitable place, to tomahawk
or otherwise kill him) ; bitau,
bi tautau, v. r., to invite (as
to a feast), taua a heap, also a
crowd (of men or a herd of
animals), from the things or
people being firmly compacted
together or attached to each
other ; tau a season, a year,
from tau in the sense of to
bear fruit (of a tree — see
above) ; tau to be fixed, to
abide firmly, is also used
and may be used before any
verb, like toko or to, anl, tu,
to denote continuous action as
i tau bat ia he continues
fixedly doing it. (So Fi. tau,
or dau, Sa. tau.) [Ma. tau to
light, rest, be anchored, be
suitable, &c. ; Sa. tau fixed,
to fit in, be anchored, pluck
fruit with the hand, buy (see
tau lua), taula'i to anchor
with, hang up with, hang on
to (tau-raki), taula an anchor;
Fi. tau-ra take hold of, seize,
tau-vata equal (tau, or to,
equal), Ma. taua army, Tah.
taura a herd or flock, also a
rope, Sa. tau a season, a year,
Mg. taona a year, season, also
gathered, collected (cf. taua) ;
also enticed, allured, attracted
(tau, tautau), mitaona to
gather in, collect, entice, draw,
My. taun a season, year.]
H. sawah to set up, place
(S. So'), Pi. sivah (A. waSSa',
see boroaki) to constitute,
appoint, to decree, to charge,
to command, to commission
(delegate anyone with com-
mands), to give last commands
to one's family, to make one's
will (Rabb. sava'ah a will),
eg. s'awah to be even, level ;
equal in value, equivalent, be
fit, suitable, be like, resemble,
Pi. to make level, then to
compose, calm the mind ; to
put, set, s'ivah peri to yield
fruit (frucht ansetzen) ; fol-
lowed by ace. and k', to make
one like anything. Hi. to
liken, compare (to-naki, infra).
Taua, s., a heap, a crowd, a
herd : preceding word.
'■• -"■]
Tau, tautau, v. t., to commission.
[Fi. tatau-naka, id., My. titah,
to command, order, decree
(to-naki, infra.)] See tau.
Tail ni, or tao ni, v. t., to cook,
to bake (in the oven). [Sa.
tao, ps. taoa, taoina ; taona'i
to bake food the day before
giving it j To., Ma., tao.] A.
taha, n. a. tahw', to cook.
Hence
Tao, s., c. art., leaves for cooking
which are put into the oven
along with the food to be
cooked. [To. tau the cooking
leaves, Tah. tao leaves and
stones put into the inside of a
pig to be cooked.]
Taueru isa, v. t., to haul, drag,
tau place, fix, and eru, i.e. aru,
the hand, lit. fix the hand on
(to drag) as to drag a man to
punishment.
Taul a, v. t., to twist, wring (as
to wring clothes after washing
them), to milk (as a goat)
squeeze, or wring (the milk
out). A. tawa' (E. tawiy, H.
tawah) to wring, twist.
Taulen, or towien, s., a sister's
husband, a wife's brother, that
is, brother-in-law ; but, d., a
general name for reliable
friend, brother, or sister, and
in another d. the word is
applied to father-in-law and
son-in-law. [Fut. safe, Aniwa
nosafe, Ta yafuni, d., c. art.
nevun.] A. safiyy' a friend
of a pure and sincere mind, i.e.,
a real friend, safa', 3, to be of
sincere and pure affection
(towards someone), 4, to show
sincere love, 6, to live in
193 [tai so
mutual sincerity of friend-
ship.
Taubora, s., an ornament that
hangs or is fixed on the side
of the head : tau, bora.
Taulalo, v. or s., to hang, or In-
fixed or what hangs or is fixed
in front of the belly, nasieg i
taulalo : tau, lalo.
Taunako, s., a thing (like the
peak of a cap) worn or fixed
over the forehead. [Cf. syn.
Sa. taumata] : tau, and nako.
Taumako, s., the wild (edible)
yam that grows on the hills :
tau, and mako for which see
aka, ako.
Taumafa, d. taumofa, v. i., to
give an offering (to the nate-
mate), taumafa sa give an
offering of or with it (some-
thing), taumafa ki nia offer
it (something), taumafa tua i
make an offering, giving to
him (a natemate). [Ml. P.
tomav, Ha. kaumaha to offer
in sacrifice, to offer a gift upon
an altar, s., a sacrifice, Tah.
taumaha a portion of food
offered to the gods or spirits of
the dead.] Tau (to place) and
mafa, or mofa (q.v.), a gift or
offering. A. ma'haba^ a gift
H. habhabim (Hos. viii. 13)
offerings (to God), A. wahaba,
H. yahab, to give.
Taumi a. See tami a.
Tauruuru, v. i., to grumble, mur-
mur, mutter : ta, and uruuru.
Tausi a, v. t. See takusi a.
Tauso, or tausoa, v. i., to com-
mit adultery or fornication (of
either sex) : tau, and so, or
soa. [Fi. dauca.]
14
tk]
Te, dera., rel. pron., conj., us
agute mine this, ana te his
this or that ; te uia what (is)
good, that which is good, or he
or she who is good, te sa that
which is bad. or he or she who
is bad ; in this sense d. tea, as
tea uia, tea sa ; te nata what,
or whatever person, any per-
son, someone ; te, redup. tete,
may be used substantively, as
te ru ban, or tete ru ban, some
went ; te dem. is found in fite
(nafite, sefete, what this, that,
or it? or simply, what?) also
in matuna, banotu, binote ;
with art. nete, s., the that,
anything, something, and d.
with dem. ka prefixed nakate,
id. ; te is also found with ka,
dem. prefixed in one d. as a
tense particle (see kate, tense
particle, supra) ; te, or t', is
also used as a conj. and before
the verbal pron. of the 1st
person sing., a, and of the 3rd
sing., i or e, loses its vowel, as
ta ban that I go, or be gone,
te ban that he has gone, or
because he has gone. In one
dialect for i kate, ku kate, a
kate ban, he, you, I went,
there is ka te ban, ku te ban,
ki te ban, I went, you went,
he went, in which the verbal
pronouns are suffixed to the k.
A. (la, dem., du, rel., S. d', Ch.
di, rel. and conj., that, because.
Tea. See te.
Teba,, or ta&a, v. i., to dry up
(of liquid or moisture), to be-
come dry ; and mun te6a ki
to drink, making itdry (liquid).
E. nasepa to become dry (as
194 [tefa i: a
a river) ; to dry up (as a
spring), nesup dry, dried up.
Teel, s., shellfish, etc., got on the
reef, lit. te el', that which is
pleasant, sweet, or tasty : te,
elo.
Tefa, tetefa, v. i., to draw up in
order of battle ; and
Tefa ki, v. t., to put in a series,
to range (troops, in order of
battle) ; bitefa range them-
selves in order of battle, face
to face ; tefa gi, d. tefa ni,
v. t., to put things in a series,
either one before or one
above another ; rogo tefa sa
hear paying no attention, dis-
obeying, lit. hear putting
down, d. syn. rogo tao sa (see
tao). [Fi. tuva, v. i., tuva,
v. t., to place in regular order,
to range in close compact, or
place one upon another, tuvai
nai valu, tuvai valu to put in
the attitude of war, put in
battle array, tuva na lawa ni
valu arrange or put in ranks
the lawa ni valu.] A. safia,
1, 2, 6, 8, to set or place in
order in a series ; to arrange
the line of battle, draw up in
order of battle ; Nm. to
arrange (troops), 2, id., to
range themselves mutually
face to face.
Tef ia, or tefi a, redup. teteti,
v. t., to cut ; tefi, to circum-
cise. [Fi. teve, tava, Sa. tefe,
To. tefe, Sa., To. tafa.] A.
'as'aba to cut.
Tefarafara, v. i., to break (of
the sea) ; and
Tefara, s., c. art., breakers :
tafera, taferafera.
tefarere]
Tefarere (i.e., tefarrere), v. i., to
break rushing u|> on the shore
(of the breakers) : tefarafara,
tefara, and re re.
Tei, s., c. art. intei, a reddish
powder made from a plant,
turmeric : bitei a.
Tei. See rei.
Telake na, d. telakea na, s., c.
art. a, lord, owner, possessor :
lake.
Telatela, v. i., or a., to be large,
wide ; and
Telatelana, id., c. ending -na, and
see matulu, matultul, matoltol,
swollen, large. [Epi toru
large, Sa. tetele, telatela,
latele, vatele, Ma. tetere, large,
swollen.] H. 'adir large, great,
'adar to be wide, A. 'adira
to have hernia (to swell
out).
Tele, v. t. See tale is, to search
for.
Teluko. See taluko.
Telei, or talai, s., the ancient
axe, or adze-like axe (a shell).
[Sa. talai to adze, Ma., Tah.
tarai chop with an adze, Ha.
kalai to chop, hew, pare,
carve.] A. s'aralia to cut,
slice, carve, dissect.
Tenia na, or tama na, s., father :
t', art., and a ma for afa, as
mama for abab (q.v.) [Sa.
tama, My. rama, id.]
Tema6alu, s., brothers, lit. te
(he who) ma (with) bain
(brother) : bsdu ; and
Temabalu ta, for temabalu ra,
who (or those who) with their
brother, i.e., brothers. So
tema in the following words
is lit. he or she who or those
105 [tematua ta
who, or that (person) or those
(persons) with.
Teuiabau ra, s., d., uncle and
nephew : bau.
Tema&ele ta, s., mother and
child : bele na.
Temagore ta, s., brother and
sister : gore na ; d. mera gore
na. (See mera).
Teinaloa ta, s., d. syn. temabau
ra : aloa na.
Temamo ta, s., mother-in-law
and son-in-law : mo na.
Tematrafa, for temarafa, s.,
father and child, lit. that (i.e.,
the child) with the father.
See afa.
Tematema ta, s., father and
child : tema na.
Temataku ta, s., a man and his
brother-in-law (his wife's gore
na) : taku na.
Temarataulen, s., i.e., te mara
taulen that with (his) taulen,
d. syn. temataku ta : taulen.
Temarauota, s., i.e., te mara
uota, that with (her) uota
(husband), wife and husband :
uota, d. me nimariki.
Temasere, s., a beloved one,
especially a child much cared
for ; te that, masere loved,
cared for. See also sere a,
bakasere a.
Tematete ta, s., maternal grand-
mother, and her grandchild :
tena na.
Tematia ta, s., paternal grand-
father (ifec.)and his grandchild :
tia na.
Tematobu ta, s., maternal grand-
father and his grandchild :
tobu na
Tematua ta, s., paternal grand-
TTE
na]
mother and lier grandchild :
tua na.
T'te na, s., juice : toto.
Ten, d. for tanonon.
Tena na, s. See atena na ; d.
atia, or tia na.
Ter, v. i., to be slow, tardy. A.
ah'll'ara, 5, to be slow, tardy.
Tera sa, v. t., be ignorant of,
forget, not to know (it), d.
rera, d. tenr. A. s'alla to not
know, be ignorant of ; forget.
Tera, v. i., to shine (of the sun),
tera ia, v. t., shine upon it (of
the sun). [My. tarang, tarang
kan, Fi. cila, Malo sarasara.]
H. sahar (cf. zahar, etc.) to
shine.
Tera ia, tetera ia, v. t., to go
after, to do anything after (or
in the track of) another, baka-
tera ia to answer (make one's
word to go after another's),
ba, and sela tera ia go after,
gua tera ia shout after, bisa
tera ia speak after ; also to
rehearse, recount, tera usi to
recount following, tera uti na
to go after following. [My.
turut follow, go after.] A.
'athar' track, 'athara, 4, make
something follow another, 5,
8, follow the track of someone,
go after, 1, recount, rehearse.
Tera, v. L, to be quick, swift,
tera ki mala wheel, swoop,
shoot, or glide swiftly like a
a hawk, tera gulu ti swoop
(upon one) clasping (him, as
in war), tera tukituki run
rapidly beating the ground
with one's feet, tera belbel to
be exceedingly swift or quick,
tera mau to be quick indeed
196 [tere
or truly, to be instant, do
instantly, tera bile to be very
quick, teratera, redup. ; tera
lo saki to turn quickly, looking
up, tera tafeo (d.) to turn
quickly bending the head
down. [Ma. tere, Sa. tele-
tele.] A. darra, 10), to run
vehemently, or swiftly, 4, to
turn or whirl a spindle very
swiftly, H. darar (also) to fly
in a circle, wheel in flight ;
and like A. darra to spout, to
pour out (as rain, &e.) Hence
Ter ea, v. t., to pour into ; and
Tera, s., c. art., a pouring out ;
natera ni us, a rain squall, an
outpouring of rain.
Tera, a., having (lit. that has)
branches, as tera rua, tolu,
&c, having two, three, &c,
branches (of a tree) : te, and
ra.
Terafi, v. t., to scratch (as the
ground) : cf. H. sarab, and see
tari a, tara ia ; d. syn. garafi,
or karafi. See kar ia.
Teragi, v. t., in kabu teragi, to
heat cooked food over again
teragi is for reragi, as in bau-
ragi a, bau-terag ia (see bau
sia, baraga i, raga-elo).
Teratera, v. i., to be delirious,
insane ; A. hatara, 1, 4, to
make, or to be delirious, in-
sane ; also torotoro.
Tere, teretere (a, ra), v. t., to
feast, to entertain (especially
visitors at a festival), also to
make a feast or banquet for a
friend who visits one. The
radical idea lies in that of
gathering folks together for a
festival, or enclosing them as
tbeatab] 197
it were in one's house and
hospitality. H. 'agarah an
assembly of people for keeping
a festival, 'asar (primary idea
is that of surrounding, enclos-
ing), Ni., 3), to be gathered
together, especially for a festi-
val, A. a'aslr breakfast and
dinner, or supper.
Teratar, v. i., to stagger, totter
(as a man drunk). A. tartara
to stagger (as a man drunk ).
Tere, s., c. art., the mast (of a
canoe or ship), calf (column)
of the leg. A. sariya/,, Nm.
Sari, the mast (of a ship), a
column.
Tere, s., and teretere, s., the
comb (of a cock) ; the eaves of
a house. [Sa. tala, Tah., Ma.
tara, Ha. kala.] Nm. torra
crest, comb of bird, A. torra<
extremity, side of anything,
forelock, pointed, from tarra
to cut, to sharpen, to snatch,
to shoot (as plants), to propel
vehemently, irritate, stir up.
Terei a, v. t., for rerei a, for
roroia : rei a.
Trea ki, for rea ki.
Trei a, for toitoi a.
Terina, s., enclosure. H. tur
fence, enclosure.
Teres, for reres : res.
Tere ti, v., used as ad., as boka
tere ti to smite or strike hastily
(and therefore ineffectively,
confusedly), syn. sarah' and
sumati, and bile, or bilebile :
tera to be quick.
Tete, s., voc, mother. See
under ani na.
Tete, and tetea. See te.
Ti, and d. tsi, neg. ad., not : d.
ta. [Sa. le, Ma. te, Kut. si,
My. ta, Mg. toy.] _
Ti, v. t., to say ; ti ki nia say to
him, tell him, ti ki nia sa tell
him it : dd. ni, noa, nofa, q.v.
Ti, s., chief, as ti Tongoa chief of
Tongoa : for tui, q.v.
Ti a, and rl a, v. t., to push,
thrust, propel, or drive. A.
<laya to propel, thrust.
T'tie na, or t'tia na, s., saliva,
water of the mouth, nat'tia na
i sera sa his mouth waters
because of it, lit. the water
(of his mouth) runs at it :
titia.
Tia na, or tie na, s. See atia na.
Tiamia, v. i. or a., to be first, d.
liea or tobea (for toko bea) :
tia to abide or be, and mia, d.
bea, q.v. [Oba tomua, Sa.
mua and tomua.]
Tiele, v. i., to finish a laugh with
shrill cries, in a whinnying
manner (of women). H. sahal
to utter shrill cries ; to neigh
(of a horse), A. sahala, n. a.
Sahil', to whinny.
Tiena, v. i., to be with child.
See miten. S. t'yina laden,
gravid.
Tiba, neg. ad., not. See d. tab :
ti ad., and ba for ma, as in
Assy, aama not.
Tib ea, or tuba ia, v. t., to shoot
with an arrow ;
Tiba, or tuba, s., c. art., au
arrow, i.e., what is cast : tuba.
[Mg. tsipika.] E. nadafa, (2)
to shoot with an arrow, (1) to
strike, (3) to prick, H. nadaf
to drive away. The radical
idea is thrusting, pushing.
Tiba, s., the post in a house that
TIBI Li]
198
[tiko
supports the ridge-pole : so
called because i tuba ia. See
tuba, which is the same as
tiba.
Tibi li, v. t., to burn, to sear.
A. s'ahaba to roast, to broil.
Tifai, s., thunder ; ti art., and
fai. [8a. fai-tilitili, Fila te-
fachiri, Aniwa tefachiri.l A.
balih'(used of thunder) hoarse,
cf. Sa. fa hoarse.
Tibu (pronounced timbu), d.,
s., c. art. natimbu, the deep
(sea) : bua.
Tikal ia. See takal ia.
Tigi na, or tiki na, s., side,
edge ;
Tigi elo, v., to bask in the sun,
warm oneself in the sun. A.
Salia to bask or warm oneself
in the sun, s'a]|iya< side, out-
side or edge. Hence
Tigi (side) in malitigi, malirigi,
&c, place at the side, that is,
beside, near ; and
Tigitigi na, s., d., edge (outside
or exposed edge or side of a
thing), and
Tiki na, and
Tikitiki na, id. ; and
Tiki nra nin, d., this point (of
time), now.
Tika, a strong negative, it is
not, no, by no means ;
Tiki (or tika), neg. ad., not ; i
tiki ban he did not go ; and
Tika, and tiki, the same, used,
with the verb, pron., as a
verb, to be not, to exist not,
dd. tsika, nika. rika, tika :
neg. ad. ti, and ka. It is
thus construed : i tika sa it is
not in it or him, or he has it
not, i tika ki nia it is not to
or in him, or he has it not,
thus namuruen i tika ki nia
there is no laughing in him,
i tika ki namuruen he has not
laughing. See also under hi
enia, supra. For ti see ti,
ad., supra ; ka is to be com
pared with the E. ko in 'eko
not, ko being a contraction of
kona (A. kana) to be, and
tika with the Talmudic and
Mandaische lika not, is not
(Noldeke, Mand. Grammatik).
[Fut. jikai, My. tak, Mg. tsia,
and cliahoe, To. ikai, Sa. i'ai,
no, not, not so.]
Tiki-amo, d. takamo, q.v.
Tiki, v. i., to be soft (of the
skin), syn. busa, as nauili na i
tiki, or i busa, his skin is soft
(his skin is bad, or has an un-
comfortable feeling, as on
hearing some dreadful story,
or witnessing some fearful
thing). See busa. A. 'atilta,
b), 3), to become soft and
tender (of the skin).
Tiki na, and triki na, s., for riki
na.
Tiko, s., a staff, a walking stick,
a pole by which a canoe is
poled forward in shallow
water. [Sa. to'o a canoe
pole, a stick in which is fixed
the perch of a pigeon, to'o-
na'i to lean on a staff, to lean
on anything for support, too-
too a staff, walking stick,
toto'o to lean upon a staff,
To. toko a post used to make
fast canoes to, tokotoko a
staff, My. takan, Mg. tehina,
a staff, mitehina to walk with
a staff, to walk leaning on a
TIKO KlJ 199
person.] A. toka'a£ a staff, a
support, he who leans much
on his side, and props himself
up. Hence, Nm., taka, 8,
itteci to lean upon. Hence
Tiko ki, v. t., to pole (a canoe).
This is done by leaning upon
the tiko, and so throwing
one's weight upon it.
Tila ia, d. til e a (and ta lisi)
v. t., to wrench, prize (with a
lever), to struggle, wriggle,
wrestle (as through a narrow
place) ; tila ki, v. t., to wrench,
sprain, twist (as one's foot by
stepping into a hole) ; tilatila,
v. t., wrench up with a lever
roots and rocks in making a
hole in which to plant a yam ;
hence
Tila, s., a lever, crowbar. [Mg.
tolona, mitolona, to struggle
together, to wrestle.] A.
'atala to violently drag and
wrench away, 3, to wrestle
with, atala/, Nm. 'atela, crow-
bar, lever, hod.
Tila ia, tila, d. for lita ia : lita.
Tili-mar, v. i., d. for lele maroa,
to revolve or roll turning
round : lele, maroa.
Tilasi a, and redup. tilatilasi a :
lasi a.
Tilai, titilai. See talai, tatalai.
Tili a, v. t., to tell, relate (a
thing). [Sa. tala, v. and s.,
tell, relate, tale, narration,
tala'i, talatala'i, To. tala.]
A. tala', to follow, to relate (a
narrative), read, recite.
Tinom ia, d. for tulum ia.
Tiragi (tira gi), v., to look at (as
at a spectacle). A. Sara, c.
ali, to look at.
[titiro
Tira sa, d. rira sa. See tera sa.
Tiri, v. i., to fly (of birds), d.
riri ; also to fly into a rage, to
be transported with rage,
flying and jumping about
excitedly ; i tiri, syn. i miti,
as i tiri bas ia, or i mitiias ia,
he (transported with rage)
Hies snatching him (the object
of his passion, as if to tear
out his eyes). Hence riri a
spark, and mitiri a grass-
hopper (from leaping and
flying), and taroa a pigeon).
[Sa. lele, Ma. rere.] A. tara
to fly ; to be swift, move
quick.
Tirigi, for ririgi, rigi.
Tirikit, v. i., to begin to drop or
sputter (of rain). [Fi. tiri to
drop.] For tiri see tuturu,
and for kit, kita small, little.
Tiro, v. i., to sink, roll down (as
in the sea, or down a precipice,
or into a pit) ; hence
Tiroa, s., c. art., a precipice, or
deep, steep place. [Fi. tiro,
siro, sisiro, My. turun, turun-
kan.] H. Salal, gul, to be
rolled down, sink (as in the
sea), mesolah and me.sulah
depths (of the sea, a river,
clay). See mitaru, toroaki ;
also
Tiro e, cl., v. t., to swallow, send
down, make to sink down
(into the stomach) ; and
Tiro aki, v. t., make to sink
down (as an anchor,) to anchor,
d. toro aki, tirotiro, redup.
Titiro, v. i., to gaze into the sea
looking for fish or shellfish ;
to look at one's image in
[Fi.
TISO]
tiro, tiro-va, to look at oneself
in the water, peep at, Sa.
tilotilo, ps. tilofia, to peep, spy,
Ma. tiro, tirotiro, titiro, look,
gaze, Ha. kilo to look hard,
earnestly, to star-gaze, prog-
nosticate, act as a sorcerer.]
A. nat'ara to gaze, look for,
consider, spy, to prognosticate,
divine.
Tiso, v. i., to exude, d. lisoa, tise
a exude on to (a thing) : toto.
Titi, v., to tread, titia ki nakasu
tread on a log (as on a log
thrown across a stream). [My.
titi.] A. watiya to tread.
Titia, v. i., to slaver, dribble (as
an infant), to have saliva
flowing, to have the mouth
watering, nat'tia na saliva,
water of the mouth. [Mg.
rora saliva.] H. rir saliva, A.
rala to slaver, dribble (of an
infant), riyal' saliva, cf. My.
liyor slaver, dribble.
Tiii sa, d., v. t., to sink, dip,
matiu, v. i., to sink, d. ledup.
tutu, d. lulu, v. i., to sink, d. ;
riu sa, v. t., to point out with
the linger, d. tuma ia, v. t., to
point out with the finger, d.
tiu sa, til sa, d. tu nia, or riu
sa, or ru sa, or redup. tiu tiu
sa, tutu sa, riuriu sa, or ruru
sa, v. t., to smear, tinge,
colour, or paint nafona (native
cloth). See also lolofa, lum,
Iuma, lulum. [Ma. totohu to
sink, tuhu mark, sign, toi
finger, also toe, Tah. tohu
to point at with the finger,
make a sign, To. tuhu, v.,
to point with the finger, s.,
the forefinger, Sa. tusi to
200 [toitoi a
mark (native cloth), to
write, to point out, tusitusi
striped, Fi. luvu to sink, Mg.
tsoboka soaked, drenched,
dipped, My. tud-ing to point
at with the finger, to indicate.
See also under lolofa, luma.]
H. taba' to sink (eg. Saba', A.
Saba'a to dip into, immerse,
E. tam'a, id.), to be dipped,
plunged, H. Saba' to dip in,
immerse, to dye, tinge, seba'
something dyed, a versicoloured
garment, Ch. (see lolofa) soba',
A. saba'a to point out or at
with the finger, 'asbi', 'asbu',
&c., the finger, H. 'asba'
finger, also toe, A. saba"a to
dye or colour (cloth), to make
a sign, indicate.
To, v. i., contr. for toko, or tok,
dd. ti, te, to rest, sit down,
dwell, remain, be. [Malo ate,
Ml. d. at, Mg. toetra, toatra,
toitra.] See toko.
To, redup. toto, d. touo, d. tau,
s., a measure, equal. [Fi. rau.]
And
To-naki, v. t., to compare ; to
place, fix; to appoint, deter-
mine, establish. See tau.
To (and see tofi a), v. t., to push,
press upon. A. da"a to push,
propel.
Toa (towa), or to', s., a (domestic)
fowl, also a bird ( = manu). [Fi.
toa, My. ayam, Ceram dd. tofi,
towim, Bouru dd.tehui, teput,
teputi, Cocos Island ufa, bird,
Tag. Ibon.] H. 'of bird (gen.
name), A. 'a'f gallus. Note
toa (towa) has t' art.
Troa i. See roa i.
Toitoi a, v. t., also teitei a (and
TOUO]
201
[toko-naki
trei a), to bate. A. -ada', 2),
n. a. 'adw', b), 'adiya, to hate.
Touo, d. for roua. See roa.
Tob, d., v. i., or a., to be large,
great. [Episombi, Mg. dobe.]
A. 'at'oma to be great.
Tob, s., c. art. natob, spittle.
H. tof, E. tafe' to spit.
Tobag ia. See tabag ia.
Tobaroba. See rabaraba.
Toiet, s., rubbish heap. Of. H.
tofet spittle. See tob.
Tobu, s., a tumour, swelling.
See tubu.
Tobu na, s., grandfather. See
bobu, bua. [Malo tubu, Ta.
tupu, Epi kumbuo, Ml. P. apu,
Fi. bu, Fut. bua, grandfather
or grandmother, prop, ances-
tor.] H. 'ab (rather), pi.
'aboth, A. pi. 'abau, ab'u (and
'abuna) ancestors.
Tobua, s., d., a natemate, spirit,
familiar spirit, demon. [Fut.
tupua, Ma. tupua, cf. Sa.
tupua.] See suie (where see
Sa. tupua).
Tobu, d. nobu, q.v.
Tofena, s., native cloth, clothing.
[To. tapa, Ha. kapa, Sa. siapo.]
Nm. thiyab clothes, dress ;
sole essential article of Arab
dress, A. tha'b', pi. thiyab'.
And hence
Tofe, v. i., d., to put on the
tofe, to dress.
Tofi a, v. t., to push. A. da'aba
to push.
Toga, d. rog, d. taga, s., a basket.
H. tene', id.
Toga, s., far away, also natoga
a distant place or country.
H. raliok, S. rullka, E. rehuk
far off, away.
Togo ia, d. toko ia, v. t , to push,
thrust, and see bakatoko ia.
H. dallak, A. dahaka to push,
thrust.
Troga, for toga, basket.
Trogo, d. nrogo, for rogo, to
hear.
Toki a, tokitoki a, v. t., to
gather up one's things, or pack
up, preparatory to flitting.
See raku, taku ti. [Cf. Fi.
toki a.]
Toko, d. tok, v. i., to rest, sit
down, dwell, remain, be, contr.
to, q.v., sometimes pronounced
tuk. [My. and Ja. duduk,
dodok, Mg. toatra (see to), Fi.
tiko, toka.] H. takah, Pu.
tukah (Deut. xxxiii. 3), A.
waka'a, 8, 'ttaka'a, cf. 5, to
sit (Luke xiv. 8), to remain.
Hence
Tokon, s., c. art., a village, re-
maining or dwelling place.
Tokei, or tokai, s., c. art., a
prop, or rafter (which reaches
from the ground to the ridge-
pole in an Efatese house) ;
then natokai nafanua the
prop, i.e., chief, of the land.
A. 'atka'a to prop up.
Tokora, s., a place. [Mota togara
behaviour, togava a station.]
See toko.
Toki, s., an axe ; and
Tok, s., violence, force. A.
takka to cut, H. tok violence.
Tokalau, s., easterly wind : tok
remain, alau on the sea.
Toko ia. See togo ia.
Toko-naki, v. t., to strike on (as
one's foot on a stone, the wind
on a mountain). [Ma. tu-
tuki, To. tugia.] See tuki a.
TOKOTOKO NA]
202
[torotoro
Tokotoko na, s., a shark's fin :
toko ia.
Toko ni, v. t., to kindle, set fire
to, redup. tokotoko. A. daka'
to kindle.
Tol, s., violence, force. See tila
to wrench.
Tola, v. i., to be early dawn :
toa i tola the cock crows, lit.
crows at early dawn ;
Tola, s., the dim early dawn ;
the dim distance in the sky ;
and
Tolarola, id., redup. ; and, d. to-
lau, id. Hence matol, d. to-
morrow. H. s'allar, A.
Sahara, to be far remote,
saliira, to do, or to set out at
early dawn, 8, the cock crew
at early dawn, H. mis'liar the
morning.
Toli a, v. t., to surpass, to go
past, before, bitoli, v. r., d.
bilele ; to pass or go before
each other, d. toliu .sa. See
liu, and to.
Tole na, s., c. art., egg (of a
bird), d. atol mita na eye-
ball. [My. talor, Mg. atody,
Oba toligi, Sulu iking, Nias
ajuloh, Poggi agoloh.] Mahri
chali, Amh. 'an]\uilal : the
radical meaning is round.
TrOm, or torn, s., turmeric, a
reddish curry powder. [Fi.
damudamu red, Mg. tamo tamo
turmeric, tomamotamo yellow,
of an orange, saffron colour.]
A. 'adomatobe red, H. 'adam-
dom reddish.
Tdnako, for taunako.
Tontono sa, v. i., to be perplexed,
in pain or distress on account
of (something) : tunu.
Tomo na, s., tumu na.
Tomotomoa, v. i., tumutumua.
Toro, v. i., to leak (as a canoe).
A. ta''ara to boil, emit water
(as clouds), to leak (as a vein
or vessel).
Toro, v. t., to lay down, abandon,
let down, permit, tor ea lay it
down, &c.
Torn sa, lit. lays down qr aban-
dons on account of it, i.e.,
gives up his old mind or
opinion in consequence of the
evil it has brought upon him,
rues ; toro bisi a, also dd. turn
bisi, and taru bisi, lay down
leaving (a thing), permit, &c. ;
tor ea put into (as liquid into
a vessel), totor ea, id., syn.
tutua ki ;
Toroa, v. i., to be rich, toro (lay
down, store up, and a. ending
a) : matoro-toro, let down,
slackened, slack (as a rope),
A. wadara (not used in per-
fect), fut. yadaro, imperative
dar, to lay down, leave, permit.
Toro aki, for tiro aki.
Torotoro, for teratera.
Toro na, s., his impulse, onset,
power, might. [Ma. tara
courage, mettle.] This same
word occurs as tere na (comb
of cock, Ac), where see the
verb. A.tarra to propel vehem-
ently, &c, Nm. tarr free will,
arbitrary power ;
Torotoro na, id., redup.
Tore, or tere (natuone), s., the
leg below the knee. See tere
mast (of ship), column.
Torotoro, v. i., to be hot, to
sweat. A. $ala' to be hot.
Hence
TOKUTORU
203
[tua NA
for
Torutoru, id., and
Toru, s., sweat.
Tos, d., v. i., to creep, d
rosa.
Trot ia. See rot ia.
Totau, dd. tatau, titan, titu, s.,
a child, infant. [Mg. zaza.]
E. ga's'ae, H. se'SSa'em off-
spring.
Trotro, v., to think ; and
Trotro na, s., thought, mind.
See mitroa.
Toto, dd. tiso, lisoa, v. i., to
exude (as gum, juice, from
plants). [Fi. titi, titi-va, My.
titik, Mg. niitete, mitate, tete-
vana.] A. nas's'a, n. a. nas'Is',
to exude. Hence
Toto, s., a plant abounding in
a milky juice, and its juice,
Totofa, d., v. i., to swell :
tubu, q.v.
Toii gi, d. toii ni, v. t.,
measure, to weigh. See tau,
d. tau asa, to measure.
Tu, dem., in banotu, matuna.
Tu, verb, prom, 1 pi., inch, dual
ta. See nigita, ninita.
Tu, v. i., to stand, dd. tsu, ru,
and see su ; also to abide,
dwell, be ; tu lena stand up
straight, used also of rising up,
to rise up ; tu-ri a (ri t. prep.)
also, occurs, to stand, or abide
to (or with) a person, and tu-
raki, to stand or abide for (a
person or thing). [Fi. tu,
tu-ra, turaga, TaSa. turu, Ml.
P. tu, tutu (= My. diri), Sa.
tu, tutu, faatu, tula 'i, tulaga,
.Ma. tu, tutu, turanga, Ha.
ku (1, rise up, 2, to stand),
My. diri, Mg. joro.] H. nasa',
so', s'et, imp. sa', cf. Hithp.,
d.
to
E. nasa'a, A. nas'a'. See su,
supra.
Note. — This word also oc-
curs as matu, batu, fatu ; and,
like toko, matoko, and also
am, it is put after demonstra-
tives, as uane tu, uane matu,
nin batu, nistu, etc., lit. this
or that standing or being
(there or here).
Tu na, s., bones (of fish), and
Tutu, a., bony. [Fi. sui, d. dua r
1 >one, suisuia, lean, bare of flesh,
bony, rough, sharp.] Cf. A.
s'a'a, 4, to become spiky, to-
be rayed.
Tua, v. t., to place, put down ;.
also to give, tua i give him ;
tua ki place, put down ; used
also of liquids, tua ki nia las
put or place it in the vessel
(cf. tor ea), make it to fall
into the vessel, redup. tutua
ki, bitua ki nia, or bitua sa,
to put down, also to give (a
thing) ; with some verbs it is
like " from " as ba tua ki nia
go or come from, lit. go or
come leaving, or putting it
down, or placing it, hence
ba bituaki to halt between
two opinions (in which
the reflexive force of bitua,
v. r., comes out), ba bituaki
lit,, being to go leaving it over
and over again. A. was'a'a
to place, lay, or put down.
Tu sa (see tiu sa), d. tu nia, to
tinge, mark, colour native
cloth, hence (c. ending a) tuni-
tunia striped, marked.
Tua na, s., name of various rela-
tives, as brother's wife,
husband's mother, paternal.
TUAl]
204
[tubara
grandmother, and her grand-
children, husband's sister.
See under the following word.
[Ml. U. tuan elder brother,
My. mantuwah father-in-law
or mother-in-law.]
Tuai, or tuei, a., old, ancient, and
ad. long ago, also a long time
hereafter. See bakatuai to
make long (of time), matua
old, mature, &c. [Sa. tuai, faa-
tuai, matua, My. tuwah,
Ja. tuwa, bartuwah, batuwah,
mantuwah, Bu. matua, Mg.
antitra, anti (panahy), anto
(andro), matoa, matotra.] A.
'adiyy' old, ancient (has the a.
ending), and a'd' from 'ada to
confer a benefit on one, to
favour, &c. (see preceding
word), mo'id' powerful, ex-
perienced, accustomed. See
matua.
Tuasil, s., giver of help :' tua
place, give, sila.
Tua, d. tue, s., c. art., twins :
rua.
Tua, v. i., to go, redup. tutua.
Hence
Tua na, or tuo na, s., legs, feet.
[An. thuo, Ta. su, legs.] H.
s'uk to run, whence s'ok, Ch.
s'ak, A. sak', pi. suk', the legs.
Tui, pronounced also ti, s., as
tui Tongoa chief of Tongoa.
[Fi. tui.] A. waddu, for
watadu. See tatu, supra.
Tuuti a, v. t., to tie ; hence
Tuut, s., a knot. [Tah. toti,
My. tambat.] E. s'abata,
Arm. sSbat and sewat, id.
Tubu, or tub, d. totofa, or totoba,
v. i., to swell. [Oba tutumbu,
Ml. timb.] Arm. seba, H.
sabah to swell, sabeh a swell-
ing. See tobu, supra. This
word also means to will, as
Arm. seba to will, to wish,
properly to be inclined, prone,
so H. sabah ; hence in Efatese
(cf. S., John iii. 27 and 8)
tuma, d. tumbu (ndumbu),
with the nom. suf. denotes
will, sua sponte, as i tuma-na
he of his own will or accord,
as " Who told him to do
this " 1 i tumana bat ia " He of
his own will or accord did it."
Tuba ia (see tiba ia, tibea, which
is the same word), to thrust,
impel, hence tuba ki to send,
and natuba, s., an arrow,
also a prick, sting, or thorn ;
tuba gote ti (to thrust break-
ing) to condemn, or adjudge
to die, tuba gori (thrust over or
in front of) to forbid, tuba gasi
(thrust wiping) to wipe, and
redup., tubatuba ia, to impel,
propel, send off : from the idea
of thrusting comes that of
reaching to, touching, hence
bitub, bitubetuba, v. r., to be
touching (thrusting, lit.) each
other, i.e., throughout, wholly,
continually, as tale tiri bitub
all round wholly, tafisatisa
bitubetuba pray continually
(one prayer touching an-
other as in a series), and
i mate tuba nasefa 1 he died
on account of what? lit.
touching what; ru tumaratuba
ra they touch each other (as of
any two things, also of one
thing done in retaliation for
another). See tiba ia.
Tubara. See tabara.
tobatua] 205
Tubatua, v. i., to kneel, lit. to
stand on the knees : tu, batua.
Tubut, d., s., rainbow : lit.
stand in the middle (i.e., of
the sky) : tu, but.
Tugo fi a, d. for toko i;i, togo ia.
Tuk ia, or tuki a, v. t., to strike,
beat, pound, redup. tukituki a;
and uru tukituki run quickly,
lit. run beating (the ground
with the feet). [Fi. tuki-a,
To. tugi, Ma. tuki, tukituki.]
H. duk, dakak, A. dakka,
dakka, &c, beat, pound, Nm.
daqdaqa sound of horses' feet
beating (the ground).
Tuku, v. i., to go down, sink
down, also v. t., tuku nalai
lower the sail (of a canoe),
tuku bia kiki put a child in a
cloth basket to be carried on
the back. [Ma. tuku, To.
tugu, Sa. tuu, Ha. kuu, Fi.
tuku-ca.] H. s'uab, A. sali'a,
sah'a (cf. thah'a, tali'a) to
sink down, H. s'uhah, s'ihah
;t pit, s'aliat pit, cistern, the
grave. Hence
Tuk, s., a hole, enclosure like a
hole or pit : and
Tukituki, s., the seven stars
(because like an enclosure) ;
and
Tuk, s., uora tuk, place of the
pit, i.e., Hades ; and
Tukituki, or tukutuku, s., name
of a place on the western side
of Efate, where is the entrance
to Hades : and
Tuku, s., a fence, stake, or post
(because sunk in the ground
and firm).
Tuki, in niatuki, s., q.v., and
Mau-tukituki, or Mau-tiki-
[tuma i a
tiki, name of a mythical
person, one of the first men.
[Mg. toky, matoky. See nia-
tuki, supra.] See under taki
a, supra, and see mau.
Tukunua, s., a story, tradition,
d. syn. kakai. [Fi. tuku-na,
v. t, and tukuni, s.] A.
nataka to speak.
Tu-ki-roa ki, v. t., to give in
commission : roa as in boroa
ki, and tua, or tu, to give.
Tuletule, v. i., to swing ; and
Tule aki, v. t., to swing ; and
Tula, s., el. a swing, v. i., to
swing. H. dalal, dalah, talal,
A. daldala and taltala to
s« ing.
Tula, s., wax of the ear. [Fi.,
tule, id., daligatula deaf, Sa.
tub deaf, My. tuli deaf.] A.
Salah' deafness.
Tuli for tili, to tell, relate.
Tuluku for taluko.
Talum ia, or
Tuluni ia, v. t., to swallow down,
del. tulug ia, tinom ia, tunug
ia, talug ia. [An. atleg, My.
talan, cf. parlan, tar Ian, Mg.
telina.] A. lahima, n. a.,
lahm', 5, 8, Nm., 5, telehhem,
to swallow elown.
Note. — Sa. and To. " to
sw^allow " is folo, A. bali'a, id.
Tu-lake, v. t., to give in com-
mission : tua give, and lake, q.v.
Tuma, el. tumbu (see under
tubu). S. Sebu will.
Tuma ia, v. t., to point out with
the finger, bituma v. r. ; d.
riu sa. See tiu sa.
Tuma ia, v. t., to knock (as a
door), as a sign to open it
And
TUMATUMA IA]
Tumatunia ia, id., redup. [Sa.
tuina, cf. My. antara.] For
tuba ia.
Turaa, or tama sok, for tuba,
soka : ta&a.
Tuinalu, for tamalu : ta&a.
Turaa, (1. ruma, q.v.
Tuma ni, v. t., d., to cook (in a
particular way), redup. tu-
turua ; and
Tumu na, d. nubu na, q.v., also
tomo na ;
Tumutumua, v. i., or a., formed
from tumu by a. ending a.
See noba nia, and no&ano&a,
and matumutumu, and manu-
bunubu.
Tumana, s., a parcel : taum ia,
tarn ia.
Tumi a, or tomi a, v. t., to suck.
[Motu toboa.] E. tabawa to
suck.
Trumi a. See rumi a, i.e., ru-mi a.
Tuni, v. t., to heat, tuni fatu to
heat red hot the oven stones.
[Fi. tunu, tunutunu, vaka-
tunu-na.] And
Tunu, v. t., to heat, to oppress or
make to suffer (as heat does) ;
bitunu to be hot, painful, dd.
bitin, bitsin (see also sinu,
sisinu, and tontono) ; tutun to
light up (torches, the evening-
cooking fires) ; and
Tunu, s., heat (of fire, or of the
sun). See slnu.
Tuni a See tani a.
Tunika, s., place where the
watchers at a koro (fish trap)
noiselessly remain : tu to
stand, and see nikenika.
Tunitunia (see tiu sa, tu sa, d.
tu ni a), a , striped, marked.
Tura sa, v. t., to lengthen (as by
206 [tutun
splicing) ; tutur ki, to delay
for (as for a sick man unable
to walk quickly), d. tutura ki,
bakatura ki, id. A. tala 1, 2,
4, make long, lengthen, to
delay.
Turausi. See tera usi.
Tur ia, d. turu sa, v. t., to sew ;
also to nail ; to go through an
opening (as a ship through
the entrance of a harbour) :
turu sa ;
Turi, and turituri, s., needle,
also nail ;
Turua (a. ending a), full of
holes (as a rock of holes
through which rain percolates) :
Tuturu, v. i., to drip (as eaves),
leak (roof) ;
Tuturu, s., a drop, a dripping,
c. art. ; and
Turu ki, drip or leak through.
See also tiri-kit. [Sa. tulu'i,
tulutulu, faatulutulu, To. tulu,
tului, To. tulu he mata = riri
mita (tears), Fi. tiri, turu.
titiri, tuturu, tiri-va, turu-va.]
A. s'alla, 3), to sew, 2), shed
tears, s'als'ala to drip, fall in
drops, was'ala to drip, drop,
leak out.
Turu bisi. See toro bisi.
Turuk, d., v., to permit. A.
taraka, id.
Tusi, s., book, writing, Sa. word.
See tiu sa, tu sa, for its origin.
Tutu, v. i., to sink : tiu sa.
Tutua ki, redup. of tua ki, to
place.
Tutna, redup. of tua, to go.
Tutuma, redup. of tuma ni, to
cook.
Tutun (redup. of tunu, q.v., to
heat), to light up (torches and
°]
cooking fires, as in the even-
ing)-
r
, verb, pron., 1 pi., excl. (con-
traction for au), d. bu (dual
moa), we (and) they. Mahri
hem, or habu, they (Ef. bu =
habu = 'mi in kinami, nami).
IT, s., in nau, d. for usu ; also in
biteu, for bitesu.
U, verb, pron., 3 pi., they : d.
for ru (r elided).
U, v., d. for ba, q.v. ; in umai to
come here.
ITa (wa), dd. ua (uwa), ui (wi),
interj., ad., yes: ua, clem.
Ua (u-a, and u-wa), s., oven, dd.
um, ubu, of (ov).
ITa (wa), d. ue, q.v., inter, ad.
ITa, s., c. art. naua (nawa),
veins, or muscles (so called
from swelling out or up). [Fi.
ua, Sa. ua.] See ua'a.
Ua, v. i., d. for ba, and boua, to
rain : bu.
Ua ki, v. t., d. boua ki, to yield
fruit ; and
Ua, s., c. art. naua, or nua na,
its fruit. [Ta. v., auwa, s.,
nowa, Oba, v., mo ai, Sa., v.
and s., fua, My , s., buwah, Ja.
uwoh, woh, My., v., barbuwah,
Mg., s., voa, v., mamoa.] Arm.
'eb, 'ub, 'iba, 'ebo, Assy, (inbu)
imbu, fruit, and Arm. abeb to
produce fruit.
Ua, dem., this : with other
demonstratives suffixed, either
this or that, uana, uane, ua
naga, uai, uase, uai na, uai
naga, and with tu (to stand,
1*07 [UAXA
to be) uane tu, dd. uo, uose,
uintu. Connected with this
word are ua, uua, ui, uisa,
uiko, uila, uana. Compare < ),
dem., supra, which is identical
with the u in ua. The S. also
suffixed other demonstratives
to hu, or 'u, thus huhana, cf.
St., p. 23, owa (oa, wa = Ef.
ua) this, that. Compare
Assy, uma (which, however,
has the appended enclitic
ma) this or that indeed, also
thus.
Ua'a, s., a swelling, rise, i bi
ua'a (of, e.g., an island seen
from a distance swelling up or
rising out of the sea). See
fuata, and bua ill.
Uabe, inter, ad., d. syn. sabe,
where now ] where then ? See
be and ue (d. ua).
Uago, s., d. uak, pig, swine.
[Ta. puka, Fi. vuaka, Sa.
pua'a, Malo boi, Epi bue,
Bouru babue, My. babi, Mysol
boh.] This name seems lit.
to denote " grunter," Ta. puka
to grunt, puka, s., a pig.
Compare supra buka to bark,
to cough (also d. buku).
Uai, dem., this, that ; and
Uaia, id., also uai na, uai naga,
uai ntu, id. Compare English
this here, this 'ere, for this.
Uaka na, s., d. for aka na : aka.
Uako, interj., a mere exclama-
tion : ua and ko, dems.
Uai, for ali, day.
Ualu, for 6alu, friend ; and
Ualuiota, s., enemy, lit. alien
friend.
Uana, dem., that : ua dem.,
and another dem. suffixed to
tana]
208
[ui
it. Compare S. huhana. See
ua, deni.
[Tana, inter]., an exclamation,
see ! look out
Denis, ua
and na.
Uan, inter, ad., d., where? This
is dem. n suffixed to ua, inter,
ad. See ue. f Santo veai and
even, id.]
Ua-nate natua na, s., d., calf of
the leg, lit. fruit of the belly
(liver) of the leg.
Uane, dem., this : ua, ne.
Uarik, d. for 6atlk, q.v.
I T asa, ad., d. asa, the day after
to-morrow. [An. vith, Epi
veua, Ml. vis, wisa, Am.
bugirua, Santo pogirua, Lo
weria, Motaarisa.] The word
uasa is ua (for which see ma)
day, and sa (for ra, or rua, 2),
2, or 2nd : in pogirua, pogi is
another word for day, and, in
arisa, ari is still another, Ef. ali.
Uase, dem., this : ua, se.
Uasi a, v., d. for asi a.
Uata, s., a portion : bota, ia.
Uataki, v., d. for bitaki ; and
Uataki, s., dd. otaki, itaki.
Uateaf, and d.,
Uateam, and d.,
Uateau, s., kidneys : ua fruit,
ate liver (&c), and amo belly,
lit. fruit of the liver (or inside)
of the belly ; and
Uateau-laso, s., testicles, lit.
kidneys of the scrotum.
Uati a, v., d. ati a.
Uatu, v., d. for atu.
Uaua (waua), v. and s., for
ban a, q.v.
Uba na, or ube na, s., his day, d.
kuba na.
Ubog, s., day. See bog.
Ubu, s., dd. um, ua, of.
Ue, inter, ach, where 1 dd. ua
(uan, uabc), bai, mbe. [Fi.
vei, Sa. fea.] H. 'e', and,
with n suffixed, 'ain, 'an, A.
'a'na, and, with fi (prep.)
fa'na, Mod. A. fain, or fein
(where? sans mouvement).
Note. — In Ef. sa or se (for
safa or sefa) also denote
where, lit. what (place)? some-
times fully expressed sefa
nalia? or sefe tokora ? But ue
is an entirely different word,
with a different construction,
being always used with the
verb, pron., with which seor sa
cannot be used. Thus i ue he,
she or it (is) where ? This is
because the prep, fi (bi) is used
also as the verb " to be." On
the other hand i baki (ba ki)
se he goes to where (i.e., to
what place) ? One cannot say
i se for i ue, nor baki ue for
baki se.
Uei, interj., an exclamation: uai.
Uelu, v., for &elu, and
Uelu, s., a heathen function
in which the men pass days in
the bush, hidden from the
women, under the direction
of the natamole tabu, in order
to ascertain from the natamate,
in dreams, what their future
fortune is to be.
Uen, s., c. art., sand : aran.
Uenr, d. for
Uere, d. for
Uete, d. for fata, q.v., and fatu.
Ufea, ad., afar, far away, at a
distance : d. emai, q.v.
Ui, interj., and ad., yes (that's
it) : ua, or uai, dem.
Ui]
Ui, uia, also ftia (pwia), v. i., or
a., good, well, beautiful, etc.
[Mota wia, Am. wi, Ml. bu,
Santo va, Ma. pai (whakapai-
pai to adorn), Sula pia, Cerani
lia, My. baik.] H. yapah to
be fair, beautiful, Pi. to adorn
(cf. Ma. supra), yapeh fair,
beautiful, good, excellent.
LTiko, interj., exclamation : ui
interj., and ko dem.
Qila, interj., exclamation : ui
interj., and la ad.
Uili na, s., d. for kuli na, the skin.
Uiroa, s., a crooked kind of
yam : biria, tafirofiro.
Uis, or uisa, interj., and ad. yes:
ui, and sa dem.
Uisia, v., for bisi a, to take with
the hand.
Uisi, uisiuisi (wisiwisi), d. bisi-
uisi, d. bisi, d. iusiwusi, v., to
make, to work, bisi ekobu
make a house, uisiuisi ki work
at, nauisien work, or act of
working. [Sa. osi, Ja. yasa,
Mg. asa.] H. 'asah, n. a.
ma'aseh (work), to make, pro-
duce by labour.
Uisiki na, s., elbow, or anything,
as a corner, like an elbow,
uisiki aru na (or naru na)
elbow of the arm, d. mago
naru na heel of the arm.
[My. siku.] A. zugg' elbow.
Ula, s., a maggot. [Sa. ilo, My.
ulat, Mg. olitra.] E. 'es'e
vermis, 'as'ya vermes producere
(Ex. xvi. 23 (4), Actsxii. 23):
eg. A. 'uthat.
Uli, for uili, kuli, skin. Mahri
gotl. See kuli na.
Uli a, or ul ia, v. t., dd. oli a,
auli a, uilia, to take the place
209 [uluulua
of, to substitute for, to
barter for, buy. See biauli,
d. bioli, v. v., and bauli a,
faulu ; also e. art. naulu, s.,
barter, and redup.,
Uliul, id., and especially in the
phrase uliul nako substitute
the appearance (or face) of
some other person for his own
to deceive (demons were sup-
posed to do this). [Mg. vidy,
mivicly to buy, Fi. voli a, id.,
volivoli to trade or barter,
Santo uliul give for, buy ;
Ha. ouli.] A. 'as'a to do or
give something for another
thing, 2, 3, id., 4, id., 5,
accept one thing for another,
8, substitute one for another ;
'awis' one (person or thing) in
place of another, in place of,
ma'us'ai! what is given for
another thing (i.e., one thing-
given for another thing, Ef.
faulu, id.)
Uli na, s., leaf, leaves, also ulu ;
and
Ulua, v. i., or a., to put forth
leaves, to grow up (of plants
and hair), and redup.,
Uluulua, id., also to be full of
leaves, to be hairy, hence
lulu na (for uluulu na) hair,
and uluma, s., a pillow for the
head. [Ha. ulu, uluulu, Fi.
ulu, Ma. uru, Sa. ulu, Malo
ulu, My. ulu ; To. ulunga
(ulu the head), Tah. urua,
pillow for the head.] See lu
lulu, lua, laga, elagi, &c. A.
'ala, n. a. 'aluw', H. 'alah,
whence A. 'ilawal the head,
H. 'aleh leaf, leaves, 'uleh
sprouting forth, growing up.
15
ululuia]
Ululuia, ululia, and lulia. See
alialia.
Um. s., oven, tld. ubu, ifec. See
bani a (ba ni a).
Unia, v., to clear for a planta-
tion, cut down the jungle for
this purpose, d. syn. beru.
[My. unia.] And
Urn a, s., a clearing, for cultiva-
tion, in isuma, q.v. [My.
uma.l A. h'ainma to cut ;
to sweep out, to clean, h'imm'
a garden vacant of trees and
fruits.
Umai, d. See banomai, babe.
[Sa o mai.]
Umkau, d. makau, or mukau, a
cluster, gathering, hence many,
all (cl.) : kau.
Umba ia, v. t., to cast on it,
umbaki, v. t., to cast a thing,
d. b\. E. hay pa to cast.
Una, v., to cover or bury itself
in the sand or mud (of a snake,
and an eel-like fish which does
so);
Una ki, v. t., to make to bury
itself in the ground (a post or
fence stake) ;
Una, s., an eel-like fish that
burrows or buries itself in the
sand ;
Una, s., a post, or fence stake ;
Un, s., a fish scale (because it
covers) ;
Unu, s , ghost. See anu. [Sa.
una fish scale or tortoise-
shell (covering).] H. ganan
cover over, A. ganna to cover,
bury, egg. H. kanan, 'anan,
A. kanna. See anu.
Uo, dem., d. for ua.
Uo, ad., d. for bo, now, then.
See bo.
210 [uose
Uokati, v., for boka ti ; hence
Uoka, chapped, sore (of the
hands, as from striking or
chopping with an axe, &c.)
Uoki, s., an axe. A. waki' a
sharp cutting instrument.
Uol, s., c. art., a bed ; and
Uolis ia, v. See bo\\s> ia, mauol,
&c.
Uol. See bo\, bolo.
Uolau. See ftolau, bouolau.
Uolo, interj., exclamation. [Fi.
uala.] See uoro.
Uon, dem., d. for uane.
Uon, v., for bon.
Uonda, s., cl. uete.
Uontu, dem., and v., uon, tu :
d. for uanetu.
Uora, v., and
Uora na, redup. uorauora mi, s.,
and
Uoratan, s. (uora sprout, tano
of the ground) a plant that
springs up of its own accord
(without being planted or
sown) ; fig. a person without
friends or connections to
avenge him, i bi uoratan ba
faku sa he is a person with-
out friends, pluck him up (i.e.,
uproot, or kill him). See
bora II.
Uorausi a, d. for uru usi a.
Uora, or era, s. See bora, ia.
Uori a, uoriuoria, mauori. See
bori a.
Uoro, and auoro, interj., excla-
mation (d. uolo) : uo, dem.,
and ro, dem., and a as in ako,
ake.
Uosa, uosauosa, uosagoro. See
bosa, Uosauosa, iosagoro.
Uose, or uos, d. uohe, s., oar,
paddle. See balu sa. [Ml.
uose]
bos, Epi Bi. voho, Fi. voce,
Ta. vea, Fut. t'oi, Sa. foe, My.
dayung, Mg. fi-voy, Bisaya
bugsai.] A. mikdaf, migdaf,
railldaf, mikdaf, Anih. mak-
zaf, A. "aduf, oar.
Uose, dem., d. for uase
Uota, s., c. art., a chief, lord,
husband. [Tah. fatu, Ha.
haku.] See fata.
Uota-n-manu, and fatu-n-manu,
s., name of a pillar-like rock
(Monument Rock) off Efate,
lit. pillar or stone of birds.
Uota, uotauota : for bota, bota,-
uota.
Uoti a, d. for uti a, oti a : moti a.
Uotu, s., a mark ; hence
Uotuuotu, a., having marks. A.
nabathu mark.
Ua (u-a), d. for ua (wa), yes,
that's it : ua, dem.
Ura, v., in masi ura ki to scoop
up water, sprinkling (someone) ;
and
Ura, s., c. art. niura, dew, or
rain water on the foliage of
plants (from its sprinkling and
wetting people;. H. yarah to
sprinkle, to water, hence yoreh
rain, lit. sprinkling.
Uri na, s., the latter or after
part, i.q. muri na, s.
Ura, s., lobster, prawn. [Sa.,
Ha. ula, Ma. koura, My.
ud'ang, Ja. urang, Mg. orana
(oranorana eating greedily).]
H. hawar to be white, become
pale, A. hara to be bleached,
&c, 4, to eat greedily, hawar',
Nm. haur, red leather
Note. — Ef. ura seems to be
so called because of the red
colour which the lobster
211 [uta
assumes immediately on being
put on the fire to be cooked :
hence the proverb i ti bi ura
iga miel marafi it is not the
lobster to become red imme-
diately (said of wickedness
whose punishment does not
follow at once, but will come,
however slowly and un-
observed).
Uru, v. i., to run. A. "ara (H.
'ir) to run.
Uru, uruuru, v. i., to growl,
grumble, mutter, murmur.
See oro, orooro.
Usi a (for kusi a), v. t., follow
in the track of, investigate,
ask, question ; and redup.,
Ususi a, v. t., investigate, ask.
See takusi a. [My. usir,
mangusir, tarusir.]
Usi, v. i., to hasten, usu-naki,
v. t., hasten about, or as to.
H. hus' (and 'us'), A. lias'a, to
hasten.
Usiraki, or usereki, i.e., usi-raki
(usi to follow), v., to follow
through, hence, as ad., through-
_ out.
Usii, s., c. art. nausu, d. iu, or
u, a reed. [Ml. ui, Epi yi, Sa.
u, Fut. gasau, To. kaho.] E.
base, H. lies, reed, arrow.
Us, d. for su, v. t., to take up.
Uta, s., land, euta ashore, on
land, by land. [Sa. uta, My.
utan (hutan).] A. "utat' land
planted with trees ; and
Uta i, or uta ki, v. t., to load
(make sink, immerse) a canoe.
[Ma. uta, Mg. onclrana.] And
Uta, s., c. art. nauta, a canoe
load, cargo. [Sa. uta, Ma.
utanga.] And
UTU]
Utu, ut T a, v. t., to till (by
immersing) a water vessel.
[Sa. utu, utu-fia, Ha. uku-ki.]
A. "ata ("a'tu), 4, to immerse.
Uti a. See oti a, moti a.
Uti na, prep., after, following ;
originally v., i.q. usi a.
Uulu, v. i., also uilu (wulu, wilu),
for 6ilu, q.v., to dance. [Ml.
U. velu, Malo velu, Motu
212 [uui
mavaru, Ha. mele.] H.
maliol, and mholah dance,
dancing, from hul, or liil to
go round, also to dance (in a
circle).
Uusike, and uisiko, or uisiki,
q.v., elbow.
Uui (uwi, and u-i), s., c. art.
naui (nau-i, or nau-wi), the
yam. See afa ki.
Walker, May and Co., Fruiters, Muckil.up Btrj
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
URL
$Y LOANS
JUL d 1981
| ^Ei^^Eaja^ROI^l DATE OF RECEIPT
i/f\i'\i< o¥Wm
AUG 7 1981
• ftUG 2 9 ^84
Form L9-75m-7,'61 (Cl437s4)444
iwv
Open Library